,p,. 
 
 7 
 
 ■>*, V 
 
 CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 BOUGHT >X^ITH THE INCOME 
 OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT 
 FUND GIVEN IN 1891 BY 
 
 HENRY WILLIAMS SAGE 
 
g ^§= - 4v^^»y 
 
 -m^ 
 
 f 
 
 •iSMMS- 
 
 WL 
 
 ys M ? 
 
 "M^ 
 
 n in7&4. 
 
 £C4.t49*5tt 
 
 -'^^^^»B? g=^J 
 
 -j-*to»=ee^^— f 
 
 ii?¥fr 
 
 
 3 1924 100 477 425 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 the Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924100477425 
 
PORTA 
 
 LIEGUARUM ORIENTALIDM 
 
 mCHOAVlT 
 
 J. H. PETERMANN 
 
 CONTHTOAVIT 
 
 HERM. L. STEACK. 
 
 ELEMENTA LINGUARUM 
 
 Hebraioae, Phoenioiae, Biblioo-Aramaicae, 
 
 Samaritanae, Targuraioae, Syriaoae, Arabioae, 
 
 Aethiopicae, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacae, Copticae, 
 
 Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum 
 
 studiis academieis accomvnodaverunt 
 
 J. K Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Fraetorius, 
 
 A. Merx, Aug. Mueller, Friedr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann, 
 
 Ad. Erman, V. Shukovski, Th. Noeldeke, 
 
 G. Steindorff, B. Bruennow , Dav. H. Mueller , Q. Jacob , aui. 
 
 PABS IV. 
 ARABIC GRAMMAE 
 
 By 
 A. SOCIN. 
 
 SECOKD EDITION. 
 
 BBELIN, 
 EEUTHER & BBICHABD 
 LONDON NEW YORK 
 
 WILLIAMS & NOEGATE B. WESTERMANN & Co. 
 
 14, HEimrETTA STEEET 812, BK0AJ3WAY. 
 
 1895. 
 
ARABIC GRAMMAR 
 
 PARADIGMS, LITERATORE, EXERCISES 
 
 AND 
 
 GLOSSARY 
 
 D R. A. § O C I N 
 
 PJROFESSOE OBDINAKIUS IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG. 
 
 SECOND ENGLISH EDITION 
 TRANSLATED PBOM THE THIED GERMAN EDITION 
 
 BY THE 
 
 Eev. arch. E. 8. J5:ennedy d. d. 
 
 PEOFBSBOK OF HEBEEW ETC, IN THE UNIVER8ITT OF EDnTBTTROH. 
 
 NEW TOEK, BERLIN, 
 
 B. WESTBEMANN & Co. . EEUTHEE & EEIOHARD 
 
 1895. 
 

 All rights reserved, 
 including that of translation into other languages. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 SECOND ENGLISH EDITION. 
 
 The aim of the following pages is to furnish intend- 
 ing students of classical Arabic with the most import- 
 ant rules both of the Accidence and of the Syntax 
 in the briefest possible form. The present edition, the 
 second in English, is a translation of the third German 
 edition of 1894, to which, save for a few corrections 
 and additions, it in all respects corresponds. Its 
 German counterpart has been considerably altered 
 compared with the second edition because of the 
 publishers' intention to issue a separate chrestomathy 
 of Arabic prose. Professor R. Bruennow, a scholar 
 of approved ability, was entrusted with the prepara- 
 tion of this work which appeared in the year 1894. 
 The connected narratives which formerly composed 
 the chrestomathy of the grammar were, according to 
 arrangement, incorporated in Bruennow's work, and 
 consequently had to be dropped from the new edition 
 
YI Pkbface. 
 
 of the grammar. On the other hand the latter was 
 now extended, more particularly in the part dealing 
 with the syntax, with the result that it will now be 
 found, with few exceptions, to be sufficient for the 
 understanding of the new chrestomathy. At the same 
 time, the fact must again be emphasised that the 
 present work does not pretend to take the place of 
 any of the larger treatises ; the English student who 
 wishes to advance beyond the elements of Arabic must 
 have recourse to the latest edition (the third) of 
 Wright's excellent grammar. For this reason the 
 author has deemed it his duty to adhere to his former 
 view and to decline, in a book intended for beginners, 
 to enter into the technical terminology of the Arab 
 grammarians — which may safely be left to the larger 
 grammars; still the Arabic specialist will easily dis- 
 cover that their views have been taken into account 
 even in the present elementary work. The best intro- 
 duction to this department of study will be found to 
 be the reading of the'Agrumiye, which Bruennow has 
 printed in his Chrestomathy. 
 
 In order to lighten the first lessons in grammar, 
 the exercises consisting of short sentences and anec- 
 dotes have been increased by the addition of a few 
 short stories, by means of which a sort of stepping 
 stone is provided to the prose chrestomathy. 
 
Preface. VII 
 
 The passages for translation into Arabic have been 
 retained unchanged along with the appropriate 
 glossary. Experience has shown that this part of the 
 chrestomathy has unquestionably been of service; and 
 although I am strongly of opinion that this class of 
 exercises is of real value in such systematic instruction 
 as is necessary at first, I am in no wise blind to the 
 difficulties which the correction of such exercises entails 
 even on the teacher of Arabic. In order to meet such 
 difficulties, I have selected single sentences and anec- 
 dotes from Arabic authors, and have so arranged both 
 notes and glossary that the student, who in any case 
 will have to make diligent use of grammar and dic- 
 tionary, is so to say compelled to reproduce exactly 
 the Arabic original. From what has just been said, 
 it is clear that this part of the book, at least, presup- 
 poses a teacher, for I am convinced that the grammar 
 of Arabic as a whole, and the syntax in particular, 
 can only be mastered with extreme difficulty by self- 
 instruction. I would add, however, that translation 
 from English should be taken at first in the smallest 
 possible doses, and even in this way only after the 
 student has read a part of the Arabic texts. 
 
 The synopsis of Arabic literature has also been 
 extended. Strictly speaking, this section is out of 
 place in an elementary work; still it may afford a 
 
Vm Peeface. 
 
 stimulus to a beginner here and there, and supply an 
 occasional hint to those pursuing the study of Arabic 
 by themselves, or at a distance from the larger seats 
 of learning. 
 
 The present English edition is an entirely new 
 translation. This difficult and tedious work has been 
 undertaken by Professor Archd. K. S. Kenkedt of 
 Edinburgh University. To him and to his late assistant, 
 Mr. W. B. Stevenson B. D., Vans Dunlop Scholar in 
 Semitic Languages of the same University, who has 
 rendered us great assistance in the reading of the 
 proofs, I cannot omit to express here my warmest 
 thanks for their co-operation. 
 
 A. SociN. 
 
NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR 
 
 I have only to add to the foregoing, that my 
 responsibility as translator does not extend to the 
 English-Arabic exercises and the relative glossary. 
 A few verbal changes excepted — chiefly where the 
 "violence done to the Queen's English" (p. 57*) was 
 greater than seemed absolutely necessary — these 
 have been reprinted from the first edition. I have 
 also inserted an additional reference here and there, 
 and in the bibliographical section I am responsible 
 for one or two additional entries. 
 
 I wish also to express my personal indebtedness 
 to Mr.Stevenaon, without whose generous co-operation, 
 owing to my absence in the East, the book would 
 not have been ready in time for this winter's work. 
 
 20*11 September 1895. 
 
 A. R. S. K. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 GRAMMAB. 
 
 .£ 
 
 I. OETHOGRAPHT AND PHONOLOGY (§§ 1— 11). 
 
 Page 
 
 § 1. Consonants . . 1 
 
 § 2. Long Towels 6 
 
 § 3. Short Vowels, Nunation, Gezma 8 
 
 § 4. Hamza 9 
 
 § 5. Tesdid 11 
 
 § ,6. "Wasla . . 12 
 
 § 7. Medda 15 
 
 § 8. The SyUable 16 
 
 § 9. The Tone 17 
 
 § 10. Pause ... . 18 
 
 § 11. The Arabic Cyphers and Contractions 18 
 
 II. ACCIDENCE (§§ 12—96). 
 Chap. I. The Pronoun {§§ 12—15). 
 
 § 12. Personal Pronouns 19 
 
 § 13. Demonstrative Pronouns . 21 
 
 § 14. Eelative Pronouns 23 
 
 § 15. Interrogative Pronouns 24 
 
 Chap. II. The Verb (§§ 16—54). 
 
 § 16. Grroundform .... ... .... 24 
 
 § 17. Conspectus of the derived Stems 24 
 
 § 18. I. Stem 25 
 
 § 19. II, Stem 26 
 
 § 20. in. Stem 26 
 
 § 21. IV. Stem 27 
 
CONTEHTS. XI 
 
 Page 
 
 § 22. V. Stem 27 
 
 § 23. VI. Stem . 28 
 
 § 24. VII. Stem 28 
 
 § 25. VIII. Stem ... 28 
 
 § 26. IX and XI. Stems 29 
 
 § 27. X. Stem 29 
 
 § 28. The Stems of the quadriliteral Verb . ... 30 
 
 § 29. The Passive . 30 
 
 § 30. The Tenses 30 
 
 § 31. The Moods 31 
 
 § 32. Imperative .... 32 
 
 § 33. Inflexion for Person and Number 33 
 
 §§ 34—36. Verbs mediae geminatae . . . . 34 
 
 §§ 37—38. Verba hamzata . . ... . . 36 
 
 § 39. Weak Verbs 38 
 
 § 40. Verba primae ^ et i_5 . . . 38 
 
 §§ 41—44. Verba mediae ^ et ^ . . 39 
 
 §§ 45 — 48. Verba ultimae ^ et ^^ 41 
 
 § 49. Doubly weak Verbs ... 44 
 
 § 50. The Verb J^ 45 
 
 § 51. Verbs of Praise and Blame 46 
 
 § 52. Forms of Admiration 46 
 
 § 53. The Verb with Pronominal Suffixes 46 
 
 § 54. Sign of the Aoousative 47 ' 
 
 Chap. III. The Noun (§§ 55-90). 
 
 a. Tormation of Nouns. 
 
 § 55. Primitive and derived Nouns 48 
 
 §• 56. Sunmiary of the simple Nouns 49 
 
 § 57. Nouns with Preformatives 49 
 
 § 58. Nouns with Afformatives 50 
 
 g 59. Quadriliteral Nouns 50 
 
 § 60. Participles 50 
 
 § 61. Infinitives 61 
 
 § 62. Verbal Adjectives 53 
 
XII COHTBNTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 § 63. Intensive Forms 54 
 
 § 64. Nomina loci, instrumenti, speolei 56 
 
 § 65. Nomina relativa 56 
 
 § 66. Nomina deminutiva 57 
 
 § 67. Nouns from Stems mediae geminatae 57 
 
 § 68. Nouns from Stems with Hamza ... ... 58 
 
 § 69. Nouns from Stems primae ^ 58 
 
 § 70. Nouns from Stems med. ^ and ,_$ 59 
 
 § 71. Nouns from Stems ultimae ^ and i_$ 60 
 
 b. Gender of Nouns. 
 
 § 72. Masculine and Feminine Gender 62 
 
 §§ 73—74. Formation of the Feminine 63 
 
 c. Inflexion of Nouns. 
 
 § 75. Number and Case ... 65 
 
 § 76. Formation of the Dual and Plural 66 
 
 § 77. Case-endings of Singular. Triptote and Diptote Nouns 67 
 
 § 78. Diptotes 68 
 
 § 79. Inflection of the Determined Noun 68 
 
 § 80. Shortening of Dual and Plural in the Construct State 69 
 
 § 81. Inflection of Nouns in in and an from ult. ^ and ^ 70 
 
 § 82. The Noun with the Pronominal Suffixes .... 71 
 
 § 83. Vowel Changes in the PluraUs Sanus 72 
 
 § 84. Proper Names compoimded with (^1 73 
 
 § 85. Vocative 73 
 
 § 86. Collective Nouns . . 74 
 
 § 87. Broken Plurals 75 
 
 § 88. List of the principal varieties of the Broken Plural . 76 
 
 § 89. Broken Plurals from Quadrihteral Nouns .... 78 
 
 § 90. Nouns of irregular Formation 80 
 
 Chap. lY. The Numerals (§§ 91—93). 
 
 § 91. The Cardinal Numbers 83 
 
 § 92. The Connection of the numeral with the thing numbered 85 
 
 § 93. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 86 
 
Contents. XIII 
 
 Page 
 
 Chap. Y. Particles (§§ 94—96). 
 
 § 94. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions 88 
 
 § 95. Inseparable Particles 88 
 
 § 96. Prepositions and Particles with Suffixes .... 89 
 
 III. SYNTAX (§§ 97 — 160). 
 
 Chap. I. Tenses and Moods (§§ 97—104). 
 
 § 97. Perfect and Imperfect 90 
 
 § 98. Use of the Perfect 91 
 
 § 99. Use of the Imperfect . 92 
 
 § 100. Subjunctive .... 94 
 
 § 101. Modus apocopatus . 95 
 
 § 102. Modus energicus 95 
 
 § 103. Passive 96 
 
 § 104. Participles 96 
 
 Chap. IL Government of the Verb (§§ 105—117). 
 
 § 105. The Verb and its Compliment 97 
 
 § 106. Accusative 97 
 
 § 107. Accusative after verbs of coning &o 97 
 
 § 108. Verbs with two Accusatives 97 
 
 § 109. The Absolute Object 98 
 
 § 110. The Accusative as Predicate 99 
 
 § 111. Accusative with 'SI 100 
 
 § 112. Accusative with ^ of Concomitance 101 
 
 § 113. Accusative of nearer Definition 101 
 
 § 114* Accusative in Exclamations 102 
 
 §§ 114—116. The Verb with Prepositions 103 
 
 § 117. J in Dates ... 104 
 
 Chap. III. Government of the Noun (§§ 118—184). 
 
 § 118. The Noun with the Article (Determination) . . 105 
 
 § 119. Apposition • . . 106 
 
 §§ 120—122. Qualifying Adjuncts 107 
 
 §§ 123—130. The Genitive Belation 109 
 
XIV Contents. 
 
 Page 
 
 § 131. The Construction of the Infinitive 112 
 
 § 132. The Participle and its Object 113 
 
 § 133. The Nomen Begens undetermined ... . H4 
 
 § 134. Improper Annexation 114 
 
 Chap. IV. The Simple Sentence (§§ 135—151). 
 
 § 135. DistiQction bet. Nominal and Verbal Sentences . 116 
 
 § 136. The Verb in the Verbal Sentence 115 
 
 §§ 137—138, Indefinite Subject 117 
 
 § 139. The Predicate in the Nominal Sentence .... 118 
 
 §§ 140 — 146. Connection bet. Subject and Predicate . . 119 
 
 § 147. The Particles 'inna and 'anna 122 
 
 § 148. Subordinate Sentences 123 
 
 § 149. More than one Predicate 125 
 
 § 150. Negative Sentences 125 
 
 § 151. The Particle of Exception 126 
 
 Chap. V. Compound Sentences (§§ 152—161). 
 
 § 152. Co-ordinate Sentences 127 
 
 §§ 153—156. The Relative Clause 128 
 
 § 157. The Circumstantial Clause 131 
 
 § 158. The Temporal Clause 132 
 
 § 159. The Conditional Clause with the Perfect ... 133 
 
 § 160. The Conditional Clause with the Apoo. Impf. . 134 
 
 § 161. The Particle <_3 in the Apodosis 134 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 Computation of Time (Names of the Days of the Week, the 
 
 Months &o.) . . . . .... . 136 
 
 LITERATURE. 
 
 A. Bibliography 139 
 
 B. Introduotioij and general . . 144 
 
 C. Chrestomathies 144 
 
 D. Grammars . . I45 
 
Contents. XV 
 
 Page 
 
 E. Lexicography 147 
 
 P. Koran, Islam, Life of Muhammed, Bible &o. . . . 150 
 
 G.- Jurisprudence I53 
 
 H. Philosophy 154 
 
 I. Natural Sciences and Medicine 156 
 
 K. History, Biographies 157 
 
 L. Cosmography, Geography, Ethnography, Travels . . 163 
 
 M. Poetry 166 
 
 N. BeEes Lettres, Ethics, Bomances 169 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 I. Suffixes and Prefixes for the Conjugation of the Verb 3* 
 
 IL Strong triliteral Verb Act. 1 4* 
 
 III. Strong triliteral Verb Pass. 1 6* 
 
 IV. Quadrihteral Verb, derived Stems 7* 
 
 V. Strong triliteral Verb, derived Stems 8* 
 
 VI. Verbum mediae geminatae Act. 1 10* 
 
 VII. Verbum mediae geminatae Pass. 1 11* 
 
 VIII. Verbum mediae geminatae, derived Stems . . . 12* 
 
 IX. Verba hamzata 13* 
 
 X. Verbum primaQ radicalis 3 et (_$ 14* 
 
 XI. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ Act. 1 15* 
 
 XII. Verbum mediae radicalis 1^ Act. 1 16* 
 
 Xin. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ vel (_$ Pass 17* 
 
 XIV. Verbum med. radicalism et (_$, derived Stems . . 18* 
 
 XV. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ (/jjii) -A-ot. I. . . . 19* 
 
 XVI. Verbum tertiae radicalis y^ ( J-»i) ^'*'- I. ■ . . 20* 
 
 XVII. Verbum tertiae radicalism vel 1^ {^\sS) Act. I. . 21* 
 
 XVIII. Verbum tertiae radicalis j vel ^ Pass. I, . . . 24* 
 
 XIX. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ vel i^, derived Stems . 22* 
 
 XX. Nomen generis masculini 25* 
 
 XXI. Nomen generis feminini 26* 
 
 XXII. Nouns in "in" and "an" 27* 
 
 XXIII. The Noun with Pronominal Suffixes 28* 
 
XVI Contents. 
 
 Page , 
 
 EXEECISES AND TEXTS. ' 
 I. Exercises on the Grammar 
 
 A. For practice in Reading ^- • 30* 
 
 B. Exercises on the Accidence 32* 
 
 C. Exercises on the Syntax 35* 
 
 II. Connected Extracts 48* 
 
 III. For Translation into Arabic .... ... 57* 
 
 GLOSSAEIES. 
 
 A. English-Arabic 79* 
 
 B. Arabic-English 104* 
 
PART I. 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 AND 
 
 BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
I. THE AEABIC CHARACTERS. PHONOLOaY 
 
 (§§ 1-11). 
 
 The Consonants. The Arabs at first used the Syriac 1. 
 characters and the Syriac alphabet, in which the order °" 
 of the characters is the same as in Hebrew. A relic 
 of this earlier order is still preserved, in the employ- 
 ment — afterwards seldom resorted to — of the letters 
 of the alphabet as cyphers (cf. pages 4 — 5). At an 
 early period, however, the Arabs distinguished by 
 means of diacritical points a number of sounds which 
 were not so distinguished in the older alphabet. 
 By a process of curtailment, moreover, a number of 
 characters became so like each other that they had 
 to be distinguished by similar diacritical signs. The 
 next step was to group together in the alphabet the 
 characters which in this way had come to resemble 
 each other. Hence the Arabic alphabet now consists 
 of twenty-eight consonantal signs, the usual order and 
 
TABLE OF CHAKACTEK3. 
 
 
 Names 
 
 Form 
 
 Talue 
 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 1-5 P. 
 
 
 O BQ 
 
 ^§ 
 
 a 
 a » 
 
 s ^ 
 
 Pronunciation 
 
 o 
 
 •43 
 
 .& 
 
 u 
 
 H 
 
 1 -i 
 
 1 
 
 , itlAlif* 
 
 1 
 
 L 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 cf. §§ 2 an 
 
 d4 
 
 i| 
 
 2 
 
 glTBa 
 
 I-) 
 
 v_^ 
 
 A 
 
 . 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 glj Ta 
 
 i:y 
 
 v:>. 
 
 JC 
 
 J 
 
 t 
 
 t 
 
 400; 
 
 4 
 
 gU Tha 
 s 
 
 idJ 
 
 v3. 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 English hard th as 
 in thing -^ ' 
 \ orig. g hard; later 
 > g in Italian ^ior«o ; 
 j English j 
 
 -t 
 
 500 
 
 5 
 
 |VA». Jim 
 
 c 
 
 e 
 
 ^ 
 
 is. 
 
 V 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 gLl Hha 
 
 c 
 
 e 
 
 :SX 
 
 .^ 
 
 "1 strong h. with fric- 
 > tion of larynx as if 
 
 h 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 J wheezing 
 
 h 
 
 600 
 
 7 
 8 
 
 sLL Kha 
 
 J|5 Dal 
 
 s _ 
 
 
 e 
 
 4\ 
 
 .^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ch in Scotch loch 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 d 
 
 4 
 700 
 
 ' 9 
 10 
 11 
 
 JI5 Dhal 
 gtjRa 
 il) Zai- ; 
 
 ; 
 ) 
 
 4X 
 > 
 
 
 — 
 
 soft th, as in this 
 
 r 
 
 Z as in zeal\ soft s 
 as in rost 
 
 r 
 z 
 
 200 
 
 7 
 
 12 
 
 i^juj/ Sin 
 
 LT 
 
 u^ 
 
 AM 
 
 AM 
 
 hard S 
 
 s 
 
 60; 
 
 13 
 
 G * _ 
 
 (J^ Sm 
 
 U^ 
 
 \J^ 
 
 xc«. 
 
 ^ 
 
 sh 
 
 s 
 
 30(1 
 
 tion, 
 
 * The termination s i. e. 
 as in the modern Arahio 
 
 wn, (see § 3 b) is neglected in the 
 pronunciation. 
 
 transl 
 
TABLE OF OHARACTEES. 
 
 Names 
 
 Form , Value 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 [2! 
 
 M 
 
 MM 
 
 ■a a 
 
 oi 
 
 si, 
 ^1 
 
 Pronunciation 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 •3 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 w 
 
 iUfl Sad 
 
 u« 
 
 (>a. 
 
 jA 
 
 ja 
 
 emphatic S 
 
 s 
 
 90 
 
 
 SLi Dad 
 
 U^ 
 
 (>i 
 
 jO. 
 
 rtO 
 
 1 emphatic d(tongue 
 pressed against the 
 
 emphatic t 
 
 d 
 
 800 
 
 1 
 
 ^Lb Ta 
 
 is 
 
 ia 
 
 k 
 
 lo 
 
 t 
 
 9 
 
 T3 
 
 %\Jd Za 
 
 h 
 
 ii 
 
 k 
 
 ib 
 
 emphatic z 
 
 ■\ produced byatight- 
 
 z 
 
 900 
 
 w 
 
 ij^ Am 
 
 t 
 
 * 
 
 X 
 
 *^ 
 
 I ening of the vio- 
 j leutly compressed 
 J glottis 
 
 
 70 
 
 » 
 
 i^^JLft Ghain 
 
 t 
 
 <i 
 
 s. 
 
 £ 
 
 guttural r 
 
 g 
 
 1000 
 
 
 gli Fa 
 
 
 
 v-a 
 
 A 
 
 i 
 
 f 
 
 f 
 
 80 
 
 3 
 
 JUKaf 
 
 ij 
 
 L3- 
 
 A 
 
 J' 
 
 deep emphatic k 
 
 k 
 
 100 
 
 P 
 
 Jl/Kaf 
 
 J 
 
 d 
 
 jC 
 
 r 
 
 k 
 
 k 
 
 20 
 
 3 
 
 IS Lam 
 
 J 
 
 J^ 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 30 
 
 b 
 
 j^A>o Mim 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 4- 
 
 A! 
 
 m 
 
 m 
 
 40 
 
 ■a 
 
 ^^^i Nan 
 
 (J 
 
 c> 
 
 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 
 50 
 
 5 
 
 jL^ Ha 
 
 8 
 
 2(, 
 
 ■& 
 
 JO 
 
 li 
 
 h 
 
 5 
 
 in 
 
 JI5 Waw 
 
 i 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 ^jljYa 
 
 (5 
 
 15 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 7 
 
 y 
 
 10 
 
 "1 
 
6 2. THE VOWELS, HOW INDICATED. 
 
 forms of which are exhibited on pp. 4 — 5. These 
 signs are written and read from right to left. Some 
 are joined, to the letters preceding or following, others 
 are not, as indicated in the table referred to. 
 
 b. "When s (No. 26), at the end of a word, indicates 
 the feminine termination (§ 73), two dots are placed 
 over it to show that it must be pronounced as t (Nr. 
 3) ; thus : H. 
 
 c. Very frequently, especially at the beginning of 
 words, certain letters, instead of being written along- 
 side of each other, are placed one above the other 
 this is particularly the case with the letters _, _, ^ 
 
 (Nos. 5—7), e. g. ^ for .sj^j (Nos. 2 and 6), S: (Nos. 
 5 and 6) for s3^, :^ (Nos. 18 and 5) for :ss^ &c. 
 Instead of LJ (Nos. 23 and 1) the Arabs write ^ or "li 
 (the Lam in the latter form beginning at the left 
 of Alif). 
 
 2. The vowels, how indicated. In the earliest times 
 
 the Arabs indicated only the long vowels a, t, u, and 
 the diphthongs au, ai (whose second element they 
 regarded as a consonant); this was done by employing 
 the sign | (No. 1) for a, ^ (No. 27) for u and (with a) 
 au, (No. 28) for i and (with a) ai. In cases where 
 and ^ indicate the sounds au and ai, which we pronounce 
 as diphthongs, Sukun (see § 3 c) is ordinarily placed- 
 
 a. 
 
2. THE VOWEL SIGNS. 7 
 
 over these letters, to denote that they have no vowel 
 of their own. Examples; JU" kdla, ^tM sJra, (..-w 
 
 
 
 sukun, «jo bai'un, ^yj naumun. 
 
 In the oldest writing, the long a was not uniformly 5. 
 represented by t, but was occasionally left unrepre- 
 sented. This omission has continued to be observed 
 in a series of very common words; in such cases, 
 however, an upright stroke is usually placed over the 
 consonant that is to be pronounced with the long a, 
 
 e. g. \tys> (for I6L») hada, xJ| Hldhun (God), ^jt^\ 
 rahmdnu. Frequently, however, in our printed editions, 
 we find this long a represented by a simple _1-, thus: 
 
 \^jb hadd. 
 
 In a few words a . after an a does not indicate c 
 the pronounciation au but a long «, originally no doubt 
 an obscure a; in this case, too, the upright stroke is 
 
 the usual sign, e. g. iy^^ (alongside of sLt^.) haydtun 
 life (but I with Suffixes: xSLys. haydtuhu his life). 
 
 At the end of many words ^ is likewise employed d. 
 
 to represent a long d; in such cases (like the ^ in c) 
 
 it does not receive the Sukun (§ 3 c), e. g. ^^ (or 
 
 ^>) ramd (he has thrown); in the middle of a word, 
 
 on the other hand, \ takes the place of this ^ ; thus 
 
 • with a suffix sL<i« ramdhu he has thrown it. 
 
O 3. THE SHORT VOWELS. 
 
 Note a. In a few rare cases, in the middle of a word, we 
 
 ^ I 
 find a denoted by 4 _!_, as in the foreign word ijjjJ taurdtun Torah. 
 
 Note b. Should ^^ " be preceded by a i, ( is written for the 
 
 former in order to prevent two ^g coming together; e. g. UJ>J 
 
 dunya world fiir ^^'j (§ 74 a). 
 
 e. Occasionally an ( is added to a final u or au, but 
 
 it is entirely left out of account in the pronunciation ; 
 e. g. \yjjf kataM, Ijjo. ramau (§§ 33 and 53). 
 
 3. The short vowels were originally, as a rule, left 
 
 "" unrepresented^; afterwards the following signs were 
 employed to represent the short vowels, and (in con- 
 junction with the signs discussed in § 2) the long ' 
 vowels as well: , 
 
 1) JLsii Fatha^ (also ^IjS Fath) 1_ for a (in 
 certain cases to be pronounced like e in men, also 
 like German a in Manner), e. g. J^XS katala, JU kdla. 
 
 2) 'iyj^S Kesra (also wvLJ Kesr) __ for i, e. g. J. ^p 
 gadiba, «juj yaWu. 
 
 3) X+^ Damma (also ^ Damm) _i_ for u, e. g. 
 ^jjJo yaktuou; «yj^ yafutu. 
 
 h. When these signs for the short vowels are written 
 
 ' Many books, particularly those printed in the East, are 
 printed without these vowel signs. 
 
 2 The terminations 8—, K-^ are here represented in the trans- 
 literation by a, as in modern Arabic. 
 
4. HAMZA. 
 
 twice at the end of a word, they are to be pronounced 
 with a final n (called by the Arabs ^?>j^IS Tanwin, 
 by us frequently Nunation, from the letter niin), e. g. 
 ^jM+*i lamsin, J^. ragulun. The Nunation «w receives 
 as an additional indication the letter |, but the pro- 
 nunciation remains unaffected, e. g. !S)Lo malan. This 
 I is omitted only when the Nunation accompanies the 
 
 J, . . . . * J 
 
 leminme termination S (see above § 1 &), e. g. '\iSJa 
 markiibatan , or in cases where the word already has 
 a final |, or in its place a ^^ quiescing in a, e. g. Ljj 
 
 rWan, ,^jJo hudan (§ 2d). The same holds good in 
 most cases after Hamza (§ 4). The vowel of the Nu- 
 nation is always short. 
 
 When a consonant has no vowel of its own, this c. 
 
 is indicated by the sign _1^ x^y=»- Gezma (also called 
 
 ^^Xlw Sukiin [Rest]) e. g. «yj.iLl sdfartu, OLjyiiuo ma- 
 saita (cf. § 2). On the omission of this sign see § 5. 
 k consonant which is thus pronounced without a 
 i^owel following is said to be "resting". 
 
 Hamza. In order to distinguish the cases in which 4. 
 was employed to denote a (§ 2), from those in which °" 
 t had (as originally in Hebrew) its proper force as 
 I consonant, the Arabs gaye it the additional sign 
 
10 4. HAIIZA. 
 
 iiyijo Hamza ^ (in form a modified c 'Ain). I accord- 
 ingly denotes the closure of the larynx by which the 
 breath, engaged in voice production, is turned on or 
 off, according as the Hamza precedes or fellows a 
 vowel. It is best heard in English before the. second- 
 of such pairs of words as "sea eagle", "mine eyes". 
 Its effect may also be noted by comparing the two 
 following pronunciations of Kuran, viz: Ku-ran and 
 Kur-'an (the latter with Hamza). In the translitera- 
 
 tion we indicate | by ' except at the beginning of a 
 word where no indication is required. The sign ^ is 
 placed under the |, when followed by an e-sound. 
 Examples yo| "amrun, Jj| HMun, ^\ 'umamun; JLI 
 sa'ala, ^\. ra'-sun; SJi\ik-ra\ In the last two exam- 
 ples Hamza closes the syllable. 
 
 Before or after an i- or w-sound, the signs , and 
 1^ are generally employed instead of | as the bearers of 
 the Hamza, in which case ^ is written without the two 
 dots: e. g. ^^^j bahisa, Li^^ yu'taru, '^\J yu'ataru] 
 lii^As. gi'ia, ^^Xfo sa'iba, (^sLaj yuldr^u. 
 
 After a long vowel, and in most cases after Suktin, 
 Hamza as a rule has no bearer, but is written on or 
 above the line, thus: %\S6A 'irddhin, glS (or ill) 
 iarun. After a vowelless consonant in the middle of 
 
5. TESDID. 11 
 
 a word, Hamza with its vowel is placed over the 
 connecting stroke (except, of course, when no such 
 connection is possible, as after . in 'it-yX^ mamlu'aiun), 
 thus: x_Aiii&. hatVatun; in the same way L_-ul sai'an; 
 
 On the other hand, in cases like 'S-LiaJ^ Hmdd'an no 
 Alif is written at the end, cf. § 3 &. 
 
 Tesdid. That a consonant is to be sounded twice 5. 
 
 G " ^ a. 
 is indicated by the sign of doubling ", named Jojuii 
 
 Tesdid or Jui Sedd (from the initial ji of this word 
 
 O - G^ ^, 
 
 the sign " has been derived), e. g. ^_^mi sabba, (j-s^Ji 
 tarahhulun. This doubling of a consonant is either due 
 — as in the examples just given — to the essential 
 nature of the form, nominal or verbal (as for example 
 the verbal forms corresponding to the Hebrew PPel 
 § 19), or is the result of assimilation. 
 
 When one consonant is assimilated to another, the h. 
 assimilation is further graphically represented by the 
 removal of the Sukun from the assimilated consonant. 
 
 This applies to the I of the article Jt, when the latter 
 precedes one of the following consonants: yy, yij, t>, 
 i^' ;> )' LT' LT" Lr°' u*' -'=' ^' ^' O (*'^^* ^®' <i^°*^ls, 
 sibilants and r, /, n). Examples: ws^UcJI attdgiru, ^JUJI 
 
 attalgu-i fju.4M*i\ assamsu, (the sun), but j.+aJ| alkamaru 
 (the moon). From the fact that the two last examples 
 
12 6. WASLA. 
 
 are stereotyped those consonants that may be assimi- 
 lated are technically called solar letters, those that 
 do not admit of assimilation, lunar letters. 
 
 Note a. The word iJj, 'ildhun, God, when joined to the article, 
 drops the first syllable and becomes 4U| (§ 2b) allahu. 
 
 Note b. The words ^ mm, ^ 'an, ^\ 'an (and ^1 'in), when 
 
 foUowed by a few words beginning with » m or J ? are usually 
 combined with them into one word, the final ^^ n being at the 
 
 ,3: 
 
 same time assimilated to the following consonant, e. g. U* mimma 
 from U ^ min md, 2) I 'alia from 1! ^1 'an Id. 
 
 6. Wasla ". A word beginning with two consonants 
 
 receives in Arabic either a full helping-vowel prece- 
 
 ded by Hamza in accordance with § 4a (e. g. ^jJs^i I 
 Plato), or merely a vowel which is heard only when 
 the word is standing alone , but which must be given 
 up when the word in question comes to stand after 
 another word in the sentence. Thus in the latter 
 
 case we find JJcjil uktul instead of JuCi" ktul. The I 
 which is prefixed in this and similar cases is, however, 
 still written although the helping vowel accompanying 
 it is given up, and it then receives over it the sign 
 
 jLLo, n^asla e. g. ^svlJI ^y-ij bintulwazlrl. The two 
 
 a 
 
 =5 
 
 3- g- ^^^ 
 
 words thus united together are also to be pronounced 
 as if they formed a single word. Such an Alif JJ'aslatum 
 or Wasla-bearing Alif is called a connective Alif in 
 
6. WASLA. 13 
 
 contradistinction to a disjunctive Alif, that is, an Alif 
 
 hamzatum or Hamza-bearing Alif (cf. § 4). 
 
 Note. The sign " is a modification of jo; wasla or sila deno- 
 tes "close connection". 
 
 When a connective Alif has to be employed at 6. 
 
 the beginning of a sentence, a full vowel must be 
 
 pronounced, but, as written, only the proper vowel 
 
 sign may accompany the Alif, never a Hamza. Thus 
 
 we have J^JI arrasUlu, --vi-i uhrug but i~-y=>\ JLs 
 pronounce kdlahrug. 
 
 In the last example the division of the syllables c. 
 is now ka-lah-rug. If the vowel preceding a connec- 
 tive Alif is long, it must now be pronounced as a 
 short vowel, since it stands in a shut syllable (see 
 § 8). Thus vdHlfiJ, properly fl-lfulki, has now the 
 following syllables /?/-/M/-/t2; so too xJUi ^^^ rida-llahi 
 (§ 2 (?) = ri-dal-ld-hi, tj*^ I f^5 (§ 2 e) da-ia-hul-irvazza. 
 
 If the word before a connective Alif ends in a d. 
 consonant which has no vowel of its own, the conso- 
 nant receives a helping-vowel. The most natural 
 vowel in such a case is i, e. g. Ju,*JI oo>-«o dardbati- 
 VaMa (for ooZ^); so Jll£Xwl istikhalun with the ar- 
 ticle j|: jCal3l alistikhdlu, in syllables thus: a-lis- 
 tik-id-lu. In certain cases original final vowels that 
 
14 6. WASLA. 
 
 have been dropped reappear before the connec- 
 tive Alif, e. g. ;^^li\33\ 'fSf hu-mul-kd-fl-ru-na. The < 
 first word is otherwise uniformly Isa hum (§ 12«). — 
 The Nunation (§ 3 &) is also treated as if it ended in 
 a consonant; the favourite vowel in this case is z, e. g. 
 «-»-*l J^) pronounced as if written n^tMA ^j-^) ragu- 
 lunismuhu, in syllables: ra-gu-lu-nis-mu-hu. 
 
 Note. Before a connective alif the preposition ^c "away 
 from" becomes ^, the preposition ^, "from" "becomes ^, tiut 
 before the article ^. 
 
 e. The same rule applies to a word ending in a so- 
 
 called diphthong (cf. § 2) ; the consonant (. or ^) 
 forming the second part of the diphthong must receive 
 a helping vowel before a connective Alif, which vowel 
 is M or i according as the consonant in question is , 
 
 or ^. Thus we have xJUl yJiSaSajo mus-ta-fa-rvul-ld-M 
 
 in place of «<Ul JdiMSjo, sjujf J^z^yrig-la-t/il-ba-ka-ra- 
 
 ti for ifSjJ t ^^^y (So, too, with the termination |. " 
 
 NoTE. The particles jl "or" and y "would that!" take i as 
 helping vowel. 
 
 /. The connective Alif is altogether omitted in the 
 
 following cases: 
 
7, MEDDA. 15 
 
 1) In the article J|, when it receives as prefixes 
 the particles J li or J /a; e. g. ^^1^)3, lil-hak-ki for 
 
 (3siJ!i|, tXsv+JLf lal-mag-du for Ji^sj.^5(. 
 
 s ^ 
 
 2) In ^jjI son, in apposition to the proper name 
 
 of the son and followed in the genitive by the name 
 of the father; e. g. tUJpl JjJ ^jJU mus-li-muh-nul- 
 wa-E-di Muslim, the son of al-Walid. At the beginn- 
 ing of a line, however, even in this case we must write 
 
 3) In the word ^\^ ismun^ name, after the prepo- 
 sition ;_, M in the oft recurring formula sJJ| |Va»o bis- 
 mil-ld-M, in the name of God. 
 
 Medda. Inasmuch as the Arabic orthography 7. 
 cannot tolerate two Alifs side by side, in such a case "" 
 only a single Alif is written, over which is placed a 
 
 S iS ^ _ 
 
 'id-^ Medda or Medd (a sign derived from t\xi). At 
 the beginning of a word or syllable the Medda carries 
 with it the force of a Hamza; the vo wel sign Fath is then 
 
 also dropped, e. g. Jkil ^a-ki-lun for J.^^! !, ^j\Ji kur-d- 
 
 nun for (jHjJ'; so ^\ 'a-ma-na for ^\ |, since the ■ 
 Hamza of the second Alif disappears as explained 
 § 38 «. 
 
16 S, THE SYLLABLE. 
 
 Note, ^^\j ra'd may be taken as an exanaple of the rule just! 
 given. With suffixes it ought to appear, according to §_ 2d, as 
 
 SIlj, which, however, is written Sf) in syllables ra-'a-hu. 
 b. Since a *- after a long a H_ is written on the line 
 
 (§ 4 c) without receiving an Alif as bearer, the | pre- 
 ceding the Hamza in such cases likewise receives 
 Medda, as a rule, although the latter has no effect on 
 the pronunciation of the word, e. g. *L&. ffd-'a (for 
 lUi), iJsUS ta-fd-a-lu\ and the same where . or ^ 
 appears as the bearer of Hamza s. ULs-f a-Mb-ba-u- 
 Am, JoU" ka-i-lun. 
 
 Note. Arabic orthography has also an objection to two Waws 
 appearing side by side, if the first has a Damma (even though 
 the first may be only the bearer of a Hamza, as expained in § 4 c). 
 
 Thus 1^55) TU usnn is often written j*;;. 
 
 8. The Syllable. An open syllable ends in a vowel 
 
 short or long; a shut syllable ends in a consonant. 
 Every syllable begins with a single consonant, not 
 with two or more (cf. § 6). A short syllable consists 
 of a consonant with a short vowel, as in the second 
 
 syllable of icjUo ma-td (with two open syllables); a 
 long syllable consists either 1) of a consonant with a 
 long vowel, like the open syllable md in the above 
 example, or 2) of a consonant, a short vowel and a con- 
 sonant (shut syllable) e. g. both the syllables of 
 
9. THE TONE, 17 
 
 J,AJ( kat-lun (ao too uy^ mau-tun § 2«) |^ sar-ran, 
 or 3) of a shut syllable with a long vowel. This last 
 variety, however, is only found (exclusive of pausal 
 effects § 10) when the following consonant has been 
 
 Go ^ 
 
 doubled (§ 5) and is preceded by a long a, as in xj|o 
 
 dab-ba-tun (rarely after ai as in XAjiii du-rvaib-ba-tun 
 which is derived according to § 66 from ddbbatun). 
 Such a syllable may be described as doubly long. 
 
 Other syllables of this sort are shortened as J^ib yakul 
 
 from JjJLs yakul\ o^xij ramat from cjLx» ramat. 
 
 Note. A word cdnsisting of but one short syllable, if it stands 
 alone, either receives an addition at the end (see §49 a 6), or is 
 joined to the following word. The latter method is adopted in a 
 series of particles (see § 94), which notwithstanding the connec- 
 tion are still regarded as more or less independent words. The 
 principal stress, however, rests on the words with which the par- 
 ticles are connected. 
 
 The Accent or Tone. The accent in Arabic is thrown 
 backwards towards the beginning of the word till it 
 meets a long syllable, or if there is no such syllable, 
 till it reaches the first syllable of the word. A simple 
 long syllable at the end of a word, however, does not 
 receive the accent. Examples of words with a final 
 
 short syllable: Zj'XSo daraba, lX]i£w] istdnkara; with 
 
 a final long syllable: UjC++j tamdmiuma, Cyi fdrdun, 
 
 RJCL^.^ mdmlakatun, Ijjj-to ddrabu, SjJ Udatun. 
 
 Socin, Arabic G-rammar.* 2 
 
18 10. PAUSE. 11. KUMERICAl SIGNS. ABBKEVIATIONS. 
 
 Exceptions: A syllable with a connective Alif (§ 6), 
 as in Jill (see § 6a), cannot receive the accent; the 
 pronunciation is therefore uMtL In the same way- 
 monosyllabic inseparable particles, like ^ and o (cf. 
 § 94), prefixed to words, do not affect the accentuation 
 
 of the latter ; e. g. ,-m^ famdsa. 
 
 10. In pause iinal short vowels are dropped. Also 
 the Nunation un and in; the Nunation an is changed 
 to ff, the feminine termination xJL to sJL (with the h 
 sounded): thus ^JJ^b ndzilun for rjJsLj naziluna; 
 J^a."^ ragul for Ji4>) ragulun; LI^j,jo marhabd for U.a»yo 
 marhdban; is^^\S Fdtimah for R^isLi. 
 
 11. Numerical Signs and Abbreviations. The usual Arabic 
 cyphers are the following: 
 
 V t, f, t", I', 6, 1, V. A, "1 
 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. 
 The tens, hundreds &c., are written to the left of 
 the units &c. as i") 19, IaIo 1895. 
 
 The following are a few of the most frequently 
 occurring abbreviations: 
 
 «-) (vXi = *^LIJI xLL£'«toiAe-s5«/(mt«Peacebeuponhim! 
 
 »,slXj£i = rv^j ^^^ ^'^l 1^^ salla-lldhu "alaihi 
 rvasallama God bless him and give him peace (said of 
 Mohammed). 
 
12. THE PRONOUN. 19 
 
 11. ETYMOLOGY (§§ 12—96). 
 Chapter I. The Pronoun. (§§ 12—15.) 
 
 The personal pronouns are either independent or 12 
 suffixed. The independent or separate personal pro- ^' 
 nouns have the following forms: 
 
 Sing. Plur. Dual 
 
 I. 
 II. 
 
 Pers. 
 Pers. 
 
 LSI 
 
 masc. ooi 
 
 0* 
 
 fem. oo 1 
 
 S ^ 
 
 (''■■■% "'A \ 
 
 L^i! 
 
 III. 
 
 Pers. 
 
 1 masc. yc 
 fem. ^ 
 
 
 Li* 
 
 Note 1. The second syllable of the pronoun of the first pers. 
 singular, although written with I, is short. — The forms in pa- 
 rentheses (2'"* and 3'''' pers. plural) are used particularly before 
 "Wasla (§ 6d); these final vowels are originally long. 
 
 Note 2. When joined to j and ^J (see § 95) the pronouns of 
 
 the 3"''* pers. sing, may lose theii- first vowel e. g. jAj , ^^. 
 
 The suffixed 'personal pronouns^ which joined to a 6. 
 noun indicate the genitive, joined to a rerb, the ac- 
 cusative, are the following: 
 
 2* 
 
20 12. THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Sing. Plur. Dual 
 
 I. Pers. j ^i^^ ^ouns ^— q_ 
 
 I with verbs ^ — 
 
 f masc. li) — i;^— \ 
 
 masc. s — i55 — 
 
 fern. Ls> — 
 
 i 
 
 c>*— J 
 
 Before a connective Alif (§ 6 d) the sufiix pron. of 
 the 1. pers. singular may receive as helping-vowel the 
 a which belonged to it originally; thus we may write 
 
 LjUX!!i ^J.'-^*' °^ i-jUx)! ^_jLkc|. After a, t and 
 ai the nominal suffix of the 1. pers. sing, has the form 
 
 ^ ya. Occasionally (in the Kur'an particularly) the 
 suffix of the 1. pers. sing, is indicated by a simple ?, 
 of which the sign is Kesr , as Cjj my lord! In 
 
 the same way the corresponding verbal suffix may 
 be only ^ ni. 
 
 After an immediately preceding i or ai the suffixes ; 
 
 8, U», 1*^, J^ substitute the vowel i for u, thus 
 
 assuming the forms s, U», ^, ^-^ e. g. JLo instead 
 
 of xJLi. Before the connective Alif lic generally 
 
 becomes '^». — The suffixes ^ and ls& resume 
 
13. THE DEM02JSTBATIVE PRONOUNS. 21 
 
 their original forms j^i^and jvff before a connective 
 Alif. 
 
 For further information regarding the affixing of 
 these pronominal forms see § 82 and the table of 
 paradigms No. XXIII. 
 
 The reflexive pronoun, when carrying a certain e. 
 amount of emphasis with it, is generally expressed 
 
 by the word ijusj nafsun soul, to which the proper 
 suffixes are appended. In many cases, however, the 
 personal pronoun suffices to express the reflexive. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are the following (with 13. 
 their inflexion compare § 76«). 
 
 The simple pronoun (rare) o- 
 
 Masc. 
 Sing. \'o ^b, s6; ^^, aj"; Uf 
 
 Dual 
 
 } Gen. Ace. 
 
 ^ *^ ■ — i 
 
 Plur. (1,1 (uld) or ©^,1 {ula'i) 
 
 This simple pronoun combines: 
 
 (1) with the demonstrative particle \s>, generally 
 
 written defectively {s^ or less correctly ss § 2 &). The 
 result is the usual demonstrative pronoun to indicate 
 that which is near at hand {this, these): 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 \l 
 
 ^5^, s6; 1^', aj' 
 
 Nom. ...16 
 
 ^^ 
 
 1 Gen. Ace. ^ib 
 
 ^ 
 
22 13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 
 
 ttXfC 
 
 s 
 
 jjo i^j^) 
 
 Dual 
 
 Nom 
 Gen. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 3jii 
 
 
 The simple demonstrative combines (2) with a 
 suffix of the second person. Only in the older Arabic, 
 particularly that of the Kur'an, however, does the 
 suffix vary according to the number of persons ad- 
 
 dressed (e. g. plur. lj3c>, dual UxJii), elsewhere it 
 appears uniformly as d. There is also a form with 
 (^ before d. The result is two forms of the demon- 
 strative pronoun to indicate that which is more remote 
 (that, those): 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 Sing. dtS, vdji (JJiS, JijS) dU (JLo) viiJb 
 
 Nom. viljta, ^ilo dbU, >iI)LS 
 
 Gen. Ace. aUjo, ^iJ^,c> ^^i^, ^^' 
 
 Dual 
 
 - i 
 
 Plur. ^^^^1 (d^.]), rarely dJ'3^\ 
 
 d. Among the demonstratives we must also place the 
 
 article J I (see § 5 &). When the noun, in the circumstances 
 
14. THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 23 
 
 detailed in § 6 /" 1, begins with a J, this letter has a 
 Tesdid placed over it and the J of the article is drop- 
 ped. Thus we get kilij for xJUdW; so too Jj for 
 M (§ 5 note). 
 
 The relative pronouns are the following: 14. 
 
 i^iXi\ who, which, that, — originally a compound a. 
 
 demonstrative with the article as one of its elements 
 (hence the connective Alif) — declined as follows: 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ^^Jl 
 
 C3^ 
 
 ■ 
 
 Dual I 
 
 Gen. Ace. 
 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ^.4^"' 
 
 ^:1m, ^rjS\ 
 
 /US (indeclinable) 
 0, those who. 
 
 one who, such (a one) as, he 6. 
 
 Lo (indeclinable) that which, s 
 
 lomething which. 
 
 Among the relative pronouns may also be included c. 
 
 ^^1, fern, jbl he who, she who. This word is declinable 
 in the sing., but the masc. often takes the place of 
 the fern. It also combines with the prons. in b above 
 to form \^\ every one who, whosoever; and Uj| 
 whatsoever. 
 
24 15. THE INTEEKOGATIVE PRONOUNS. 16. 17. THE VEKB. 
 
 15. The interrogative pronouns are : 
 ^ -who? 
 
 Uo what? Frequently strengthened by the addition 
 of the demonstrative Id: Id Lo what then? 
 
 ^t, fern. jLsl what sort of? which? 
 
 Note. \a after prepositions is shortened to f e. g. fJ why? 
 With this interrogative U is also connected the interrogative 
 particle p" how much? 
 
 Chapter II. The Verb. (§§ 16-54.) 
 
 16. The great majority of Arabic verbs have three 
 radical letters ; only a small minority have four radi- 
 cals. The ground-form of verbs, according to which 
 they are arranged in grammar and dictionary, is the 
 
 third person singular of the perfect. The verb JJii 
 
 (to do) is used as a model paradigm. 
 
 Note. Since all Arabic dictionaries give the verbal and no- 
 minal derivatives under their respective root-forms, it is necessary, 
 in order to find the three radicals with ease, to note carefully what 
 consonants are employed in the formation of verbs and nouns as 
 prefixes and affixes to, and as infixes in, the stem. 
 
 17. From this ground-form or root, which is named 
 by grammarians the first stem, other stems are deri- 
 ved by a series of uniform changes, represented by 
 
18. THE FIEST STEM. 25 
 
 modifications of the verb JJii, but usually referred 
 to by their respective numbers in the series. Thus 
 we speak of "the eighth stem", (indicated in the dic- 
 tionary simply by VIII) not as in Hebrew and Syriac 
 of the Piel, the Afel &c. The following stems, the 
 order of which must be carefully noted, are those 
 most frequently met with: 
 
 I Jii 
 
 ^ 0* 
 
 IV j^t 
 
 VII Joiili 
 
 X JjtaJLwj 
 
 •^ cs -* 
 
 II Joii 
 
 V J,%x 
 
 VIII J;v,M 
 
 XI JUij 
 
 III jili 
 
 VlJiUx 
 
 C5 Cr 
 
 IX J^l^ 
 
 
 Note a. 
 
 Of these No. 
 
 IX and especially N 
 
 0. XI are of less 
 
 frequent occurrence; still more rare are XII Jej*i|, XIII j)**l, 
 
 XIV JJL*«il , XV ^JU»i|. Which of these derived stems are formed 
 
 from any given verb, and to what extent the meaning of the ground- 
 form is modified by them, will be found in the dictionary under 
 each verb. 
 
 Note h. In many cases the verb is used to express the idea 
 that some one wishes to do something or has something done; 
 
 thus iisi "he killed him'' may also signify "he wished to kill him", 
 
 and «a:c wj^ "he cut off his head (prop, neck)" may mean "he 
 had {ewrmiit) his head out off." 
 
 G^ - 
 
 The ground-form I, in the majority of verbs, takes 18. 
 the form J^ii, e. g. J^^i* to kill; there is also— mostly 
 with intransitive verbs — a form Jju (cf. 153), e. g. 
 -j-yi to be sad, ju^ to do (transitive), and also a 
 
26 19, 20. THE II. AND III. STEMS. 
 
 form i}!al (cf. p'Q) , confined to intransitive verbs, as 
 , r\J^ to be beautiful. Sometimes both the transitive 
 and intransitive forms, J.ii and Jk*i or J.»i, are 
 found side by side in the same verb. One and the 
 same verb, again, may have both the forms J.»i and 
 
 19. The I I. ste m J,ii (corresponding to the Hebrew 
 Pi"el) usually denotes a greater intensity of the action 
 expressed by the simple verb. This intensification 
 may affect the subject, object or qualifying adjunct, 
 
 as Joi' to kill many people^ to massacre (intensi- 
 fication of the object). In the majority of verbs, 
 
 however, the II. stem is causative as lj.£ to know, 
 
 iXft cause to know, to teach. It is also declarative — 
 
 as in LjjJi to lie, i^Ji'to take one for, declare one 
 
 to be, a liar — and denominative, as in ^i.^^^. to collect 
 
 an army (jilAs*). 
 
 20. The III, stem J.fiLi expresses an attempt or effort 
 to perform the action of the simple verb on some per- 
 son, to influence some person or thing. Thus Jocii to 
 kill, but Joli to try to kill, to fight with ; ,2>^to 
 write, v^'Lj to correspond with (with accusative of 
 
21, 22. THE IV. AND V. STEMS. 27 
 
 the person corresponded with). This stem also means 
 to exercise some abstract quality on a person or thing, 
 
 e. g. ij^ to be soft, gentle, jT*.j'i( to exercise gentleness 
 on some one, to treat one kindly. 
 
 The IV. stem jjii| (the Hebrew Hiph'il) has a 21. 
 causative signification, as ,^JUa to be in good condi- 
 tion, ^Jl.ol to bring into good condition. Very 
 
 frequently we find, with this stem, denominative verbs 
 which appear to us as intransitive, but to the Arab 
 as possessing an implicit transitive force, and which 
 express the idea of action in a certain definite direction, 
 
 as ^Mj.^\ to do good. Frequently, too, verbs of this 
 stem convey the idea of going to a place, of entering 
 
 upon a certain period or condition; e.g. CjIcI to go 
 towards the West, a,a^| to enter upon the period of 
 the morning, to be something in the morning, Oj-cil 
 to reach the top^ to be high; ILisI (from ^Ls rise up, 
 stand) to halt, to stay. 
 
 The V. stem JJS^ (Hebrew Hithpa''el), a soft of 22. 
 middle voice is formed from the II. stem and has both a 
 reflexive and a reciprocal meaning, e. g. IaXJ to make 
 one's self great, liij to let one's self be taught, to 
 learn. Sometimes a verb in the V. stem conveys the 
 
28 23, 24, 25. THE VI., Vn. AND VIII. STEMS. 
 
 1 • f =-' 
 
 idea of giving one's self out as something, e. g. L»-o 
 to give one's self out for, to conduct one's self as, a 
 prophet. 
 
 23. TheJVLstemjJ^J^-, derived from the III. stem, is 
 the reflexive form of the latter, and has a reflexive or 
 reciprocal signification, as 11 L2 to show one's self bold; 
 J-jUj to fight one another (usually in the plural). 
 Another signification is seen, for example, in J,\Ju, VI 
 form of !ikx to be high, which means to exalt one's 
 self and then simply: to be exalted. 
 
 24. The VII. stem Jii.!] (the Hebrew Niph'al with 
 
 the connective Alif ace. to § 6a), derived in most cases 
 from the I. stem, is a middle or reflexive form of the 
 latter. Its signification may also be described as 
 
 quasi-passive, e. g. jmS^ to break lljCit, to break or 
 
 be broken in pieces. 
 
 25. The VIII. stem Jixif, (with connective Alif § 6a) 
 
 is likewise a middle and reflexive form, for the most 
 
 part of the I. stem, as ^lx£.l , to oppose one's self, 
 
 object to; sometimes also with reciprocal signification 
 
 as jviOAirkj, to dispute, contend with each other. 
 
 Note. In the case of verbs wliose flrstiTadical is ja, je, h 
 or 15, the Cj of the VIII. stem is changed to the emphatic fa, and 
 
26, 27. THE IX. AND X. STEMS. 29 
 
 is even assimilated to the first radical, when that letter is a dental 
 as ^^l instead of j*si| from j^; "^^ or '^1 for IlSBI from 
 ^; O is sometimes assimilated also to a preceding o, e, g. c«^l 
 or cwl from St^ properly c»*SjI; after J, J and J il» is changed 
 into the soft J, e. g. JIJ3I for 0U3I from JlJ; ^jjl for ,i>Nj..j|. 
 
 S _, O C3 Ci 
 
 The IX. stem Joii| (as also the XL stem JL*il,26. 
 both with connective Alif) is used of verbs which 
 denote the possession of inherent qualities such as 
 colours or bodily defects, e. g. from the stem yjL>o: 
 
 wi^t to be or become yellow; from the stem .^■. .let 
 to be one-eyed; from the stem j.*;^ : jU^I to be red. 
 
 The X. stem JJUx^J, (with connective Alif) is 27. 
 
 primaril5i__a reflexive of the IV. Jixit (otherwise a 
 reflexive, formed on the analogy of the VIII. stem, from 
 
 a stem JJlLw with a prefixed 5), as from the stem jL^^ 
 
 IV*. (jSi^.l to grieve: X. ^J^^yjA to grieve (one's 
 
 self). Very frequently the X. stem denotes also to 
 
 wish or to beg something for one's self, e. g. from .Jia\ 
 
 to pardon, X.: waAZ*!. to ask for pardon; or to think 
 
 that something is so, as ^^s-. to be necessary, IV: 
 
 J^°,| to make necessary, X: ^^yci«[ to consider 
 
 something as necessary for one's self. 
 
30 28. THE QUADEILIT. STEMS. 29. THE PASSIVE. 30. THE TENSES. 
 
 28. The quadriliteral stems are denoted, for tlie verbal 
 and nominal forms, by the paradigm JJjii (that is 
 by the addition of a fourth radical to Jjti), and con- 
 sist for the most part of two stems, of which the first 
 may be said to correspond to the second stem of the 
 triliteral verb (for Joii is in reality J^juii), and the 
 second jjjiij to the fifth, e. g. ^Xl> to overturn, 
 cast down, .UCaJo fall down. 
 
 Note. The stems III JJUtnil and IV JJWI (the last corre- 
 sponding to the IX. stem of the triliterals) ai'e rare e. g. ^^Uiol, to 
 be quiet, from a stem jjWs. 
 
 29. In addition to the active, the Arabic verb has a 
 passive voice. This passive is formed in the perfect 
 in such a way that in place of the a-vowels of the 
 active we have the order u-i-a {i with the second, a 
 with the third radical) ; thus the act. of stem I. is 
 
 Jjii, the pass: Jjti. The additional formative syllables 
 
 of the derived stems also receive the vowel m, e. g. 
 
 pass. V. JuiAJ", VIII (JkaJCil (with connective Alif). 
 
 30. The Arabic verb has two principal tenses, 2^. perfect 
 "■ which, generally speaking, denotes a completed action, 
 
 and an imperfect which in general denotes an uncom- 
 pleted action. 
 
31. THE MOODS. 31 
 
 The imperfect is formed by adding the prefix j,ya. lb. 
 for the active of the I, V., VI., VII., VIII., IX. and' 
 X. stems, and the prefix j yu for the active of the 
 II., III. und IV. stems, and for the passive of all the 
 stems without exception. 
 
 In the case of verbs of which J,ii is the type, the c. 
 second radical, in the impf. act. of stem I., may receive 
 one or other of the vowels u, i, a. Which of the three 
 must be used for a particular verb will be found 
 indicated in the dictionary under that verb (e. g. J.Xs 
 impf. u) and should be taken careful note of. Those 
 
 verbs, on the other hand, of which J*.«i (with e-vowel) 
 
 is the type, together with all passives point their second 
 
 radical with a only, thus impf. act. I. J.*ij; pass. Jk*Aj. 
 
 Those verbs, finally, of which J^ai (with w-vowel) is the 
 type, take u with the second radical for the imperfect. 
 As regards the active imperfect of the derived stems, 
 the second radical takes i throughout, with the excep- 
 tion of stems V. and VI. where it takes a; thus impf. 
 
 II. J^jb hut V. JoLa3L). 
 
 In the imperfect various Moods are distinguished, 31. 
 namely the ordinary mood which we call the indicative, 
 the dependent mood or subjunctive, and a modus apo- 
 copatus (sometimes called the jussive). These are 
 
32 32. THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 distinguished as follows: in the indicative the last 
 radical, when final, always takes m, as impf. I (.mlsj, 
 III. J-fi-Lftj; in the subjunctive always a, as (Jjlsj, 
 while in the apocopatus the third radical is vowelless. 
 In addition to the above there is a double modus 
 energicus, which is formed by appending the syllables 
 anna or an (in some forms only n) to the impf. as 
 
 ij-l*jij or ^jXiLAi. 
 
 Note. As the modus energicus is of comparatively rare 
 occurrence, it is given in the tahles of paradigms only in the case 
 of the ordinary strong verb. From the examples there given it 
 may easily be formed for the other verbs. 
 
 32. The imperative agrees with the apocopated imper- 
 fect as regards vocalisation and termination, except 
 that the prefixes ya or yu are wanting. In the imper. 
 of the I. stem a helping vowel (therefore with connec- 
 tive Alif § 6 a) is prefixed in all cases where the first 
 consonant is without a vowel of its own. This vowel 
 disappears, however, in pronunciation as soon as the 
 
 word ceases to stand alone, e. g. Jjiit but >^| JLi- 
 
 The same applies to stems VII. — X. The imperative 
 
 has the same energetic bye-forms as the imperfect. 
 
 Note. In the imper. of stem I the prosthetic vowel is u when 
 
 OJOJ 
 
 the second radical has u, as J«l, but i when it is pointed with 
 a or i, as Jatil, ^jl. 
 
33. NUMBEK, PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. 33 
 
 Note b. In the imper. of the IV. stem the prosthetic f, which 
 is characteristic of the stem, is retained, although it disappears 
 
 after the prefixed i of the impf. Hence impf. Jstij (for J*»l>), 
 
 hut imper. J*JI. 
 
 In the perfect, imperfect and imperative, there 33. 
 are, in addition to the singular and plural, dual forms 
 for the second and third persons. Verbs are inflected 
 by the addition of modified and abbreyiated forms 
 of the personal pronouns, and of the dual and plural 
 
 terminations of nouns, to the ground-forms J^ii and 
 
 Ji.**j (for the terminations ani and Una of the' impf. 
 
 indie, vid. § 76 «). The terminations just named, along 
 with the ending ma of the 2. pers. fem. sing., 
 drop the syllables ni and na in the subjunctiye, the 
 apocopated imperfect and the imperative. The t, which 
 appears in the paradigm after the final , _L. in the 
 perf. and in these shortened forms of the impf. and 
 imper., has no phonetic value (of. § 2e). 
 
 As to the prefixes of the impf., it is to be noted 
 that in place of the prefix j of the 3. pers. masc, we 
 have J as the prefix of the 2. pers. sing, and plur., 
 and of the 3 pers. fem. of the sing., | to indicate the 
 1. pers. sing., and j the 1. pers. plur. 
 
 The affixes employed in the inflexion of the verb are given 
 in paradigm I. 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar^. 3 
 
34 34. VEEBS 3IEDIAE GEJIINATAE. 
 
 Note a. In the V. and VI. forms of verbs whose first letter 
 is a dental or a sibilant, the formative prefix occasionally drops 
 its vowel and is assimilated to the first radical of the verb, in 
 which case the perf and imper. have a helping vowel (§ 6) prefixed 
 
 e. g. )J Jl wrap one's self up, impf. yJ^iJ. 
 
 Note b. In the impf. of these two stems, the prefix J may 
 he treated in such a way that instead of the two syllables 57 
 
 only 5 remains, e. g. from Js5 2. pers. msc. impf. V. jsi? for JsiSJ. 
 
 Note c. In the impf. VII. and VIII. stems the tone remains 
 
 on the sarne syllable on which it falls in the perf., contrary to 
 
 the rule laid down in § 9 ; thus J^^Sij JSAi^ yankatilu, ydktatilu. 
 
 For the conjugation of the strong verb with three radicals 
 see paradigms II, III and V, for that of the quadriliteral verbs 
 see paradigm IV. In the paradigms the participles and infinitives 
 are also given, although the discussion of these forms has been 
 deferred to §§ 60 and 61. 
 
 34., Among the ordinary strong verbs must also be 
 reckoned the so-called verbs mediae geminatae, i. e. 
 verbs whose second and third radicals are identical. 
 A contraction of these last two radicals takes 
 place in all those cases in which 
 a. 1) the first, second and third radicals have each 
 a short vowel; in this case the vowel of the second 
 radical is always dropped, e. g. Zi (to flee) contracted 
 from Tli (which statement is not to be understood 
 as implying that a form Tli once really existed in 
 Arabic) 3. p. perf. pass. I. ^i from .^i; 3. p. impf. 
 VII. ^jLu from ^ vIaj ; 
 
35, 36. VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE. 35 
 
 2) When the first two radicals have each a short, h. 
 and the third a long, vowel, e. g. 3. p. dual masc. 
 perf. Ci from iTli; 
 
 3) Generally also when the first radical has a long c. 
 «, e. g. 3. s. m. perf. of the III. stem vU contracted from 
 >,Ls (which is also found), passive \\^- 
 
 When the first radical is vowelless and the second 35. 
 has a short vowel, then contraction takes place and 
 the vowel of the second radical passes over to the 
 
 first. Thus 3. pers. impf. act. ^jj for \Jl2; pass, m 
 
 from .laj. 
 
 When the third radical is vowelless, there is no 36. 
 contraction in the body of the word: e. g. 2. pers. sing. 
 
 masc. perf. act. liywi; 3- pers. plur. fem. impf. act. 
 'jjyij. But when the third radical stands at the end 
 of a verbal form with no vowel following, as in various 
 forms of the apocopated impf. and the 2. pers. sing, 
 masc. of the imper., we find the full forms >vij) yyi\ 
 only in the dialects. As a rule contraction takes place 
 and an additional vowel is assumed at the end in 
 
 order to preserve the doubling of the radical; thus 
 
 . . - „ =.- . i' 
 
 we have >iLs, ji, from j». imper. Oy 
 
 3* 
 
36 37. HAMZATE TEEBS. 
 
 Note. In the case of verbs of the forms J*i and Jx^ the 
 
 vowel of the second radical ajjpears only in the uncontracted form 
 
 ■e- g- J* to loathe, 1. pers. perf. cMm; hence the vowel a of the 
 
 impf. J«J. 
 
 For the conjugation of verbs mediae geminatae see paradigms 
 
 Nos. VI— VIII; model verb '^ to flee. 
 
 37. Those yerbs that have a Hamza » as first, second 
 
 ^% 
 or third radical are for the most part regular, as lj| to 
 
 , _i, it,, _ ^^'^ 
 
 make an impression, impf. *jLj; Li' to read, impf. |liu. 
 
 In certain cases we find, according to § 4&, . or ^^ 
 (without points) as bearers of the Hamza, or ^^ may 
 
 stand without a bearer, thus 3. s. m. perf. act. ^1*25' 
 to be sad, (w-«j to be brave; 3. s. m. impf. passive of 
 jj|: jjj.j; 3. sing. masc. perf. act. ^JaL. to err, fern. 
 owXk^; 3. s. m. impf. act. of jCj] to ask: JsJlj. Oc- 
 casionally an j takes the place of two Alifs, according 
 to § 7; e. g. 3. s. m. perf. III. of pf: pT for 3tf; VI. 
 of l^f (bind up a wound &c.) Is^'. 
 
 38. While in all these cases the ^ may easily be distin- 
 guished as the third radical of the verb, there are a 
 few forms in which the verba hamzata are more diffi- 
 cult to distinguish, inasmuch as the ^ sometimes 
 entirely disappears; from this point of view these 
 verbs ought rather to be reckoned among the weak 
 
38. HAMZATE VERES. 37 
 
 verbs (§ 39 ff.). The most important of such cases 
 are the following: 
 
 1) After I, I, t (also after a connective Alif |, |, | a. 
 
 at the beginning of a sentence) *. gives up its power 
 as a consonant (cf. § 7) ; hence, in place of '«', V, Y 
 
 simply 'a, 'm, % e. g. 3. s. m. perf. IV. of ^3\ : -j| for 
 
 >.jlt; 3. s. m. perf. pass. IV., of A\ is 'i, | in place of 
 
 jj. I. So also imper. I. wijj for yiSt. 
 
 2) In the imper. of the I. form the verbs Jv.^! *• 
 take, Jki'l eat, .jol order, drop the > altogether: j^, 
 Jk^ yvo ; in the same way, from JUL to ask, the impera- 
 tive is either JLwj or J^^ &c. 
 
 Note. Should y or > come to stand as inseparable particles 
 (§ 87) before one of the imperatives under a, the prosthetic Alif 
 is dropped and the radical Hamza reappears, receiving, as its 
 
 bearer, an Alif on account of the preceding Fath, as in yjj. The 
 
 same holds good in the case of two separate words: thus ^yvjl 
 
 3. =. m. perf. pass. VIII of ^\ connected with a preceding word 
 
 becomes y*?}! ^^jJI elladi-'tumina. 
 
 3) In the VI. form the >- of verbs primae ^ is c. 
 sometimes changed to ., as C^IIj in place of CoLj" 
 (for^lb). 
 
 4) In the VIII. form the •> of the verb tXLl is d 
 
1 
 
 38 S9. THE WEAK VERBS. 40. VEEES PEIMAE J AND ^J. 
 
 assimilated to the following j, the result being j", as 
 
 jC^'t instead of an original j^^Si, impf. lX^Jj hut 
 
 from j.;c|, to order, I^XjI. 
 
 For the conjugation of the verba hamzata see paradigm IX. 
 
 The Weak Verbs. 
 
 39. The weak verbal stems are those having a . or 
 a ^ as first, second or third radical; under inflection 
 these semivowels in some cases resolve themselves into 
 full vowels, in others they are treated as consonants. 
 
 40. The Ver'bs primae , and ^ differ from the strong 
 verbs in the following points: 
 
 a. 1) In the impf. and imper. of the I stem a number 
 of verbs primae . surrender their first radical and 
 take the vowel i with their second (cf. ib^), as jj^ 
 
 Jo ^ 
 
 to bring forth, impf. jju, imper. jj. 
 6. 2) Under the influence of a guttural a few verbs 
 take a in place of i with their second radical, drop- 
 ping the ^, however, like the others, as li' to lay, 
 
 impt. ^j; so «j^ to fall, ^_^js, to give and others 
 (see the dictionaries). 
 c. 3) In verbs primae ^, jj_ is changed to ?7, e. g. 
 the impf. IV of 'ih'Li to be awake, properly Ja£^, be- 
 comes Ja.i"yj. 
 
41, 42. VERBS MEDIAE 3 AND ^5. 39 
 
 4) In the VIII. stem the first radical of verbs d. 
 primae . and ^ is assimilated to the following i^j, 
 
 e. g. from oS". to promise, JuLi'l for (>.ij"jt (cf. § 38 d). 
 
 Note. A few verbs of the form J*J also give up tlie first 
 
 radical in the imperf. as li^j to inherit, impf. >i»^ (cf. § 18). 
 
 Por the conjugation of the verbs primae j and ^5 see para- 
 digm X where will be found the principal forms of the verbs 
 
 J^oj to arrive, e Jj to leave, ^j to be dirty, Ja-j to he anxious, 
 i^j to be sleepy, ymJ, to be easy. 
 
 Verbs mediae . and ^. In the II., III., V., VI. 41. 
 and IX. stems, . and are treated as consonants, 
 and the inflexion is the same as that of the strong 
 verb; thus 3. s. m. perf. II of JLS" (to say) med. ^: 
 jlS, 3. s. m. perf. Ill of TLl (to travel) med. (^ : IjLI. 
 In the other stems these verbs are inflected according 
 to the following rules: 
 
 Long a takes the place of the middle radical: 42. 
 
 in the perf. active of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and a. 
 
 X. stems, as Jli', JlS'lj JLajI, JUaj, Jux»/t; 
 
 in the impf. passive ofthe same stems, as jUij, JUL;, 6. 
 
 in the impf. active of VII. and VIII., as JUaj, Juiij ; c. 
 in the impf. active of the I. stem of verbs of the d. 
 
 form joJ e. g. oLi. to fear, impf. ^\jd. 
 
40 43, 44. VERBS MEDIAE J AND ^J. 
 
 43. Long t takes the place of the middle radical: 
 
 a. in the perf. passive of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and 
 
 X. stems as J^aj, J^ajI, J.aajI, (^-v^'ij J>^^aX«'I 5 
 J. in the impf. active of IV. und X., as J-^aj, (J-tEAA«j ; 
 c. in the impf. active of verbs med. ^, as j.-u**j.- 
 
 The corresponding form of verbs med. ,, on the other 
 
 hand, takes long u, as J Jij. 
 
 Note. The nature of the phonetic changes just detailed will 
 be more readily understood from the standpoint of the strong/ 
 
 verb if it he noted that j , J , j , i ; j , i pass 
 
 into a; j , j , ^ , i into i; » into ti. It is not 
 
 meant by this that the corresponding strong forms were ever 
 really found, in these verbs, at any period of the language. 
 
 44. The whole of the long vowels mentioned in 
 §§ 42 — 43 are shortened (§ 8) in a shut syllable, e. g.: 
 
 2. s. m. perf. act. IV. of JLi" and TLl : i.iJj" f and 
 
 3. sing. masc. apoc. impf. pass. I JlL, llo (with 
 the tone on the last syllable as if contravening § 9). 
 
 2. pers. masc. sing, imper. I. of oLi&. (§ 42<?): 
 
 i_ttis. (but plur. !jjL~»); 
 
 2. pers. masc. sing. perf. pass. JUj ; 
 
 3. pers. sing. masc. apoc. impf. act. IV. Jjij ; 
 2. pers. sing. masc. imper. I: y^^ ^. 
 
43, 46. VERES ULTIMAE j AND ^. 41 
 
 In the perf. active of I, verbs med. . take m where 
 we should expect a, (cf. riaj?) as i;.JLs, while verbs 
 med. ^ take «, as i^i^^ ; « is also found in verbs of 
 the form Ji.*i, as o*.*^ from oLi» (for a theoretical 
 
 Note a. Instead of the apocop. impf. ^i &c. from j^Vjtobe, 
 ■we sometimes find the still shorter form ^. 
 
 Note b. Prom a few verbs med. j and ^^ strong forms 
 are found in stems I., IV., VIII., X.; e. g. IV. kJ^' compel; X. 
 '^^•a^4u\ to find correct, a denominative form from '-j\yo correct. 
 
 For the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XI — XIV. 
 Ver'bs ultimae . and ^. Verbs ultimae . pass into 45. 
 ultimae ^ in all the derived stems, and in the perf. 
 and impf. passive of the 1 stem; thus from .y^ we 
 
 have 3 s. m. perf. II (^Lc^ The same applies to the 
 
 active of stem I of the form J^jii; thus'^.o^ becomes 
 
 l.or (to have pleasure in). 
 
 If the second radical has «, this vowel is changed 46. 
 in every case into a long final a. In order to distinguish *' 
 the stems ult. ^ from those ult. . this final a is in the 
 former case indicated by (^, in the latter by | (this 
 
 applies only to the 3. s. m. perf. act, I). Thus JoC to 
 
 throw, -lye carry on a war; but II. ^N, ^5ye&c. Similarly 
 
42 46. VERBS TJLTIMAE j AND ^^. 
 
 in the imperfects (cf. § 45), e. g. indie, and subj. pass. II 
 ^ll (in place of a theoretical ^^o^j and ^^J~^ ! ™pf' 
 act. I of i^\, ^e^^^f■>^ ™pf- act. V. ^^^oyo- 
 
 Note. With the same reservation as under § 43c note, we 
 
 would call attention to the fact that the combinations j ^ ^ — , 
 
 ] , ^ all pass into long a. 
 
 b. In all the cases mentioned in the preceding sub- 
 section, a diphthong (§ 2 «) appears before the in- 
 flectional additions that begin with a consonant. Thus: 
 
 2. sing. masc. perf. act. I ci».A^>; from lyi: ^'y^', H 
 
 c. In the case also of the inflectional additions u, 
 una, ma (and its shortened form z), the a of the second 
 radical, (after the elision of the third radical) unites 
 with their initial vowel to form a diphthong. Thus: 
 
 3. pers. masc. plur. perf act. I. iJoj, I.Ccj do. impf 
 pass. II. ^jjoJj, subj. L-oCj; do. act. I. r\y^yl, V. 
 ijyOvXj; 2. pers. fern. sing, of the last -\^lx^_, subj. 
 
 d. Before the dual terminations a and dni the last 
 radical of this class of verbs is treated as a strong 
 
 letter, e. g. 3. pers. perf. act. I. \Jixsy iryS ; impf. pass. 
 
 II. (jLl'flvJ &c. By the addition of the termination at, 
 
47. VEEBS ULTIMAE j ASD ^^. 43 
 
 the 3. pers. fern. sing, of the perfect must originall}^ 
 have ended in at; this ending, however, has now become 
 at in accordance with § 8, as ^^'; ^^p^. According 
 to the analogy of the above is also formed the 3. pers. 
 fern, of the dual; thus we find Lxo'v, ISyl (where we 
 should expect LiUoj, LSlyt). 
 
 In the impf. active of stem I, verbs ult. . of the 47. 
 
 form Jjb take an u, those ult. ^^ an i, the third 
 radical quiescing in these vowels. The ending u of the 
 
 imperf. is lost, e. g. .yij, ^s^yJ- The imperfects active 
 of the derived forms (with the exception of V and VI) 
 are formed on the model of the last mentioned forms, 
 
 as II ,-^5-Sj (3y*J ^'Hd so on. 
 
 Note. "With the same reservation as under § 43 c note, it 
 may he pointed out that j passes into u, ^ into i. 
 
 Affixes beginning with a consonant are appended h. 
 in every case to the i or the u just mentioned, as 3. pers. 
 
 fern. plur. impf. I. ^/jo^j, (j.-ou; similarly in the 
 petf., e. g. 2. sing. masc. perf. pass, 'o^axv ; do. from 
 J.*i I. oyya\ ; from J>»i I t:i5.j.Au. 
 
 If the second radical has i or w, the third radical c. 
 is dropped and the terminations u^ una, ina added to 
 
 the second, e. g. 3. plur. masc. perf. pass. Lxl^ (not 
 
44 48. VERBS ULTIMAE j AND |^. 49. DOUBLY WEAK VEBES. 
 
 t^s), t^yi; 3. plur. masc. impi. act. ^y>J) (J^j*:?) 
 (not ^^-w!j, ;j^_^Cij); 2. pers. fem. sing. impf. 
 
 d. Before the dual endings a and d?ii, as also before 
 the terminations a of the 3. sing. masc. perf., at of 
 the 3. sing. fem. perf., ata of the 3. fem. dual perf., 
 and a of the subjunctive, the third radical is treated 
 as a strong letter, if the second has i or u. Exx: 3. pers. 
 
 masc. perf. act. ^1^''^,'',J^; do. pass. ^», (3>.e; 3. pers. 
 
 fem. perf. ^^.^r, i;yjww; 3. pers. masc. dual LLov; 
 
 fem. LicLoT; 3. pers. subj. act. I ^-fyJi ^y*^; 3. pers. 
 
 dual impf. ^[Icyj, ^\yykj. 
 
 48. In the apocopated impf. and in the imper. every 
 final a, i and u is shortened, as 3. pers. sing. masc. 
 
 apoc. impf. jjllj, j,o, Lij; 2. imper. (_^j], |.J], 'Jki 
 
 Por the conjugation of these verba see paradigms XV — ^XIX 
 where various forms are given of the verbs lye to carry on war, 
 U*j to throw, ,^j to be content, ^y**' to carry out, accomplish. 
 
 49. Of verbs doubly weak the follov?ing are the 
 principal varieties: 
 
 a. Verbs primas . and ultimas ^^, as Jr to take care 
 
 of; impf. according to §§ 40 and 47 io, apoc. (Sj. 
 
50. THE VERB j*>J. 45 
 
 The imper. is properly ^ , for which, however, when 
 
 the word stands alone, i. e. in pause, we write x3. 
 
 The verb j^L to see, which in the impf. elides b. 
 the Hamza, throwing back its vowel a to the first 
 
 radical. Thus ^5JJ yara for ^^|jj yar'd; 3. pers. pi. 
 
 'j.jj; imper. t (ace. to a s'l), fem. ,^7. The IV. form 
 
 in the sense of 'to show' is similarly inflected: ^A 
 
 for (jivl, impf. ^^^ for (^bvj; perf. pass. ,^.1 for 
 
 (^e.| and so on. 
 
 The verb :^ to live, properly ^^^ ; impf. LI^ (cf. c. 
 § 2 <? note) like a verb ult. ^^ or ;^ like a verb mediae 
 geminatae; perf. IV U^l, perf. X Aiiuul^ or LajsLw] 
 also contracted ,^sL^t (be ashamed). 
 
 The verb J^ 'there is not' (compounded of the 50. 
 
 negative ^ and an obsolete Arabic noun corresponding 
 to the Hebrew ^i) is inflected as follows : 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plural 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 
 
 Laaw.aJ 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. com. 
 
 - -r 1 
 
 I'.'."'! 
 
 5 -r 
 
4G 51. VERBS or PRAISE AXD BLAME. 52. AD5IIRATIVES. 53. THE SUFFIXES. 
 
 51. The verbs of praise and blame, 1*J to be good 
 and (jIaj to be bad, which are rarely conjugated, are 
 written as above. 
 
 52. The Arab grammarians adduce as special forms 
 the so-called admirative forms, that is, forms expressive 
 of admiration. These are strictly the 3. s. m. perf. 
 and 2. pers. imper. of the IV. stem, but have assumed 
 a special signification; so ltXj\ Jodii Lo properly 'what 
 has madeZaid excellent', and JojJ J^^I prop, 'make 
 Zaid excellent' both mean: how excellent is Zaid! — 
 The verbs mediae . and (^ may in these forms take 
 the inflection of the strong stems (§ 44 note V) as 
 
 ttX» i2)j^' '-^ ^°^ ®^®y this is! 
 
 53. The addition of the pronominal suffixes (§ 11&) 
 alters the form of the verb only to a slight extent. 
 
 a. The 2. pers. fem. sing. perf. with a suffix receives 
 
 a long final vowel as ^UajIo. 
 h. The I, standing after ._L m (§ 2 e), is dropped as 
 
 s^Axs from I Jujj with the suff. of the 3. pers. sing. masc. 
 c. The ending ^ of the 2. pers. pi. perf. becomes j^' 
 
 (cf. § 12ff, note 1), as ^y;id^s from ^jdiS with the 
 
 suff. of the 1. pers. sing. 
 A- Before the suffixes to the 1. pers. sing, and plur., 
 
iii. THE PEONOUN AS OBJECT. 47 
 
 ^j and Li, the final na of the 2. fern. sing, and 3. 
 
 and 2. masc. plur. impf. is sometimes dropped (so that 
 these foi'ms become identical with those of the sub- 
 
 junctive and apocopated moods).Ex.: ^Low«a.j alongside 
 
 of the more common ^AAAjwAaJ" thou (fem.) strikest 
 
 me; Ljjjwtdj alongside of the more common liSjjw»fl.j 
 
 they strike us. 
 
 When the object of an active verb consists of a 54. 
 personal pronoun, and this object is, for the sake of "'• 
 emphasis, made to precede the verb, then instead of 
 the ordinary suffixes appended to the verb the sign 
 
 of the accusative LI (ns, n«) is employed with the 
 suffixes of the noun (with the suff. of 1. pers. sing. 
 
 The Arabic verb may have two suffixes appended 6. 
 at the same time, in which case the pronoun of the 
 I. person precedes those of the 2. and 3. persons, 
 and the pronoun of the 2. person that of the third, 
 
 as XAjUict he gave it me; frequently, however, in 
 place of the second suffix— more particularly when both 
 pronouns are of the third person — we find the above 
 mentioned periphrasis with Gt^as L^L»[x=.^\ he married 
 him to her. 
 
48 55. THE NOUN. 
 
 Chapter III. The Noun. (§§ 55—90). 
 
 a. The Formation of Nouns. 
 
 55. Nouns in the wider sense comprise 1) substantives, 
 2) adjectives, 3) numerals (§§91 — 93), and 4) pronouns 
 (§§ 12—14). The noun, in the narrower sense, is 
 limited to substantives and adjectives. 
 
 Primitive substantives is the name given to such 
 substantives as cannot be derived from a verb. Accord- 
 ing to the usual arrangement of Arabic dictionaries, 
 
 it is true, the primitive noun ,^^^1*, head (un affix) for 
 example, is found under the verb jllj, but this verb 
 is in all its significations denominative. On the other 
 hand, it may fairly be maintained that a noun like 
 
 ijj,!. goes back to ahypotheticaltriliteralroot. + t +^. 
 — In contrast to these primitive nouns^ we find a 
 large number of nouns which are derived either from 
 verbs or from other nouns, that is, which are either 
 deverlals or denominatives. All the forms of the noun 
 are indicated by paradigms from the root Jjti (cf. 
 § 15 ff.); thus we say of .1\'. as of the deverbal in- 
 finitive (JJcj- killing, that it has the form J^. 
 
 Note. The numerous foreign words which have found 
 their way into Arabic, adapted from Persian and Aramaic, and 
 indirectly from Greek and Latin, have also, to some extent, been 
 reduced to Arabic nominal forms. 
 
56, 67. THE FOEMATION OF THE NOUN. 49 
 
 A number of nouns do not show the full complement 56. 
 
 of (three) consonants (see §§ 16 and 90), as *5 blood; 
 
 •with the feminine termination (§ 73) : jwl a slave-girl; 
 to this group belong also nouns with a prefixed vowel 
 
 Q 
 
 (connective Alif) as ^^m^ name, which accordingly must 
 be sought for in the dictionary under ^. 
 
 Extremely common are the nominal forms with b. 
 
 c* ^ <t « f* 
 
 one short vowel, like J^aU, Jjii, Joii, e. g. Jka., foot, 
 according to the form Jjti. There are also nominal 
 
 G,, 0, S,^ 0^ 
 
 forms with two short vowels: J^xi, Jk*i, Jji*, Jkii, 
 
 J^xi, (Jk*i, e. g. Jta*', a man, NF. Ji.jJ; wxTold age 
 
 NF. J^. 
 
 Next in order we may put nominal forms with a c. 
 
 s 
 long vowel either with the first radical J^eU or with 
 
 G^__, G^ ®^5 ^J,^ ^99 ^ -T- 
 
 the second JL**, ^i^, JLii, J^, Jyii, (i^i or 
 with both J^Ls. 
 
 Nominal forms with doubling of the second radical d. 
 are such as ijc^ja. chick-pea NF. Jii; JLxi (§ 63 a); 
 
 Note. By their mode of formation these nouns have been » 
 i-aised to the rank of quadriliterals like those in §§ 57 — 58. 
 
 The preformatives employed in the formation of 57. 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.^ 4 
 
50 58. FORMATION 03? NOUNS. 59. QUADEILIT. NOUNS. 60. PAETIOIPLES. I 
 
 nouns are the following (whose vowels vary according ; 
 to circumstances): a) * cf. §§ 60 and 64. h) j" cf. § 61. 
 c) J as .yAki_ fugitive NF. J^xiy from ysu to flee, d) | 
 (cf. §§ 62c; 63&), e. g. U^d^\ story NF. xJjj^l from 
 the stem iiytX^.. 
 
 58. The afformatives or formative additions used in 
 
 the formation of nouns are: a) ^J and i| (see 
 
 § 74). h) ^\ (for substantives) or ^| (often to 
 
 form adjectives) e. g. ^Uiiis. palpitation of the heart 
 
 NF. ^"^-J^i from (J-fti^ ; ^^SS^ drunk NF. ^^^iUti from 
 
 yjCl. c) liij. (not originally Arabic) as i^yjCLo 
 
 kingdom NF. icyJlii, which takes the masc. gend. 
 in Arabic. 
 
 59. The quadriliteral nouns are denoted by the para- 
 digm (JJ,xi (§ 28) as ^jlflA scorpion NF. jd*i; ^jydlti) 
 box NF. J5.-l.j1i; ySCLxx military camp NF. JJJiix; 
 tL!w.AA~^ a species of beetle NF. i!iLi*i. 
 
 60. From among the rich growth of nominal forms in 
 Arabic a few deverbals and denominatives may be 
 singled out for special attention. Such, of the former 
 class, are the participles and infinitives, whose forms 
 will be found among the paradigms of the verb. 
 
61. THE INFINITIVE. 51 
 
 The participles — the active is generally named a. 
 nomen agentis, the passive nomen patientis — take 
 
 G 
 
 the form J^^Li for the active of the I stem, and for 
 the passive the form J^kijS. In all the derived stems 
 the participle is formed by prefixing the syllable 
 A\ in the active the second radical takes i, in the 
 passive a (see below). As a rule, however, the active 
 and passive participles of the derived stems take the 
 vowels of the active and passive imperfs. with the 
 exception of stems V and VI. 
 
 In addition to the participles there is a class of 6. 
 so-called verbal adjectives, which are in part treated 
 as participles; they might be called quasi-participles, 
 
 as ij-aIs.. beautiful, from ^^^mi^. 
 
 The Arabic participles do not in themselves convey c. 
 
 s ^ 
 any suggestion of time; hence Jijls, for example, may 
 
 mean 'one who has killed' as well as 'one who is killing', 
 
 JyXRi 'one who ought to be killed' i. e. interficiendus 
 as well as interfectus. 
 
 The Infinitive (nomen verbi) assumes various forms 61. 
 in the I stem, and is therefore specially noted in the "'■ 
 dictionaries under each verb. One of the most common 
 
 forms is jJU, as jJii* killing. The infinitives of Jjii 
 
 4* 
 
52 61. THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 verbs (§ 28), as a rule, take the form Jjti, e. g. from 
 J^Miic, ^1-tdfi the being angry. Jyts and JLii are 
 also common forms from intransitive verbs, as ^j*/»Aa. 
 a sitting, from u^.)^; *!iL*/ health, from *-L*,- In- 
 finitives are also found with the prefix ma, as Jj^o 
 
 or Jiia. Joo (for the same verb has frequently more than 
 one form of the infinitive, sometimes with different 
 
 meanings) from Jl^o to enter. 
 
 6. The infinitive of the II. stem has the form JowxAJi 
 
 or RJIjiAj (cf. § 57&); the inf of the III. stem the form 
 
 jL*i or xJLftLLo (which last is identical with the fern. 
 
 of the passive participle). The infinitives of IV., VII., 
 VIIL, IX. and X. are formed by the insertion of a 
 long a before the last radical; before this a every 
 
 short a of the perf. becomes ?, as in the IV. stem Jljiil. 
 
 & 
 
 The infinitives of V. and VI. take u after the second 
 
 G j;,^ 
 
 radical, as V. jJiAi. 
 
 c. The Arabic infinitives do not contain the idea of 
 time and may be used both in an active and in a 
 
 passive sense. Thus JJj denotes the circumstance 
 that some one has killed or has been killed, the idea 
 of killing or of being killed. 
 
62. VEBBAL ADJECTIVES. 53 
 
 Synopsis of participles and infinitives 
 
 Partop. Act. Partcp. Pass. Infin. 
 
 I. J^Ls JyXJuo cf. § 61« 
 
 G^-, Go,, S, o, G c 
 
 III. J^Uvo J.fiLaA) SXcUx jLii 
 
 Goj G^o, G,„ 
 
 IV. Jjiix) J.JLL« JLiil 
 
 G'-j G,,^, S, — 
 
 VI. J,£L*A/i J^LaXx! JlcLaj' 
 
 S ^ti , G,,o, G^o 
 
 VII. JmIuo JJLftA^ JULajl^ 
 
 G^o, G, ,0, G^o 
 
 VIII. JjLXa/) JJiXfco J\SLXi\ 
 
 S .0, 6^0 
 
 IX. Jjiixi JiL*il 
 
 Go,(,, G^cr^g, G^g^ 
 
 G ^ G,^ G, O ^ ^ ^ 
 
 Quadr. I. (jjJuJe Jkiii/i J^*i jLUULs 
 
 Go-,, G,^,,, G^t,,, 
 
 II. J^ixAAAI JJjLAA/l JtJjLaJ' 
 
 As regards Verbal Adjectives (cf. § 60 c), the follow- 62. 
 ing forms may be specially noted: 
 
 G , . 
 
 The form (^^^3, which occurs in both an active a. 
 
 G , _ g , _ 
 
 and a passive sense; as JoUi' killed, iXj;.g.w a witness, 
 
54 63. THE INTENSIVE FOEMS. 
 
 Luas. one who disputes with another (in the sense 
 of |V.tflLis? part. act. of III). 
 
 b. Jj,*i, e. g. i^.j^y (often an intensive form) given 
 to lying. 
 
 c. (JJii I, a form denoting colours and physical defects, 
 
 as llja\ yellow; Zy£-\ lame; .^t (with ^ as a strong 
 letter) one-eyed. For the formation of the feminine, 
 see § 74 &. 
 63. Arabic has the means of expressing a heightened 
 or intensive form of the root idea. Of such intensive 
 forms the following are examples: 
 
 a. JL*i intensive form of JlcQ and other verbal 
 
 adjectives, as i_j|<>.^ (habitually) given to lying. As 
 a denominative this form is in frequent use to denote 
 
 G a ^ 
 
 trades or professions (nomina opificum) as ; LaI* baker 
 from yAj=» bread. 
 
 b. Very frequently there is derived from adjectives 
 
 the form JoLs t in the sense of an elative (generally 
 so named because including both comparative and 
 
 superlative), as ^^ww^ beautiful, elative : ^..vls.. I more b., 
 
 G -- J "a ^ 
 
 most b.; y-tjuo small, young, elative: j^t smaller, 
 younger; smallest, youngest. The elatives, when stand- 
 ing in the predicate, do not admit of inflection for 
 
64. NOMINA LOCI, INSTEUMENTI, SPECIEI. 55 
 
 gender and number, as ,j«LJI J^t *iO they are the 
 most excellent of men. When used in a comparative 
 sense, they are mostly undetermined (§ 76 &c), and are 
 followed by the preposition i\je in the sense of our 
 
 "than" (properly 'at a distance from', 'measured from*). 
 
 Used as superlatives, on the other hand, they are 
 
 generally determined. For the feminine formation 
 
 see S 74 &. 
 
 Note. No special elative is formed from the words y*i. good 
 
 and fSi bad, ■whioli are used as elatives in the form just given. 
 As a matter of fact, the positive of other adjectives as well must 
 
 sometimes he rendered by our superlative; thus j».UI| ^j*) signifies 
 
 the (absolutely) greatest of men. 
 
 To the class of deverbal nouns belong further: 64. 
 
 Nouns of place and time formed with the prefix a. 
 X ma, as _sH]x! the place where one writes, the school; 
 also with the fem. termination as s^lijix a buryingplace. 
 
 Note. Nouns of place and time from the derived stems take 
 
 the form of the pass, participle, as ^;^m (from the IT. stem of ^^ 
 
 to go out, of which IT. ^fA caus.) the place to which or the time 
 
 at which something is brought out; lojS* (from T. stem) the 
 place where the ritual washing is performed. 
 
 Nomina instrumenti, formed with the prefix k mi, 6. 
 as JjLaS milk-pail, from ^.^J^ to milk; _LxLe key, 
 from ^Xi to open. 
 
56 65. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI. 
 
 c. Nomina specie! of the form xJJii , as sm^ the 
 ^ manner of writing, one's "calligraphy''. 
 65. To the class of denominatives belong especially 
 
 the nouns of relation and the diminutives. 
 
 a. By means of the termination ^^ (corresponding 
 
 to the Hebrew i , fern. r\\ and n^^-) there is derived 
 
 from nouns a group of other nouns which, following 
 the example of the Arabic grammarians, we call nomina 
 (adjectiva) relaiiva, i. e. nouns of relation. Thus — o>l 
 
 Go* 3 * - . 
 
 belonging to the earth djo. |), earthly; j^L^ belonging 
 to J, Li (i. e. Syria), a Syrian. The feminine termination 
 is dropped when this ending is added, as "^Zo (from 
 xJCo) an inhabitant of Mecca; occasionally we meet 
 with certain changes in the vowels of a word, e. g. 
 
 ^ Jlx! an inhabitant of Medina, from jixjiXiJI Medina; 
 ^Ji a Koreishite^ one of the tribe Ji^^. 
 h. By the addition of the feminine ending to nouns 
 of relation there are formed feminines, as jUxLi a 
 Syrian woman, but more fi-equently abstract nouns; as 
 s^^l divinity from "^!if| divine, (from sSJ^ God); 
 Jui.^L^ heathenism from ^soLi heathenish, (from 
 (JjuL^ ignorant). 
 
66. NOM. EELATIVAET DEMINUTIVA. 67. NOUNS TEOM STEMS MED. 9EM. 57 
 
 Note. It is usual to indicate the nomina relativa al.so by 
 paradigms from JaiJ ; tiius we say that ^jl is a form ^J*>, sJLiiU. 
 a form 4*Jlfili. 
 
 Diminutives from triliteral nouns take the form 66. 
 
 J,A*i, as tX^AA a little slave, servulus, from tX^i slave. 
 
 From quadriliteral nouns the form is JuLl*^) ^^ OvliLe 
 
 a little scorpion, from o Jie (so v1a4j..«s diminutive 
 
 from ^jw^Lo companion). From quadriliteral nouns 
 
 with a long vowel between the third and fourth radi- 
 
 cals the corresponding form is JkA^Axi, as (^jjJa^ 
 
 G ' o ? 
 
 diminutive from ^x. Ja^ a box. Diminutives are not 
 unfrequently derived also from proper names, as 
 
 xJUt tX{U-ft 'udaiduUdM alongside of idJ\ tX^c 'abdullahi 
 
 (Abdallah). 
 
 The formation of nouns from stems mediae gemi- 67. 
 natae and from those with a hamza or the semi-vowels 
 presents many irregularities, for a general idea of 
 which we must refer to the inflection of the corre- 
 sponding verbal stems. In addition to what is there 
 given the following particulars deserve attention. 
 
 For the formation of deverbal nouns from stems 
 mediae geminatae (see § 34 ff.) the following points 
 may be noted: 
 
 The second and third radicals are of course con- a. 
 
58 68, 69. NOUNS FEOM STEMS WITH HAMZA AKD PEIM. J. 
 
 tracted when the second is without a vowel of its 
 own, as ys irom j^i. 
 
 i. If the first radical has a, and the second i or a, 
 
 contraction takes place in the participles and infini- 
 tives, e. g. part. act. VII of li : IxXa contracted from 
 yyiXjo; pass, also ^.j^Uo trom s^aXxi. ihere is no con- 
 traction, however, with nouns of the form JJii, as ^*j3 
 inf. to be hairy. 
 
 c. According to the rule given in § 35 b, from .yjue 
 
 we get j.Ax; from sJix: Juo. 
 cl. The act. participle of I is tU from ~!.Li cf. § 8. 
 e. Contraction does not take place when a long 
 
 vowel stands between the last two radicals e. g. jlli, 
 
 G ^ G J u^ ^ ■'' 
 
 68. The orthographical rules which apply to the in- 
 flection of the verba hamzata (§§ 37 ff.) hold good 
 for the formation of nouns, e. g. J^.^ something asked 
 for; Jl^ a question, from JLl to ask; the part. act. I 
 of Ji I, to make an impression, is jj| for lS"|| ; '■Cj^ NF. 
 nomen mstrumenti jujiixi from ^"1 &c. 
 
 69. The primae ^ stems, which according to § 40 lose 
 "■ their first radical in the impf., lose it also, as a rule. 
 
70. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. j AND ^5. 59 
 
 in the nomen verbi ; as compensation the latter receives 
 the feminine termination (§ 73), as from Jk.£j to pro- 
 mise nomen verhi stXe; from ci>j to allow: x^O. 
 
 w after the vowel i (. ) coalesces with the latter b. 
 
 to form 2, as inf. IV of Is: fall: cUbl^ for cLi.t; i>iLy« 
 time of one's birth NF. Jlxix, for Ci'^yx from Ji.Jy 
 
 J passes into u (§ 40 c), e. g. part. IV of ^« c. 
 
 to be awake: iaJs^ia for iaJij^jo- 
 
 In the infs. of the IV. and X. stems from stems 70. 
 med. . fl!w<Z ^ the middle radical disappears; the *' 
 feminine termination is added as compensation, e. g. 
 
 IS^l for Jlpt. 
 
 In the act. part, of stem I the m of verbs med. , 6. 
 becomes y and j («/?) is changed into 'i (3) ; as J.jLS" 
 for J^li, ^Ll for ^U (for Medda see § 7). 
 
 A characteristic formation from these stems is JJU ; c. 
 thus from the stem oL« med. ^ we get d^ master, 
 lord; from the stem oUs med. ^5, ^Jda good. 
 
 Nouns formed on the model of Jjii contain diph- 3,. 
 
 S„, Go^ 
 
 thongs (§ 2 «), as jy>', ^jy.w. 
 
 The place of the second radical (see § 42) is taken e. 
 by a long a in the act. participles of stems VII. and 
 
60 71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE j AND ^. 
 
 VIII. and in the pass. part, of stems IV., VII., VIII. 
 
 S 9 
 
 and X.; e. g. part. pass. IV. *LLo, part. act. or pass. 
 VII. |,LsLo (from a hypothetical active f»JiJ^ pass. 
 -jJLuo). Also in numerous nominal forms, as .|o (from 
 a hypothetical .:o) house, from »|t> med. . ; NF. JJlLc 
 from JU is JL^, from a hypothetical JjLc. 
 /. The place of the second radical (see § 43) is taken by 
 
 G G ^ 
 
 a long Hn nouns of the type of Jo« and XjLks from med. 
 ^ and ^^ e. g. ^^.J from ^^ med. ^^ to be gentle ; x£yo 
 (§ 64 c) for jLsyo mode of death from med. .; in the 
 form JJLs from med. ^, e. g. ijk^ for ^J^ white 
 (plur.) ; (Js»A;o in the forms from med. ^, e. g. lu«.c, 
 walk for j.aa«.x ; in the part. act. of the IV. and X. stems 
 from verbs mediae^ and ^, e. g. ^-lL^, lu.«lli; in 
 the part. pass. I from med. ^, e. g. %^ from cLj, 
 to sell (mediae ^^) for X jaL<- 
 
 if. The place of the second radical is taken by long 
 u in nouns of the type of J^ki from med. as ! J 
 light from "^15; u may also arise by contraction from 
 rvii in the pass. part, of the I stem of verbs med. 
 ^, as J^jio for JjyAjo. 
 
 7i. In the case of nouns derived from verbs ultimae 
 
71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE J AND ^J. 61 
 
 J and ^ those forms in which the second radical is 
 vowelless are treated like forms from strong stems, 
 
 Go ^ G o ^ . 
 
 as y^, ^^ mf. 
 
 If the second radical has a, there results (cf. § 46 a) b. 
 at the end of words a long d (from hypothetical awu, 
 ayu) which is written L-l. ox ^^ (ace. as last rad. 
 
 IS ^ or 1^), e. g. LaiJI the stick, iox yCL»i\\ ^c^y^JI 
 the pasture, from l"! to feed, for a hypothetical 
 ^^pjf; Jii\ NF. JJiit for ^1, elative of ^ gener- 
 ous, liberal (§ 63&). The same applies to all the pass, 
 participles of the derived stems. "With the nunation, 
 
 these forms appear as L.oi, ,-^5^1 j-«y/>(ptc.pass.IV) 
 in which the original long final vowel, now standing in 
 a syllable closed by the n of the nunation, must be pro- 
 nounced short (§ 8): '«s«w, mar'an, murman. Long a 
 
 appears before the feminine termination (cf. § 70 e) as, 
 Sljii morning for 'iZd-^; sUj death for iUij. 
 
 If the second radical has short i, from iyu arises c. 
 a long t (cf. § 47 «), e. g. ^c^Ol part. act. I in place 
 of a hypothetical ^LJ|; and so in the act. participles 
 of the derived forms. If the nunation is added, the 
 result is *L, rdmin &c., in which the ^5 is dropped 
 even in the written form of the word, uyu is changed 
 
62 72. NOUNS PKOM STEMS ULTI3IAE j AND ij- 
 
 to iyu, and consequently with the nunation it likewise 
 becomes m; e. g. inf. V. ^^^^t for jc^r^'' (•7^' ^O"" 
 ^IS'. In the act. part, of stem I from yerbs ult. . 
 irvun is changed to iyun, and consequently with the 
 
 nunation further to in, e. g. (^)LaJI for j)LiJI, (^vLaJI; 
 
 with the nunation \L£. Before a and « (cf. § 4,1 d), on 
 
 the other hand, the third radical retains its conso- 
 nantal Talue ; thus the inf. of stem II, according to 
 
 the form most in use with yerbs med. , and ^ viz. 
 S-r "- . s, „, s, „, 
 
 JUAfij (§ 61), is: Jijuowi", JoyiJ- 
 
 (?. After a, yu and wm become 'm; j/mw, and wim be- 
 
 come 'un, in each case with the hamza, e. g. i-tllJl 
 for A12J\ with the nunation glCL inf. I of .^w to be 
 noble; «.L«,!i!i for ,cC«s!^l, with the nunation gLo»t inf 
 IV for ^Ujl 
 
 e. If the second radical has a long m, the forms from 
 verbs ultimae ^ are formed regularly ; thus the pass, 
 part. I of lui is ^yix (for ^^y*^) magzuwun. From 
 verbs ultimae ^5, on the other hand, uyun is changed 
 to lyun, e. g. ^^yi (from (^yili) manmyun, so from 
 j^^ go away inf. ^^^^ for l^y^ NF. jj-jLj. 
 
 /• If the second radical has a long I, the forms from 
 
72., 73. THE GENDER OF NOUNS. 63 
 
 G 
 
 verbs ultimae ^ are formed regularly, e. g. NF. JkAxi 
 
 from (Jj : J^ saint (for ^ii) rvaliyun. From verbs 
 
 ultimae ., on the other hand, Imun is changed into 
 
 g ^ ^ 
 
 ««/««, as Ji.A 'allyun high from j-yLe. 
 
 J. The Gender of Nouns. 
 
 Arabic has two genders, a masculine and a femin- 72. 
 ine. A number of vyords are sometimes masculine 
 sometimes feminine, in other vrords are of the common 
 gender. Words which denote female beings, collectives, 
 countries, cities, winds, parts of the body occurring 
 in pairs, and others, are in themselves feminine with- 
 out requiring the feminine termination. The gender 
 of such words is in each case noted in the dictionaries. 
 
 As an outward and visible sign of the feminine 73. 
 
 s ^ ' , a. 
 we find most frequently the ending s atun (or is 
 
 atu § 79), e. g. XJli'b (NF. XJUli), fem. of Jg'U killing ; 
 
 S^ , G^ _ ' 5 ^ G^ ' 
 
 x)CJLx! (NF. JL<L*i) queen, from vilJLo; Jw-*?') fem. of masc. 
 i_^ir (§ 71c) content, gUci (NF. asJUi) maid, from ^ 
 (§§ 71 & and 2d) youth. Many substantives are found 
 
 Sea, 
 
 only with the feminine ending, as xa=. an orchard. 
 
 Note. As a rarity, the feminine ending is found, particu- 
 larly in the Kur'an, written with Cj, e. g. UJI iS***" the grace of 
 God (for Cw). 
 
64 73. THE GENDER OP NOTJNS. 
 
 6. A number of masc. nouns are found with the 
 feminine ending, as xa-J^ Caliph, ji^is Talha (proper 
 name of a man, see p. 8, note 2). On the other hand, 
 there are nouns which, as being essentially feminine, 
 do not require the feminine termination, as jjLc. barren 
 (referring to a woman). 
 
 5 
 
 c. The feminine ending H-I_ is occasionally appen- 
 ded to common or class nouns in order to indicate a 
 single individual (nomen unitatis), as jliiii a gold 
 piece, from v^^sso gold; jixiLi^i. a dove, from |.Ua. 
 
 doves (collective). The termination S_l- is also used 
 for the formation of the so-called nomina vicis, i. e. 
 nouns that express the doing of an action once, as 
 
 s jJls a single sitting down, from jJu to sit down. 
 
 d. The feminine termination, again, serves to form 
 
 substantives from adjectives, as kli'llu conduit-pipe, 
 
 water-channel, from the part. I of .JLm to water. Con- 
 nected probably .with this is the feminine ending which 
 
 G, o ^ 
 
 forms intensives, as jLoi^ a very learned person, from 
 
 the adjective J^k^ § 63 a. 
 
 e. Collective nouns are also formed by means of the 
 
 G ^ 
 
 feminine termination, e. g. from mcLJ* a courier, coll. 
 
 P__os G^ 
 
 juol^* ; ^^yo (§ 05 «) Sufi (mystic), coll. 'ilsya. 
 
74. TEEMINATION OF THE FEMIN. 75. NUMBEK AND CASE. 65 
 
 Other feminine terminations are: 74. 
 
 The termination ^—•, it goes to form feminines a. 
 of the type ^xi, e. g. ^IXL fem. of ^^1X1, drunk, 
 (§ 58&); feminines of the nominal form (NF.) Ji 
 from elatives (§ 63 &), e. g. ^^IJo fem. of Xa I smaller, 
 ^^^1 from J . ( the first, and substantives like Lajo 
 world (§ 2 note), which is properly a feminine to the 
 elative j^jiil, that which is nearer at hand; also fem- 
 inines of the NF. J,ii, e.g. from tl^f one, fem. ^54X^1 ; 
 subst. i^Jih remembrance. 
 
 The ending if ; it goes to form, more especially, &• 
 
 adjectives of the NF. iiUii from Jjii t (§ 62 c), e. g. 
 i-\yL>a fem. yellow; ^K«a fem. one-eyed, but also 
 substantives, as *C^? desert. 
 
 e. Inflection of the Noun. 
 
 Arabic has three numbers: singular, dual and 75. 
 plural. Of the last, there are two different kinds; 
 the one, the ordinary plural, properly so called, also 
 known as the pluralis sanus or the outer plural, which 
 originally denoted rather a number" of separate persons 
 and things ; the other, the collective plural, also called 
 the inner or broken plural (see §§ 86 ff.), which denotes 
 
 Socin, Arabic G-rammar.^ 5 
 
66 76. DUAL AND PLUKAL. 
 
 rather a continuous mass, in which the individual 
 member is not distinguished. At present we shall deal 
 only with the first-named. Arabic distinguishes three 
 cases: Nominative, Genitive, and Accusative. 
 76. The terminations of the dual and the pluralis 
 ^- sanus are as follows: 
 
 Dual nominative ^1 — (cf. § 33) 
 
 „ genitive and accusative ^jj — (cf. D';^) 
 
 Plural mascul. nominative ',. (cf. § 33) 
 
 gen.-accus. ^^-- (cf. d^— ) 
 
 „ femin. nominative i:i)| (cf. ni) 
 
 „ „ gen.-accus. i:y|-l- 
 
 Before these terminations the flectional endings 
 of the sing, are dropped ; the is of the feminine ending 
 is changed to cj before the dual termination, (as it is 
 before the pronominal suffixes appended to the sin- 
 
 gular), e. g. xj^Ls., dual ^UcSjL^. 
 
 b. By the addition of the terminations exhibited 
 above is formed the plural of many adjectives, in 
 particular, and also of a number of substantives. In 
 the formation of the plural we find substantives with 
 the feminine ending taking the sign of the masculine 
 
 plural (as iU^ year, plur. r^y^M,); much more fre- 
 
77. THE CASE INFLECTION OE THE SINGULAE, 67 
 
 quently, however, substantives without the sign of 
 the feminine in the singular are found forming their 
 plural by means of the feminine termination, e. g. 
 JL=» condition, plur. ^^jlSfLi., %.[^ heaven, plur. ol.U-l 
 (with the original waw restored § lid), also written 
 
 As regards the case inflection of the singular, it 77, 
 is necessary to distinguish between the so-called no- 
 mina triptota or triptotes, i. e. nouns which are in- 
 flected for all three cases, and the so-called nomina 
 diptota or diptotes, i. e. nouns which cannot be thus 
 fully inflected. The latter never receive the nunation, 
 and unless they are determined by the article or by 
 a following genitive, they are inflected for only two 
 cases. 
 
 The following are the case-endings of the triptote a. 
 noun : Nom. sing. _1 un, Gen. sing. — in, Ace. sing. 
 \— an. With the feminine termination _!_ only is 
 written instead of S— as !iV.4>-s, but iLLsi\xi; so ^jai 
 and {„tcus. (cf § 3&). 
 
 The case-endings of the diptote noun are: Nom. b. 
 sing. _L M, Gen. and Accus. Sing. J_ a. 
 
 In the dictionary the triptotes are distinguished 
 from the diptotes by being always written with the 
 
68 78. NOM. TEIPTOTA ET DIPTOTA. 79. DETERM. AND TJXDETERM. NOUNS. 
 
 nunation, as J^^") ^ ™^^^' "^^^^^ ^he latter are always 
 without it, as Oj^i black. 
 
 78. Whole classes of nouns are always diptote. Such are 
 
 a. 1) all proper names that are either feminine or have 
 
 '=' ' '"- J. 
 
 the feminine termination, as JUx, •^^.^ as names ot 
 
 women; jCLli as name of a man. To these must be 
 added the majority of such proper names as are of 
 foreign origin, e. g. »aj5Lj|^ Abraham, i-iw^ Joseph, 
 ^J) Moses (but monosyllables like _^^ Noah are 
 mostly triptote). 
 
 b. 2) Many so-called broken plurals ; cf. § 88 Nos. 18, 
 19, 20; § 89 Nos. 23 24, 25, 27, 29; 
 
 c. 3) adjectives of the form JJii I (§ 62c; § 63b); 
 
 d. 4) adjectives of the form ^S^xi (§ 58 b), which form 
 their fem. like jJts, e. g. ^Lyii; angry, fem. ^eA.<al- 
 
 e. 5) Feminines formed by the terminations ^5— or 
 
 i.t__ (§ 74). Cf. also the broken plurals referred to under 
 b, §§ 88,19 and 89,29. 
 
 79. The inflection of the singular of all nouns and 
 of the plural of feminines varies according as a noun 
 is determined or undetermined. 
 
 a. All proper names are in themselves determined 
 as L^tr^ muhammadun Muhammed; (^V ( -^ t ahmadu 
 
80. SHORTENING OF THE DUAL AND PLURAL TEBMINS. 69 
 
 Ahmed; such proper names are treated either as trip- 
 totes or as diptotes according as their form and the 
 custom of the language may determine; many of them 
 always take the article, as <ijjGi|. 
 
 Common or class nouns are determined: 
 
 1) hy the article; as ^^i a horse, ^juIaJI the horse, h. 
 
 2) by the addition of a following genitive, which c. 
 may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix, whereby 
 
 the nomen regens is put in the construct state; as (uali 
 
 J«s.Jt the horse of the man, x^li his horse. 
 
 The case-endings of a noun determined (1) by the 
 prefixing of the article, or (2) by a genitive following 
 — and the same applies to proper names with the 
 article — are distinguished as follows from those of 
 the undetermined noun: 
 
 Singular nom. , Gen. , Ace. _I_. 
 
 Plural fem. nom. , Gen. -Ace. 
 
 i. e. the nunation is always dropped. These endings 
 are assumed not merely by all triptotes, but also by 
 the diptotes, when determined by the article or a 
 
 genitive following : e. g. Nom. ^^.^S, Gen.- Ace. dy^S ; 
 
 J, 0*0- ,0*0' ^^o*"- 
 
 but Nom. o^!i( I, Gen. Oj.*wiy I, Ace. c>yJ3 1. 
 
 Before a following genitive (which ace. to § 79 c 80. 
 may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix) the 
 
70 81. INFLEXION OP NOnNS FEOH STEMS ULT. J AND ^^. 
 
 terminations ^ of the dual and ^j of the plural are 
 
 dropped, thus: 
 
 Dual Nom. of J^: ^ItUc, but^vy t ltW the two 
 
 slaves of the Vizier. 
 Dual Gen. -Ace. ^j.j4>.xe, but w^x. ^5cX^ o*.J>-«i> J- have 
 
 beaten the two slaves of Omar (before a cortnective 
 
 _^o^ ^ o ^ 
 
 Alif thus: vJS^t i^Jy.^) cf. § 6e). 
 Plural Nom. of oLJ^' butcher, executioner ^jj^L/ai", 
 
 but dULUl ^.jLaS the executioners of the king. 
 Plural Gen.-Acc. 'voL^S, but yiLL^Ji ^^jLtcLs o^jK I 
 
 have seen the executioners of the king. 
 
 Tor the inflection of the noun see paradigms XX and XXI, 
 ■where will be found the forms of the masculine triptote »->UaJ an 
 
 executioner, the masculine diptote ^1 another, the feminine triptote 
 
 S- - is' 
 
 4eU< hour, and the feminine diptote «;« Mayya (name of a woman). 
 
 81. In the case of nouns derived from stems ultimae 
 "• . and (^ when the second radical has a short vowel 
 
 the nunation, ace. to § 716 c, is taken by this vowel 
 
 of the second radical. 
 6. Nouns ending in an or a are unchangeable for 
 
 all three cases; those in in or F, on the other hand, 
 
 take the an of the nunation, as well as the simple a 
 
 (§ 47 rf) as LlolJ, ^^tpj. 
 
82. THE ADDITION OF THE PKONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 71 
 
 Before the dual terminations (cf. § 4:6 d) the last c. 
 radical is treated as a strong letter, as ^\1m1., ^Llelo, 
 
 In the plural the last radical is dropped before d. 
 the terminations una and ma, which^ when joined to 
 an a of the second radical, produce diphthongs (§ 46c); 
 
 thus from ^-xiyxi: ^yoyjo, ^j^ajOj./); if the second radical 
 has i, the terminations are added immediately to the 
 former (§ 47 c), as ^^^;J|J, ij^fy 
 
 For the inflection of these nouns see paradigm No. XXII, 
 where -will be found the forms of the triptote jolJ judge, the 
 triptote ^^aa/oM (ult. ^5) chosen one (often as a proper name), the 
 triptote Use (ult. j) a stick, the diptote i^ji'j remembrance, and 
 the diptote Uij world (vgl. § 74 a). 
 
 For the forms of the pronominal sufiixes see 82. 
 § 12 6— <f. 
 
 Before the pronom. suffix of the 1. pers. sing, the a. 
 short case-endings of the construct state are dropped, 
 
 as ^LaS". The said suffix after a final a, I or at be- 
 comes ^ (?/«), as with the nom. dual j^LjUaSs with 
 ^Xj: (^Laj (§ 2<:?; 81 a); with the gen.-acc. plur. AJ^ls; 
 with j^U (§ 81 fl): ^_^li; with gen.-acc. dual ^Lai". 
 
72 83. VOWEL CHANGES IN PLUR. SANUS. / 
 
 s , 
 Note. In the case of words which end in ^ , the suffix 
 
 may either he attached in the usual way, e. g. from ^, ".soniiy", 
 
 ,^, or appended to the shortened form ^5 , e. g. ^, from ^, 
 
 and |_5. 
 
 6. The final u of the construct state of the plural 
 
 masc. is changed to l before the ai^pended ^ (cf 
 
 § 71 e), thus j.jLJki' becomes jL^aS, and then with 
 
 the suffix of the 1. pers. sing. ^1^3^ (no longer to be 
 
 distinguished from the genit. and accus. plural). The 
 same applies to the ending au from stems ult. ^ (see 
 
 parad. XXII), e. g. Jiia.«fl-o becomes J^a^toja, with the 
 
 suffix Jtiojo^ (also identical with the genitive-accu- 
 sative form). 
 
 For the union of the noun with the suffixes see paradigm 
 XXIII. For the change before suff. of final » into Cj see § 76 a. 
 
 83. In the pluralis sanus of substantives of a masc. 
 or fem. nominal form with one short vowel (that is, 
 of any of the following types J,ii, jJu, jL*i and xJL«i, 
 XijLJ , x<L*i) the second radical frequently receives a 
 complementary vowel which is either identical with 
 that of the first radical or isshort a. Thus ^Ji\ I earth, 
 plur. r^yja.\, more rarely ,..^J, and y^jLo.'!, more 
 rarely ^[jS. I; it^ifl darkness, plur. liUJJs alongside 
 
84. ^^J, 85. VOCATIVE. 73 
 
 of c^LJJb and v;ymic. This is a favourite method in 
 
 the case of the plural of the form £L*i, as xXxi: 
 
 (§ 73c) a single thrust or blow; plur. ^iUiJo several 
 thrusts or blows. 
 
 G o 
 
 'Before ^[_ a son, a proper name loses its nuna- 84. 
 
 5 o 
 
 tion m the case mentioned § 6/" 2, and ^j| is itself 
 
 written without the prosthetic |, e. g. iXfJ'jJ \yli IXUa 
 
 musUmu-hnu-lwalidi Muslim, the son of al-Walid. 
 
 wCw (JjI tX.j\ zaiduni-hnu Wschrin (§ 6e) means, on 
 
 the other hand, Zaid is the son of Bishr (nominal 
 sentence). 
 
 After Lj the particle of address, the simple noun 85. 
 follows in the nominative without the nunation, as 
 
 txXsP Muhammed, SZ^ L^ Oh M. ! JX-J Lj Oh man! 
 (by which a definite person is hailed). But should 
 anything of the nature of a complement (a genitive, 
 for instance) be added to the noun in the vocative, 
 the name of the person addressed must be put in the 
 
 accusative, as jjjt jJlc: xiJi Ju-a Lj o Abdallah!(Oh 
 
 servant of God!); sJaS" aj Lj Oh Banu Kinda! i. e. 
 
 members of the tribe of Kinda (here ij cf. § 80 and 
 
 90 & is the constr. state of (Tj-aaj)- If an Object follows, 
 
 the noun stands in the accus. with the nunation, as 
 
74 86. COLLECTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 stplrilrtr Lj oil thou that ridest the red mare! — 
 The particle Lgjf (before which we may also have G) 
 is always followed by a nominative with the article, 
 
 as UJ.UJ t I4jf Lj Oh ye people ! 
 
 Note. After I3 , which serves as the expression of pain and 
 
 sorrow, a, long o is appended to the noun; in pause SI , as 
 
 «Si1 15 Oh mother! 
 86. There are, in Arabic, a mass of words which, 
 though singular in form, have a collective signification. 
 The following varieties may be singled out under 
 this head: 
 
 a. Simple collectives (masc. gend.) such as ^Ji, which 
 denotes not merely '« people' collectively, but also 
 
 'people' as individuals ; jCle an army and also the 
 individual soldiers thereof. From such words broken 
 plurals may be formed. 
 
 b. Names of the inhabitants of a country, as liJ^S 
 the Jews, often coinciding with the name of the country 
 
 itself, as JulgJI the Hindus; a single Jew or Hindu is 
 
 called ^5<^^^_, jJiXAff § 65 a. 
 
 0. Class names (masc. gend.) from which are formed 
 
 nomina unitatis (§ 73 c) as -U.^ doves. 
 d. So-called quasi-plurals (masc. gend.), from which 
 
 no nomen unitatis is formed, as JjS^\ a company of 
 
87. THE BROKEN PLURALS. 75 
 
 horsemen (a single one Z^]^) ; ^6^ the domestics 
 (oneof whichislt>Li.); "Ia*^ a number of asses (one 
 ass «Ua,.); tXAAA slaves (from jLla). 
 
 The so-called broken plurals (plurales fracti in the 87. — 
 language of the native grammarians — by German ^' 
 scholars by preference called 'inner plurals' because 
 due to changes in the body of the word) are also 
 strictly speaking nothing more than collectives. Hence 
 they are treated in Arabic as singular nouns of the 
 feminine gender and construed accordingly. Thus 
 
 's£ysXjii ust^ t different gates, where '^\yi\ is the broken 
 plural of i_>Lj (on the model of JLiif), and the par- 
 ticiple act. V. of ,_vli is put in the fern. sing. — These 
 broken plurals, further, take the same inflection as 
 the singulars, discussed in § 77 ff. 
 
 As a rule the broken plurals are given in the 6. 
 dictionaries alongside of the singular of their respective 
 nouns ; when this is not so, it is to be presumed that 
 the word either has no plural or takes a pluralis sanus. 
 Sometimes we find from one and the same word more 
 than one plural; in such a case, not unfrequently, a 
 word varies its plural as its meaning varies. Certain 
 of the broken plurals are, as a rule, confined to certain 
 specified singulars. 
 
76 88. THE BEOKEK PLURALS. 
 
 88. From nouns regarded as containing three con- 
 sonants the following broken plurals may be formed: 
 
 1. Joii from (JJiil (§ 62 c) and its fem. ijJij 
 (§ 74&), as ^^ from 1^1.1 red; SyL (cf. § 70 5-) 
 from c>*-w| black; (jdAj (for (joaj cf, § 70/) from 
 udjol white. 
 
 2. Jjus from various singulars, as ^jjcS' from 
 loLx^ book. 
 
 3. (JJii from sing, gj^xs, as «iis from Rikji piece. 
 
 4. JJii mostly from sing. x>L*i, as ^^ULa from 
 jUXc box; f^ioS from RxjI people; occasionally from 
 
 ° r " - *' /J S , ' G,e , 
 
 ju*3, as ^wi" (for j^jj" ace. to g 71 &) from jLs^j' place. 
 
 5. jLLki, as isyi^l from -I brother. 
 
 6. jLlii esp. from sing. jLaLi, as ioUi^from Jooiy 
 
 G„^ ' G 
 
 perfect; but also from J^^i § 70 c, as s5H (for 
 stX-iAu) from tX-y*, lord. 
 
 7. Xijii (rare) as SS^j from t>3 monkey. 
 
 ''r-'' J. ^^ r ^' Q -' G, ,5 
 
 8. xAjii from jLtU ult. ^^, as sLaii (for jouis 
 
 § 71 1) from ^li judge. 
 
 9. JLii very common, from various singulars, as 
 
 G I Go 
 
 _|jU from _Jo arrow. 
 
88. THE BROKEN PLURALS. 77 
 
 G , J 
 
 10. Jyjti very common, also from various singulars, 
 as i>j-i.is» from jj^ band of soldiers; ^IXj (for (^JCj 
 see § 71 e) and then (with change of m to i) jCj from 
 dlj weeping. 
 
 11. xJLii (rare) as SsL^ from ^^ stone. 
 
 12. iUjjii (rare) as X;oj.tx from I^ uncle. 
 
 Gjjj G- ®03 ^.^ 
 
 13. Jii from Jk^U, as J^ from (Jjou an un- 
 branded she-camel. 
 
 Sj-j 0— gS? G-" 
 
 14. jUii from Jk^U, as uUs from v.^li' scribe. 
 
 15. J.*il from various singulars, as J-^-vl from 
 
 So 
 
 J^s.) foot. 
 
 16. xJL*it from various singulars, as Sac J from 
 (.Xtftj a cake, '^iJ] (§ 67c) from vIaaa^ beloved; x^\ 
 from lUol president; JLgJt from s!i)| God. 
 
 17. JLxit very common, from various singulars, 
 as tlLxif from pax rain; iLLil (always without the 
 nunation) from %^ thing. 
 
 18. *.ij»it esp. from Jw^, as ^.b^M from >_^^a 
 relative; ill*ll from ^ rich. 
 
 19. J.*i (rare), as ^5^^ from ^^ wounded. 
 
78 89. THE BROKEN PLTJEALS. 
 
 20. i>)kks, as itpi^ from j^Lo poet. 
 
 21. |j^!i^, as ^Loi from ^^Xi youth; (jl^us. 
 
 G ^f G -- 
 
 (for ijl)^^ ^^- § ^^^) fj^om »L^ neighbour. 
 
 22. ^ilxi, as ^jljJj from JJ^ district; ,jLw^ 
 from iJjvLi rider; ^jlt)***, negroes from l>1«,I black. 
 
 Note. Forms 5 and 15 — 17 are used, as a rule, 011I3' of a 
 number of objects not exceeding ten (hence called pluralia 
 paucitatis). 
 
 J9. From nouns with more than three radical con- 
 
 sonants (cf. § 56<? ff.) are formed plurals in which the 
 first consonant takes «, the second a and the third ;. 
 Such plurals are diptotes with the exception of all 
 those derived from stems ult. ^ (or with an additional 
 
 t^— in the sing. § 74 «) which take the nunation i?i in 
 the nominative and genitive, but not in the accusative 
 
 which ends in ^ The forms of the singular of 
 
 Nos. 24 (cf. also ._j^y.^ § 66) and 25 are regarded 
 as quadriliterals. No. 29 ends in long a and is diptote. 
 The following are the principal varieties: 
 
 23. JJLii as ooli;^ from CiSlL (NF. JjL*i) 
 locust. This form is also found from nouns that are 
 only in a special sense quadriliterals, inasmuch as 
 they are really triliterals with the addition of a 
 
89. THE BEOKEN PLURALS. 79 
 
 formative consonant; examples of this group are: 
 a) J^Lil, as Joob! from jlUjI (NF. jLUil) fingertip; 
 also from elatives used as substantives, such as 
 -jLS'I the great ones from SiSS elat. of jaaT; b) J.eLftj 
 
 ^' , ^-r. G^ or. G- °' ' ' 'i '^ 
 
 as LJ^L^' from JUj.s! (NF. xLiaj) experience; c) Jk^LAo 
 
 as (Jolyo from SJjyxi (NF. xLiaa!) dung-heap; ^ji-jljui 
 (with J, not with 2) from s-cijow (NF. X-Uax) livelihood ; 
 i^Ujo (acc. ^^Ljw) of ^^ijw (NF. JJLax) idea. 
 
 ,^, G'' B^ 
 
 24. JkftO especially from jiXtU and J^U (used 
 as a substantive), as ^j^l^^o from xiiftLo thunder-clap; 
 (_^Jli from ^Xi rider; ijal^i* (for (j«a>tal^ § 67 &) 
 from ^Li.. person of distinction; X^ (acc. ^-S^s^ 
 from JbsL^ a female slave. 
 
 25. JoLii from such nominal forms with a long 
 vowel after the second radical as have a feminine 
 
 3 -^ G, ^ 
 
 form or signification, as a) ySQs^ from svU=» funeral 
 obsequies ; b) JoL^ from Xl^ miracle ; c) ^i\y& 
 from (j^jv^ bride. 
 
 26. JLii as jUci from ^5yci (N. F. J.*i) decision. 
 
 27. JyJLii from quadriliteral nouns with a long 
 
 » 1 -'■ « 6 'o J 
 
 vowel before the last consonant, as juJiLs^ from c>^iiA 
 
80 90. IKREGULAE XOUXS. 
 
 (N. F. J^i»i) bunch of fruit; this form is also found 
 with nouns derived from triliteral stems, of which the 
 
 following are specimens: a) Ju^^UI as oooL^t from 
 
 Xj^tki.1 (NF. JU^I) story; b) J^-v^Uj as oiJvLaj 
 
 from ^jy^J (infinitive J^jiij* used as a noun) turn; 
 
 ' -''-• ^ -"' G^"^ G,ft^ 
 
 c) J^Li^ as ^joLjLo from .^tXJLo (participle Jutii 
 used as a noun) fate; but also J^A^Iyi (cf. No. 24) as 
 fj^j^\y>. from jjj^Ls* (NF. JyS^li) spy. 
 
 G -- -- 
 
 28. JLULii, from quadriliteral nouns denoting 
 
 G-- G B -• ^ Cg -" 
 
 living beings, as s^jLIs. from .Lla. (NF. JLii) a 
 mighty man; RasLwI from i_jiiL*ul bishop; ii j^!^' from 
 cXa+Ij pupil; HjtoUtj from ;^t>|ji.ij a native of Bagdad. 
 
 29. jLii, as (5^1^ from i\'.^ desert; Lj|cXi 
 (for (^jtXi § 2 <? note &) from xl(^i0 (NF. £L*i from 
 ult. ,^) present. 
 
 90. The following nouns (arranged in alphabetical 
 order) are more or less irregular in their mode of 
 inflection: 
 
 a. oi father, -I brother and ^ father-in-law take 
 
 the following forms in the construct state and before 
 suffixes beginning with a consonant: 
 
Nominative 
 
 90. IREEGULAB NOUNS. . 81 
 
 ^1, ^t, ytJ^ 
 
 Genitive ^|, ^|, ^^ 
 Accusative LI, L^l, 1V~- 
 
 The Dual of lol is ^oI*jI (i- e. the two parents), the 
 plur. eLjI (§ 88 No. 17). The vocative singular with 
 suff. of the 1. pers. sing, of i^| is ._Xj| Ls, ooI L>, 
 oo I L ; from ■ I : ^i.| ; with suffix of the 2. pers. masc. 
 sing. (J^l, d^|. 
 
 ^1 son; plur. sanus has nom. ^jv^ (construct 6. 
 jju) , gen.-acc. r^sjjl (st. constr. Jj) ; broken plur. 
 gUj;? (§ 88,17). 
 
 ^•\ brother, see a; broken plur. is^i*.]^, ijl<-^|. ''• 
 (§ 88,5. 21). 
 
 G o ^ G ^^ -^ 
 
 o^ia.| sister; plur. i:!}!,.^.!. ^• 
 
 gyol or .w;o|^ (also gl«) man; gen. i^Cxih ace. SyA. e. 
 
 slyot woman; plur. from another root gLwuJ, /■ 
 S^ or j!,!^ (§ 88,9. 5. 21). 
 
 1 1 mother ; plur. i:i>L^ I or oL/i I- ^- 
 
 j^UUt man, human being; plur. ,j«U|, collective A. 
 
 Sooin, Arabic Grammar.^ " 
 
82 90. raEEGULAE NOUNS. 
 
 i- o^AJ daughter, frequently also jUjI (with con- 
 
 nective Alif); plur. <yLij. 
 *• )^.'> dinar, gold-piece; broken plur. irregular, 
 
 i- .0 (only in the st. constr.) possessor of . . . .; 
 gen. ^(j>, ace. li; fern. udIo; dual nom. \lc>; plur. nom. 
 ..O (gen.-acc. ^5.l3) fern, cjt.3; for the plural J.| 
 (m/m), gen.-acc. J.| is used. 
 
 »w- XJUM year; plur. nom. ij^-* (^^ (jr**")' g^n.-acc. 
 
 «• .y+ft 'amrun, 'Amr, proper name of a man. A . , 
 is added to the written form of this word in the nom. 
 
 and gen. (jv+i) to distinguish it from l^c 'umaru (a 
 
 diptote). Ace. |CZe ; followed by ^^J it is written ,1^ 
 and pronounced 'amra-hna. 
 
 0- *i or s^ mouth; st. constr. usually nom. »i, 
 gen. ^, ace. li; broken plur. (§ 88,17) »Q|. 
 
 p. J. J night; broken plur. (from the root JoJ) JUL! 
 (§ 89,23). 
 
 ?. gU water; broken plur. sLl« or st^!;;^! (§ 88,9.17). 
 
91. THE OAEDINAL NUMBERS. 83 
 
 Jo hand; broken plur. (§ 88,15) Jo I from j^Jol »"■ 
 (cf. §71c). 
 
 |,jj day; broken plur. |,Ljt from -Ij-sl (§ 88,17). s. 
 
 Chapter IV. The Numerals. (§§ 91—93.) 
 
 The cardinal numbers have the following forms: 91. 
 
 Masc. Fem. 
 
 is ^ - 
 
 J.s»|; id^y^ inflected 
 
 2 ij'-^^'l lo^-*^' (inflected as a dual) 
 
 3 ^%:-, (eJo) xj^J (xiJb) inflected 
 
 4 «jj j«jj )1 
 
 5 
 
 Go, 
 
 y a: 
 
 6 >OA>wu 20Uu 
 
 
 ^ G ^ " 
 
 8 ^Lij(seep.27*),jUjLij „ 
 
 G __ S^ o 
 
 9 !'^*'^ x jLMhi ,! 
 
 10 >.Mti£ s^<&.£ « 
 
 11 I^i Jk~.| »*^ i5''^^i indeclinable 
 
84 91. THE CAKDINAL JSUMEEKS. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 12 wCi.A Uj] 'iyi»A UajJ gen.-acc. "^ ^j, 
 
 " -'1. 
 
 13 Icii Xj!^' slwii lijS^' indeclinable 
 
 14 wC*£ 24*^)1 Swii^ »J^ f » 
 
 16 ww.£ &Xu> 8wim£ 0«~w n 
 
 ^ - ^ ^-a ^ T'"- '"-- 
 
 - ' ' r.' " . '.^ ° ' ' ° 
 
 20 ^.>_(iLA inflected, like all the tens, as a 
 
 pluralis sanus. 
 
 '."T'T 9^0'^ JO-' ^i 
 
 30 ij^'^') 40 ^ytjj I, 50 jj...« ^ , 60 ^yu-, 
 70 i^yiAAi/, 80 ij^Uj, 90 jj^jlwaS 
 
 100 julx (also written &1«, and always so 
 
 pronounced, mfatun, the | having no effect on the 
 pronunciation). 
 
92. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 85 
 
 200 ^^LBLo, 300 xSLo ^LlS*, 400 xSLo gjt, 500 
 SjLo J^, 600 xSLo vLa*,, 700 sSLo i^, 800 ^^Q 
 kSUo, 900 XjLo «a»o. 
 
 JjI, 2000 ^liJt, 3000 oSiT lii-SG (;!jSf7 
 
 1000 
 
 ?, -c? 
 
 is here a broken plural of the form JULsl § 88 No. 17) 
 &c. 11000 llll lii S^\, 100000 v^'F&SU, 1000000 
 
 The following are the leading points to be noted 92, 
 in joining the cardinals to the names of the objects 
 numbered : 
 
 The numerals for one (Jk.^1;) and two are adjec- a. 
 
 tives; the numbers from 3 — 10, on the other hand, 
 are substantives, and take the word indicating the 
 objects numbered in the genitive plural. They may 
 also, however, be placed in apposition after the noun. 
 Whatever their position relative to the substantive 
 may be — even, in fact, when the latter is altogether 
 omitted, or when they stand as the predicate of a 
 sentence — the construction is such that nouns of the 
 masc. gender take the fem. forms of these numerals, 
 
 * Often written SJUjUj &c. 
 
86 93. THE ORDINAL NUMBEKS. 
 
 and vice versd nouns of the fern, gender take the masc. 
 forms. Thus: ^j-yo xj!^ (Xi'^' (jj-*j) three sons, 
 
 i^Uj «j«| («jJ yyUo) four daughters. Also before 
 
 broken plurals of which the singular is masculine, 
 we find the fern, forms of these numerals (3 — 10), as 
 
 JL&A xj^' 3 men. 
 
 6. The numbers from 11 to 99 are followed by the 
 word indicating the objects numbered in the accusative 
 singular, as !i^-4-) joyJ^J 30 men. 
 
 c. The numbers from 100 upwards take the thing 
 numbered in the genitive singular as J^j jLsLo 'flS 
 400 men. 
 
 d. In the compound numbers the nature of the 
 construction depends on the last numeral. The 
 particle ^ is used to join the numbers together; the 
 units and the tens may stand either before the 
 hundreds, or after the thousands and hundreds. Thus 
 the year 1895 is either ^f^ ^Lo ^^Ui^ ^^i'^ J*U> 
 
 xa^ or sXm ^jAjmJ^ ij x t '^ j xjLo ^Ui'j i_aJ I. 
 
 93. The ordinals have, for the most part, the form 
 a- of the act. part, of the I stem, as may be seen from 
 the following: 
 
93. THE OEDIITAL NtJMEEKS. 87 
 
 Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern. 
 
 >a* ^ i- S ^ ^ ^ " 
 
 I. J^l, first J^l 6. fj^iAL Jol,(>L«- 
 
 3. ^iJLS XaJLj 8. j^LJ xJuoU 
 
 4. «^|^ jotjL 9. ,^b XjLwLj 
 
 5. (jwjoLa«. JLwfc^oL^ 10. wiiiLc SwwLe 
 
 II. wCi-a 15^1-^ Hj.-cLft JuoL:s. indeclinable 
 
 12. y^hA ^^jLj SyAitt JUjLj „ 
 
 13. wA-a viJli SwCii XiiU' and so on. 
 
 The ordinals of the numbers from 20 upwards 
 are expressed by the corresponding cardinals, as 
 
 ^Ji!k!i^ oJLS thirty-third; when larger totals have 
 
 to be expressed, the cardinals are used even for the 
 lower numbers. In dates, as a rule, the cardinal 
 
 numbers are used exclusively, as SwCOlc yi)!xj 'iXM ^ 
 
 s^-sJ-^Jl ^\yj) ^'5 ^^ 4)^'^ in the 1313 th year of 
 
 the Hegira (which began on the 24th of June 1895). 
 
 G o J 
 
 Fractions are usually expressed by the form Juii, 6. 
 
 go? 
 
 as viyJi' a third. 
 
88 9i, 95. PARTICLES. 
 
 Chapter V. The Particles. (§§ 94—96). 
 
 94. The adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions cannot 
 here be given in detail. The prepositions, like many 
 adverbs, are still for the most part recognizable as 
 nouns of three radicals originally, which have preserved 
 the accusative ending without the nunation. Preposi- 
 tions therefore always govern the genitive case in 
 Arabic and may also stand in the genitive in depen- 
 dence on other prepositions. Thus ^ijj above, with 
 a subst. JkAil liyi up on the hill. 
 
 Note. A few adverbs end in ii (which in this case has 
 absolutely nothing to do with the nominative termination) as 
 
 j*j afterwards; so J*^ ^ in the same sense; but as prepositions 
 
 j*» or SKj ^ after. 
 
 95. The following particles (in alphabetical order) 
 because written with a single letter are inseparably 
 joined to the following word, cf. § 8 note. 
 
 a. I (n) interrogative particle, as Jai't did he kill? 
 
 Before the connective Alif: dLi-*t for I + dUAul is thy 
 name . . . ? 
 
 ^- i_j (a) preposition 'in'; with suffixes thus: 1. ^ 
 in me, 2. masc. liL, 3. masc. jo (§ I2d) &c. 
 
 '■• «ij particle of asseveration, as jJJLi' by God. 
 
96. PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 89 
 
 U« shortened from o^, a particle whicli gives d. 
 
 to the impf. the sense of the future, as jJc£^ he 
 will kill. 
 
 o, then, denotes a less close connection than :. e. 
 
 d (3) like, as. f, 
 
 J a corroborative particle before verbs, especially g. 
 
 in oaths, as ^jJLxJuJ he will certainly kill; it also 
 
 stands before nouns, especially after the particle ".I 
 (§ 125 a note). 
 
 J (b) preposition and conjunction ; before suffixes h. 
 (except in 1. pers. sing, j) it becomes J, as dU 
 to thee. 
 
 J (1, 1) connective particle; as a particle of »• 
 asseveration it takes the gen., as jJUK by God. 
 
 As regards the addition of pronominal suffixes 96. 
 to the prepositions and conjunctions, the following 
 points may be noted in addition to what has been 
 said under § 82. 
 
 Before the suffixes of the 1. pers. sing., the final a. 
 vowel or vocalic auslaut is dropped as is the case 
 
 with the noun; thus jju 'after' with the suff. of the 
 
 1. pers. sing. i^JotJ, but djjij &c. 
 
90 97. DISTINCTION BETWEEN PEKP. AND IMPF. 
 
 h. In the prepositions J>.£ upon, and J( towards, 
 the final ^ is sounded before suffixes (contrary to 
 § 2 d), e. g. 
 with suff. of the 2. pers. masc. dUXc, dLul 
 
 !) 11 11 ^- 11 11 ^tV^J f-frl. 
 
 11 1, 1, 1- 1, 11 ^, III (see § 82 a) 
 
 c. The prepositions ^!wo and A..a double the n he- 
 fore the suffix of the 1. pers. sing., as _Lo. 
 
 d. ^jl^ behold, truly, and ^| that, become 
 
 with the suff. of the 2. pers. sing. masc. >iJbt and ^ilLjl 
 
 " " " " ^- " " isi^i °^ csii' 
 
 11 n 11 „ 1- 1, plur. oil or iJt, 
 
 Qi1 or Lit 
 
 in. NOTES ON SYNTAX. (§§ 97—160). 
 
 Chap. I. Moods and Tenses. (§§ 97—104). 
 
 97. The perfect expresses a completed action, the 
 completion of which falls in the past, present or future, 
 or is thought of as falling in one or other of these 
 
98. THE PEBFECT. 91 
 
 periods. The imperfect expresses an uncompleted 
 action, which may likewise fall in each of the same 
 three spheres of time. 
 
 The perfect is, in the first place, the tense of 98. 
 narration (perfectum historicum), when an action com- "" 
 pleted in the past is spoken of, and may, as a rule, 
 be rendered by our past tense, as Juv s.Ls> Zaid came. 
 
 By the perfect the idea is expressed that an action 6. 
 or a state has continued from the beginning, and still 
 
 continues, as iUJjiJt t^„ftJLcis.j the learned (always) 
 
 disagree (gnomic aorist); JLiS' \JU| God, he is exalted 
 (from the beginning). 
 
 When the perfect expresses an action completed c. 
 in the present, it is to be rendered by our present, 
 
 as |JlS5 viJLAjLk^t I present you with this (the affair is 
 at this moment concluded). 
 
 In a sentence containing an oath or a wish, the A. 
 perfect expresses an action which, in the mind of the 
 
 speaker, is completed in the future, as xJUt xJL*J God 
 curse him; also with ^ 'not', as jJJ| x,-^. '^ may God 
 have no pity on him; oJ.*i !^ J-^l^ ^J ^^^ ^ ^^ 
 it not! 
 
 When the particle tXjj stands before the perfect, «• 
 the latter may in most cases be rendered by our per- 
 
92 99. THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 feet (either the present or the past perfect), as tXi 
 b j^'S we have (just) mentioned, or we had mentioned. 
 The perf. with JLs may also be used in the sense given 
 under sub-section c. 
 
 f. When the verb ^J^ (to be) stands before the per- 
 fect (with or without JkS), we must render as a rule 
 by our past perfect (pluperfect), as ^^y^ 3Jy Q 
 jUL^f jJc£> ^ys:li Zi\ JLi- JjLT when Moses was 
 born, Pharaoh had (just) commanded to kill the little 
 children. 
 
 Note. Instead of the above verbal sentence (§ 134), ^^ 
 may be follovi^ed by a compound nominal sentence (§ 138 c?) as ^ 
 . . . yol ji ^^^. 
 
 g. Our conditional is expressed in Arabic by the 
 perfect, that is, it is represented as something already 
 
 accomplished, as i^jiji, Ishouldwish, i:iJt>3'I opJs'(tXs') 
 I should have wished. 
 
 h. For the perf. after til and in conditional sen- 
 tences see §§ 157, 158. 
 99. The imperfect indicative is to be rendered accord- 
 ing to circumstances by our present or our future, 
 sometimes also by our past progressive (imperfect). 
 
 a- If the future is to be expressed with greater pre- 
 cision than by the Arabic imperfect alone, the latter 
 
99. THE IMPEEFEOT. 93 
 
 has prefixed to it the adverb v^L», (end), which may be 
 shortened to m and is then inseparably joined to the verb 
 (see § 95<?), as J^^*I*j op« ye will know (it); '^^yXL 
 (49 &) we shall show you. 
 
 By the imperfect is expressed an action which 6. 
 accompanies another action completed in the past, 
 or which is still in the future from the stand point 
 
 of the latter, as (j^XJ-j (V»L I t. L^ they came to their 
 
 father weeping (of. § 157 &); ^yi^, ij^l (c^'l 
 came to the spring to drink. 
 
 he 
 
 The imperfect can also express the continuance e. 
 
 of an action in the past; JjJLj'LftAj may also mean 
 'they were fighting for a considerable time', or 'they 
 fought repeatedly, with each other'. More frequently, 
 however, this continuous imperfect is expressed by 
 
 a combination of ^Lj with the impf, (cf. § 98/". and 
 note); sometimes we can render such a combination 
 
 by our 'was wont to' or 'used to', as j.^j J^ij i^=^. (j'-^ 
 Itfljii xi^j he used to receive every day three 
 drachmae. 
 
 If tXi' stands before the imperfect, a certain in- 3,. 
 definiteness is the result, as ^^. cXi" 'it will most 
 
94 100. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 likely be that . . .', an idea which is not unfrequently 
 found in the imperf. without 0<s. 
 
 Note a. The impf. also stands in direct subordination to 
 Other verbs, as w'^.al cJj l« I ceased not to drink (cf. § 110); 
 j^WI ^i J*a. he began to speak with the people; J*J| jjJl U 
 liiTl cannot do such a thing. 
 
 Note b. Before several verbs (perfects or imperfects) joined 
 together with j, it is sufficient to write ^jU" once, and so with 
 
 S>, ^yn and ^ju. 
 
 Note c. ^J,U'(see note to § 98/") is frequeotly followed by a 
 
 compound nominal sentence, as ^IS*II ^j^ |^U.*c \^ Osman was 
 
 wont to visit the graves (the cemetery). 
 
 100. The Subjunctive is found in certain kinds of depen- 
 dent clauses introduced by a conjunction, the action 
 of which is to be represented as one to be expected 
 as the result of the action of the principal clause, 
 and hence as one that is only likely to occur in the 
 future. Hence this mood is frequently (not always) 
 
 used after the conjunctions ^jl that, !ii( (from !5f jjl) 
 
 that not, (^Xa^ until, o (and I) that, and always after 
 
 J, ^ ij^ i'^ order that, XJ (made up of "3 ^S) 
 
 in order that . . not, ^t in the sense of 'except that', 
 
 'until', as ^..yiJ -A^ he came in order to visit me; 
 
 wI"aJo ^t Sj./)! he commanded him to write (that he 
 
101. THE MOD. APOCOPAT. OR JUSSIVE, 102. THE MOD. BNEEGIC. 95 
 
 should write). In like manner the subj. is used after 
 ^jJ (,j| ^) it will not be (the case) that, as jJLull Jj 
 I shall not send him. 
 
 The modus apocopatus (or jussive) is found: 101. 
 
 1) in positive commands, generally with the particle a. 
 J prefixed, as J^JcCiJ let him write. 
 
 Note. When such a form is further preceded by j and j 
 (which is sometimes the case, without any special stress resting 
 
 » >« — ^ 
 on these particles) J generally loses its vowel, as 4U| ^Jlfij 
 
 jj)jA«j*l| JfyUli and in God let the believers (then, therefore) trust. 
 
 2) in negative commands with if, as Jjii" '^ say not, 6. 
 thou shalt not say. The imperative can never take 
 
 a negative. 
 
 3) always after l^^ not as a prohibition but as ne- e. 
 gativing a completed action, as i_5w«ij li he did not 
 strike, (as the negation of CJ-So) ; in like manner after 
 mj in the sense of 'not yet'. 
 
 4) in the protasis and apodosis of conditional sen- d,. 
 tences, see § 158. 
 
 The modus energicus is usually found in assevera- 102. 
 tions, and particularly in connection with an oath 
 
 and the corroborative particle J, as xAjwo^I xJLJI. by 
 
 God, I will certainly strike him; this mood is also 
 
 used with the prohibitive ^. 
 
96 103. THE PASSIVE. 104. THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 103. The Passive is employed in those cases in which 
 the agent, for some reason or other, must not be 
 
 Go.--' 
 
 mentioned. Hence a sentence like Ji.j\ JuCi' means 
 
 'Zaid has been killed (by some person unknown or 
 who may not be named)'. Our 'Zaid has been killed 
 by 'Amr', the Arabs express by the active construction. 
 The passive is frequently found in an impersonal sense 
 (see § 121 «). 
 
 104. With regard to the employment of the participles 
 the following points are to be noted: 
 
 a. The participle (especially as predicate of a nominal 
 
 sentence § 122 «) frequently expresses our "to be about 
 
 to", as dL<JI ^o\js Qt I am about to come, on the 
 
 •• e r- 
 
 point of coming, to you. 
 6. The passive participle is also used impersonally 
 in Arabic; starting from the sentence xiuLa le*^ ^® 
 fainted (literally: it was covered over him) we can 
 also say xllc (5-4^'^ ^ ^^ ^^^ fainted , fern. ^, 
 L^jyLc (-.lioLo. In such constructions the impersonal 
 part. pass, may be inflected for all three cases and be 
 determined by the article, as jcLCc ,ZcioLo i^Lli '^°yt^ 
 
 I passed a man who had fainted; ^^-ivkiJ? 'iS°Sj\ ^\\ 
 Lg.jyJ^ I saw the woman that had fainted. 
 
105. VERB. COMPLEMENTS. 106 108. AOOUS. COMPLEMENT. 97 
 
 Chap. II. The Government of the Verb. (§§ 105—117); 
 
 In Arabic the verb may take as its complement 105. 
 either an accusative, or a preposition with its case. 
 The numerous combinations of the latter sort, in 
 which the preposition with its case is sometimes the 
 necessary complement of the action denoted by the 
 verb, sometimes merely accessory (such, for example, 
 as specifications of place and time) cannot here be 
 given in detail. See, however, §§ 114 ff. 
 
 The accusative is the case depending immediately 106. 
 on the verb. We distinguish here the cases in which, 
 the accusative stands a) as object, p) as predicate, 
 and y) as limitation or more precise definition, generally 
 called by grammarians, the accusative "of nearer 
 definition". 
 
 a) Certain classes of verbs, as for example, verbs 107. 
 of coming and going, take as direct object the goal 
 
 to which the action is directed, e. g. o/JuJI JlLo 
 he went into the house. 
 
 Note. On the other hand C«*-Jt ^^j, Jij denotes primarily 
 the direction of the action toioards the goal; c*^) ^ Ji-J 
 he went into the house and stayed there. 
 
 The following take two accusatives: 1) The causa- 108. 
 tive forms of transitive verbs with one accusative in 
 the I. stem, as lit to know; cans. ssI^aJ! au-Lc he 
 
 Sociiij Arabic Grammar.- ' 
 
98 109. THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT. 
 
 taught him reading; 2) verbs that express the ideas 
 of filling or giving, of making into, of considering or 
 recognising as, of naming, and many others: e. g. 
 [IQ Jdj,^'\ idil d^ God made the earth (into) a 
 carpet ; \d^ jUjT ^4^ he named his son Muhammed. 
 When a verb of this class is put in the passive, the second 
 
 C5--? J'o? 
 
 accusative remains, as \SZ^ s-i..?! (e*-"/ his son was 
 named Muhammed; \^.c> ^'^T he was presented with 
 a dirhem, from the active L+ffst> sLjI he presented him 
 with a dirhem (for suff. see § 107). 
 
 Note a. The two accusatives of such verbs as express the 
 idea of finding one to be, or considering one as something, stand 
 to each other, strictly speaking, in the relation of subject and 
 
 predicate (§139); thus a sentence like U-^ Isui 4Jj>a-j may also 
 be translated 'I found that he was a gentle old man'. As second 
 object we may have a verb instead of a noun, as i^SeViaJ IjJ^j 
 2^1 blijj they found their payment to be something which was 
 returned to them = they found that their payment was &c. 
 
 Note b. Verbs expressing not an intellectual but a physical 
 perception are also frequently found with two accusatives. The se- 
 cond, indeed, is generally regarded as an aco. of condition (§ 
 
 113i), but sentences like l*A{ I^*c c-''fn, it must be admitted, 
 
 may also be translated: I heard 'Amr weeping, i. e. I heard how 
 'Amr wept. 
 
 109. For the purpose of strengthening or of more 
 
 precisely defining the idea conveyed by it, every verb 
 
110. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE. 99 
 
 may take a so-called absolute object. This absolute (or 
 internal) object consists of an infinitive, a nomen speciei 
 (§64'c) or other noun. Usually this object is itself more 
 precisely defined either by some qualifying word or 
 phrase (§ 120) or by a genitive, as LLl^ LLoLS joi^I 
 he educated him with a good education, i. e. well; 
 ^A*s>.| Ljwo ^et^>^^ he struck him with a stroke 
 which pained me (for the relative sentence, see § 155); 
 8 J^ ^y*:^ >iLA.AO he walked in the way of his grand 
 father. More rarely the absolute object is found with- 
 out any qualification, as Ljw«3 xS>J6 he struck him 
 with a stroke, as much as to say, he struck him a 
 
 blow, and what a blow ! |.wo Swo he wrapped it in 
 (so many) parcels ; here the absolute object expresses 
 rather the result of the action. 
 
 Note. Sometimes the place of the infinitive is taken by the 
 mere qualification, as Uijls jl-< he journeyed long, for U^jfa \y>^ jL- 
 he journeyed a long journey, or by some other form of nearer 
 definition, as \s^Le ^^jiJl c^, ijlc iJUl ^5* God allowed him to 
 capture Jerusalem peacefully = ^Irf ^S*. 
 
 P) The accusative stands as the predicate with verbs 110. 
 which express the idea of being or becoming some- 
 thing, and is especially common with the verb "^JS 
 (med. .). This verb signifies either 1) to be in the 
 
100 111. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE. 
 
 sense of to exist, as Ijxl ^Lf" there was (there lived) 
 a vizier, or 2) to be something (in particular); in 
 the latter sense it takes its predicate (to adopt 
 the nomenclature of the native grammarians) in 
 
 the accusative, as !^L^ «jfyo| c:oLs his wife was 
 
 pregnant. The same construction is adopted by all 
 
 verbs of similar signification , such as _*«.x| to be 
 
 something late, _^s-yol to be something early, oLc to 
 
 be or become something a second time, 1\S to remain, 
 
 to last, JK to cease to be something, jLo to become 
 
 something, ^j«lj not to be something. The place of 
 the accusative in the predicate may be taken by a 
 
 preposition with its case (cf. § 114 ff.), as JoC ^^^i' 
 v^y.juJ( ^ Zaid was in the house; u^-Alt ^Ajs ooLs 
 \jay^\ d^Xo jjifct i\yj^ the kings of Persia belonged 
 to the most powerful sovereigns on earth. The con- 
 struction of jjLT and the others with a finite verb 
 (§§ 98/"; 99 c) must also be understood in this way, 
 that is, the predicate in such cases consists of a verbal 
 sentence (§ 135), as \^ ji ^\jf\ IJ-^t the people 
 had already (prop, early) become weary. 
 
 111. The accusative, further, stands in the predicate 
 
112. AOC. OF CONOOMITANOE. 113. AOC. OF NEAKEE DEFIHITION. 101 
 
 after the negatiye Sl, when the latter, as the Arabs 
 
 say, expresses a general negation. The accus. after ^, 
 which is always undetermined, drops its nunation, as 
 
 xJUl ^t^ jJ[ !Sf there is (absolutely) no God but Allah. 
 
 The accusative is used after the conjunction ; to 112. 
 indicate concomitance, especially in verbal sentences 
 
 (§ 135), as dUI. o^jui-o Uo what hast thou and 
 
 thy father done? J-aDI. jjla«I oJv Lxi I ceased not 
 
 to go with (along) the Nile; also without a verb Lo 
 
 |ju\^ •A) what hast thou (to do) with Zaid? 
 
 y) The accusative of nearer definition is employed 113. 
 in the following cases: 
 
 1) To give details of place and time, as LXuj 3aj a. 
 ^L+4'I he looked to right and to left of him; L^^i 'XL 
 he journeyed a parasang; sLAa t.L^ they came late 
 in the evening; JoUt^ isjoo >iJLJ3 Ji-.fc jiiwt be con- 
 tinued faithful thereto during his life-time. 
 
 2) Very frequently the accusative, as a rule un- 6. 
 determined, appears in verbal (rarely in nominal) 
 sentences as the accusative of state or condition, 
 
 as iXiCC^\ J| Lg.&.yoo ^L*, he journeyed, taking the 
 direction of Medina; lI:J^lj III* outai I met 'Amr 
 weeping. 
 
102 113, 114*. AOO. OF NEAEEK DEFINITION AND EXCLAMATION. 
 
 Note a. "With the accusative of condition the student 
 must be careful to note to which of the nouns in the sentence it 
 applies; in the last sentence above, for example, it might refer 
 
 * - e 
 
 to the subject pronoun implicit in Ct^ instead of to Amr. 
 
 Note b. Two nouns in the accusative of condition are 
 often placed beside each other without a conjunction (asyndeton) 
 
 as ljjS«i lojj-o \^M pji.) (God said to Satan) ; Go out of it (pa- 
 
 radise, fem.) as one cast off and despised (for Ujj.* see § 76 note). 
 Note c. In some rare cases an infinitive is used (in place 
 
 of a participle) to denote a qualifying circumstance; Ija<o JU he 
 
 = ^ o ' 
 
 was killed bound (i. e. while bound) = \yyyoj». 
 
 c. 3) The accusative of specz^cff<io«(=accus. of respect), 
 also in most cases undetermined, expresses a more 
 
 precise reference, as iZiLi^yuo oUai*^ it (paradise) is 
 beautiful with reference to staying (there), i. e. as a dwell- 
 ingplace ; this accus. is especially common with elatives 
 
 (§ 63 b) of a more general signification, as isy4,a. Juil 
 stronger with regard to the colour red = redder. 
 
 d. 4) The accusative of nearer definition is also em- 
 ployed to indicate the motive or purpose of an action, 
 in which case, also, it is mostly undetermined, as 
 
 LaLs. IjJy* tl^sy flsd from cowardice ; aJ L^llS't omJ 
 I stood up to do him honour. 
 114* The accusative may also stand in cases, parti- 
 cularly in exclamations, where a finite verb can be 
 supplied, as iLgiu. ibcl welcome! Here we must 
 
114, 115. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS, 103 
 
 sipply 10UJ&.. and the meaning of the phrase comes 
 
 to be: thou art come to relatives and a smooth (i. e. 
 
 pleasant) place; ^Ljx slowly! to be taken as the 
 absolute object of an imperative understood. 
 
 Of the numerous constructions of the verb with 114. 
 a preposition attention need only be called to the 
 follov?ing. 
 
 Many prepositions are still treated as nouns, in 
 accordance with their original signification (see § 94), 
 
 as ^'Ui!^!. )j^jJI ,j.>o yjw he distinguished between 
 
 (prop, the distance, difference of) males and females. 
 Very frequently we find (cf. § 110) the partitive ^ 
 
 used in this way as object, e. g. |.LilaJ| ,^ J^n he 
 ate of the food. 
 
 A few verbs are construed, with but slight differ- 115- 
 ence of meaning, now with a direct object, now with 
 
 i_j, as jtiJLe'he knew it, au iJLi he knew about it. 
 Frequently t_) serves to introduce an object, to which 
 the action of the verb extends only indirectly, as 
 l(>.JV viou he sent Zaid; t_juXJb liyju he sent the 
 writing (i. e. some one with the writing); cXajiJI oou 
 he sent the slave, jJjiJL viou, same meaning, but 
 
104 116, 117. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 with the understanding that the slave travels unde/ 
 escort. Verbs of going construed with (_> take tte 
 
 sense of bringing, as jj.iLj IJo\ J>l he brought Zsid 
 the news. — This lo may also accompany an impera- 
 tive as a periphrasis of the first person of the dual 
 and plural, as Uj (j^ajol let (thou) us go. Lis ^yojo^ 
 
 let (ye) us go. 
 
 116. The meaning of many verbs is often so altered 
 according to the preposition with which they are 
 construed that a sense quite the opposite of the 
 original, according to our idiom, is the result; thus 
 
 sJ Le5 is properly: he called (to God) in his favour, 
 
 i, e. he blessed him, xaXc Lc3 he called (to God) 
 
 against him, i. e. he cursed him; ^ilL JjiX^I he 
 
 occupied himself with the affair; but with Jwc (which 
 
 contains the idea of separation) yo!^l ^.r. JjLAUi! he 
 
 was occupied so that he put the affair in question 
 aside, could not attend to it. 
 
 117. Of the various uses of the preposition J (see 
 §§ 130 ff.), we may call attention to its special use in 
 dates, particularly in specifying the days of the month, 
 
 as j»w^ ij^ XA-0 J^i! in the first (literally: tothefirst) 
 night of (the month) Muharram. ^"^LL JLJ «IU 
 
118. DETERMINATION, 105 
 
 ^jLa**6 (J^ or with the omission of JLJ (§ 90 p) 
 ij^Xia. ^«AA^J at the time of seven nights, which (cf. 
 § 155) had elapsed of Sa'ban, i. e. when seven nights 
 (or days) of S. had passed; >l^j>^^ i.'^) »v^ ^;^ 
 ^JLaxl^ ^^ when still fourteen (nights) were left of 
 Eamadan. 
 
 Chap. III. The Government of the Noun. (§§118—134). 
 
 A noun may take with it a) the article, p) a permut- 118. 
 ative (noun in apposition), y) a" qualifying (attribu- 
 tive) adjunct, 8) a genitive. 
 
 a) When a noun is preceded by the article, it is said 
 to be determined (§ 79&). This determination may be 
 stronger or weaker: 
 
 A very strong determination is found in certain a. 
 
 words which contain the idea of time, as jLtLuLtl this 
 
 hour = now, -vyi this day = today. In these cases 
 the article has the force of a demonstrative. 
 
 By means of the article a single definite object is 6- 
 indicated, which the speaker has in mind, or which 
 
 has been already mentioned: by J^*- Jf is meant some 
 particular known man. Proper names furnished with 
 the article (see § 79 a) were originally appellatives 
 
 with the determination, as ,j_w*if. 
 
106 119. APPOSITION. 
 
 c. The determination by the article often serves 
 merely to denote the species or class to which some- 
 thing belongs, as vLU-T d-h? y^ ^^ ^^ ^^^® ^^ ^^®' 
 This use of the article is named the generic. 
 
 119. 8) From among the cases in which a noun follows 
 
 another noun in apposition, the following may he 
 singled out as worthy of note : 
 a. A substantive may have in apposition words 
 expressing a) size, b) resemblance, c) the parts and 
 d) the material of which a thing is made up. Thus 
 
 a) cK6 oIj a dress an ell long (lit. a dress, an ell); 
 
 b) Joj Jji.5 (J4m a man like (lit. the likeness of) 
 
 ** _ ^ ■£■6 
 
 Zaid; c) iIjLo'J J4=> a rope made up of rotten pieces; 
 d) tVjcXil AJ'Lii the iron finger-ring; when undeter- 
 mined preferably with ^^ as v_^ j ^j^ ^x^ an idol 
 of gold. For the last, the genitive construction is 
 also found viz: >_^jJi |vi-«o. 
 6. The word J^J totality is construed either with the 
 noun following in the genitive, or stands in apposition, 
 
 with a suffix referring back to the noun, as y^UJI Jii 
 
 or |V.gJj (jj^UlJI all men. (Note that Jjbeing a substan- 
 tive always remains unchanged as regards gender and 
 number). 
 
120. QUALIFYING ADJUNCTS. 107 
 
 f) A substantive may be qualified 1) by an adjective, 120. 
 2) by a preposition with its case, or 3) by a relative 
 clause (§§ 155—6). 
 
 1) The qualifying word may be an adjective^ as a. 
 
 Jt^Lc -Let an honest Imam; in this case if the 
 
 substantive is determined the adjective must also 
 
 receive the determination, as Jt)LiJ| -Uo!i)|, the honest 
 
 Imam, 
 
 The adjective follows its substantive; to this rule 6. 
 the demonstrative pronoun forms an apparent excep- 
 tion, in as much as it generally stands 'before (like the 
 article § 118), less frequently after ^ the substantive 
 
 which it qualifies. Thus we find (.i^wiJI \ds> this slave, 
 
 alongside of | jijs ^iV^Ll I. 
 
 The adjective must agree with its substantive in c. 
 
 gender and number, as &Lu^ '^-*:^ ^ pretty girl. 
 
 Among the exceptions is the word ^iS'much, which 
 
 generally remains unchanged, like a noun in apposi- 
 
 S ' s ^ 
 tion, even after the plural, as ^Ai^^JL=.^, many men. 
 
 That the broken plurals take their adjectives in d. 
 the feminine has been already noted (see § 87 a); the 
 adjective, however, may also take a broken plural, as 
 |!|3' JL^M noble men. The plur. sanus, moreover, is not 
 
108 121, PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE AS ADJUNCT. 
 
 unfrequently found especially if the adjective qualifies 
 
 words denoting living beings, as r^^UJl tU ^ I the 
 
 ancestors that were of old (part, of ^e-^)- ^^ the same 
 circumstances the collectives (§ 86 a) may also take a 
 
 plural adjective, as i!i>^ I »j' miserly people, jj^Us ^Ji 
 
 violent people. The preceding pronoun often stands 
 
 then in the plural, as j*,uJ| e^yS> these men; but 
 
 with fem. plurals that do not denote living beings 
 
 generally in the fem. singular, as iiyl JLiJi » jjo these 
 
 deserts; before broken plurals also in the fem. sing., as 
 
 AaW ^tH 5 jjo these slaves. 
 
 2) From those cases in which a preposition with its 
 
 121. noun is dependent on a verb (§§ 114 ff.) or its equi- 
 
 "■ valent, must be clearly distinguished those in which 
 
 they form the qualifying attribute of another noun, 
 
 as ^yZJ\ji ^Lo ,J<& k^iLwJjs^ I sat down beside a 
 
 goldsmith (who was) in the bazaar; oJjJu ^.» dLxj.i 
 
 thy posterity (that will be) after thee. 
 
 Sometimes this attribute does not stand next to 
 6. the word qualified; so particularly with the relatives 
 
 ^jx and L«, as oJiJI jTjjo -LoJI Jk^o \x those of 
 
 the Arabs that advanced into Syria; Ci\Jo \Jo \j£S\ 
 
122. ASYNDETON Of ATTKIBUTES. 123. THE GENITIVE. 109 
 
 eUujJI ^jo *X! marry of the women whatever seemeth 
 good unto you. 
 
 Should several attributes qualify a single substan- 122. 
 five, the connecting conjunction is usually omitted 
 
 (asyndeton), as |VAk«JI J^jiJI jJUl the high and mighty 
 
 God; JOjJiJi L-itjjl ^0-* (**"'5 '-'^ ^ y^iAe gate of the 
 
 gates of the town; sXki' xauI, ^^ x+iJ-o iwUfi 
 
 a thick cloud over his head which gave him shade. 
 
 8) One noun, when in dependence on another, is put 123. 
 in the genitive case — the function of which is to deter- 
 mine more exactly the application of the preceding 
 noun. As the result of the close connection subsisting 
 between the second noun and the first, the latter, now 
 said to be in the construct state (§ 79 c) and therefore 
 without the article, is regarded as determined. There- 
 fore ^vLaJI -3»«j is 'the (particular) spear of the 
 (particular) horseman', and so with the suffixes, as 
 s.^. his (particular) spear. When the dependent noun 
 (nomen rectum) is undetermined, the governing noun 
 (nomen regens) is only defined in a generic sense 
 (§ 118 c), or is specialized in a way resembling the 
 generic definition, as dLLe oJl? a daughter of a king 
 = a king's daughter. 
 
110 124.00NS.AND GEN.INSEP. 125. DETEE.BYSUrP. 126. COMPOS. NOUNS. 
 
 Note. More rarely, in the latter case, the generic article 
 may be attached to the nomen rectum, as ^-*-iJ| J^ harley bre ad 
 
 124. The genitive cannot be separated from the go- 
 verning word (nomen regens); adjectival and other 
 additions must therefore stand after the genitive, as 
 
 «AulJI dLL+JI o»,/.j the spacious house of the king. 
 
 When, according to our idiom, a genitive belongs to 
 two substantives, in Arabic it is made dependent on 
 the first of the two, and represented with the second 
 
 by a personal pronoun, as xjo^j. jJ.JI 5Ua.v the mercy 
 
 and blessings of God. 
 
 125. Substantives conveying the idea of time sometimes 
 receive a specially strong determination by the addition 
 
 of suffixes (cf. § 118 a), as jdJj Ji>.o he prayed his 
 night, i. e. the particular night in which he then was. 
 
 126. The close connection of two nouns thus standing 
 in the genit. relation makes sometimes possible their 
 fusion to one idea, although only the first component 
 admits of inflection. Thus 2JJI jjj; (gen. jJJI iXa^; 
 ace. sJJI Ju.£) the servant of Allah, as a proper name, 
 conveys but a single idea. Further illustrations will be 
 found in the numerous examples of composite proper 
 names, of which one of the elements is one or other of the 
 
 Go G'^ Go S^ 
 
 words ^jj| son, i_,| father, o^ daughter, ^| mother. 
 
127. SUEST, USB OF ADJJ. 128. EXPUOATIVE GENITIVE. Ill 
 
 As the Arabs have no family names, properly so-called, 
 the name of a man or woman receives for distinction's 
 sake an addition by the help of the above words, as 
 
 Joyj ^ tX+^ Ui;H'»''f *-?! (observe the order). Very 
 frequently a name thus made up has become the 
 principal name, as that of the first Caliph ^Jo jj|, 
 for example, or that of the savant xLoi' ^i\ ; names 
 of tribes, too, like ^^S j^, are in the same way 
 
 simple notions (Einheitsbegriffe). 
 
 Not unfrequently an adjective which in our idiom 127. 
 would be made to qualify its substantive, is in Arabic 
 raised to the rank of a substantive, on which its proper 
 
 substantive is made to depend ; thus xJiJLi. *.Jj,S' the 
 
 noble(ness) of his character = his noble character; 
 
 (wU.J| yiS\ most men. The same construction is found 
 
 with elatives also, as Xx^a ,j**I t^-wL* they lived 
 
 the easiest life (cf. § 109). 
 
 A species of explicative genitive is found in cases 128. 
 where a general conception is more explicitly defined 
 
 by a following proper name, as ^j^\ uojl the land 
 of Yemen. — Under this head may be reckoned the 
 suffixes appended to numerals, as ^^^xiH the three 
 of thenif 
 
112 129. CLAUSE AS GEN. 130. PEEIPH. Or GEN. 131. CONS. OF INFIN. 
 
 129. A few words contaming the ideas of time and 
 place may have, instead of a genitive, a whole clause 
 depending on them, as JlXj> *^ on the day on which 
 he was killed. 
 
 130. When a noun on which another noun is in the 
 proper sense (cf § 134) dependent must remain absolu- 
 tely undetermined (see§ 123), the usual genitive rela- 
 tion of nomen regens and nomen rectum is inadmissible, 
 and the connection of the two must be expressed by 
 a preposition, as jS^ -I a brother of yours, where 
 ^ is attrib. adjunct to • I (see § 121 «). 
 
 131. Infinitives may govern their object according to 
 the laws either of verbal or of nominal government. 
 In the first instance their subject is subordinated in the 
 
 genitive; Jo; Jjci' accordingly means: the circumstance 
 
 that Zaid has killed. If no subject is named, the object 
 may likewise stand in the genitive, so that the same 
 
 expression Jo j JsJCs may also mean : the circumstance 
 
 that Zaid has been killed, the fact of Zaid's being killed. 
 When both subject and object are present, the former 
 is treated as a subjective genitive ; the latter remains 
 in the accusative or J with the genitive is used as a 
 
 periphrasis for the accusative, as y^\ Cj^m sJCo^ltX-o 
 
132. PAETIOIPLE WITH OBJECT. 113 
 
 the circumstance that he was constantly drinking 
 wine; y^-sJ ,ela- the circumstance that I am fond 
 of wine. J also stands after an undetermined infinitive 
 (e. g. in cases like § 113 d and others) as UolyS"! oufji 
 tXjCJ I stood up to do honour to Zaid. 
 
 In the case of the participle, the ohject of the 132. 
 verb appears as the objective genitive, and when the 
 part, has the sense of the perfect it is determined by 
 the genitive following, as ^jOy^S i^JL^ «-UI God is 
 he who has created the earth = the creator of the 
 earth. With a present or future sense the governing 
 participle is not determined, as ^Jii\ 'xJ£>\C) (j^.aJ d^ 
 every soul is one that will taste of death; ivJ^aj^ jhj|^ 
 he is one that will meet with you. If the participle 
 is in itself determined, the object stands in the 
 accusative or is expressed periphrastically with J, as 
 ivJL*jU ^iJUaJI he who strives after knowledge; the 
 same applies when the participle is strictly undeter- 
 mined, as awjf ^lJ v^^Lb one who wishes to take 
 blood revenge for his father; |,iLwiU La^ oJ\ Lo I 
 have not ceased to love Islam. 
 
 S 0,0 in, Arabio Grammar.^ ° 
 
114 133. UNDETEKM. STAT. CONSTE. 134. IMPEOP. ANNEXATION. 
 
 133. A special idiomatic use of certain generic words 
 is their combination with a following genitive. They 
 are determined or undetermined according to the 
 
 context, 6. g. .<> he who has, possessor of (cf. § 90/), 
 
 (JLo .0 the possessor of wealth, a rich man; ,_^-b.Lo 
 
 companion, owner, jJii ,_;w:s.Uis the man of sense; j^isl 
 
 people, UbjJi J^lpeopleoftheworld=worldlypeople; 
 
 (j,d*j portion, e. g. sUJjiJI (jojij one, some of the 
 
 Go' 
 
 learned; ^yc prop, change, then 'another than', as 
 »wA£. s Joij viJUUi dLXJ! i^yLo the king died and another 
 
 " G ,* 
 
 than he reigned after him; similarly Jk„&.| one, as 
 [vJS tX^t one of them; finally ^1 son,in certain common 
 idioms, as jLi..w JwVj!iU ^\ thirty years old. 
 
 134. A special kind of genitive relation is presented 
 by the so-called improper annexation, by which a 
 participle or a verbal adjective (see § 60 &) is more 
 strictly limited or defined by a following genitive, as 
 
 x=. Jl jj««Ai&. J4>) ^ va.2sa beautiful of countenance. 
 This construction is best rendered by a relative clause, 
 the subject of which will be the word that more clearly 
 defines the governing idea, in other words the genitive 
 of the Arabic will be the nominative of the English, 
 a man whose countenance is beautiful. In such a case 
 
135, 136. THE VEEBAL SENTENCE. 115 
 
 the governing word is not determined by the following 
 genitive; should the latter require to be determined, 
 it may receive the article (contrary to the rule in 
 § 123) as JiL'yi\ ^jlAS (Jk=»irt the man of the beautiful 
 countenance, i. e. whose countenance is beautiful. 
 
 Chapter IV. The Simple Sentence. (§§ 135—151). 
 
 Sentences in Arabic are of two kinds, verbal and 135. 
 nominal. 
 
 The chief characteristic of a verbal sentence is the 
 fact that it always contains a finite verb ; in fact, a 
 verb of this kind with its inherent (subject) pronoun 
 
 is in itself a complete verbal sentence, as ool^ thou 
 hast struck. This type of sentence always expresses 
 the commencement of some activity ^ understood in the 
 widest sense. If a special exponent of the idea con- 
 veyed by the subject of the verb is added, it follorvs 
 the verb in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. 
 
 the nominative^, as Juv i_jy.«s he has struck, Zaid (has) 
 == Zaid has struck, whereby Zaid is singled out as 
 the agent. 
 
 In the verbal sentence, the finite verb does not 136. 
 always agree in gender and number with the following 
 
116 136. OONCOED IN THE VERBAL SENTENCE. 
 
 subject. The following are the chief points to be 
 noted in this connection: 
 
 a. The verb stands in the masculine singular before 
 sound or outer plurals, and generally before the masc. 
 forms of tbe dual. 
 
 b. The verb stands in tlie feminine singular 1) before 
 a sing. fem. if it follows the verb immediately, 2) be- 
 fore sound plurals feminine, 3) before the fem. forms 
 of the dual, and 4) before broken plurals (of. next 
 sub-section). 
 
 c. The verb stands in tbe masculine or feminine singular 
 1) before a sing. fem. not immediately following the 
 verb, 2) before collectives, 3) before broken plurals 
 denoting male persons ; if these plurals do not imme- 
 diately follow the verb, the latter in most cases takes 
 the masc. singular form. 
 
 d. Once the subject is introduced, the verbs following 
 agree witb it in gender and number, as jJL^. Jov sLs> 
 tJLs. xJJl cXlc. there came Zaid, Halid and'Abdallah 
 and they said. After collectives also the verb, in such 
 a case, often takes the plural, as mSyxlxl ...LjLiJt cy-<aJo 
 the young people set out to follow him. So too after 
 words like ^^i" and others. Still it is always possible 
 for the verb to remain in the singular, as u«j*s« 
 
137. INDEriNITE SUBJECT. 117 
 
 jUmjj&. ^^ ^DpiXS ijjo ijujj^ and the Kuraishites 
 
 (the tribe Kuraish) imprisoned whomsoeYer they 
 could imprison. 
 
 A subject unknown, or purposely left unnamed, 137. 
 is treated as follows (cf. French on dit, German man 
 sagt) : 
 
 1) The verb is put in the 3. pers. sing, of the a. 
 passive (see § 103), as xlJ|^ )L1j they journey to him. 
 It is to be noted that this impersonal passive can 
 never stand without a complement (here xaJI). 
 
 2) Or in the 3. pers. plur. of the active, as | Jli 6. 
 they said. 
 
 3) Or in the 2. pers. sing, (or plur.) of the active, c. 
 e. g. in the Kur'an ooKl or *j:jiJ dost thou think? 
 do ye think? where it is not any particular persons 
 that are addressed, but people in general, as much 
 
 as to say 'could any one suppose that ....?' Jjjii" one 
 might say (cf. Eng. 'as you might say'). 
 
 4) There may be added to the verb a subject d. 
 (participle) formed from the same root, as JkjLs JU or 
 JkjUJI JLi" some one said; xAi* u^'r" '^'5 i*-* t-^" 
 
 a castle, the like of which had never been seen. 
 
 Note. The case of an undefined complement of a verbal 
 action being expressed by a substantive derived from the verb is 
 
118 138. INDEFINITE SUBJ. 139. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 
 
 not unfrequently met elsewhere than in the above construction, 
 e. g. lUsJ J55 aliquem (interfectum) interfecit, ^J)> iUjJ i^jJlsw 21 
 they did not fear the reproof of any reprover. 
 
 138. Occasionally, out of something that has been 
 mentioned, a story or the like, there arises an in- 
 definite subject corresponding to our "it", which is 
 usually expressed by the feminine of the verb; for 
 
 example, after a fable or the like, ^£o o^^cXi, and 
 it (i. e. this story) passed into a proverb. 
 
 139. The nominal sentence^ in contrast to the verbal 
 sentence, expresses a state or condition of the subject. 
 This last as a rule stands at the head of the sentence 
 in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. the nomina- 
 tive ; in most cases it is determined while the predicate 
 is undetermined. The predicate may consist of one 
 or other of the following : 
 
 G -- G f — 
 
 a) a simple noun, as JLa J.jv Zaid is wise; 
 &) a preposition and its case, as jljJt ^ J^wi the 
 man is in the house; 
 
 c) an adverb, as U-gJo jtXJl di>^ 'Abdallah is here. 
 
 d) a complete sentence, which may be either a) a 
 verbal sentence, or p) a nominal sentence; the whole 
 
 now becomes a compound sentence. Exx.: a) ^Ji^ Jov 
 
 Zaid (he) is ill; s^| ^^ Joj Zaid, his father is 
 
140, 141. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 119 
 
 ill; P) ,j-w^ s^l Jo; Zaid, his father is aged (i. e. 
 
 Zaid's father &c.). The sentence constituting the 
 predicate must contain a pronoun referring back to 
 the subject. The subj. thus placed at the head of 
 the sentence has been wrongly named the nominative 
 absolute. 
 
 Note. The difficulty we feel in distinguishing between •^yio 
 
 OJ j and ^yo J.J j Zaid has struck, may he explained in this way. 
 In the first of these two expressions it is the act of striking that 
 is uppermost in the speaker's mind, and the enquiry as to the 
 subject or agent from whom the act proceeds is answered with 
 
 Zaid, on which the logical emphasis now rests. In ^yo 0.43, on 
 the other hand, we start with Zaid as a given subject or agent, 
 and the question as to what is to be predicated regarding this 
 
 subject or as to what this agent has done is answered by ^■ji, 
 on which in its turn the logical centre of gravity, so to say, 
 comes to rest. 
 
 Between subject and predicate, when both are 140. 
 determined, there ought to stand the pronoun of the 
 3. person, but this rule is not always observed, as 
 
 ^it Jb xJUt God is the living One. — Sometimes, 
 
 also, this pron. merely serves to emphasize the 
 
 subject. 
 
 In negative and interrogative sentences the predi- 141. 
 
 G ci^ , cr- 
 eate stands before the subject, as Jo\ ^\ where is 
 
 Zaid? "^^ lye ls3 U ye have no helper (in which 
 
 case the subject li,". receives the addition of ^ 
 
120 142. MOMINAL SENTENCE. 
 
 (= French du, &c.) as strengthening the negation). In 
 the same way a predicate consisting of a preposition 
 and its noun, or of an adverb, stands before the subject 
 when the latter is undetermined and is not more 
 precisely defined by any qualifying word or phrase, 
 
 as !sL;ot «|JJ| ^ in the house is a woman; ^^ t*-g-<^ 
 
 l£.\ among them are some who maintain. 
 
 Note. A predicate of this sort may even stand before a 
 determined subject, but in that case the logical emphasis is on the 
 
 *o- • „ . , o So- 
 
 subject, as i»ij k5J"^, Zaid is with me, -while in ^^jJic j.jj the 
 
 logical stress is on the predicate: Zaid is with me. 
 142. Verbal adjectives (§ 60&), in virtue of the verbal 
 
 idea inherent in them, sometimes stand as predicate 
 hefore the noun in the place of a finite verb, as tXjv 
 fj„fi. s^l i-J)^ Zaid, his father struck Amr = Zaid's 
 father &c. The predicate, thus placed in advance, 
 frequently agrees in gender and number with its subject 
 
 following, as ^^Aj itiJ^^JI whose hearts have been 
 inclined (to Islam), but in respect of case it agrees 
 with the word on which this kind of sentence is 
 generally dependent, as jjijj lotXi *~aj with a mouth, 
 
 whose saliva is sweet; l^itpl £lU^ Ci\yS UjIC we 
 found animals, the species of which differed from each 
 other, of different sorts. A circumstantial accusative 
 
143, 144, 145. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 121 
 
 (§ 113 &) may also, in this way, refer to a following 
 subject, although it is really dependent on the preced- 
 ing verbs, as s^| \S^C jLjC %[^ Zaid came, while his 
 father rode. 
 
 When the subject of a nominal sentence consists 143. 
 of a demonstrative pronoun, the latter agrees in gen- 
 
 der with the following predicate, as JOsLi- 5 j^ this 
 
 is a female slave. 
 
 The predicate of Lo not (often also that of jlll 144. 
 
 §§ 50 and 110, and of JjLS'§ 110 when occurring with a 
 
 negative) is introduced by i_» as dUUj | jije Lo this is 
 
 no king. 
 
 In the relation of subject and predicate (cf. § 119«) 145. 
 may stand in Arabic: 
 
 A thing and its dimensions, as L^K<3 i^-*^ t>***JI a. 
 the pillar is thirty cubits (high). 
 
 A thing and that which it resembles, as J*jc^ «xJ I 6. 
 Lipl selling is the likeness of (is like) usury; and so 
 with liJ (§ 95/}, which likewise may stand in any of 
 the three cases. 
 
 A thing and its parts, as <^\Jj^ «jv I ^JiiS J^Xo c. 
 the kings of the Persians fall into four divisions. 
 
a. 
 
 122 146. KOM. SENT. 147. NOM. SENT. WITH mnu, aiitia. 
 
 d. A thing and its material JotXi* %ASo'^\ oa*J 
 jj-"^ \_^JJS',. one part of the toes was of iron and 
 another of clay. 
 
 146. In certain cases a pronoun has to be supplied as 
 
 subject of a nominal sentence, as d^^ «J JUu it is 
 said of him "he is Muhammed", i. e. he is called 
 
 Muhammed, prop. = d^4<s ^. 
 
 147. The particles ^j^ (nan) behold, and ^t that (of. 
 § 96<?), the compound particles ^Xf (Jv^^) never- 
 theless, (jli'as if, ^i! because, and other combinations, 
 
 and also JJiJ perhaps, v^aJJ would that, are all follow- 
 ed by a nominal sentence the subject of which stands 
 
 G " ^ u^ M 
 
 in the accusative, as *JjS' IJoj jjI behold (truly) Z. 
 
 is generous. The predicate of the nominal sentence 
 
 following ^t or .1, if it should consist of an adverb 
 or a preposition with its case (see §§ 139, 141), may 
 stand before the subject, which must still be in the 
 
 accusative, as ^s-j La.» ^\ verily (only in the rarest 
 cases translatable) here is a man; \j^ X*JLftJt ^ m' 
 in the citadel is a prison. 
 
 Note. Sometimes a qualifying plii-ase consisting of a preposi- 
 tion and its case appears, in addition, before the subject, as ^J jjjl 
 i^\^ iUJJ I have a request (to make) of thee. 
 
148. KOMiNAL SENT. WITH Hnna AND 'anno. 123 
 
 The corroborative particle J(§ 95 g) is frequently b. 
 prefixed to the predicate after a preceding "^t^, as 
 JiLo _rJ LjLI ijI^ truly our father is in error; or 
 
 even to the subject, as j" a*J >iUi ^ jjHruly there- 
 in is an example. 
 
 After the particles above mentioned, the pronoun c. 
 of the 3. pers. sing, masc, as the so-called pronoun 
 of the fact, is sometimes used as the subject of a 
 nominal sentence; the predicate, in this case, consists 
 of a complete sentence (cf. § 139d), as ^JLaj 51 joI 
 ^jyOj.k!sJI of a truth (= the fact is), the evil-doers do 
 not prosper; J^ .j.f iXt-kJ J^o xj f J.xs it is rela- 
 ted that M. had four female slaves. 
 
 While ^f introduces a new and independent sen- 148. 
 
 15* a. 
 
 tence, one introduced by ^j\ always forms part of 
 
 another sentence, as g^xo i^ J^ aJjf ^\ JLij" *JI 
 
 G ^ 
 
 wjtXS knowest thou not that God is mighty over all; 
 here the sentence beginning with ^| is really the ob- 
 ject. In (c^-ct &ji (j vii-Aij *J there has never been 
 any doubt that he is blind, the sentence with ^| is 
 
 ^ a— JO* ", 
 
 virtually in the genitive; in ^JS jol ^5AiXJ it has 
 reached my ears that he is married, it represents the 
 subject. 
 
124 148. SENTENCES WITH 'an und md. 
 
 Verbal sentences introduced by ^^1 also form in 
 this way an integral part of the principal sentence; a 
 distinction must be made, however, between two va- 
 rieties of this construction. If the sentence beginning 
 
 with ^1 asserts that something is now going on, or 
 that it has now ceased, the verb in the subordinate 
 
 clause remains in the indicative, as ^| ^j^ oJ^ 
 
 (or simply ^|) J»,£ ^^ I am surprised that he takes 
 
 the field against me, Li'Lo ^1 ^l dJi!> I^Jjiii and 
 
 they did this until they died; if, on the other hand, 
 something is conceived as falling in the future and 
 therefore still uncertain, the subjunctive (cf. § 100) 
 
 is required, as f Jo Joiij ^jl dU it falls to thee to do 
 
 so, jL^\yAi\ 'ya stXi' (j! ^c*^. it is fit and proper 
 
 that thou shouldst guard against shameful actions. 
 
 Note. Sometimes the preposition which indicates the relation 
 
 of the two parts of the sentence is omitted before |ol and ^ol, as 
 
 a* - ! == - .1 
 
 jjjl Jiiyi = jjjU liUj this -was for the reason that, and it was so, 
 
 because &c. 
 
 In the cases discussed in the above sub-section 
 an infinitive may take the place of ^t with the finite 
 verb. Quite as frequently as ^.j in such cases, we 
 find Uo with the finite verb (of course always in the 
 
149. SEVERAL PEEDICATES. 160. KEaATIVE aENTENOES. 125 
 
 indicative), as Ij^) viJCi Co ^^ I am surprised 
 that thou hast struck Zaid = Ij^v iSJ'j^ ^V- The 
 use of this so-called infinitive-?wa is very common; 
 thus we have it in U^ (as)— made up of t^and Lx — 
 with a verbal sentence: ^^^ CiJi U^J^j Cy^ Zaid 
 was beaten as 'Amr was beaten' 
 
 When more than one predicate is required in a 149 
 
 nominal sentence, they generally follow each other 
 
 without a conjunction (cf. §§ 122, 113 &, note b), as 
 
 s - ** - ^ 
 
 IvaIa ia-Jtfta^ ^\ I am attentive and well-informed. 
 
 The same is the case with the predicates of the verb 
 
 J^LT (which frequently occurs as the substantive verb) 
 
 and the verbs akin thereto (see § 110), as xXjCUlf 'LS 
 
 Vg » nry ^ ^^yJ Lg-tdju 'iJiXiJ<S 'ihXpU^ v^Jt j^l jjyaj" 
 
 i_AA*.o the kingdom will in the latter days become 
 
 mixed and a prey to dissension, and one of which 
 one part will be strong and another weak. 
 
 In negative verbal sentences we find Uo with the 150. 
 perfect, as i_jj^ Lc he did not drink, or J with the 
 apocopated impf. (jussive, cf. § 101 c). 
 
 With the impf. indicative Lo is used, as i-jlxio Ljo 6. 
 
126 151. EXCEPTIVE PARTICLE. 
 
 he does not drink, or !^ with the same tense i— >>-cio ^ 
 he does not, or he will not drink. 
 
 Other uses of Si are («) with the apoc. impf. (cf. 
 § 101 &) and (h) with the perfect (cf. § 98 d). As negatir- 
 ing an act in the past "3 can only stand before the per- 
 feet when two perfects come together, as I^f^ (^'tJ^-o "3 
 J^^ he neither believed nor prayed, or after sentences 
 with other negatives. 
 
 Note. A preceding negative, even in the same sentence, is 
 frequently resumed by means of 2), as 4*^ Us lij Hiyi}] J-sv J lie 
 did not find the village nor yet his friend again. 
 
 151. After the exceptive particle !S)t that which is ex- 
 cepted stands in the accusative when a positive sentence 
 
 precedes, as IlVjj !iil jjwLJI sLi. the people came, ex- 
 cept Zaid; when a negative sentence precedes that 
 which is excepted is less frequently in the accusative, 
 but rather, as a rule, in the same case as the word 
 
 to which the limitation or exception applies, as Lo 
 tXj\ yi^ r*y^' *^ ^^^ people came not, except Zaid; 
 t)oj !y| t>.s>Lj '^)fo l-^ I passed no one except Z.! 
 |w+£ iit^ ttX.:s-t ooy^ Lx! I have struck no one, except 
 'Amr. Very frequently in such cases it is the exception 
 that brings us the necessary logical complement, as 
 
152. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 127 
 
 Juwj ^ft lo^>JO Lo I have not passed (anyone) except 
 Zaid, i. e. I have passed only Zaid. 
 
 J«j to ^1 - 
 
 Note. Also in the sentence iHS 2(J iJJ 2) (§111) there is no 
 God but Allah, the last word is in the nominative, because it is 
 the logical subject (there is no God, if not Allah; but Allah is). 
 
 • •= a <^' 
 
 In the sentence *iH3j| ^^jWI 4JUO 2)| Kj^ 2)3 J^ a there is neither 
 
 power nor strength except (in union) with Allah, the high and 
 
 mighty One, the ideas of power and strength (SjJj J)*") niust 
 logically be supplied before the exception. 
 
 Chapter V. Compound Sentence. (§§ 152—161). 
 
 Co-ordinate sentences are as a rule joined together 152. 
 by a copulative particle. Thus a simple co-ordinated 
 
 sentence is usually introduced by ; (§ 952'), as J.i.0 
 
 JUl Jo\ Z. entered and said, o (§ 95 e), on the other 
 hand, is used when the connection of the two sen- 
 tences is less close, when, for example, the second event 
 follows the first only after a certain interval, as \jo-.xi 
 "^Ixs Jov Zaid was ill; soon after he died, o, according- 
 ly,is often used when the subject is changed, as lNj\ *Ls> 
 «J oJlks Zaid came ; and so I said to him. ^jU with 
 a following nominal sentence expresses the motive of 
 the action and is to be rendered by 'then', 'therefore'. 
 
128 153, 154. BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 Note a. In lively narrative prose the connective particles 
 are often dispensed with, particularly when the story is told in 
 dialogue form, the words of each speaker being then mostly intro- 
 
 ' duced by a simple J\3, 
 
 Note b. As illustration of the omission of the connectives 
 (asyndeton) must not be quoted certain combinations of two verbs 
 (of. § 99 note a), in which the second verb denotes rather the 
 end to which some more general activity is directed; such, for 
 example, is the imperfect with verbs denoting a beginning. In 
 other cases, a perfect may be made to depend on a perfect, an 
 imperfect on an imperfect, an imperative on an imperative, as 
 
 IjJUIaJ lyoU they arose and fought with each other; Xj M k I 3 
 
 arise and woo her. 
 
 Note u. Among the connective particles ,jXa. may also, in 
 a certain sense, be reckoned, when it does not introduce a 
 result expected in the future (§ 100), but denotes the actual 
 
 completion of an action, as in the sentence «X.o JJj ^-Sa. ■Xm he 
 jom-neyed until he alighted at Mecca = he journeyed and at last 
 
 alighted &c. In such cases ^^Sa. may also be followed by an imperf. 
 
 indicative or by ^\ with a nominal sentence. 
 
 153. Relative sentences or clauses are of two kinds, 
 those which do not accompany a noun and those 
 which do accompany and qualify a noun. As regards 
 the asyndetical connection of several qualifications, 
 the latter class is subject to the same treatment as 
 the qualifying adjuncts discussed in §§ 120 — 122. 
 
 154. Those relative sentences that do not depend on 
 or qualify a noun are introduced either by ^SS\ (see 
 § 14 «) he that, that which, whoso, &c., which is 
 
155. RELATIVE CLAUSES. 129 
 
 declinable and always determined, or by tbe indeclin- 
 able pronouns ^^.i (he that, one that, whosoever, those 
 
 that, such . . . as) and G (that which, a thing that, what). 
 The former is sometimes determined, sometimes unde- 
 
 termined. Exx: xxiLi^JI ijL^pI *.» UjLjL l^wftT^j.j jJI 
 those that reject our revelations, they will be the people 
 of the left hand (^^^ jJI is here in the nom. as being 
 the subject); Ujyb oJiiia. ,j^ dJsiW (the devil said:) 
 Shall I fall down before one whom thou hast formed 
 of clay (jj.<o is here in the genit.) ? jv^l^L jj^yy 
 I^JUu (uLJ Uo they speak with their mouth what 
 is not in their hearts (Uo is here accus.). 
 
 A relative clause is made to follow and qualify 155, 
 a substantive by means of ,j jJt only when the sub- 
 stantive in question (the antecedent) is determined; 
 with it (CtXJI agrees in gender and number, as y^^jwo 
 *L». (< jJt J^ Jl I struck the man that came. The 
 explanation of this is that ^jJI is originally not a 
 relative in our sense of that word, but a demonstra- 
 tive, and as such it is always determined. The above 
 sentence, for example, means, strictly speaking: I 
 struck that man there, he came. On the other hand 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.^ " 
 
130 156. BELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 the relative clause is appended without ^^ jJf when 
 
 the antecedent is undetermined, as tU&. ^=>-> i,:iOj_to 
 I struck a man who came (prop. I struck a man, he 
 came). 
 
 Note, (^jJI is also dispensed with when the antecedent is 
 only determined in a general sense (i. e. when it has the generic 
 article see § 118c), as I^UmiI J*»w jUsUI J.*«J like an ass that 
 carries books. 
 
 156. The relative clause, which we have seen to he 
 strictly speaking merely a verbal or a nominal sen- 
 tence subordinated to an antecedent noun, ought by 
 rule to contain a pronoun referring back to this an- 
 
 tecedent, as ^^ »yjt ^d^\ J^JI the man whose 
 father is rich; \Ck^ ^^^ ^\ xj ^[fhe had a son, 
 who was named M. (in this case the pronoun is im- 
 plied in the verb); J».ji jj JLL Jo^C a man who is 
 named Z. (prop, of whom it is said: [he is] Zaid, cf. 
 § 146). The pronoun which in this way points back 
 to the antecedent may stand in any part of the rela- 
 
 tive sentence; thus in the sentence lAJ^t saJI ljvJ Jo 
 Jlaxj juI i^jJb (J jJl the army had come up close to 
 him , regarding which he thought that it was still at 
 a distance, it does not appear till we reach the sen- 
 tence which is subordinated by ".! to the verb ^^Jj5. 
 
157. OIECUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. 131 
 
 Collectives which denote living creatures (cf. § 136 d) 
 may he followed here also by a plural verb, as 
 ij^.A-«fc5 *jj people that believe. 
 
 Note a. The omission of the pronoun, however, is not un- 
 frequent, especially when it would merely consist of a suffix of 
 
 the 3. person, as C»I> lo ,j1b c^^ for 4515 I regret what I said. 
 
 Note b. In certain cases the antecedent may be repeated in 
 the relative clause; indeed, this is the favourite construction with 
 
 Jr as »_>ur «J i^ J.JJ Jr ii^ ^\S3 jX«> SL. ^irthe (idoi) 
 
 Hubal had seven arrows (for casting the lot), of which each single 
 arrow had writing upon it. 
 
 A special kind of subordinate sentence is the 157. 
 circumstantial clause. Such a clause may consist: 
 
 1) Of a nominal sentence introduced by the particle a. 
 ., the subject of which may have been already men- 
 
 tioned or may be something quite new, as jLul ooLo 
 
 SDCo (^t x«;^K , J8. Amina died while she was return- 
 
 ing to Mecca; wufe^o jUjI. Jov ^:l>\jo Zaid died while 
 
 his son was still young; with a compound nominal 
 
 sentence JUjtX+JI Joajb yo. »L« he journeyed taking 
 
 Medina as his goal. A sentence, whose predicate con- 
 sisting of a preposition and its case comes before 
 its subject, ace. to § 141, may stand as a circumstan- 
 
 tial clause, without ., as ^Ji i£^. li(^) ^^y^y^ I 
 went out with a bow in my hand. 
 
132 158. TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 b. 2) Of a verbal sentence frequently; in this case the 
 imperf. either stands alone or is preceded by jLs^. 
 When the sentence is a negative one, the negative is 
 '3 or UoT; or the verb may stand in the apoc.impf. with 
 "J or pr (as the negation of the perf.). We may 
 also have the perfect with jJl or ^L?^j when negative 
 with Lo,; thus we get the following: *iA.^Sj Jov *Ls» 
 Z. came laughing; ooLs. -i^^ J U^^- is^ ' '^'^ 
 Uxft JXJI ^ ooiJLj tXs^ MU ^5J,fv<ll (Zakariya) 
 said: how shall I have a male child, seeing my wife 
 is barren and I have reached too great an age; i^^'ii 
 Ji.£ |Jl1wJ '3 JilliS he entered the room without 
 
 greeting me. 
 
 Note. In contrast to the stiffer accusative of condition 
 (§ 113 6) the verbal circumstantial clause expresses the commence- 
 ment of the action; there is very little difference, however, 
 
 between ,£Xs\mj^ .jjj lU. and lXa.l<o ^y lU.. 
 158. In temporal clauses (also in conditional clauses) 
 
 which are formed with the particle lit when, if, we find 
 in the protasis as well as in the apodosis the perfect 
 
 in the sense of our present or future, ^^ (jitT lit 
 
 xjULo oJ6 w«^t when John takes the thing in hand, 
 
 its difficulties are easily surmounted. 
 
 a. 
 
159. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 133 
 
 NoTe a. The imperfect maj' also stand after I jl if the action 
 takes place repeatedly. Should I jl be followed hy a compound 
 nominal sentence, as d'f^ »*svsOT I Jl when hell is heated, it is 
 considered that this is but another way of writing what we should 
 expect to find expressed in a verbal sentence (and so with j^l). 
 
 Note b. A sentence with lit may also be inserted between 
 two closely related words, or rather it is to be regarded as form- 
 ing with its apodosis a complete unity. Thus : IsCW I j^ \^}^, WgJW 
 Ulij (J there were two gates, which when they were opened 
 could not be shut (again). In the apodosis to I jj a perfect is found 
 where we should expect an imperfect (cf. § 99 e), as Ij^I l>5| \y^ 
 UUoU IjJa. IjSIkU U^j they were wont, when they captured a 
 man and then released him, to cut off his front lock of hair. Very 
 frequently a sentence like this, with I jj, is inserted between j^Sa. 
 (§ 152 note c) and its proper verb, as jIjJT Ja.j IJ^ ^^Sa. 45**? 
 liSSyi\ I followed him until I overtook him as he entered the house. 
 
 Lo in the sense of 'so long as' takes the perfect, as 6. 
 ^Li lit ^^0) Lo so long as I live I shall be thankful. 
 
 In sentences containing the notion of a condition 159. 
 which is the case after ^|^ if, ^ if anybody, L« if 
 anything, I ^g^ whatsoever, \Ji.^-, Lo v_ftjo'how, how- 
 soever, jjcx when &c. the perf. is used in the sense 
 of our present or future, and so too in the apodosis, 
 
 as vilXu> dU<!> ^.%i (j1 if t^o^ <io6st that, thou 
 
134 160, 161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 
 
 wilt perish; Jb JU* ^ whoso seeketh, findeth (if 
 any one seeks, he finds). 
 
 Note. If the perf. is meant to retain its proper force in the 
 protasis, the verb jjU" is placed after ^J, as ^^ lii i-aj^ ^^ ^[ 
 jiij-oJ J-5 if his camisole is torn in front, she has told the truth. 
 
 160. The particles above mentioned may also take the 
 ' apoc. impf. in protasis and apodosis alike, as l^r*^^' ^ji 
 
 Ijo) IT^lV-Ij if ye wait patiently, God will help you. 
 
 J. The apoc. impf. also stands in the apodosis after 
 
 an imperative (with conditional force) in the protasis, 
 
 as LXJ.^ "[^ iXii" ^^ live contentedly (i. e. if thou 
 
 live &c.) thou wilt be a king, 
 c. An apoc. impf. in the protasis may be followed by a 
 
 perfect in the apodosis, as nywiio >-«jaj ,j|_ if thou 
 
 wait patiently, thou wilt gain the victory. If the clauses 
 
 are both negative, we have Ij with the apoc. impf., 
 
 as ^S |J --vAJ |vJ m' if ^^ "io^s not go away, I am 
 
 not satisfied. 
 
 Note. Occasionally the apodosis of a conditional sentence 
 is •wanting, e. g. I jjb jjVT ^\ if this is so — supply : then it is well 
 (Arab. l«*i). 
 
 161. Before the apodoses of conditional sentences, 
 other than those discussed in § 159 — 160 we find the 
 
 particle o, which is employed: 
 
161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 135 
 
 1) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence, as a. 
 
 kj (J^j^ ■-"' ijt^ if he is refractory, then alas for 
 
 him! Also before sentences with ,."«! and before 
 interrogative sentences. 
 
 2) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, of which b. 
 the perfect is intended to retain its force as a perfect 
 
 (cf. § 159 note), especially, too, when J*J> (cf. § 98 e) 
 is employed, as Ipy; ^^^ tjjujol <XHi I^Ull ^^ 
 ci^JJt liJUJ^ '-♦^^ if *^^y become Moslems, then have 
 they come to the right way, and if they turn aside, 
 then thou hast but to announce the message. 
 
 3) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence that con- c. 
 
 tains an impf. with one of the particles OylL, ^^ J^, 
 or that expresses a command or a wish, as o-i^^t 
 l^^jbt jj J!(jLs>.Li ^Ii> jj if thou findst thyself among 
 people, milk into their pail. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 COMPUTATIOlSr OF TIME. 
 
 a. Names of the Days of the Week. 
 In the following list the various names may also 
 he used with the word for day, ^.jj omitted. 
 
 1. 4X^.5(1 j.^ (1st day) Sunday. 
 
 2. ^jJSlSJ ^^ (2nd day) Monday. 
 
 3. eliiliir |1^ (3rd day) Tuesday. 
 
 -r.i^S"'^, 
 
 4. sLsuj yi -jj (4th day) Wednesday. 
 
 5. ij«Ji^l *^J (5th day) Thursday. 
 
 6. xilil -1j (day of assemhly) Friday. 
 
 7. i,::;wAA«Jt -yj (Sabhath) Saturday. 
 
 6. Names of the Months. 
 
 In the names of the months the word wg^i, month, 
 may be prefixed in the constr. state throughout; 
 indeed, as the following table shows, some of the 
 names are always so written. 
 
COMPUTATION OF TIME. 137 
 
 1. ^y£S^\ al-Muharram. 
 
 2. wAao Safar. 
 
 3. J^ii| «^. ^_g^ the first Rabi'. 
 
 4. j^jLaJI «AJ^ w^xo the second Rabi'. 
 5- ti^lill (^i^Us. the first Gumada. 
 
 6. s^!i(l ^3Lija. the latter Gumada. 
 
 7. >_as»^ Ragab. 
 
 8. ^jLajLco Sa'ban. 
 
 9. (jLfljoT Ramadan (the month of fasting). 
 
 S = ' V 
 
 10. Jlj.^ Sawwal. 
 
 11. StX*iL)| .6 Du-lka'da. 
 
 12. X^l ^(i Du-lhigga (month of the pilgrimage, hagg). 
 
 c. The Year. 
 
 The Moslems reckon by lunar years of 354 days; 
 their first year is usually considered as beginning 
 at the date of the Christian era given below. In 
 calculating from one era to the other, it may be 
 reckoned that 33 eolar years are equal to 34 lunar years. 
 
138 
 
 COMPUTATION or TIME. 
 
 In the works of European scholars it is customary, 
 by means of comparative tables, to give the precise 
 day of our era with which each Moslem year begins 
 (see the Bibliography). The following short table will 
 be useful in helping to a rapid approximation of the 
 date required. 
 The Moslem year 
 
 1 ■ 
 
 began 
 
 16. July 622 A. 
 
 D 
 
 101 
 
 » 
 
 24. July 719 „ 
 
 r 
 
 201 
 
 V 
 
 30. July 816 „ 
 
 H 
 
 301 
 
 n 
 
 7. Aug. 913 I, 
 
 n 
 
 401 
 
 n 
 
 15. Aug. 1010 " 
 
 H 
 
 501 
 
 « 
 
 22. Aug. 1107 n 
 
 V 
 
 601 
 
 H 
 
 29. Aug. 1204 « 
 
 H 
 
 701 
 
 » 
 
 6. Sept. 1301 « 
 
 55 
 
 801 
 
 n 
 
 13. Sept. 1398 « 
 
 11 
 
 901 
 
 « 
 
 21. Sept. 1495 „ 
 
 » 
 
 1001 
 
 n 
 
 8. Oct. 1592 „ 
 
 » 
 
 1101 
 
 V 
 
 15. Oct. 1689 >. 
 
 n 
 
 1201 
 
 H 
 
 24. Oct. 1786 . 
 
 7) 
 
 1301 
 
 » 
 
 2. Nov. 1883 n 
 
 n 
 
 1313 
 
 n 
 
 24. June 1895 v 
 
 n 
 
LITERATURE. 
 
 A history of Arabic literature as a whole, or even of particular 
 parts of it, does not exist, for the work of Hammer-Purgstall (Litteratur- 
 geschichte der Araber, von ihrem Beginn bis zu Bnde des zwolften 
 Jahrhunderts der Hidsohret. 7 Bande. Wien 1850 — 56. 40.) must 
 be described as premature and as useless by reason of its numerous 
 mistakes. An acquaintance with Arabic literature must therefore be 
 got partly from works by Arabs on the history of their literature, partly 
 from European catalogues. In the course of the present century 
 numerous works, including not a few specimens of the eai-lier litera- 
 ture, have been printed in the East, especially in Cairo (government 
 press in Bulak), Beiriit (where there is an excellent press managed 
 by the Jesuits) and Constantinople; also in Persia, India and the 
 island of Java. We must, in particular, mention the great quantity 
 of valuable Arabic manuscripts that still await pubUcation both in 
 European and eastern libraries. A synopsis of such catalogues of 
 these MSS. as have hitherto appeared will be found below. 
 
 In the following selection, books of special importance are marked 
 with a star, those recommended to beginners with a dagger. 
 
 A. BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 I. Printed Works. 
 
 u, Written by Orientals. 
 
 *Kitab al-Fihrist (by Ibn oK Ya'kiib an-nadim; wrote in the year 377 
 H., beg. 3. May 987) mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben von Oustav 
 Fliigel. Nach dessen Tode besorgt von Johannes Bodiger und 
 August Mailer. 2 voU. Leipzig 1871 — 2. 
 
 ♦Lexicon bibliographicum et encyolopaedicum a Mustapha ben Abdallah 
 Katib Jelibi dicto et nomine Haji Khalfa {Haggi HaUfa \ 1658) 
 celebrate compositum. Ad codicum Vindobonesium Parisiensium 
 et Berolinensis fidem primum edidit latine vertit et commentario 
 indicibusque instruxit Oustavus Flugel. Leipzig-London 1835 — 
 1858. 7 voll. 40. 
 
140 Literature A. 
 
 P Written by Europeans. 
 
 Bibliotheca arabica. Auctam nunc atque integram edidit D. Ohristianus 
 Fridericus de Schnurrer. Halae ad Salam 1811. 
 
 f Bibliotheca orientalis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. I. conte- 
 nant les livres arabes, persans et tares imprimes depuis I'invention 
 de I'imprimerie jusqu'a nos jours tant en Europe qu'en Orient etc. 
 par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. — Bibliotheca orientalis. 
 Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. II. contenant 1. supplement 
 du premier volume. 2. Littfa'ature de I'Orient chretien. 3. Litte- 
 rature de I'lnde etc. Par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1861. 
 
 t(Euting) Katalog der kaiserlichen Universitats- und LandesbibUothek 
 in Strassburg. Arabische Litteratur. Strassbm-g 1877. 4". 
 
 Bibliographie des ouvrages arabes ou relatifs aux Arabes publies dans 
 I'Burope chretienne de 1810 a 1885 par Victor Chauvin. I. Pre- 
 face. — Table de Schnurrer. — Les Proverbes. Liege 1892 
 (is being continued). 
 
 Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht fiber die morgenlandischen Studien, 
 von 1844 an in Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen 
 Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847 ff. The annual reports on works 
 published up to 1868 appeared in the Zeitschrift, those for the 
 years 1859 — 61, 62 — 67 (one part), autumn 1877—81 appeared 
 as independent publications. 
 
 Bibliotheca orientalis oder eine voUstandige Liste der im Jahre 1876 
 in Deutschland, Prankreich, Eugland und den Colonien erschie- 
 nenen Biicher, Broschiiren, Zeitschriften, u. s. w. iiber die Sprachen, 
 Eeligionen, Antiquitaten, Literaturen, Geschichte und Geographie 
 des Ostens, zusammengestellt von Karl Friederici. Leipzig. 
 8 years (to 1883). 
 
 Bibliography for 1883—85 (not completed) in the Literatur-Blatt fiir 
 orien^alische Philologie unter 3Iitwii-kung von Dr. Johannes 
 Klatt herausgegeben von Prof. Dr. Ernst Kuhn. 1883 — 85. 
 
 *Orientalische Bibliographie . . . herausgegeben von A. Miiller, now 
 E. Kuhn. Berlin 1888 ff. 
 
 Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. 
 I. Druckschriften und Ahnliches. Leipzig 1880 (a new and 
 largely augmented edition will appear in a year or two). 
 
 A. 6. Ellis, Catalogue of the Arabic books in the British Museum 
 Vol I. A-L. London 1894. 
 
 Eor works from oriental presses an important guide is: E. J. Brill, 
 Catalogue periodique de livres orientaux I— IX, Leide 1883 ff. 
 (To parts I — VII Index de noms d'auteurs et de noms de livres, 
 ib. 1889). 
 
LlTEEATlTEE A. 141 
 
 II. Manuscripts. 
 
 (Die Handsohriftenverzeichuisse der konis;lichen Bibliothek in Ber- 
 lin. Vols. 7 £f.). Verzeicliniss der arabischen Handschriften 
 von W. Ahlwardt. 40. 1. Band. Berlin 1887; 2. Bd. 1889; 
 3. Bd. 1891; 4. Bd. 1892; 5. Bd. 1893; 6. Bd. 1894. A 7th 
 and last vol. will appear soon. 
 
 [Balle) Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutsohen Morgenlandischen Ge- 
 sellschaft. II. Handschriften u. s. w. Leipzig 1881. 
 
 Verzeichnis der orientalischeu Handschriften der Bibliothek des 
 -HaZ^e'schen "Waisenhauses von ffr. Aug. Arnold und Augvst 
 Muller. (Programm der Lateinischen Hauptschule). Halle 
 1876. 40. 
 
 (University Library, Leipzig) Die Befaiya. Von Prof. Fleischer: 
 Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen GeseUsohaft. 8, 
 S. 573—584. 
 
 (Municipal Library in Leipzig) Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum, 
 qui in bibliotheca senatoria civitatis Lipsiensis asservantur, ed. 
 Naumann. Codices orientalium linguarum descripserunt H. 0. 
 Fleischer et Fr. Deliizsch, Grimmae 1838. 41. 
 
 Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium Bibliothecae regiae 
 Dresdensis. Scripsit et indicibus instruxit H. O. Fleischer. 
 Lipsiae 1831. 4". 
 
 Die arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Gotha. 
 Verzeichnet von Wilhelm Pertsch. 5 Biinde. Gotha 1878 — 1892. 
 (Also w. the title: Die orientalischen Handschriften der h. B. 
 zu G. Dritter Theil). 
 
 Die arabischen Handschriften der K. Hof- und Staatsbibliothek in 
 Miinchen, Toesahriehea^ on Joseph Aumer. Miinchen 1866. (Cata- 
 logus codicum manuscriptorum Bibliothecae regiae Monacensis. 
 Tomi primi pars secunda.) 
 
 (Tubingen University Library) Catalog arabischer Handschriften in 
 Damaskus gesammelt von J, G. Wetzstein. Berlin 1863. 
 
 Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca aca- 
 demica Bonnensi servatorum adornavit Joannes Gildemeister. 
 Bonnae 1864—1876. 4°. 
 
 Katalog der hebraischen, arabischen, persischen und tiirkischeu Hand- 
 schriften der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek zu 
 Strassburg. Bearbeitet von S. Landauer. Strassburg 1881. 4". 
 
 Die arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Handschriften der kaiser- 
 lioh-kbniglichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien. Von Gustav Fliigel. 
 3 Bande. Wien 1865—7. 40. 
 
 (Copenhagen) Codices orientales Bibliothecae regiae Havniensis enu- 
 merati et descripti a N. L. Wesiergaard etc. II. Codices hebr. 
 et arab. Hafniae 1851. 
 
142 Literature A. 
 
 Codices Orientales bibliothecae regiae universitatis Lundensis recensuit 
 Gurolus Johannes Tornberg. Lundae 1850. 
 
 Codices Arabici, Persici et Turciei bibliothecae regiae universitatis 
 Vpsaliensis. Disposuit et descripsit C. T. Tornberg. Upsaliae 
 1849. 4°. 
 
 (Paris) Catalogue des manuscrits arabes de la Bibliotheque Nationale 
 par le Baron de Slane. Pr. Fascicule. Paris 1883. Sec. Fasc. 
 1889. Trois. Fasc. 1895. 40. (To be continued.) 
 
 Catalogue general des manuscrits des biblioth^ques publiques de 
 France. Departements. Tome TI (p. 437—482). Marseille. Par 
 M. I'abbe Albanks. Paris 1892. — Tome XVIII. Alger. Par 
 E. Faynan. Paris 1893. 
 
 [Leide) Catalogus codicum orientalium Bibliothecae academiae Imgduno 
 Batavae I. II. auctore E. P. A. Dozy. III. IT. auct. P. de Jong 
 et M. J. de Goeje. V. auctore M. J. de Goeje. VI. auctore 
 M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Bavatorum 1851 — 77. — Editio se- 
 cunda. Vol. I auctoribus M. J. de Goeje et M. Th. Houtsma. 
 Lugduni Bat. 1888. 
 
 (London) Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium qui in Museo 
 Britannico asservantur. Pars secunda codices arabicos amplectens. 
 Londini 1846. fol. 
 
 [London) Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the 
 British Museum (By Charles Bieu). London 1894, 4". 
 
 [London) A catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the library of the 
 India Office. By Otto Loth. London 1877. 4". 
 
 ( Oxford) Bibliothecae Bodleianae codicum manuscriptorum orientalium, 
 videlicet hebraicorum, chaldaicorum, syriacorum, aethiopicorum, 
 arabicorum, persicorum, turcicorum, copticorumque catalogus a 
 Joanne Vri confectus. Pars Prima Oxonii 1787. — Partis se- 
 cundae volumen primum arabicos complectens confecit Alexander 
 Nicoll. Oxonii 1821. fol. 
 
 [Cambridge) Catalogus Bibliothecae Burckhardtianae cum appendice 
 librorum aliorum orientalium in Bibliotheca Academica Canta- 
 brigensitis asservatorum — confecit T. Preston. Cantabrigiae 
 1853. 4C. 
 
 Catalogue of the Oriental Manuscripts in the Library of King's Col- 
 lege, Cambridge. By Edward Henry Palmer: Journal of the 
 Boy. As. Society of Gr. Britain and Ireland. New Series III. 
 105 ff. 
 
 A descriptive Catalogue of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish Manu- 
 scripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. By E. H. 
 Palmer. Cambridge and London 1870. 
 
 (Escurial) BibUotheca arabico-hispana Escurialensi sive Librorum 
 omnium Mss. quos Arabice ab auctoribus magnam partem Arabo- 
 Hispanis composites Bibliotheca CoenobiiEscurialensis complectitur 
 
Literature A. 143 
 
 recensio et explanatio opera et studio Michaelis Casiri etc. 2 tomi. 
 Matriti 1760. fol. — Les manuscrits arabes de I'Bscurial dfecrits par 
 Sartwig Derenbourg. Tome premier. Paris 1884. 
 Catdlogo de los Manuscritos Arabes existentes en la Biblioteca Na- 
 
 cional de Madrid [F. 9. EoUes). Madrid 1889. 
 {Florence) Bibliothecae Mediceae Laurentianae et Palatinae Codicum 
 manuseriptorum orientalium catalogus, Steph. Bvod. Assemanus 
 recensuit. Morentiae 1742. fol. 
 (Venice) Catalogo dei Codici manoscritfci oriental! della Biblioteca 
 Naniana, compilato dell' abbate Simone Assemani. 2 Part. Pa- 
 dova 1787—1792. 41'. 
 
 Eemarques sur les manuscrits orientaux de la Collection Marsigli a 
 Bologne suivies de la liste compUte des Manuscrits arabes de 
 la meme collection par le Baron Victor Rosen. Roma 1885 (atti 
 della K. Academia dei Lincei. Serie 3". Tol. XII). 
 
 (Milan) Catalogo dei Codici arabi, persiani e turchi della Biblioteca 
 Ambrosiana (Hammer-Purgstall): Biblioteca Italiana t. XCIV, 
 pp. 22 and 322. 
 
 Cataloghi dei codici orientali di alcune biblioteche d'ltalia. 5 fasc. 
 Piienze 1878—1892. 
 
 Catalogue des manuscripts et xylographes orientaux de la BibliotliSque 
 Imperiale publique de St. Petersbourg. St. Petersbourg 1852. 
 
 {St. Petersburg) B. Dorn, Catalogue des ouvrages arabes, persans et tures, 
 publics a Constantinople, en Egypte et en Perse, qui se trouvent au 
 Mus6e asiatique de 1' Academie. — Chrouologisches Verzeichniss der 
 seit dem Jahre 1801 bis 1866 in Kasan gedruckten arabischen, 
 tiirkisohen, tatarischen und persischen Werke, als Katalog der in 
 dem asiatischen Museum befindlichen Schriften: Melanges asia- 
 tiques tires du Bulletin de 1' Academie Imp6riale des sciences de 
 St. P6tersbourg. Tome V. Livr. 5. St. Petersbourg 1867. 
 
 (St. Petersburg) Notices sommaires des manuscrits arabes du Musee 
 asiatique par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1881. 
 
 (St. Petersburg) Les manuscrits arabes de I'Institut des langues orien- 
 tales decrits par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1877. 
 
 (/. M. E. Qottwald) description of the Arabic Manuscripts in the 
 Library of the Imperial University of Kasan. Kasan (no date) 
 [1885]. In Russian. 
 
 (Cairo) Pihrist al-kutub al-'arabiya al-mahfiiza bil-kutubhana al-hedi- 
 wiye el-ka'ine biserai derb al-gamamiz. (Under the management 
 of Spitta and Vollers.) 7 vols. Cairo 1301—1308. Second 
 Edition. Vol. I 1310. 
 
 Catalog der mektebe 'umiimiye in Damascus. Damascus 1299. i". 
 
 Studia Sinaitica No. III. Catalogue of the Arabic Mss. in the Convent 
 of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai compiled by Margaret Dunlop 
 Gibson. London 1894. 
 
144 LiTEEATTJEE B, C. 
 
 (Batavia) Friedrich, Codicum arabicorum in Bibliotheca Societatis 
 Artium et Scientiarum quae Bataviae floret asservatorum Catalogus. 
 Absolvit indicibusque instruxit L. W. G. van den Berg. Bataviae 
 et Hagae 1873. 
 
 B. INTRODUCTION. 
 General. 
 
 Borhan-ed-diui es-Sernadji (as-Sarniigi lived at the and of the 12tli 
 century of our era) Enchiridion studiosi. Axabice edidit latine vertit 
 et lexieo explanavit Garolus Caspari. Praefatus est S. 0. Flei- 
 scher. Lipsiae 1838. 40. 
 
 Einleitung in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Mohammed 
 und zum Theil spater . . . von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1861. 
 
 Orientalische Skizzen. Ton Theodor Noldeke. Berlin 1892. Trans- 
 lated, with the title 'Sketches form Eastern History' by J. S. Black. 
 London and Edinburgh 1892. 
 
 De auctorum graeeorum versionibus et commentariis syriacis, arabicis, 
 ai-meniacis persicisque commentatio quam scripsit Joannes Georgius 
 Wenrich. Lipsiae 1842. 1845. 
 
 C. CHRESTOMATHIES. 
 
 *tJB. Brunnow, Chrestomathy of Arabic Prose-Pieces. Berlin and Lon- 
 don 1895. 
 
 •fChrestomatia arabica quam e libris Mss. vel impressis rarioribus 
 coUectam edidit Fr. A. Arnold. Pars I. Textum continens. Pars II. 
 Glossarium continens. Halis 1853.- - 
 
 •j-Chrestomathie Arabe, ou extraits de divers ecrivains Arabes, tant en 
 prose qu'en vers a I'usage des eleves de I'ecole sp^ciale des langues 
 orientales vivantes ; par A. J. Sylvestre de Sacy. II. ed. corr. et 
 augm. Paris 1826. 3 vol.; Tome IT Anthologie grammaticale 
 arabe. Paris 1829. 
 
 fChrestomathie elfementaire de I'Arabe litteral avec un glossaire par 
 H. Derenbourg et J. Spiro. 2 cd. Paris 1892. 
 
 Joh. Godofr. Lud. Kosegartenii Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus 
 manuscriptis Paris. Goth, et Berol. coUecta atque turn adscriptis 
 vocalibus, cum additis lexieo et adnotationibus explanata. Lip- 
 siae 1828. 
 
 Georg. Guil. Freytag, Chrestomathia arabica, grammatica historica in 
 usum scholarum Arabicaram ex codd. ineditis conscripta. 8" maj. 
 Bonnae 1834. 
 
Literature D. 145 
 
 tThier und Meusch.vor dem Konig der Genien. Ein arabisohes Mahr- 
 chen aus den Schriften der laufceren Briider ia Basra im TJrtext 
 
 herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici, 2. Ausgabe. Leipzig 1881. 
 
 Arabisch-deutsohes Wbrterbuoh zum Koran und Thier und Menacli 
 von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1894. 
 
 Brevia chrestomathia arabica. In usum scholarum ed. Joh Bollig 
 Koma 1881. 
 
 Chrestomatia ardbigo-espafiola por Fr. J. Lerchundi y Fr. J. Simonet. 
 Granada 1881. 
 
 Girffas and de Bosen. Arabic Chrestomathy (in Eussian). St. Peters- 
 burg 1875. 1876. — Dictionary to the Chrestomathy and to the 
 Koran by W. Girgas. Kasan 1881 (in Russian). 
 
 An Arabic reading-book compiled by W. Wright. Part first, The texts. 
 Loudon 1870. 
 
 Magani el-adab fi hadaik el-'arab. 6. Ed. Beirut 1885 ff. Jesuit Press. 
 6 vols. Sarh magani el-adab (Notes &c.). 4 vols. ib. 1886 — 8. 
 
 D. GRAMMAES &c. 
 
 a Written by Orientals. 
 
 *3l-Muzhir fi 'uliJm el-luga, philological Encyclopaedia by Galal 
 ad-din as-SuyUtl (f 91l H., beg. 4. June 1505, cf. for as- 
 Sujuti Goldziher in den Sitzungsber. d. kais. Akademie der 
 WissizuWien. Phil.-histor. CI. LXIX. Bd. 1. S. 7 ff.) Bulak 
 1282. 
 
 *Le livre de Siba-waihi, traitfe de grammaire arabe par Sibouya, dit 
 Sibawaihi (f 180 H., beg. 16. March 796). Texte arabe public 
 d'apres les manuscrits du Caire, de I'Escurial, d'Oxford, de 
 Paris, de St. Petersbourg et de Vienne par Martwig Derenboitrg. 
 Tome I, Paris 1881. Tome II, Paris 1889. — SlbawaihVs Buch 
 iiber die Grammatik naoh der Ausgabe von H. Derenbourg und 
 dem Commentar des Siraii ubersetzt und erklart . . . von G. Jakn. 
 1.— 8. Lieferung. Berlin 1894. 1895. 
 
 *A1-Mufassal, opus de re grammatica arabioum auctore Abu 'l-Kasim 
 Mahmiid bin 'Omar Zamahsario [az-Zamahsari f 538 H. ,' beg. 
 16. July 1 143) ed. J. P. Broch. Editio altera^ Christianiae 1879. — 
 Also: Ibn Jdii (f 643 H., beg. 29. May 1245) Commentar zu 
 
 Zamachsari's Mufassal. Nach den Handschriften herausgeg. 
 
 u. s. w. von Dr. G. JaAn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. Zweiter 
 Band. Leipzig 1886. 41. 
 
 *AIfijjah, Carmen didactioum grammaticum auctore Ibn Malik (f 672 H., 
 
 beg. 18. July 1273) et in Alfijjam commentarius quem conscripsit 
 
 Ibn Akil {Ibn 'AMI f 769 H., beg. 28. Aug. 1367) ed. Fr. Dieterici. 
 
 Lipsiae 1851. — Ibn 'Akil's Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.z 10 
 
146 Literature D. 
 
 aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male libersetzt von Fr. Dieterici. 
 Berlin 1852. 
 
 al-Agurrumiyya, Arabic Grammar hyltn Agurrum as-Sinhagi (f 723 H., 
 beg. 10. January 1323). Often printed with and without Com- 
 mentaries. Cf. E. Trumpp, Einleitung in das Studium der 
 arabischen Grammatiken. Die Ajrummiyyah des Muhammad bin 
 Daud. Munchen 1876. On this work see Fleischer in Zeitschrift 
 der D. Morgenl. Ges. 30 (1876), pp. 487 — 513; reprinted in 
 Kleinere Schriften II (Leipzig 1888), pp. 75—106. Text also 
 printed in Briinnow's Chrestomathy. 
 
 Kaflya fin-nahu, Syntax by Ibn al-Hdgib (f 646 H., beg. 26. April 
 1248). Frequently printed in the East. _ 
 
 Mugni al-labib. Grammar composed by Ihn SiSam al-Ansari (f 762 H., 
 beg. 11. Nov. 1360). Another grammatical work by the same 
 author bears the title: Katar an-nada wa-ball as-sada; a third 
 Suditr ad-dahab. All three works have been frequently printed 
 in the East. 
 
 al-Mann's (f 516 H., beg. 16. July 1143)Durrat al-gawwas, heraus- 
 gegeben von Hemrich Thorbecke. Leipzig 1871. (On errors of 
 speech). With the commentary of al-Hafagi, Constantinople 1299. 
 Cf. Le livre des locutions vicieuses de Djawaliki pubhe par 
 Hartwig Derenbourg (al-Gawaliki f 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072) 
 in Morgenlandische Forschungen. Leipzig 1875. 
 
 Tarika mustahdata fi tashil al-hatt al-'arabi. Calligraphic models 
 i2 parts. Beirut 1891. 
 
 P Written by Europeans. 
 
 *Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber nach den Quellen bearbeitet 
 von G. FliXgel. Erste Abthl. Leipzig 1862. Abhandlungen der 
 Deutschen Morgenl. Ges. II. Band. Nr 4. (This work gives 
 a list of grammarians to about the year 1000 of our era). 
 
 f Dr. C. P. Oaspari's Arabische Grammatik. Eflnfte Auflage be- 
 arbeitet von August MilUer. Halle 1887. — Grammaire arabe de 
 C. P. Caspari traduite de la quatrieme edition allemande et en 
 partie remanifee par E. Uricoechea. Bmxelles 1880. — A Grammar 
 of the Arabic Language translated from the German of Caspaii 
 and edited, with numerous additions and corrections by W. Wright. 
 2. ed. 2 vol. London 1874 — 5. A 3^^ edit, is announced. 
 
 Geo. Senric. Aug. Ewald. Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cum 
 brevi metrorum doctrina. Lipsiae 1831 — 1833. II vol. 
 
 *Grammaire arabe k I'usage des 6I^ves de I'ecole speciale des langues 
 orientales vivantes; avec figures. Par M. le Bf™ Silvestre de 
 Sacy. Seconde edition, corrigfee et augmentee, k laquelle on a 
 joint un trait6 de la prosodie et de la mtoique des Arabes. 2 torn. 
 Paris 1831. — Very important notes and corrections will be found in 
 
LiTEEATUEE E. 147 
 
 *Fleischer, „Boitrage zur arabischen Spraohkunde": Berichte fiber die 
 Verhandlungen der kgl. sachsisehen Gesellsohaft der Wissenschaften 
 zu Leipzig. PhHologisch-historisohe Classe. 1863 (p. 93ff.); 1864 
 (p. 265ff.); 1866(p. 286ff.); 1870 (p. 227iif.); 1874 (p. Tiff.); 1876 
 (p. 44ff.); 1878 (p. 64ff.); 1880 (p. 89ff.); 1881 (p. 117ff.); 1883 
 (p. 72ff.); 1884 (p. 272ff.); conf. 1856 (p. Iff.); 1862 (p. lOff.) 
 Reprinted io Kleinere Schriften von Dr. S. L. Fleischer, vol. I, 
 ist- and 2iici. parts, Leipzig 1886; the two last articles" in vol. II, 
 part 1. Leipzig 1888. 
 
 /. Q. L. Kosegarten. Grammatiea linguae arabioae pp. 1 — 688, without 
 title and date, incomplete. (Very rare). 
 
 Mortimer Sloper Howell. A. Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language, 
 translated and compiled from the "Works of the most Approved 
 Native or Naturalized Authorities. Published under the Authority 
 of the Government of the N.-W. Provinces. In an Introduction 
 and Four Parts. 3 vols. Allahabad 1880. 1883. 1886. 
 
 Grammaire arabe composee d'aprds les sources primitives par le 
 P. Donat Vernier, S. J. Tome I. Beyrouth 1891 ; Tome IL 1892. 
 
 Darstellung der arabischen Verskunst mit sechs Anhangen u. s.w. nach 
 handschriftlicheu Quellen bearbeitet und mit Eegistern versehen 
 von G. W. Wreytag. Bonn 1830. 
 
 Theorie nouvelle de la m^trique arabe precedee de considerations 
 generales sur le rythme uaturel du langage par M. Stanislas 
 Quyard. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal as. 7 ser., t. 7. 8). 
 
 Die Khetorik der Araber nach den wichtigsten Quellen dargesteBt und 
 mit angeftihrten Textauszligen nebst einem literatm'geschichtlichen 
 Anhang versehen von Dr. A. F. Mehren. Kopenhagen 1853. 
 
 E. DICTIONARIES. 
 
 a Written ly Orientals. 
 
 *Sahah al-'arabiyj'e (or as-Sahali) by al-0-auhari (Abii Nasr Ismail ibn 
 'Hammad f 393 H., beg. 10.' Nov. 1002). 2 vols. Bulak 1282. 40. 
 
 Lisan al-'arab by al-Mujearram (Ibn Manzur al-Ifriki al-Misri al-Ansari 
 al-Hazragif 711 H., beg. 13. May 1311). 20 vols. 40.' Cairo 1308. 
 
 *al-Kainus al-muhit (or al-Kamus) by al-Firuiahddi (f 816 or 
 817 H. = 14l'3/"4). 2 vols. Calcutta 1817; 4 vols. Bulak 1279. 
 40. id. 1301/2. — With Turkish Commentary 3 vols. Stambul 
 1272 and later. — *Commentary to the Kamiis with the title 
 Tag-el-'ariis composed by Sayyid Murtadd az-Zubaidi (f 1205 H., 
 beg. 10 Sept. 1790). 10 vols. Caii-o 1307. 
 
 Muhit al-muhit by Butrm al-Bistdni. 2 vols. Beirut 1286. (1869/70). 
 
 an-Ni'haya fi' ^arib al-hadit by lin al-AtJr (f 606 H., beg. 6. July 
 1209). 4 vols. Cairo 1311 (Dictionary to the Traditions). 
 
 10* 
 
148 Literature E. 
 
 Asas al-balaga (Lexicographical Work, dealing esp. with the meta- 
 phorical meanings of words) by az-Zamahsarl (f 538 H., beg. 
 16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak_1299. 
 
 Fikh al-luga, Synonyms by at-TddUa (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 
 1037). (Frequently reprinted; esp. in an expurgated edition 
 Beirut 1888). Cf. Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften III, 152. 
 
 'Idldbs (t 291 H. = 904) kitab al-Fasih. Nach den Handschriften 
 von Leiden, Berlin und Bom herausgegeben, mit kritischen und 
 erlauternden Noten versehen von Dr. J. Barth, Leipzig 1876. 
 
 *Gawaliki's al-Mu'arrab (a work on Arabic loan-words, by al-GawdliU 
 t 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072). Nach der Leydener Handschrift 
 mit Erlauterungen herausgegeben von Ed. Sachau. Leipzig 
 1867. Cf. Z. d. D. Morg. Ges. 33, 208. 
 
 Liber as-Sojutii (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505) de nominibus relativis, 
 inscriptus Lubb al-lubab, arab. cum annot. crit. ed. P. J, Vefh. 
 1—3. Lugduni Bat. 1840—51. 40. 
 
 *Al-Moschtabih auctore Schamso'ddin Abu Abdallah Mohammed ibn 
 Ahmed ad-Dhababi (ad-Dahabi f 748 H., beg. 13. April 1347). 
 E codd. mss. editus a P. de Jong. Lugduni Batav. 1881. (On 
 homonym proper names). 
 
 Kitabo-'l-adhdad sive liber de vocabulis arabicis quae plures habent 
 significationes inter se oppositas auctore Abu Bekr ibno-'l-Anbdri 
 (t 328 H., beg. 18. Oct. 939) ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni 
 Bat. 1881. 
 
 P Written by Europeans. 
 
 f Cf. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djeuharii 
 Firuzabadiique et aliorum libris confectum. Accedit index vocum 
 latinorum locupletissimus. IV. Tomi. Hal. 1830 — 1837. 4''maj. 
 
 0. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum ex opere suo majore in 
 usum tironum excerptum edidit. HaUs 1836. 4" maj. 
 
 *Maddu-l-Kamoos, an Arabic-English Lexicon derived from the best 
 and the most copious eastern sources comprising a very large 
 collection of words and significations omitted in the Kamoos, 
 with supplements to its abridged and defective explanations, 
 ample grammatical and critical comments, and examples in prose 
 and verse: composed by means of the munificence of the most 
 noble Algernon, Duke of Northumberland and the bountj' 
 of the British Government: by Edward William Lane. In two 
 books: the first containing all the classical words and significa- 
 tions commonly known to the learned among the Arabs; the 
 second, those that are of rare occurrence and not commonly 
 known. Book I, Parts 1 — 5. London 1863 — 1874. Ed. by 
 Stanley Lane Poole, Parts 6—8 (and Supplement) 1877—1893. 
 
LlTEKATUEE E. 149 
 
 (Prom the letter k onwards, the book is incomplete; its continuar 
 
 tion is not to be expected.) 
 *Snpplement aux dictionnaires arabes par R. Dozy. 2 tom. Leyde 
 
 1881. — Cf. Fleischer, Studien iiber Dozy's Supplement: Be- 
 
 richte iiber die Terhandlimgen der kgl. sachs. Ges. d. Wiss. zu 
 
 Leipzig. Philol.-histor. Classe 1881 — 1887. Reprinted in Kleiners 
 
 Schriften von H. L. Fleischer. Vol. II, pt. 1. Leipzig 1888. 
 
 Vol. Ill id. 
 A. KazimiraTci de Biberstein, Dictionnaire arabe-frangais I. II. Paris 
 
 1860. 
 ^A, Wahrmund. Handwbrterbuch der deutschen und neu-arabischen 
 
 Sprache. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I, 1. 2. II, 1. 2. — 
 
 II. Deutsch-neuarabiseher Theil. Giessen 1870 — 77. 
 F. Steingass, The Student's Arabic-English Dictionary. London 1884. 
 S, Atithony Salmoni, An Arabic-English Dictionary on a new System. 
 
 2 vols. Vol. I Arabic-English ; vol. II English Index. London 1890. 
 •fArabic-English Dictionary by the late William Thomson Wortahet. 
 
 Second edition, revised and enlarged, Eeyrout 1893. 
 George Percy Badger, English-Arabic Lexicon. London 1881. 
 F. Steingass, English-Arabic Dictionary for the use of both Travellers 
 
 and Students. London 1882. 
 English-Arabic Dictionary by Mr. J. Aicarius. New edition revised 
 
 and enlarged. Beyrout 1894. 
 fVocabulaire arabe-franQais a I'usage des ^tudiants par un pSre mis- 
 
 sionnaire de la Cie de Jesus; 3. ed. Beyrouth 1893. (Arab.: al- 
 
 Faraid ad-durriye.) 
 Dictionnaire fran^ais-arabe par le P. J.-B. Belot, S. J. 2 parties. 
 
 Beyrouth 1890. 
 *Die aramaischen Premdwbrter im Arabischen. Von Siegmund Frankel. 
 
 Leiden 1886. 
 Dictionnaire detaille des noms des vetements chez les Arabes. Par 
 
 E. Dozy. Amsterdam 1845. 
 Die Namen der Saugethiere bei den siidsemitischen Volkern. Von 
 
 Fritz Sommel. Leipzig 1879. 
 Die Waffen der alten Araber aus ihren Dichtern dargestellt. Ein 
 
 Beitrag zur arabischen Alterthumskunde, Synonymik und Lexi- 
 
 cographie nebst Begistem von Friedrich Wilhelm Schwarzlose. 
 
 Leipzig 1886. 
 *Glossaire des mots espagnols et portugais derives de I'Arabe par 
 
 B. Dozy et W. H. Engelmann. 2. fed. Leyde 1869. 
 Glossario etimologico de las palabras espanolas de on'gen oriental por 
 
 D. Leopoldo de Eguilaz y Yanguas. Granada 1886. 
 Dictionnaire fetymologique des mots frangais d'origine orientale par 
 
 Marcel Devie. Paris 1876. — Cf. Eemarques sur les mots 
 
 frangais derives de I'Arabe par Henri Lammens. Beyrouth 1890. 
 
1 50 Literature F. 
 
 F. KOEAN, ISLAM, LIFE OF MUHAMMED. 
 CHRISTIANITY. 
 
 a Written by Orientals. 
 
 Al-Coranus seu Lex islamitica Muhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo- 
 prophetae edita ex museo Ahrahami Hinchelmanni. Hamburgi 
 1694. 
 
 Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque puloherrimis characteribus 
 descriptus, in latinum translatus, oppositis notis, auctore Ludovico 
 Marracio. Patavii 1698 fol. 
 
 fCorani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres- 
 sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretuin lectiones et auctoritatem 
 recensuit indieesque triginta sectionum et suratarum addidit 
 Gustavus Fliigel. Bditio stereotypa C. Tauchnitzii. Tertium 
 emendata; nova impressio Lipsiae 1869 (I. 1834; recensionis 
 Flugelianae textum recosnitum iterum exprimi curavit Gustavus 
 Mauritius Bedslob, Lipsiae 1837). (In Fliigel's first edition and 
 in numerous oriental editions of the Koran, the enumeration of 
 the verses, which is indispensable for reference, is wanting). 
 
 *Concordantiae Corani arabicae. Ad literarum ordinem et verborum 
 radices diligenter disposuit Giistavus Fliigel. Editio stereotypa, 
 Lipsiae 1842. 
 
 Chrestomathia Corani arabiea, notas adjeoit glossarium confecit C. A. 
 Nallino. Lipsiae 1 893. 
 
 al-Itkdn fi 'uliim al-kur'an, a sort of introduction to the Koran by 
 as-Suyuti (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505); 2 pts. Cairo 1278. — 
 Sayuty's Itqan on the exegetio sciences of the QorAn. Edited by 
 Mowlawies Basheerooddeen and Noorool-Haqq with an analysis by 
 A. Sprenger. Calcutta 1852 — 54. 
 
 al-Kasiaf. Commentary on the Koran by az-Zamahsari (f 538 H., 
 beg. 16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1281. — The Qoran with 
 the commentary of Zamakhshari entitled the Kashshaf, an haqaiq 
 al-tanzil, ed. by W. Nassau Lees and Khadim Hosain and 'Abd 
 al-Hayi. Calcutta 1856. 
 
 *Beidhawn (f 685 H., beg. 27. Pebr. 1286; or 692) commentarius in 
 Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibus et Lipsiensibus edidit 
 iudioibusque instruxit S. 0. Fleischer. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846 — 48. 
 4". — Indices ad Beidhawii commentarium in Coranum confecit 
 Winand Fell. Leipzig 1878. 
 
 Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The commentary of El-Baidavfi on Sura 
 in trans, and expld. ... by X). S. Margoliouth. London 1895. 
 
 *Le Eecueil des traditions musulmanes par Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail 
 al-Bokhari (al-Buhdri f 257 H. , beg. 29. Nov. 870) public par 
 
LiTERATUBE P. 151 
 
 L. Krehl. I —III. Leydo 1862 — 68 (incomplete). — Oriental 
 edition: Sahih al-Buhari. 8 vols. Cairo 1290; also frequently 
 elsewhere, with and without commentary. 
 
 Sahih Muslim. Collection of the Traditions of the Prophet, composed 
 by Muslim (f 261 H., beg. 16. Oct. 874). With commentary by 
 an-Nawavn (f 676 H., beg. 4. Juni 1277). 5 vols. Cairo 1283. 
 
 Masablh as-sunna, composed by Husain ibn Mas'iid al-Farra al-Ba- 
 gavii (f 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122). 2 vols. Cau-o 1294. 
 
 Ihya al-'uliim, by al-Gazali (f 505 H., beg. 10. JuU 1111). 4 vols. 
 4". Bulak 1289. — (Cf. Richard Gosche, Uber Ghazzalis Leben 
 und "Werke: Abhdl. d. kgl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin 1858). 
 
 ' AMu-r-razzaq's Dictionary of the technical terms of the Sufies edited 
 by Aloys Sprenger. Calcutta 1845. 
 
 *Das Leben Muhammeds nach Muhammed ibn Ishdk (f 151 H., beg. 
 
 26. Jan. 768) bearbeitet von 'Abd el-Malik ibn Hischam, (f 218 H., 
 beg. 27. Jan. 833);hrsg. von if. Wiistenfeld. 2 Bande. Gbttingen 
 1858—60. Oriental edition ; Sirat ibn Hisam. 2 vols. Cairo 1295. 
 (Translated into German: Das Leben Muhammeds u. s. w. be- 
 arbeitet von Q. Weil. Stuttgart 1864). 
 
 Muhammed in Medina. Das ist "Vakidi's [al-WdkidH f 207 H., beg. 
 
 27. May 822) Kitab al-Maghazl in verkiirzter deutscher Wieder- 
 gabe herausgegeben von J. Wellhausen. Berlin 1882. 
 
 Sama'il at-Tirmidi (f 279 H., beg. 3. April 892) Traditions respecting 
 the Prophet. Cairo 1273; with commentary 2 vols. Bulak 1296. 
 
 Usd al-gaba. List of 7500 persons who knew Muhammed, di'awn 
 upbyZJnaZ-kfir(t 630H.,beg. 18. Oct. 1232). 5 vols. Cairo 1286. 
 
 al-Isabe, A biographical dictionary of persons who knew Muhammed 
 'by Ibn Hagar (Ibn Eagar f 852 H., beg. 7. March 1448). Edited 
 in Arabic by Mowlawies Mohammed "Wajyh, 'Abdal-Haqq, and 
 Gholam Qadir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca Indica. Tol. I, Cal- 
 cutta 1856; vol. IV, Calcutta 1873. Vol. II, fasc. 1—13; vol. ni, 
 fasc. 1 — 15. 
 
 Kisas al-'anbiya (Legends of the Prophet), by at-Ta'laU (f 427 H., 
 beg. 5. Nov. 1035). Cairo 1297 and often. 
 
 Pillar of the creed of the Sunnites by al-Nasafi, ed. by W. Cureton, 
 London 1843. 
 
 Ad-dourra al-fakhira: la perle pr^cieuse de Ghazali [al-OazaU f 505 H., 
 beg. 10. July 1111) par L. Gautier. Geneve 1878. — MusUm 
 Eschatology. 
 
 Muhammwianische Eschatologie nach der Leipziger u. Dresdnef Hand- 
 schrift zum ersten Male arabisch und deutsch herausgegeben von 
 M. Wolff. Leipzig 1872. 
 
 Disputatio pro religlone Mohammedanorum adversus Christianos 
 Textum arabicum (composed 942 H. = 1535) e codice Leidensi 
 cum varr. lect. edidit F. J. van den Ham. Lugduni Bat. 1890. 
 
152 LiTERATUBE P. 
 
 Book of religious and philosophical sects by Muhammed al-Shahra- 
 stani {aS-Sahrastdni f 528 H., beg. 29. March 1153). Now first 
 edited by W. Cureton. 2 vol. London 1846. — Abu-'l-Fath' 
 Muhammad asch-Schahrastani's Keligionsparteien und PMlo- 
 sophenschulen. Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt mit AnmerkuDgeu 
 von Th. HaarbriicJcer. 2 Bande. Halle 1850 — 1. 
 
 *{Bible) Kitab al-mukaddas (Old Testament). London. B. Watts. 
 1822. (New Testament 1. vol. 1821.) — f Beii'ut, various editions, 
 t New York 1867. 
 
 Ai-abic Bible- Chrestomathy with a Glossary edited by Oeo, Jacob. 
 Berlin 1888. 
 
 P Written by Europeans. 
 
 Der Koran nach Boysen von Neuem aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt 
 mit einer historischen Einleitung und Anmerkungen von Q. Wahl. 
 Halle 1828. 
 
 Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu iibersetzt mit An- 
 merkungen von L. Vllmann. 6. Aufl. 1862. 
 
 Le Koran, Traduction nouvelle, faite sur le texte arabe par Mr. 
 KazimirsM. Nouv. ed. Paris 1854. 
 
 The Koran commonly called the Alcoran of Mohammed: translated 
 into English from the Original Arabic. "With explanatory notes 
 taken from the most approved commentators. To which is pre- 
 fixed a preliminary discourse. By George Sale. London 1774. 
 Last ed. by E. M. Wherry "with additional notes and emenda- 
 tions". 4 vols. London 1882 — 87. 
 
 /. M. Rodwell, The Koran, translated from the Arabic. 2. ed. Lond. 1876. 
 
 The Qur'an translated by E. B. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880. (The 
 sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars 
 and edited by E. Max Miiller, vol. VI. IX). 
 
 Der Koran. Im Auszuge iibersetzt von Friedrich Biicjcert, heraus- 
 gegeben von A. M-iiller. Frankfurt «. M. 1888. 
 
 Die fiinfzig altesten Suren des Korans in gereimter deutscher tjber- 
 setzung von M. Klamroth. Hamburg 1800. 
 
 +*Geschichte des Qorans von Theodor Nbldeke. Gbttingen 1860. 
 
 Tiber die Religion der vorislamischen Ai-aber. Eine zur Habilitation 
 etc. bffenthch zu vertheidigende Abhandlung von Ludolf Krehl. 
 Leipzig 1863. 
 
 *Skizzen und Vorarbeiten. Von J. WelUiausen. Drittes Heft. Reste 
 arabischen Heidentumes. Berlin 1887. 
 
 Kinship and marriage in early Arabia. By W. Robertson Smith. 
 Cambridge 1885. 
 
 *Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad nach bisher grossten- 
 theils unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprenger. Zweite 
 Ausgabe. 3 Bande. Beriin 1869. 
 
LiTEKATUEE G. 153 
 
 fDas Leben Muhammed's. Nach den Quellen popular dargestellt von 
 
 Theodor Noldeke. Hannover 1863. 
 *W. Muir, The Life of Mahomet and History of Islam. 4 vol. London 
 
 1858—61. arcl edition 1 vol. 1894. 
 fDas Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. Dargestellt von Ludolf 
 
 Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des Muhammed. Leipzig 1884. 
 Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von J". WeMAoMsem. Viertes Heft. I.Medina 
 
 vor dem Islam. 2. Muhammad's Gemeindeordnung von Medina. 
 
 3. Seine Schreiben, und die Gesandtschaften an ihn. Berlin 1889. 
 fWas hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthum aufgenommen ? von Aira- 
 
 ham Oeiger. Bonn 1833. 
 *B. Dozy, Het Islamisme. Leiden 1863. 2 ed. Haarlem 1880; Essai 
 
 sur I'histoire de I'Islamisme par B. Dozy trad, par T. Chauvin. 
 
 Leyde-Paris 1879. 
 *8noucle Mv/rgronje, Het meklcaansche Pest. Leiden 1880. 
 Die Mutaziliten oder die Freidenker im Islam. Ein Beitrag zur all- 
 
 gemeinen Kulturgeschichte von Heinrich Steiner. Leipzig 1865. 
 De strijd over het Dogma in den Islam tot op el-Ash'ari door Dr. 
 
 M. Th. Soutsma. Leiden 1875. 
 Zur Geschichte Abu '1-Hasan al-AS"ari's (f about 324 H. = 935) von 
 
 Wilhelm Spitta. Leipzig 1876. 
 Expos6 de la r^forme de I'Islamisme commeuc6e au IIKme si^cle de 
 
 I'Hegire par Abou-1-Hasan AH el-Ash'ari et continufee par son 
 
 fecole. Avec des extraits du Texte arabe d'Ibn Asakir par 
 
 M. A. F. Mehren. Vol. II des Travaux de la 3e session du 
 
 Congr^s international des Orientalistes. 
 I. Goldkiher, Die Schule der Zahiriten, ihr Ursprung, ihr System 
 
 und ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884. 
 *Mohammedanische Studien von I. Qoldzilier. Erster Teil. Halle 
 
 1889. Zweiter Teil. Halle 1890. 
 Polemische und apologetische Litcratur in arabiseher Sprache zwischen 
 
 Muslimen, Christen und Juden, nebst Anhangen verwandten 
 
 Inhalts. Von Moritz Steinschneider. Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde 
 
 des Morgenlandes VI, 3. Leipzig 1877. 
 
 G. JURISPRUDENCE. 
 
 al-Muwatta' fil-hadit. Corpus juris composed by Malik ibn Anas 
 al-Hi'myari al-MadanI (t 179 H., beg. 27. March 795). Frequently 
 printed; also with commentaries, e. g. that of az-Zarkani (f 1122 
 H., beg. 19. Eebr. 1710). 4 vols. Bulak 1280. 
 
 Sunan Abi 'Abdallah al-Kazwini, known as IhnMdga (f 273 H., beg. 
 8. June 886). Delhi 1282 and 1889. (Legal traditions). 
 
 Sunan AU Dd'ud Sulahnan as-Sigistani (f 275 H., beg. 16. May 
 888); freii. printed, e.g. Bulak 1280. 2 vols. (Legal traditions). 
 
164 LiTEEATURE H. 
 
 al-Gdmi by Abu isa Muhammad at-Tirmidi (f 279 H., beg. 3. April 
 892). Frequently printed. (Legal traditions). 
 
 Sunan Abi 'Abd ar-rahman an-Nasa'l (f 303 H., beg. 17. July 915); 
 lithogr. in Kanfiir 1847. (Legal traditions). 
 
 Flugel, Die Classen der hanefitischen Eechtsgelehrten: Abhandluugen 
 der k. Sachs. Gesellschaft der "Wissenschaften VIII. Leipzig 
 1860. 
 
 Jus Schafiiticum. At-Tanbih auctore Abu Ishak as-Shirazi {Abi, 
 Ishdk aS-Sirdzi wrote the work in the year 452/3 H. = 1060/1) 
 edidit A. W. T. JuynboU. Lugduni Bat. 1879. 
 
 Precis de Jurisprudence Musulmane selon le rite Chafeite, par Abu 
 Chodja {Abu Sugd' f in the 6*11 cent, of the Plight). PubUcation 
 du texte arabe, avec traduction et annotations, par S. Keijzer. 
 Leyde 1859. 
 
 Minhadj at-Talibin, le guide des zeles croyants. Manuel de juris- 
 prudence musulmane selon le rite de Chafi'i {as-Sdfi'i). Texte 
 arabe, publie par ordre du gouvernement avec traduction et 
 annotations par L. W. O, van den Berg. 3 vol. Batavia 1882 — 1884. 
 (Cf. Snouck Hurgronje in the Indian Gids, 1884 0. Elaborate 
 criticism.) 
 
 Precis de jurisprudence musulmane suivant le rite mal^kite par 
 Sidi Khalil (Halll lived in the 9^"^ cent, of the Plight) public par 
 les soins de la Socifetfi asiatique. Quatrieme Edition. Paris 1877. 
 
 Maverdii {al-Mdwardl f 450 H., beg. 28. Febr. 1058) constitutiones 
 politicae. Ex recensione Maximiliani Engeri. Bonnae 1853. 
 
 H. PHILOSOPHY. 
 
 ot Written by Orientals. 
 
 Documenta philosophiae Arabum, edidit latine vertit illustravit Aug. 
 Schmolders. Bonnae 1836. — Cf. id. Essai sur les fecoles philo- 
 sophiques chez les Arabes et notammeut sur la doctrine d'Algaz- 
 zali. Paris 1842. 
 
 Tahafut al-falasifa (the mutual refutation of the philosophers) by 
 al-Qazdli (f 505 H., beg. 10. July 1111), Ibn Busd (f 595 H", 
 beg. 3. Nov. 1198), Hoga Zdde (f 893 H., beg. 17. Dec. 1487). 
 Cairo 1303. 
 
 Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus arabischen Haudschriften 
 zum ersten Male herausgegeben. Von Fr. Sieterici. Leipzig 
 1882 (Abhandluugen des Berl. Or.-Congresses). Cf. Die so- 
 genannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt 
 und mit Anmerkungen versehen von Fr. Dzeterici. Leipzig 1883. 
 
 II commento medio di Averroe alia Poetica di Aristotele pubbl. da 
 Fausto Lasinio. Parte I. II teste arabo: Annali della Universita 
 
Literature H. 155 
 
 Toscane. Tomo SII. Pisa 1872. 40. — II testo arabo del com- 
 mento medio di Averroe alia retorica di Aristotele, pubbl. da 
 Fausto Lasinio. Pirenze 1875. (Pubblicazioni del K. Istituto 
 di studi superiori). 
 
 Alfdratn's (f 950 A. D.) philosophische Abhandlnngen aus Londoner, 
 Leidener und Berliner Handschriften. Herausgegeben von Fried- 
 rich Dieieriei. Leiden 1890. — Id. aus dem Arabischen iiber- 
 setzt. Leiden 1892. — Alfdratn's Abhandlung der Musterstaat 
 aus Londoner und Oxforder Handschriften herausgegeben von 
 F. Dieteerici. Leiden 1895. 
 
 Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes (Z5» BuSd f 595 H., beg. 
 3. Nov. 1198). Herausgegeben von M. J. Miiller. Miinchen 
 1859. — Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt. Miinchen 1875. 
 
 Le Guide des Egares. Traite de Theologie et de Philosophie par 
 Moise ben Maimoun dit Maimonide (f 605 H., beg. 16. July 
 1208). Public pour la premiere fois dans I'original arabe et ac- 
 compagn6 d'une traduction frangaise par Munk. I — III. Paris 
 1856—66. 
 
 Bjfcab Ihwan as-safa ■wa-hullan al-wafa (between 950 — 1000 of our 
 era)._ 4 vols. Bombay 1305—1306. — A part of the raaail 
 ihwan as-safa has also been printed in Cairo, 1306. — Die 
 Abhandlungen der Ichwan Es-Safa in Auswahl herausg. von 
 F. Dieterici. 3 Hefte. Leipzig 1883 — 6. 
 
 Statio quinta et sexta et appendix libri Mevakif auctore "Adhad-eddin 
 el-I^ (f 766 H., beg. 16. Jan. 1355) cum commentario Gorganii 
 ex codd. etc. edidit Th. Sbrensen. Lipsiae 1848 (Scholastic 
 Metaphysics). 
 
 Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Scherif Ali ben Mohammed Dschor- 
 dsohani (al-Gorgdn% f 816 H., beg. 3. Apr. 1418). Accedunt de- 
 finitiones theosophi Mohji-ed-din Mohammed ben Ali vulgo Ibn 
 Arabi (f 638 H., beg. 23 July 1240) dicti. Ed. et adnot. critica 
 instruxit Otcstavus Flugel. Lipsiae 1845. 
 
 P Written by Europeans. 
 
 Die griechisohen Philosophen in der arabischen XTberlieferung. Ton 
 August Miiller. (Festschrift der Franokischen Stiftungen zu dem 
 50jahrigen Doctorjubilaum Bernhardy's). Halle 1873. 
 
 Al-Kindi (f ca. 850 A. D.) genannt „der Philosoph der Araber". Ein 
 Vorbild seiner Zeit und seines Tolkes. Von O. Flugel. Leipzig 
 1857. (Abhandlungen der D. Morg. Ges. 1. Band. Nr. 2). Cf. 
 Otto Loth, Al-Kindi als Astrolog, Morgenlandische Porschungen. 
 Leipzig 1875, pp. 261 ff. and Sir Wm. Muir, The Apology of 
 Al-Kindy 2 Ed. London 1887. 
 
 Al-Farabi, des arabischen Philosophen, Leben und Schriften. Von 
 
156 LlTEKATUEE I. 
 
 Moritz Steinschneider: Memoires de rAcademie Imp. des Sciences 
 de St. Petersbourg. Til. serie, tome XIII, 4. 1869. 4°. 
 
 Ernest Benan, Averroes et I'Averroisme. 3. 6d. Paris 1861. 
 
 Die Philosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert u. Chr. aus den 
 Schriften der lauteren Briider herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici. 
 Die Naturwissenschaft und Naturanschauung der Araber. Berlin 
 1861. — Die Propadeutik. Berlin 1865. — Die Logik und Psy- 
 chologie. Leipzig 1868. — Die Anthropologie. Leipzig 1871. — 
 Die Lehre von der Weltseele. Leipzig 1872. — Die Natur- 
 anschauung und Naturphilosophie. 2. Ausg. Leipzig 1876. — 
 EinleituDg uiid Makrokosmos. Leipzig 1876. — Mikrokosmos. 
 Leipzig 1879. 
 
 I. NATUKAL SCIENCE AND MEDICINE. 
 
 F. Wustenfeld, Geschichte der arabischen Arzte und Naturforseher. 
 Gottingen 1S40 (rather out of date). 
 
 Histoire de la medecine arabe par le Dr. Lucien Leclerc. 2 vol. 
 Paris 1876 (insufficient). 
 
 Ibn AM Useibia. Herausgegeben von August MiXller. Konigsberg 
 i. Pr. 1884 {Ibn Ail Usaibi'a f 668 H., beg. 14. May 1297 
 wrote this great work on the history of Ajrab physicians under 
 the title: 'Uyun al-"anba' fi tabakat al-'atibba'. For which see 
 Vol. II des travaux de la 6^ session du Congres international des 
 Orientalistes h, Leide. Leide 1884. p. 257 ff.). 
 
 Hayat al-haiwan (zoological work) by ad-Bamiri (f 808 H., beg. 
 29. June 1405). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Cairo 1305. 
 
 Kitab al-kanun fit-tibb, Theory of Medicine, composed by Abu 'All 
 ibn Bind (Avicenna i" 428 H., beg. 25. Oct. 1036). 3 vols. 
 V Bulak 1294. 
 
 al-Gami' li-mufradat al-'adwiya wal-'agdiya (On the common medicines 
 and foods) by Diya' ad-din Abii Muhammad Ibn al-Baitdr 
 (t 646 H., beg. 26. April 1248). 4 vols. Bulak 1231. 
 
 Tedlcire (Science of medicine) by Baud al-AntdId (■}■ 1005 H., beg. 
 15. Aug. 1596). 3 vols. Cairo 1294. 
 
 La Chimie du moyen-age . . . par M. Berthelot. Tome III. L'al- 
 chimie arabe comprenant une introduction et les traitfe de Crates, 
 d'el-Habib, d'Ostan^s et de Djaber . . . teste et traduction . . 
 avec la collaboration de M. O. Houdas. Paris 1893. 4". 
 
 Materiaux pour servir a I'histoire des sciences mathematiques chez 
 les Grecs et les Orientaux par M. L. P. E. A. SHillot. 2 tomes. 
 Paris 1845. 1849. 
 
 Traite des instruments astronomiques des Arabes, ti-ad. par J. J. Se- 
 dilloi. Paris 1834. 1835. Memoires sur les instruments astro- 
 nomiques des Arabes par J. J. Sedillot. Paris 1841 — 45. 
 
Literature K. 157 
 
 K. HISTORY; BIOGRAPHY. 
 
 a Written by Orientals. 
 
 Ibn Goteiba's {ibn Kutaiba f 276 H. beg. 6. May 889) Handbuch der 
 GeschichteherausgegebenvonFer(Z."PFMS<CT/eZ(i. Gottingen 1850.— 
 Oriental edition: Kitab al-ma'arif. Cairo 1300. 
 
 Abu Bekr Muhammed ben al-Hasan Ibn Boraid's (f 321 H., beg. 
 1. Jan. 933) genealogisch-stymologisches Handbuch herausgegeben 
 von jP. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1854. 
 
 *Chronologie orientalischer Volker von Alberuni. Herausgegeben von 
 Eduard Sachau. Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. M. Ges. Leipzig 
 1878. 4". — Chronology of ancient Nations. An English Version 
 of the Arabic Text of the Athar ul Bakiya of Albiruni, or 
 "Vestiges of the Past". Collected and reduced to writing by 
 the Author in A. H. 390—1, A. D. 1000. Translated and 
 Edited, with Notes and Index, by 0. E. Sachau. Published for 
 the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland. 
 Boy 80. London 1879. 
 
 Ibn Wadhih ("Wadih) qui dicitur al-JaquVi (Ya'kiibi) Historiae (composed 
 ca. 297 H.). 2 partes ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Batav. 1883. 
 
 Anonyme Arabische Chronik Band XI vermuthlich das Buch der Ver- 
 wandtschaft und Geschichte der Adligen von Abulhasan aimed 
 ben jahja ben gabir ben dawud elbeladori elbagdadi {al-Baladii/ri 
 ■\ 279 H. , beg. 3. Apr. 893). Autogr. und herausgegeben von 
 W. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1883. 
 
 Kitab al-ahbar at-tiwal verf. von Abu Hanifa Ahmed ibn Daiid ad-Bai- 
 nawan (f 282 or 290 H.) hrs. von Wladimir Girgas. Leiden 1888. 
 
 *Annales auctore Abu Djafar Mohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (at- 
 Tabari f 309 H., beg. 12. May 921), quos ediderunt J. Bartli, 
 Th. Noldeke, 0. Loth (f), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke (f), S. Prankel, 
 D. H. Miiller, M. Th. Houtsma, S. Guj'ard (f), V. Eosen et 
 M. J. de Goeje I, 1—5; II, 1—3; III, 1—4. Leiden 1879 seq. 
 
 Magoudi {al-Maaudi f 346 H., beg. 4. Apr. 957) Les prairies d'or. 
 Texte et traduction par CBarbier de Meynard et Pavet de Gour- 
 teUle. 9 tomes. Paris 1861—77. (id. 2 vols. Bulak 1283). 
 
 Bamzae Ispahanensis [Hamza wrote about 350 H.) annalium libri X. 
 Edidit J. M. E. Qottwaldt. I. textus, II. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae 
 1844. 1848. 
 
 Pragmenta historicorum arabieorum. Tomus primus continens partem 
 tertiam operis Kit4bo '1-Oyun wa 'Ihddaik fi akhbari '1-haddik 
 (written after the 11th cent. A-D.) quem ediderunt M. J. de 
 Goeje et P. de Jong. Lugduni Bat. 1868. 4". — Tomus secundus 
 continens partem operis Tadjaribo 'lOmami, auctore Ibn Maskowaih 
 (t 421 H., beg. 9. Jan. 1030)ediditM. J. de Goeje. Lugd.Bat. 1871. 
 
158 LlTEKATUEE K. 
 
 *Ibn el-Athiri {ibn al-'Atir f 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232) Chronicon 
 quod perfeotissimnm (el-Kamil) inscribitur. Edidit Carolus Jo- 
 hannes Tornherg. 14 vol. Lugduni Bat. 1851 — 1876. — 12 vols. 
 Bulak 1290 and later. 
 
 Oommentaire historique sur le poeme d'Ibn-Abdoun (Ibn Abdun 
 t 529 H., beg. 22. Oct. 1134) par Ibn Badroun [Ibn Badrun 
 wrote in the same century) pubUe par JR. F. A. Dozy. Leide 1846 
 (Ouvrages arabes publies par Dozy). 
 
 Historia saracenica arabice olim exarata a Georgio Elmacino (al-MaBn 
 f 672 H., beg. 18. July 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et 
 studiis Thomae Erpenii. Lugduni Bat. 1625. 
 
 Ta'rih muhtasar ad-duwal (Outlines of History by Gregorius abu 
 'i-Farag Ibn el-'ibri {Barhebraeus f 1286 A. D.) ed. by Salhani. 
 Beintt 1890. (The edition by Pococke, 2 tomi 4". Oxonii 1663 
 is rare). 
 
 Elfachri. History of the Moslem Empires from the beginning to 
 the end of the Califate by Ibn etthiqthaqa (wrote about 1302 
 A-D.). Edited in Arabic by W. Ahlwardt. Gotha 1860. 
 
 Abulfedae (f 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Annales muslemici arabice 
 et latine. Opera et studiis /. J. Reiskii, nunc primum ed. J. G. 
 Oh Adler. 5 vol. Hafniae 1789— 94. — 2 vols. Stambul 1286. 
 
 t Abulfedae historia Anteislamica , Arabice e duob. Codd. Paris, 
 edidit, vers. lat. notis et indicibus auxit S. 0. Fleischer. Lipsiae 
 1831. 4". 
 
 Ta'rih Zain ad-din 'Umar ibn al-Wardi (f 749 or 750 H. = 1348/9). 
 2 vols. Cairo 1285. — An excerpt: Aegyptus auctore Ibn 
 al-Vardi. Edidit vertit notulisque illustravit Martimis Frdhn. 
 Halae 1804. 
 
 Ibn JSaldun (f 808 H., beg. 29. June 1405) al- ibar etc. History of 
 the "World. 7 vols. Bulak 1284. — Prolegomenes d'Ebn- 
 Khaldoun. Texte arabe par Quatremire. 8 vols. Paris 1858 
 (Notices et extraits des mscr. SVI, 1. XVH, 1. XVIII, 1.). — 
 Prolegomenes historiques d'Ibn Khaldoun. Traduction par Mac 
 Quckin de Slane. 3 vols. Paris 1862 — 68 (Notices et extr. XIX, 
 1. XX, 1. XXI, 1). 
 
 The Tarikh al-Kholafa; or history of the Cahphs, from the death of 
 Mohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated Jalal 
 al-Dia Al-Osyooti {as-Suyuti f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505), ed. by 
 W. N. Lees und Mawlawi Abd al-Haqq. Calcutta 1857. Another 
 edition Cairo 1305. 
 
 *Liber expugnationis regionum auctore Imdmo Ahmed ibn Jahja ibn 
 
 Djabir al-Baladsori [al-Balddun f 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 892) ed. 
 
 M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 40. 
 
 Ousdtna ibn Mounkidh un emir syrien au premier siecle des Croisades, 
 
 (1095 — 1188) par Martwig Dereniourg. Deuxi^me pai'tie, Texte 
 
Literature K. 159 
 
 arabe de I'autobiographie d'Ousama. Paris 1886 (cf. Carlo de 
 Landberg, Critica arabica II. Leyde 1888). — Ousama ibn 
 Mounkidh etc. par H. Derenbourg (French edition.). Paris 1889. 
 
 'Imdd ed-dm el-katib el-isfaham (f 597 H. = 1201) Ccnquete de la 
 Syrie et de la Palestine par Salah ed-din. Publie par le comte 
 Carlo de Landerg. Vol. I. Texte arabe. Leydo 1888. 
 
 Vita et res gestae sultani AlmaHchi Alnasiri^Saladini auctore Bohad- 
 dino P. Sjeddadi {Bahd ad-din ibn Sadddd f 632 H. = 1234) 
 edidit ao latine vertit Aliertus SchuUens. Lugduni Batav. 1732 
 (1755). fol. 
 
 Kitab ar-raudatain^fi ta'rih ad-daulatain (History of Nureddin^and 
 Saladin) by Sihab ad-dln al-Mukaddasi , called Aim Sdma 
 (t 665 H. = 1267). Cairo. 2 vols. 1287. 
 
 Kitab al-'ins al-galil bi-ta'rih al-kuds wal-halil. History of Jeru- 
 salem and Hebron by Mugir ad-din (f 927 H., beg. 12. Dec. 
 1520). — Cf. Histoire de Jerusalem et d'Hebron. Fragments de 
 la Chronique de Moudjir-ed-dyn traduits sm- le texte arabe par 
 Henry Sauvaire. Paris 1876. 
 
 Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben von 
 Ferdinand Wustenfeld (I Azraki. II Pakibi, Pasi, Ibn Dhuheii'a. 
 Ill Kutb ed-din. IV German edition). I— IV. Leipzig 1857 — 61. 
 
 Hulasat al-wafa bi'ahbar dar al-mustaS (History of the town of 
 Medina) by as-Samhudi (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505). Bulak 
 1285. — Extracts translated by Wustenfeld in den Abhandlujagen 
 der k. Ges. der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen. Bd. IX. 1860. 
 
 *al-Hitat (Geography and History of Egypt) by al-Mal<rizi (f 845 
 H'.,'beg. 22. May 1441). 2 Vols. Bulak 1270. — Histoire des 
 Sultans Mamlouks de I'Egypte, ecrite en arabe par Taki-eddin- 
 Ahmed Makrizi, traduite en franjais et accompagnfee de notes 
 par Quatremere. 2 vol. Paris 1837 — 45. 4". 
 
 Abul-Mahdsin ibn Tagri Bardii (f 874 H., beg. 11. July 1469) Annales 
 (History of Egypt) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. G. J. JuynloU et S. F. 
 Matthes. 11, 1. 2. ed. T. O. /. JuynloU. Lugduni Bat. 1852—61 
 (incomplete). 
 
 Husn al-muhadara. History of Egypt by as-Suyuti (t 911 H., beg. 
 4. June 1505). 2 vols. Cairo. 
 
 'Agaib al-atar fit-taragim wal-ahbar (History of Egypt) by al-Gabarti 
 (t 1236 = 1821). 4 vols." Cairo n. d. 
 
 Ahmedis Arabsiadae (Ahmed ibn 'ArabSah f 854 H. , beg. 14. Pebr. 
 1450) vitae et rerum gestarum Timuri, qui vulgo Tamerlanes 
 dicitur historia. (Ed.) Latine vertit etc. S. S. Manger. 2 vol. 
 Leovardiae 1767. 1772. — Cairo 1285. 
 
 The History of the Almohades by Abdo-'l -Wahid al-Marrekoshi 
 (wrote in the year 621 H. = 1224) edited by R. Dozy. 2. ed. 
 Leyden 1881. 
 
160 Literature K. 
 
 Historia Abbadidarum praemissis scriptorum Arabum de ea dyaastia 
 loois nunc primum editis , auctore B. P. A. Dozy. I — III. Lug- 
 duni Bat. 1849. 4". (Deals w. Spain). 
 
 Annales regum Mauretaniae a condito Idrisidarum imperio ad annum 
 fugae 726, ab Abu-1 Hasan Ali ben Abd Allah Ibn Abi Zer' 
 Fesano, vel ut alii malunt Abu Muha mm ed Salih ibn Abd el 
 Halim Granatensi conscrjptos ed. illustr. Carolus Joh. Tomierg, 
 2 vol. TTpsaliae 1843. 1846. 
 
 Histoire de I'Afrique et de I'Espa^ue infcitulee al-Bay4no '1-Moghrib 
 par Ibn Adh&ri (de Maroc) (Ibn al-'Iddri wrote between 363 
 and 366 H.) et fragments de la chronique d'Arib (de Cordoue) 
 publics par B. P. A. Dozy. 2. vols. Leyde 1848—51. 
 
 Analectes sur I'histoire et la litterature des Arabes d'Espagne par 
 Al-Makkari (al-Makkan f 1041 H., beg. 30. July 1631). Publics 
 par B. Dozy, Q. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright. 2 vol. Leyde 
 1855 — 61. (Conf. Fleischer, Textverbesserungen in Al-Makkari's 
 Geschichtswerke. Kleinere Schrifteu. Vol. II pt. 1. Leipzig 
 1888.) — Lettre a M. Fleischer contenant les remarques critiques 
 et explicatives sur le texte d'Al-Makkari par B. Dozy. Leyde 
 1871. — Cf. The history of the Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain 
 by Ahmed ibn Mohammed Al-Makkari. Translated and illustrated 
 by Pascual de Gayangos. 2 vol. London 1840 — 3. 4". 
 
 Bibliotheca arabo-sicula, ossia Kaccolta di testi arabici che toocano la 
 geografia, la storia, la biografia e la bibliografia della Sicilia, 
 messi insieme da Michele Amari. Lipsia 1857; Appendice, ibid. 
 1875. 
 
 Alberuni's India, an account of the religion, philosophy, literature, 
 chronology, astronomy, customs, laws and astrology of India 
 about 1030. Ed. by Edw. Sachau. London 1887. 4?. — Id. 
 An English edition with notes and indices. By JB. Sachau. London. 
 2 vol. 1888. 
 
 Scriptorum Arabum de Rebus Indicis loci et opuscula inedita rec. 
 et illustr. Joannes Qildemeister. Ease. pr. Bonnae 1838. — 
 Cf. id., Dissertationis de rebus Indiae, quo modo in Arabum 
 notitiam venerint, pars I. Bonnae 1838, 
 
 *Ibn ChalUcan, Vitae illustrium virorum. E codd. nunc primum 
 arabice edidit variis lectionibus, indicibusque locupletissimis in- 
 struxit Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingae 1836 — 40, 4". — Ibn Hal- 
 likan (f 681 H., beg. 11. Apr. 1282). 2 vols. Bulak 1275; another 
 edition 1299. — Ibn Khallikan's Biographical Dictionary, translated 
 from the Arabic by Baron Mac Ouckin de Slant. 4 vol. Paris- 
 London 1843—71. 40. 
 
 Eawat al-wafayat (supplement to Ibn Hallikan) by as-Saldh al-KutuU 
 (t 764 H., beg. 21. Oct. 1362). "2 vols. Bulak '1283. 
 
LlTEKAIURE K. 161 
 
 The biographical dictionary of iUustrious men cliiefly at the beginning 
 of Islamism by Abu Zakariya Jahya el-Nawawi (f 676 H. = 1277) 
 edited by Ferd. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1842 — 47 (cf. idem for 
 the Life and Writings of el-Nawawi, Gottingen 1849, from the 
 4*11 vol. of the Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. "Wiss. zu Gott.). 
 
 Nuzhat al-'alubba fi tabakat al-'udaba. Concerning celebrated Men. 
 By Abul-Barakat ai-'Anbdri (f 577 H., beg. 17. May 1181). 
 Cairo lithogr. n. d. 
 
 P Written hy Europeans. 
 
 fVergleichungstabellen der muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit- 
 rechnung nach den ersten Tagen jedes muhammedanischen Monats 
 berechnet. Herausgegeben von J^erd. Wfisiere/eW. Leipzig 1844. — 
 Fortsetzung der Wiistenf. Vergl.-Tab. bis 1500 von E. Mahler. 
 Leipzig 1887. 
 
 *Die Geschichtsschreiber der Araber und ihre Werke. Von F. Wiisten- 
 feld. (From the XXVIII, and XXIX. vol. of the Abhandlungen 
 der Kgl. Ges. d. "W". zu Gottingen). GiJttingen 1882. 4». 
 
 *Genealogische Tabelleu der Arabischen Stamme und Familien , . . 
 Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt von Ferdinand Wustenfeld. 
 Gottingen 1852. q.-fol. — Register zu den genealogischen Ta^ 
 bellen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien. Mit historischen 
 und geographischen Bemerkungeu von Ferdinand Wiistenfeld. 
 Gottingen 1853. 
 
 *Gaussin de Perceval, Essai sur I'histoire des Arabes avant I'islamisme 
 3 vol. Paris 1847. 
 
 Geschiohte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der Sassaniden. Aus 
 der arabischen Chronik des Tabari iibersetzt und mit ausfiihr- 
 lichen Erlauteruugen und Erganzungen versehen von Th. N'dldeke, 
 Leyden 1879. 
 
 f*Der Islam im Morgen- und Abendland. Von A. Muller. 2 Bande. 
 Berlin 1885. 1887. (AUgemeine Geschichte in Einzeldarstellungen 
 hrsgg. von L. Oncken. Zweite Hauptabteilung. Vierter Teil). 
 
 *Geschichte der Chalifen. Nach handschriftlichen grbsstenteils noch 
 unbeniitzten Quellen bearbeitet von Gustav Weil. 3 Bande. 
 Mannheim 1846—51. — Geschichte des AbbasidenchaUfats in 
 Aegypten. Von Qustav Weil. 2 Bande. Stuttgart 1860—2. 
 
 fGeschiohte der islamitischen Volker von Mohammed bis zur Zeit 
 des Sultan Selim iibersichtlich dargestellt von Gustav Weil. 
 Stuttgart 1866. 
 
 fGeschichte der Araber bis auf den Stm-z des Chalifats von Bagdad. 
 Von Gustav Flilgel. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1864. 
 
 The Caliphate, its rise, decline, and fall from original sources by 
 Sir William Muir. London 1891. New and revised edition 1894. 
 Socin. Aiabio Grammar.^ 11 
 
162 Literature L. 
 
 Handbuch der morgenlandischen Miinzkunde. Von J. O. Stickel. 
 
 2 Hefte. Leipzig 1865—70. 40. 
 Catalogue of Oriental Coins in the British Museum, 9 vol. London 
 
 1875—1889. 
 The Mohammadan Dynasties, chronological and genealogical Tables 
 
 with historical Introductions by St. Lane-Poole. London 1894. 
 Die Charidschiten unter den ersten Omayyaden. Bin Beitrag zur 
 
 G-esohichte des ersten islamischen Jahrhunderts von B. E. 
 
 Brunnow. Leiden 1884. 
 De opkomst der Abbasideu in Chorasan door Q. van Vlooten. Leiden 1890. 
 Mfemoires sur les Carmathes du Bahrain et les Patimides par M. J. 
 
 de Goeje. Leiden 1886. 
 Die Statthalter von Agypten zur Zeit der Chalifeu. Von F. Wiisteti- 
 
 feld. Parts 1 and 2. Abhandlungen der Kgl. Ges. d. Wissen- 
 
 schaften zu Gottingen. 1875 (4"). Band 20. Parts S and 4. 
 
 ibid. 1876, Band 21. 
 History of the Moors in Spain to the Conquest of Andalusia by the 
 
 Almoravides (711 — 1110), by B. Dozy. German Edition with 
 
 additions by the Author. 2 vols. Leipzig 1874. 
 Poesie und Kunst der Araber in Spanien und Sicihen. Von Adolf 
 
 Friedrich von Schack. 2 Bande. Berlin 1865. 2. Aufl. 1877. 
 *Culturgeschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen. Von Alfred von 
 
 Kremer. 2 Bande. Wien 1875 — 77. 
 Das Einnahmebudget des Abbasiden-Reicbs vom Jahre 360 H. 
 
 (918 — 919) von Alfred von Kremer. Denkschiiften der philos.-hist. 
 
 Classe der Kais. Akademie der Wiss. in Wien. Bd. XXXVI. 1887. 
 *Geschichte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegriff, die 
 
 Prophetie und Staatsidee. Von Alfred v. Kremer. Leipzig 1868. 
 
 Die BaustUe. Historische und teohnische Entwicklung. Des Handbuchs 
 
 der Architectur (von J. Dv/rm) Zweiter Theil. 3. Baud, zweiteHalfte; 
 
 Die Baukunst des Islam. Von Franz Paseha. Darmstadt 1887. 
 Prisse d'Avennes, L'art arabe d'apres les monuments du Caire depuis 
 
 le Vile siecle jusqu' a la fin du XVIIIe. 3 vol. fol. 1 vol. 4. 
 
 Paris 1877. — La decoration arabe. (Extrait du grand ouvrage.) 
 
 Paris 1865. fol. 
 
 L. COSMOGRAPHY, GEOGEAPHT, ETHNOGRAPHY, 
 TRAVELS. 
 
 a Written by Orientals. 
 
 Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou Abdallah Mahommed ed-Dimichgi 
 (ad-Dimi§ki f 654 H., beg. 30. Jan. 1256). Texte arabe publie 
 d'apres I'fedition comniencfee par M. Frahn, et d'apres les manu- 
 
IJITERATUEE L. 163 
 
 scrits par M. A. F. Mehren. St. PMersbourg 1866. 40. — Manuel 
 de la cosmographie du moyen age, traduit de I'arabe „Nokhbet 
 ed-dahr fi 'adjaib-il-birr/wal-bah'r" de Shems ed-din Abou-'Abdallah 
 Mohammed de Damas et accompagnee d'eclaircissements par M. 
 A. F. Mehren, Copenhague 1874. 
 
 *Zakarija Ben Muhammed ben Mahmiid el-Caewini's (al-Kazmni 
 + 682 H., beg. 1. Apr. 1283) Kosmographie. Herausg. von Ferd. 
 Wustenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen 1848—9. — id. nach der 
 Wustenfeld'schen Textausgabe etc. ubersetzt von Hermann Ethe. 
 Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868. 
 
 Haridat al-'agaib wa-faridat al-garaib, a species of Cosmography 
 composed by "Umar ihn al-Wardl (f 749 or 750 H. = 1348 or 9). 
 Cairo 1292. 
 
 Specimen e literis orientalibus exhibens az-Zamaksarii, (ae-ZamahSan 
 t 638 H., beg. 16. July 1143) lexicon geographicum quod auspice 
 T. G. J. JuynboE edidit Mathias Salverda de Grave. Lugduni 
 Bat. 1856. 
 
 Al-Sarnddni's (f 334 H., beg. ] 3. Aug. 945) Geographie der Arabischen 
 Halbinsel. Nach den Handschr. herausgegeben von David Seinrich 
 Milller. Leiden 1884. 
 
 Das geographische Worterbuch des Abu 'Obeid 'Abdallah ben 'Abd 
 el-' Aziz el-Bekri (f 487 H. = 1094) naoh den Haudschi-iften 
 zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Mailand herausgegeben von 
 Ferd. Wustenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen, Paris 1876. 1877. 
 
 *Jacut's (Yakut f 626 H. = 1229) Geographisches Worterbuch aus 
 den Handschriften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten 
 der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von 
 Ferdinand Wustenfeld. 6 Bande. Leipzig 1866 — 73. 
 
 Jacut's Moschtarik, das ist: Lexicon geographischer Homonyme, 
 Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wustenfeld. Gottingen 1846. 
 
 Marasid al-ittila'i, Lexicon geographicum ed 2'. G. J. Juynboll I — TI. 
 Lugduni B. 1850 — 64. (An Extract from Yakiit). 
 
 Geographie d'Aboulfeda (ASui-yitia f 732 H.,beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Texte 
 arabe par Beinaud et Mac-Guckin de Slane. Paris 1840. — 
 Geographie d'Ismail Abou '1-Peda en arabe publiee par Charles 
 Schier. Ed. autogr. Dresde 1846. — Geographie d'Aboulfeda, 
 traduite de I'arabe en frangais par Eeinaud I (*Introdnction 
 generate a la geographie des Orientaux) 11, 1 Paris 1848; 11,2 
 par Stanislas Guyard. Paris 1883. 
 
 *Bibliotheca geographorum arabicomm. Edidit M. J. de Ooeje. 
 
 Pars prima. Viae regnorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemioae 
 auctore Abu Ishak al-Farisi al-Istakhri (al-Istahri, of. Zeitschrft 
 d. D. Morgenl. Ges. Bd. 25, p. 42 ff.). Lugduni Bat. 1870. 
 
 Pai-s secunda. Viae et regna. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae 
 auctore Abu 'l-Kasim lin Haukal fibid.). Lugduni Bat. 1873. 
 ' ■ ■ 11* 
 
1 64 LlTEKATURE L. 
 
 Para tertia. Descriptio imperii Moslemici auctore Al-Molead- 
 dasi (al-Mukaddasi wrote in year 378 the H.). Lus;duni Bat. 1876. 
 
 Cf. Description of Syria &c. by Mukaddasi. Translated from 
 the Arabic by Guy Le Strange. (Palestine Pilgrims' Text Society). 
 
 Pars quarta. Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emeu- 
 danda ad part. I — III auctore M. J. de Qoeje. Lu^duni Bat. 1879. 
 
 Pars quinta. Compendium libri Kitab al-boldan auctore Ibn 
 al-Faklh al-Hamadhani (wrote ca. A, D. 290). Lugd. Bat. 1885. 
 
 Pars sexta. Kitab al-masalik wal-mamalik (liber viarum et 
 regnorum) auctore Abn'l-Kasim Obaidallah ibu Abdallah ibn 
 Khordddbeh (Ibn Hordadbeh wrote in the second half of the 
 Htli cent. A. D.) et excerpta e Kitab al-Kharadj (K. al-harag 
 Taxbook) auctore Koddma ibn DJa'far {Kuddma ibn Ga'far 
 wrote about 930 A. D.). Lugduni Bat. 1889. 
 
 Pars septima. Kitab al-a'lak an-nafisa VII auctore Abu AIT 
 Ahmed ibn Omar ibn Eosteh (wrote before 301. H.) et Kitab al- 
 boldan auctore Ahmed ibn abi Ja'kiib ibn Wadhih al-Katib al- 
 JakuVi (cf. p. 157). Lugduni Bat. 1892. 
 
 Pars octava. Kitab at-tanbih wa'1-ischraf auctore al-Masudi 
 (cf. p. 157). Accedunt indices et glossarium ad tomos VII et 
 VIII. Lugduni Bat. 1894. 
 Description de FAfrique et de I'Espagne par Ednsi (wrote 548 
 H., beg. 29 March 1 1 53) texte ai-abe publie pour la premiere fois 
 d'apres les man. de Paris et d'Oxford aveo une traduction, des 
 notes et un glossaire par H.^Dosy et M. J. de Goeje. Leyde 1866. 
 The travels of Ibn Jubair (Ibn Gubair end of the 6tli cent.) edited by 
 
 William Wright. Leyden 1852. 
 Voyages d'lbn Batoutah (Ibn Batata f 779 H., beg. 10 May 1377). 
 Texte arabe, accompagnee d'une traduction par C. Defremery et 
 B. B. Sanguinetti (Publications de la Society a.siatique). 4 vol. 
 Paris 1853—58; deux. tir. 1874—77. — Cairo 1288. 
 
 |3 Written by Europeans. 
 
 F. Wilstertfeld, Die Litteratur der Brdbeschreibung bei den Arabem. 
 
 Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Erdkunde lirsgg. von J. G. Liidde I, 
 
 1841, S. 24—67. 
 Carte generale des provinces europeennes et asiatiques de I'Empire 
 
 Ottoman, dressee par Henri Kiepert 4 feuilles. Deux. ed. en- 
 
 tierement corrigee et augment^e d'un index alphabetique. Berlin 
 
 1892. 
 (Karte yon) Arabien zu C. Bitters Erdkunde, Buch III, West-Asien, 
 
 Teil XII und XIIl bearbeitet von H. Kiepert. Neue berichtigte 
 
 Ausgabe, die Orthographic revidiert von Th. Noldeke. Berlin 18°67 
 
 (D. Eeimer). 
 
Literature L. 165 
 
 Skizze der Geschichte und Geo^raphie Arabiens von den altesten 
 Zeiten bis zum Propheten Muhammad. Auf Gruud der luschriften, 
 der Angaben der alten Autoren und der Bibel von Eduard Qlaser. 
 Zweiter Band. Berlin 1890. 
 
 Die alfce Geographic Arabiens als Grundlage der Bntwicklungsgeschichte 
 des Semitismus von A. Sprenger. Bern 1875. 
 
 Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von 
 Otto Blau. Mit einerKarte: Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl. 
 Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559—592. 
 
 Arabien und die Araber seit hundert Jahren. Eine geographische 
 und geschichfcliche Skizze von Albrecht Zehme. Halle 1875. 
 
 Palestine under the Moslems. A description of Syria and the Holy 
 Land from A. B. 650 to 1500. Translated from the works of the 
 mediaeval Arab Geographers by Ouy le Strange. (London) 1890. 
 
 Relation de I'Egypte par Abdallatif ('Abi al-Latif al-Bagdadi f 629 H., 
 beg. 29. Oct. 1231). Le tout traduit et "enrichi de notes par 
 Silvester de Sacy. Paris 1810. 4". (The text of 'Abd al-Latif 
 has been published by J. White: 'AbdoUatiphi Historiae Aegypti 
 compendium. Oxonii 1800). 
 
 *Beschreibung von Arabien. Aus eigenen Beobachtungen und im 
 Lande selbst gesammelten Naohrichten abgefasst von Carsten 
 Niebuhr. Kopenhagen 1772. 4". 
 
 Garsten Niebuhrs Reisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andem um- 
 liegenden Landern. 1. Band. Kopenhagen 1774. 2. Band. 1778; 
 English edtn. 2 vols. Edinb. 1792. 
 
 f *Travels in Arabia (1814) comprehending an account of those t erritories 
 in Hedjaz which the Mohammedans regard as sacred. By the 
 late John Lewis Burckhardt. London, 2 vol. 1829. — Johann 
 Lttdwig Burckhardt' a Beisen in Arabien, enthaltend eine Beschrei- 
 bung derjenigen Gebiete in Hedjaz, welche die Mohammedaner 
 fiir heilig achten . . . Aus dem Englischen iibersetzt. Weimar 1830. 
 
 ■\*J. L. Burckhardt, Notes on the Bedonins and "Wah4bys. 2 vol. 
 London 1831. — Bemerkungen iiber die Beduinen und Wahabi's. 
 Weimar 1831. 
 
 Richard Burton, Personal narrative of a pilgrimage to El Medinah and 
 Meccah. 2 vol. London 1857 (and frequently, also in the Tauchnitz 
 edition). 
 
 ♦Travels in Arabia Deserta by Churles M. Doughty. 2 vol. Cambiidge 
 1888. (With new map). 
 
 Adolf von- Wrede's Beise in Hadhramaut, Beled Beny 'Issa und Beled 
 el Hadschar. Herausgegeben . . . von S. Freiherr von Maltzan. 
 Braunschweig 1870. — Eeise nach Siidarabien und Geographische 
 Porachungen im und fiber den siidwestlichen Teil Arabiens von 
 Hein/rich Freihern von Maltnan. Braunschweig 1873. 
 
IgS L:TEKATtmE M, 
 
 Mekka von Dr. C. Snouck Hurgronje. 2 Bande. Mit Bilder-Atlas. 
 Haag 1888. 1889. 
 
 I* An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians, 
 written in Egypt etc. By Edward William Lane. Various 
 editions. London. — Lane, Bitten und Gebrauche der heutigen 
 Egypter. Ubersetzt von /. Zenker. 3 Bde. Leipzig 1852. 
 
 E. W. Lane, Arabian society in the middle ages. Studies from the 
 Thousand and One Nights ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. London 
 1883. (Supplement to the "Manners and Customs", containing 
 the notes to Lane's translation of the Thousand and One Nights 
 [v. infra). 
 
 M. VERSE. 
 
 Delectus veterum carminum arabicorum. Carmina selegit et edidit 
 Th. Noeldeke, glossarium confecit A. Muller. Berolini 1890. 
 
 tjber Poesie und Poetik der Araber von Wilhelm Ahlwardt. Gotha 
 1856. 4". 
 
 Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alten Araber. Von Th. Noldeke. 
 Hannover 1864. 
 
 Kitdb al-agdni by Abu '1-Farag 'AJi al-Isfahani (f 352 H., beg. 
 30. Jan. 962). 20 vols. Bulak 1285. — Ahi Ispahanensis 
 liber cantilenarum magnus, ed. Kosegarten. T. 1. Gripesvoldiae 
 1840. 4C. — The twenty-first volume of The Kitab al-aghani 
 ed. by Rud. E. Brunnow, Leyden 1888. — Tables alphabetiques 
 du Kitab al-Agani par J. Quidi. l^r fasc. Leide 1895. 
 
 Kitab raudat al-adab fi tabakat suara* al'arab by Iskander-Aga 
 Abkarius (modern Beyrout scholar). Beirut 1858. 
 
 Bizauat al-adab wa-lubb lubab hsan al-'arab, by '' Ab-daX-Kddir ibn 
 'Umar al-Bagdddi (f 1093 H.; beg. 21. Aug. 1629) 4 vols. Bulak 
 1291 (A work on poets; on the margin are printed the Sawahid 
 al-'Aini). An index to the poets appeared from the pen of Quidi 
 in the transactions of the E. Accademia dei Lincei, Eome 1887. 
 
 *The Diwans of the six ancient Arabic poets Ennabiga, 'Antara, Tharafa, 
 Zuhair, 'Alcjama and Lnruulqais, ed. by W. Ahlwardt. London. 
 1870. 
 
 Bemerkungen iiber die Achtheit der alten Arabischen Gedichte mit 
 besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. von W. Ahlwardt, 
 Greifswald 1872. 
 
 Le Diwan de Nabiga Dhobyani public par H. Dtreniourg. Journal 
 asiatique 1868 — 9. 
 
 H. Thorbecke, 'Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867. 
 
 Die Gedichte des'j.!fta»??o Alfahl. Mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben 
 von Albert Soein. Leipzig 1867. 
 
 Le diwan d'Amro'lkais par le Bon de Slane. Paris 1837. 40. With 
 
LiTEBATUBE M. 167 
 
 Commentary by al-BatalyiJsi. Cairo 1308. Cf. Amrilkais, der 
 Dichter und Konig. Von Fr. Biickert. Stuttgart und Tu- 
 bingen 1843. 
 
 ■t-*Septem Mo'allakat carmina antiquiisima Arabum, textum etc. rec. 
 F. A. Arnold. Lipsiae 1850 (out of print) — "With commentary 
 by az-Zauzani (f 375 H., beg. 24. May 958). Cairo 1288. 
 
 A commentary by Abii Zakariya Sahya at-Tihrizi (f 420 H., beg. 
 11. Aug. 1108) on ten ancient Arabic poems edited from the Mss. 
 of Cambridge, London and Leiden by Charles James Lyall. 
 Fasc. I Bibliotheca Indica, New Series, No. 789, Calcutta 1891; 
 Pasc. II ib. No. 840. Calc. 1894. 
 
 Der Diwan des Lelnd. Nach einer Handschrift zum ersten Male 
 herausgegeben von Jusuf JDijd-ad-dm al-CMlidl. Wien 1880. 
 Cf. A. von Krenier in den Sitzungsberichten der phil.-hist. 
 Classe der Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften 98. Bd. 2 Heft. 
 Wien 1881. — Die Gedichte des Lebid. Nach der Wiener 
 Ausgabe iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen Tersehen aus dem 
 Nachlasse des Dr. A. JSuber herausgegeben von Oarl Brockel- 
 mann. Leiden 1891. 
 
 Die Mufaddalij at (Anthology of the Grammarian al-Mufaddal; f about 
 170 H.) Nach den Handschriften herausgegeben von Seinrich 
 Thortecke. Erstes Heft. Leipzig 1885. 
 
 *Samaaae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in- 
 struxit, versione latina et commentario illustr, G. G. Freyiag. 
 2 vol. Bonnae 1828—47 (collected by Abu Tammam f 180, beg. 
 27. Nov. 805; at-Tabrizi Comm. f 420 H., beg. 11. Aug. 1108). 
 Another edition Bulak 1296. Cf. Hamasa oder die altesten 
 arabischen Volkslieder, gesammelt von Abu Temmam, iibersetzt 
 und erlautert von Friedrich Biickert. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846. 
 
 The Hudsaolian poems contained in the manuscript of Leyden edited 
 in Arabic and translated with annotations by J. G. L. Kosegarten. 
 Yol. I. London 1854. 4". — Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu- 
 dbailiten, arabisch und deutsch: Skizzen und Torarbeiten von 
 J. Wellhausen. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884. Comp. Z. der D. Morgenl. 
 Gesellschaft 39. pp. 104, 151, 411 ff. 
 
 Die Gedichte des 'Urwa ibn Alward. Von Th, Noldeke: Abhandlungen 
 der Kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gottingen. Hist. -Phil. Classe 11. 
 
 Gedichte und Pragmente des 'Aus ibn Bajar, gesammelt, herausgegeben 
 und iibersetzt von Rudolf Geyer: Sitzungsberichte der Kais. 
 Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Philos.-hist. Classe. Band 
 126. Wien 1892. 
 
 Anis al-gulasa fi diwan al-Sansa (The poetess al-Hansa is said to 
 have died A. H. 24, beg. 7. Nov. 644 A. D.) Beirut 1888. — 
 Le diwan d'al Hansa' traduit par le P. de Coppier et suivi de 
 fragments inedits d'Al-Hirniq. Beyrouth 1889. 
 
168 Literature M. 
 
 Ibn Hisami(t 762 H., beg. 11 Nov. 1360) Commentarius in Carmen 
 
 Ka^bi len Zoheir Banat Suad ed. Guidi. Lipsiae 1871. 1874. 
 Der Diwan des Garwal b. Aus al-Hutefa (f between 68 — 70 H.) 
 
 Bearbeitet von Ignaz Qoldziher: Zeitsehrift der D. Morgenl. 
 
 Gesellschaft Bd. 46, S. 1—53; 173—225; 471—527; Bd. 47, 
 
 8.43 — 85; 163—201. Also in a collected edition. Leipzig 1893. 
 Diwan sayyidna Hassan ibn Tdbit (f 54 H., beg. 30. Aug. 683). 
 
 Tiinia 1281. 
 Diwan d'al-Ahtal, Texte arabe publie pour la premiere fois d'apres le 
 
 manuscrit de St. Petersbourg et annot§ par le P. A. Salhani 
 
 S. J. Beyrouth 1891. 
 Divan de Ferazdak (f 110 H., beg. 16. April 728) recits de Mohammed 
 
 ben-Habib d'apres Ibn-el-Arabi publie sur le manuscrit de Sainte- 
 
 Sophie de Constantinople avec une traduction franjaise par B. 
 
 Boucher. Paris 1870. 4". (incomplete). 
 Magmii' mustamil 'ala hams dawawin (an-Nabiga, 'Urwa, Hatim, 'Al- 
 
 kama and Tarazdal;) Cairo 1293 cf. Z. der D. Morgenl. Ge- 
 sellschaft 31, 667 ff.' 
 Ghalef elahmar^s {Ai&A after 155 H.) Qasside. Berichtigter arabischer 
 
 Text etc. von A. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1859. 
 Diwan al-Buhtun (f 190 H,, beg. 27 Nov. 805). Constantinople 1300. 
 Diwan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschrift 
 
 mit Benutzung anderer Handschriften herausgegeben von W. Ahl- 
 
 loardt. I. Die Weinlieder. Greifswald 1861. — Diwan Abi Nuwas. 
 
 Cairo 1277. (Abu Nuwas f about 195 H. = 810). 
 Diwan poetae Abu-'l-Walid Moslim ibno-'l-Walid al-Angari cognomine 
 
 Qano-'l-gliawdni (San al-gawdni f 208 H., beg. 16. May 823) 
 
 quem edidit M. de J. Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1875. 4". 
 Al-anwar az-zahiya fi diwan Abi'l-'Atahiya (AbiiV Atdhiya f 221 
 
 H., beg. 26. Dec. 835). Beirut 1886. 2nie fedit. 1888. 
 Diwan Abl Tammdni Habib ibn Aus at-Ta'i (f 231 H., beg. 7. Sept. 
 
 845). Cairo 1292.' 
 Diwan amir al-mu'minm Ibn-al-Mu tazz nl-'Abbasi (f 296 H. = 909) 
 
 Cairo 1891. Cf. tjber Leben und Werk des 'Abdallah ibn al- 
 
 Mutazz von Otto Loth. Leipzig 1882. 
 Mutanabbii (^al-Mutanabbi f 354 H. = 965) carmina cum commen- 
 
 tario "Waliidii primum edidit, indicibus instruxit, varias lectiones 
 
 adnotavit Fr. Dieterici. Berolini 1861. 4". 
 Diwan Aii Firds al-Hamdani (f 357 beg. 7. Dec. 967). Beirut 
 
 1873. 
 Abu'l-Alu' al-Maarri (f 449 H., beg. 10 Jlarch 1057) Sakt ez-zind, 
 
 Poems with Commentary. 2 vols. Bulak 1286 and 1302 (Another 
 
 edition Beii-ut 1884). — Luziim ma la yalzam. Bombay 1303. 
 
 4"; Luzumiyat 2 vols. Cairo 1891. — Caroli Rieu de Abul-Alae 
 
LiTEKATUBE N. 169 
 
 poetae arabici vita et carmiuibus. Bonnae 1843. Cf. Zeitschrift 
 der D. Morgenl. Gesellschaft 29, 304; 30, 40; 31, 471 ff. 
 
 Yatimat ad-dahr fi suara' ahl al-'asr, Anthology composed by Abu 
 Mansur 'Abd al-Malik a.t-Taalibi (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 1037) 
 4 vols. Damascus 1302. 
 
 Anthologie arabe ou choix de pofeies arabes inedites traduites pour 
 la premiere fois en frangais et accompagnfees d' observations critiques 
 et littferaires par M. Orangeret de La Orange. (Paris) 1828. 
 
 N. BELLES-LETTRES, ETHICS, ROMANCES. 
 
 *The Kamil of Bl-Mubarrad (f 285 H., beg. 28. Jan. 898), edited 
 for the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part. 1 — 12; 
 Leipzig 1864 — 92. A reprint appeared in Cairo 2 vols. 1308. 
 
 al-'Ikd al-farid, by Ibn 'Abd-rahbihi al-Andalitsi (f 328 H., beg. 
 28. March 860) 3 vols. Bulak 1293. 
 
 Kitab al-Muwassa of Abu 't-Tayyib Muhammed ibn Ishaq al-Waiid 
 (lived 860—938 A. D.) edited by JS. Brunnow. Leyden 1886. 
 
 Ibn Arabschah (f 854 H., beg. 14. Febr. 1450) Fructus imperatorum 
 et jocatio ingeniosorum edidit Q. 6. Freytag, 2. vol. Bonnae 
 1832. 4". ^ Oriental editions with the title: Pakihat al-hulafa' 
 wa-mu^kahat az-zurafa'. 
 
 Makamat badi' az-zaman al-Hamaddnl (al-Hamadani, the predecessor 
 ' of Hariri died 398 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1007) with commentary by 
 Seih Muhammad Abdo. Beirut 1889. Other Makamat of Hamar 
 dani Constantinople 1298. 
 
 *Les s6ances de Hariri (al-Hariri f 516 H. , beg. 12. March 1122), 
 avec un commentaire choisi pao Silvestre de Sacy; 1 ed. Paris 
 1822; 2. ed. par Beinaud et J. Verenbourg . ^ 2 torn. Paris 
 1847—1853. — "With the Commentary of as-Sarisi (f 619 H., 
 beg. 15. Feb. 1222) 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Makamat (Towelled 
 text) 2. Ed. Beyrouth 1886. — The Assemblies of Al-Hariri, 
 transl. &o. by Thomas Chenery. Vol I 1867. — Do. Arabic text 
 with English notes &c. by F. Steingass 1895. 
 
 *Kitab Adab al-Kdtib (proply. an aid to elegant writing) composed 
 by Muhammed Abdallah ibn Muslim Ibn Kutaiba (f in the 
 2nd- half of the Srd- Centy. of the Flight). Cairo 1300. 
 
 Kitab al-matal as-sa'ir fi, 'adab al-katib was-sa'ir (Treatise on Style) 
 by Ibn al-Attr al-Gazari (f 637 H., beg. 3. Aug. 1239) Cairo 
 1282. 
 
 Basail (Letters) abi'1-Fadl badi' az-zaman a\Samaddni (f 398 H., 
 beg. 17. Sept. 1007). Constantinople 1298. 
 
 dl-Maidanl (f 518 H., beg. 19. Feb. 1124) Magma' al-amtal. (Collec- 
 tion of Proverbs). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Arabum proverbia, 
 
170 Literature N. 
 
 vocalibus instruxit, lafcine vertit, commentario illustravit G. Q. 
 Freytag I, II, III (a b.), BoBnae 1838—43. 
 
 fLes colliers d'or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (az-Zamahian 
 t 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) texts arabe suivi d'une traduction 
 fran^aise et d'un commentaire philologique par C. Barbier de 
 Meynard. Paris 1876. 
 
 All's hundert Spruche arabisch und persisch paraphrasiert von Keschid- 
 eddin Watwat, nebst einem doppelten Anbarig arabischer Spriiche 
 herausgegeben, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von 
 H. L. Fleischer, Leipzig 1837. 40. 
 
 Sirag al-mulrik (Ethics and Anecdotes) composed by Abu Bekr Mu- 
 hammed at-Tartuli al-Maliki (f 520 H. , beg. 27. Jan. 1126). 
 Cairo 1289. 
 
 Muhadarat al-udaba wa-muhawarat as-su'ara wal-bulaga, a species 
 of Ethics with Anecdotes by ar-Bdgib al-Isfahdm (f in the 
 beginning of the 6tli centy. of the Flight). 2 vols. Cairo 1287. 40. 
 
 al-Mustatraf fi kull fann al-mustazraf, a species of anthologieal En- 
 cyclopaedia compiled by Ahmad al-IbWii (lived about 800 H.) 
 2 vols. Caii-o 1304. 1307. ' 
 
 Siret 'jimteribn Saddad, 32 vols. Cairo 1286. 1307. (another recension 
 10 vols. Beirut 1871). Cf. Antar, a Bedoueen romance. Trans- 
 lated from Arabic by T. Hamilton. Part. I, i — iv. London 1820. 
 
 Alf laila wa-laila. Tausend und eine Nacht arabisch. Nach einer 
 Handschriffc aus Tunis herausg. von Maximilian Habicht I — VTII; 
 fortges. von H. L. Fleischer IX— XII vol. Breslau 1825—43. 
 (This edition is not suitable for beginners in Arabic, as the 
 language is in many parts strongly influenced by the vulgar 
 tongue). ■ — The AJif Laila or book of the thousand nights and 
 one night, published from an Egyptian Ms. by W. H. Macnaghten. 
 4 vols. Calcutta 1839— 42. — 4 vols. Bulak 1279. — Original 
 in expurgated edition. Beyrout 1888 — 90. — Following the 
 earlier Bulak edition; The thousand and one nights commonly 
 called, in England, The Arabian nights' entertainments. Trans- 
 lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 ed. 1841. Other editions 
 by Edw. Stanley Poole (the last 1882). 
 
REUTHE R^REICHA RD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN. 
 
 CHRESTOMATHY 
 
 OF 
 
 ARABIC PROSE-PIECES 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. R. BRUNNOW. 
 
 Crown 80. Cloth pp. 334, price 8 s. 6 d. 
 
 DELECTUS VETERUM 
 CARMINUM ARABICORUM 
 
 Carmina selegit et edidit 
 THEOD. NOELDEKE. 
 
 Glossarium confecit 
 AUG. MUELLER. 
 
 Crown 8°. Cloth pp. 256, price 7 s. 6 d. 
 
 * AN 
 
 ARABIC BIBLE-CHRESTOMATHY 
 
 WITH A GLOSSARY 
 
 Edited by 
 
 DR. GEORGE JACOB. 
 
 Crown 80. Cloth pp. 64, price 2 s. 6 d. 
 
 LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGALE, 14, Henrietta Street. 
 NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway. 
 
PART n. 
 
 PARADIGMS, CHRESTOMATHY 
 
 AND 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 Socin. Arabic Grammar.' 
 
Exercises in KEADiNa. 31* 
 
 } yf iM. i «aajaJ1 JflJuJ) |^jj.<u»aj *J jj^JL^JI oi-^!o« 5. 
 
 '— .CuC^ O^jO'- ?o?,-' (2 -'p-- ? CJo^ ^'2-' 9 M ^^ 
 
 .^,^S^o^ ^jG^'i^Yi-" "Tl' *•'- H^tr on 
 
 Let>j jl».s.5 (5<X» si>U). JJ |Vg.AJI^ ij^^- (J^-"^'" ■ 
 
 jv^^u ,j.4Js->Ji i^(^*vJi xaJ^ br'^ (5f^ i^;-"*^ 
 
 y^ lyiXXi^t JtX+si (ji.^1. iiXji^JI J.^A*»:| ^A»AJ] 
 
32 EXEKCISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 B. EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 ' . T -- '•" - > ^ ,,o* .--.-.-: ^f'o ^ "• ^ 
 
 16-29. \.j~>^ Fy*'' jj-"*=*- liJr^' '— ';'-^ i«jtXA^|, wCio 
 
 J^ ^■''i r^M ti^Li. (^Jiajl^ «^Ji^l^ v.S^^sxJl 
 
 £)^' (J-^-'' ff^.J"^ J-*«A-*.I JJ^" (jJ-O 1«1AJ JJjI 
 
 y^ol j^UjlXj JoaXc^I tX*=; iU:^ ^vj:i[ ^J^Ju?.^. ^a.I 
 
 '" t-t ' ji".' =?."'> '"J 'f^" .5-0., 0,0, 
 
 ^Tf-"^' 07*^. ^fp i54*»' 1*-^^^ '^■i^r'. r'*"^' 
 
 "^ i_a^X/j t^^AAs.! ^j-gj.^_ v^*-*J LXaaJ i^.La\AJ 
 irJTir I 'f.T' " O'o'* i-i.' , , -"o , o, 
 
 ^sU-«*i^ t^iJ[ U*aX«] j^kl*^- ^v*o I^JoIl "pyOJ 
 
 ['"V-l I "'•■:• '^"'" o-.,o,' , ,-> , , o, 
 
 Ls^ '^7*^^l l;t)a-o ^^i- bc£^ l^^f J^^JUI 
 iy^ (^tVxi tXjjj v_*^ isSiAj u^i-AAs.! ^Tj-^Mdj LSiiJr 
 
 \\ \ •'\°- K^' — °.' ' "" """- 0,0, o a—o. 
 
 'rf^' ty/*:? '^/^ t^"-^ (J^y r**+» ;yij v:iuJuU«j 
 
 ^ t>t>-«aj ^KMJ yyiJtXw w« Jj^ 
 
PARADIGMATA. 
 
 TABULA I. 
 
 Suffixa et Praefixa in flexione 
 
 verbi adhibita. 
 
 Persona 
 
 Numerus 
 
 Perfeotum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 sing. 
 
 
 'nib 
 
 3. fern. 
 
 1) 
 
 -- 
 
 - S (i) 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 1) 
 
 liy 
 
 S(i-) 
 
 2. fern. 
 
 V 
 
 «y_ 
 
 (^5 ) ,2^. S (i) 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 s i 
 
 1. 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 — t (1) 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 dual. 
 
 1 ' 
 
 (I') C)'^ ^(^■) 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 n 
 
 I'r 
 
 (t ' ) u'r ■> 6) 
 
 2. 
 
 n 
 
 us- 
 
 (1 ' ) ^;,r 3 (i) 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 plur. 
 
 '/ 
 
 ('^ ')^,' ^. (^ 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 n 
 
 u 
 
 u- ^ (^) 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 » 
 
 fj- 
 
 (' ' ) i,; ' ^- d) 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 n 
 
 a > 
 
 u ^-(^o 
 
 1. 
 
 n 
 
 LS 
 
 i.6 
 
 A* 
 
4* 
 
 Paradigmata. 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 s 
 o 
 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 
 1^ 
 
 f S 
 
 
 
 C3 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 :i,a^^ 
 
 
 ^=9 
 
 :i » — 
 
 "1 "4 "^^4 "4 '^ 
 
 3^ B^ 33 O't) o^ 
 
 
 ^3 :3 :^ ^55 
 '-D °-6 ^\ ^^ 
 
 u 
 
 •I' I 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 B g 
 
 ft 
 
 \-5 v-< , 0-5 0-5^ »-< 
 
 
Paeadismata. 
 
 g 
 
 ■1-1 
 
 ^^ '■p> 
 
 ^=3 
 
 ^^ -Ds ^^ 
 
 »S3' 
 — I. 
 
 5 
 
 1) ,5 "^ 
 
 
 '3 'ii 'ii 'J3 ^J3 
 
 3 >i) -^oi. "'t )P 
 
 Id 
 t3 
 
 
 a 
 
 03 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
Pahadigmata. 
 
 TABULA III. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Passivi I verbi sani 
 
 Persona 
 
 Hume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indioativus 
 
 Subjunc- I , 
 
 lApocopat. 
 tivus '^ 
 
 3. masc, 
 3. fern. 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 smg. 
 
 dual. 
 
 plur. 
 
 o J 
 
 LAa] 
 
 9 9 
 
 X's 
 
 ^J.J^• 
 
 9 
 
 (}>.XA3 
 9^0 9 
 
 J«Xa. 
 
 ^ 09 
 
 'o' 
 
 ^^0 9 
 
 
 ^o> 
 
 
 kA^Ju 
 
 
 
 CMAJ 
 
 
 " ^o 9 
 ' '"9 
 
 J-AAJ 
 
Paradigmata. 
 
 
 •rs 
 
 a 
 
 ^ s 
 
 s 
 •S 
 
 « 
 
 a. 
 
 a 
 
 I 
 a 
 
 'a 
 
 Ph 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 c5 
 
 <»*> 
 
 v| :i ^ ^ 
 
 »-% ^n^ A ,v4 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 \ :d \ :c( \ ? 
 
 
 
 "knn 
 
 03 
 P-l 
 
 \ >-x^ 
 
 
 .-^ 
 
 03 
 
 Ph 
 
Paeadigmata. 
 
 
 
 S 
 be 
 
 n 
 
 
 *rr •< <e -A-rr - • 
 
 ^-6 ^-6 "^ »A \-6 --6 oA o=i 
 
 
 3 \3; ^i^ "i! "3^ ^= ^lB ":: 
 
 •"-rS 
 
 "-S 
 
 "3 '=.5 '-S* ^=^ ''5^ IH ^" 
 
 \-5 '^\ 0-5 j:^^ ^^ ^-3 "^ •■ 
 •^^V) ^"^"^ •"^3 '" 
 
 4 °i 'J2 n^ 4^ v=3 ^^1 «4 
 
 —6 =--6 '■■'-6 ^ --^ i> ^ 
 
 »-D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 <t) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 00 
 
 =1 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 fa 
 
 .2 
 
 03 
 
 _2 
 
 a 
 
 -1-3 
 
 
 
 ;-i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■i 
 
 
 OJ 
 
 
 .11 
 
 
 Sh 
 
 ft 
 
 Ph 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;h 
 
 a 
 
 O) 
 
 H 
 
 Fi 
 
 cS 
 
 <B 
 
 n 
 
 Ph 
 
 1 — 1 
 
 HH 
 
 Ah 
 
 Ph 
 
 1— 1 
 
 a 
 'ft 
 
 c3 
 
 3 
 
 
Paradigmata. 
 
 M 
 
 —6 »-' 
 
 
 .9 
 
 i^M fit 
 
 :5' 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 ^ o 
 
 \ :. 
 
 -:cl 
 
 \:c 
 
 \ u 
 
 !!3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 '> 
 
 
 
 
 
 r= 
 
 K 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 m 
 
 R 
 
 E 
 
 p 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a? 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 1=1 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 03 
 
 +? 
 
 a^ 
 
 d 
 
 O) 
 
 ft 
 
 t- 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 •F-t 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Si 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 S-l 
 
 
 
 
 =2 
 
 
 
 -^3 
 
 'H 
 
 ^ 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 p 
 
 fS 
 
 cS 
 
 a> 
 
 H 
 
 c3 
 
 a 
 
 
 IIh 
 
 1— 1 
 
 1— 1 
 
 p-l 
 
 PlH 
 
 H- 1 
 
 PL^ 
 
 1 — ( 
 
10* 
 
 Paradigmata. 
 
 TABULA VI. 
 
 Paradi^ma flexionis 
 
 Activi I verbi mediae geminatae 
 
 Persona 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fern. 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 tum 
 
 Imjperfectum 
 
 Indica- 
 tivus 
 
 sing. 
 
 
 n 
 
 c^ 
 
 H 
 
 ^;? 
 
 n 
 
 '^i/ 
 
 11 
 
 
 dual. 
 
 '/ 
 
 M 
 
 up- 
 
 n 
 
 
 plur. 
 
 •>/ 
 
 )) 
 
 o--— 
 
 i";/ 
 
 11 
 
 n 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 c^^^a^ 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 7^ 
 
 ,AJ 
 
 7^ 
 
 c; - 
 a -' 
 
 7^ 
 
 Apocopatus 
 
 ^■;;^" 
 ;5';7*' 
 
 u;7^ 
 
 C - o 6- 
 
PaEADIGMATA. 
 
 11' 
 
 TABULA VII. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Passivi I verbi mediae geminatae 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indioati- 
 vus 
 
 Subjuno- 
 tivus 
 
 Apocopatus 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fern. 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 smg. 
 
 dual. 
 
 plur. 
 
 9 
 
 1'° '• 
 
 7^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 1°'' 
 
 ^)J^. 
 
 
 
 ,AJ 
 
 f^)T 
 
 
12* 
 
 PAKADIGMAIil. 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 3:il!%iii^.ilii^ 
 
 a 
 o 
 w 
 
 1— ( 
 
 
 = 
 
 1— 1 
 
 > 
 
 ^iB ^:§= \3 i;j =^-i f§= r^ ^3 
 
 SULA VIII 
 
 mediae 
 
 > 
 
 1— 1 
 
 ^"x:x:VV'^-^'^^a:;5 
 
 ^2 
 
 M 
 
 P^'5 ^^^.rj -\:^s vJ 0^ 
 
 s 
 'a. 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 be 
 
 •3 
 
 Perfectum Activi 
 Imperfectum n 
 Imperativus n 
 Participium n 
 Perfectum Passivi 
 Imperfectum « 
 Participium „ 
 Infinitivus " 
 
Paeadigmata. 
 
 13* 
 
 TABULA IX. 
 
 Paradigma formarum selectaniin flexionis 
 
 verborum hamzatorum 
 
 
 
 
 verbi tert. 
 
 
 Verbi pr. ^ 
 
 Verbi sec. J^ 
 
 Ja 
 
 I. Perf. Act. 
 
 
 1*^ v_*.a3 
 
 
 
 , it. 
 
 5*"^ js^-- 
 
 i o 
 
 Impf. 1) 
 
 ^k: 
 
 j»^ 'J>-^ 
 
 \y^. 
 
 Imperat. n 
 
 n 
 
 ;ii,:.^<i 
 
 
 Partic. )) 
 
 '/ 
 
 
 
 Perf. Pass. 
 
 ^' 
 
 'r?J 
 
 
 Imp erf. « 
 
 
 r*i^ 
 
 7*:? 
 
 II. Imperf. Act. 
 
 
 
 
 
 4' 
 
 S f^ 
 
 6-'°, 
 
 Infin. V 
 
 ;4^ 
 
 (V^y?-*^' 
 
 xjJii' 
 
 
 ^r.m^ 
 
 *o* 
 
 *_0* 
 
 IV. Perf. Act. 
 
 ?' 
 
 r^' 
 
 1^1 
 
 
 i> 
 
 o 5 
 
 ;5 6 ^ 
 
 Perf. Pass. 
 
 7^^' 
 
 r^' 
 
 ^/' 
 
 
 - ^a 
 
 *,(. 
 
 ^jT-o 
 
 VIII. Perf. Act 
 
 'y^l id<m 
 
 j.lj:JI 
 
 t^il 
 
 Imperf. n 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ ? ? ^ i,9 
 
 , >0J 
 
 s' ">» 
 
 Perf. Pass. 
 
 )Pi^ ('>^'0 
 
 (V^l 
 
 tS/i"! 
 
 Imperf. n 
 
 
 ;l^^ 
 
 LaAJ 
 
14* 
 
 Pabadkjmata. 
 
 TABULA X. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis verborum 
 
 primae radicalis « et ^c 
 
 
 Verbi pr. j 
 Imperf. i 
 
 Verbi pr. j 
 Imperf. a 
 
 Verbi pr. j sani 
 
 Verbi pr 
 
 1 L5 
 
 I. Perf. Act 
 
 J-05 
 
 £^5 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 * Imperf. n 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 £jo: 
 
 
 9 
 
 Imperat. « 
 
 3 ^ J 
 
 ^ 
 
 (J^j, J^jo 
 
 
 
 Imperf. Pass. 
 
 •y^yi. 
 
 
 5 — * 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 'iXjo 
 
 
 e-5 
 
 ;^ 
 
 IV. Perf. Act. 
 
 
 
 
 yM 
 
 Imperf. n 
 
 '^yr'. 
 
 J 3 
 
 
 > 
 
 Partic. 1) 
 
 
 S J 
 
 £^^ 
 
 S 5 
 
 s 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 JLu3.^t 
 
 l'^4 
 
 e^i 
 
 G. , '■ 
 
 VIII. Perf. Act. 
 
 ju^-t 
 
 i^i 
 
 
 C 
 
 7^ 
 
 Imperf. i, 
 
 
 £'^^ 
 
 
 HI 
 
 Perf. Pass. 
 
 J-«aj'f 
 
 gtXl'l 
 
 
 d 
 
 X. Perf. Act. 
 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 
 |ljuucll 
 
 
 «i ' ..', 
 
Pakadigmata. 
 
 15* 
 
 TABULA XI. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Activi I Terbi mediae radicalis 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 turn 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indicati- 
 vus 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 Apocopa- 
 
 tus 
 
 Impera- 
 
 tiVHS 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 sing. 
 
 Ju 
 
 
 Jyij 
 
 
 H 
 
 ,I..TU 
 
 
 
 J .- 
 
 )1 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 ? 
 
 (J-J^- 
 
 iyiS 
 
 ij^B 
 
 n 
 
 ' 1" 
 
 
 
 
 dual. 
 
 ifU 
 
 U^^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 V^ 
 
 n 
 
 Qu- 
 
 Jy^ 
 
 1^^' 
 
 5Jj?V 
 
 n 
 
 ? > 
 
 ITvilv 
 
 JJ^ 
 
 ifjii' 
 
 :^^- 
 
 plur. 
 
 t^li- 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 y>: 
 
 y^. 
 
 n 
 
 » 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 » 
 
 ! > 
 
 > 5^ 
 
 g^' 
 
 
 19 
 
 
 f ^ 
 
 
 
 ! n 
 
 lib- 
 
 Jyij 
 
 
 Juij 
 
 4^ 
 
 :^^- 
 
 
16* 
 
 Pabadigmata. 
 
 TABULA XII. 
 
 Paradig^ma llexionis 
 
 Activi I verbi mediae radicalis ^ 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 turn 
 
 Imperfecttmi 
 
 Indicati- 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 Apocopa- 
 tiis 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fern. 
 2i masc. 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 sing. 
 
 \Lw 
 
 
 
 7^. 
 
 « 
 
 i^ikLIw 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 ^AutMj 
 
 
 « 
 
 ^;y*-w 
 
 yt^'i 
 
 j^wUmJ 
 
 
 n 
 
 *^^T^ 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 'Sj^ 
 
 t5rA^' 
 
 n 
 
 «y^Au 
 
 
 r^' 
 
 
 dual. 
 
 IJU 
 
 
 Ij^AamJ 
 
 IjAaulJ 
 
 » 
 
 Lj\Llu 
 
 u't^s^j 
 
 tj.AMO 
 
 tj.AAMJ° 
 
 n 
 
 Ujww 
 
 Cj'^^i^i' 
 
 La«o 
 
 IwAmO 
 
 plur. 
 
 Ij^Lw 
 
 - 5 - 
 
 'j/^ 
 
 l.wA.uO 
 
 H 
 
 
 U7^ 
 
 U/i^^ 
 
 ^0 ^ 
 
 « 
 
 O ' o 
 
 U;i7^v^' 
 
 UwAmO 
 
 1 ' ' 
 
 n 
 
 C>';-« 
 
 or^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 Li^^u, 
 
 9 - 
 
 ;-^ 
 
 a — 
 
Paradkjmata. 
 
 l?" 
 
 TABULA, xrn. 
 Paradigma fiexionis 
 
 Passivi I verbi mediae radicalis . vel 
 
 (5 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 twm 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 , 
 
 
 Indicativus 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 Apooopa- 
 tus 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 sing. 
 
 cM 
 
 JL$. 
 
 J^. 
 
 J^ 
 
 3. fern. 
 
 )i 
 
 c>jj^ 
 
 jOi- 
 
 Jlii- 
 
 JJu 
 
 2. maSc. 
 
 51 
 
 
 jlii- 
 
 Jlii- 
 
 O ..3 
 
 J.jii' 
 
 2. fern. 
 
 » 
 
 
 ^l^ 
 
 aiii- 
 
 ^lii- 
 
 1. 
 
 » 
 
 ^: 
 
 Jb-I 
 
 Jlif 
 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 dual. 
 
 ^? 
 
 cj^Ui 
 
 ^'lij 
 
 :^'u;. 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 » 
 
 UdlAi- 
 
 J\^ 
 
 
 iflii- 
 
 2. 
 
 » 
 
 lae 
 
 J^ 
 
 :^iil- 
 
 illii- 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 plur. 
 
 t^' 
 
 ^M 
 
 yu; 
 
 lyii; 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 n 
 
 ^e 
 
 - 1"' 
 
 ^^. 
 
 ^ 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 1) 
 
 
 u;Jl£- 
 
 lyii^- 
 
 lyUi 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ o -* 
 
 ^ 
 
 1. 
 
 n 
 
 LXJU; 
 
 rnmmfir ^ 
 
 3 ^J 
 
 Jlii 
 
 B 
 
 JJii 
 
 Socin, 
 
18* 
 
 Paradig&ata. 
 
 M 
 
 ^ - 
 
 e 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 a ^ 
 
 •^ I— I 
 
 
 cs 
 g I 
 
 <j © 
 
 c-i ,a 
 
 a J 
 
 a ;2j 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 :J 
 
 -4 ^ ..,4 '^ '-^ 
 
 ~D (.■>—) 
 
 •4 
 
 ;4 il ^J 34 ^^ ; j= ^J °i ^3= 
 
 '-D J -- ) -» o— , \-f, --o 8)=^ ^,J 
 
 ^3^ n ^' ^1^ y 1^ ^' f^ 'f 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 : W-:- 
 
 4 ^ „4 ^4 - 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 ->; 
 
 *> 
 
 
 
 !5- ../| .J .A. ",5- 
 
 
 
 
 
 -t1 
 
 d 
 
 R 
 
 s 
 
 R 
 
 c3 
 (In 
 
 R 
 
 -1-3 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 a 
 
 -+j 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;-l 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 4ii 
 
 FM 
 
 Oh 
 
 (D 
 
 ■43 
 
 S-i 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 ID 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 ■s 
 
 
 
 
 t^ 
 
 
 I— ( 
 
 HH 
 
 Ph 
 
 Pi 
 
 O 
 
 
 !3 
 • i-t 
 
 a 
 
Paradiomata. 
 
 19* 
 
 TABULA XV. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Activi I verbi ultimae . JSi 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indioa- 
 
 tivus 
 
 Subjunc- 
 
 tivus 
 
 Apoco- 
 
 patus 
 
 Impera- 
 
 tivus 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc, 
 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 sing. 
 
 dual. 
 
 plur. 
 
 9 
 
 9 0^-^ 
 
 9 0^ 
 
 
 »!"■■ 
 
 --Jo' 
 
 ,0- 
 
 
 
 ^s>^' 
 
 i;^i 
 
 ^ J "' 
 ^> "' 
 
 ^ J "' 
 
 >^ 
 
 B* 
 
 
20* 
 
 Paeadiq-mata. 
 
 TABULA XVI. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Activi I verbi ultimae ^^ JJii 
 
 Persona 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indica- 
 
 tivus 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 Apoco- 
 patus 
 
 Impera- 
 tivus 
 
 3. masc, 
 3. fern. 
 2. masc, 
 
 2. fern. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fern. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 sing. 
 
 dual, 
 
 plur. 
 
 o . 
 
 CI ^^ 
 
 UwOv 
 
 u: 
 
 
 UuOwJ 
 
 "; 
 
 
 
 o " 
 a •" 
 
 r; 
 
 Hy°7^ 
 
 LuOwJ 
 
 
PAEADiaMATA. 
 
 21* 
 
 TABULA XVII. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Activi I verbi ultimae . vel ^ Juii 
 
 
 Nume- 
 rus 
 
 Perfee- 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 
 Persona 
 
 Indioa- 
 tivus 
 
 Subjuno- 
 tivus 
 
 Apooopa- 
 tus 
 
 Impera- 
 tivus 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 sing. 
 
 .5^; 
 
 
 
 U^^ 
 
 
 3. fern. 
 
 !) 
 
 
 C5^? 
 
 
 u^ys 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 M 
 
 v:^.ci\ 
 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 V// 
 
 \^]\ 
 
 2« fern. 
 
 M 
 
 o«.A^» 
 
 ^ ..- ^ 
 
 
 
 ^;i 
 
 1. 
 
 )) 
 
 
 
 
 -"f 
 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 dual. 
 
 LloJ 
 
 ^?^7^- 
 
 La.<oO 
 
 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 » 
 
 [xXJl 
 
 u^y 
 
 1 ■''.''.■: 
 
 byco 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 1) 
 
 
 ^^f 
 
 Uyovj 
 
 LI^S 
 
 
 3. masc. 
 
 plur. 
 
 11 
 
 
 sjy^f. 
 
 'i^j^ 
 
 'r^!i5 
 
 
 3. fem. 
 
 vj^; 
 
 ^J^;^. 
 
 ch^;^ 
 
 c>^7^ 
 
 
 2. masc. 
 
 11 
 
 ^W; 
 
 ur^/ 
 
 1--: »' 
 
 
 lp5JJ 
 
 2. fem. 
 
 J) 
 
 <5 J ^ 
 
 
 ^°f 
 
 
 iJ^ij 
 
 1. 
 
 1 
 
 ^-^^5 
 
 ^ -^ 
 
 
 \J>y 
 
 
22* 
 
 Paeadigmata. 
 
 M .-1 a; 
 
 > 
 
 o.« 0:01 o.n ,!^ ..« o:c „:3 »-a 
 
 
 ^ % ^ i>^ ^l '\ a ^T ^J 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 :t-^,^-t.:t^>t:^t' 
 
 "0 
 
 CD 
 
 !^^|-d,--;:.:§^|j^i^ 
 
 ■s 
 
 CD 
 > 
 
 -^v.^^^'^.--,l'V.|.:iJ% 
 
 
 Perfectum Activi 
 Imperfectum » 
 Imperativus 
 Participium n 
 Perfectum Passivi 
 Imperfectum n 
 Participium n 
 Infinitivus n 
 
Paeadiomata. 
 
 23* 
 
 
 H 
 
 l> 13 I 
 
 a 3 J 
 
 
 '\ 4, "^ i- >\ - 
 
 \-S 
 
 a 
 
 ^=3 
 
 -s > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -tJ 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 pi 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 S 
 _>; 
 
 '-4-3 
 
 c4 
 
 a 
 
 .3 
 ■i-t 
 
 c3 
 
 a 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 o 
 Ot 
 
 
 =iii 
 
 ;i4 
 
 0) 
 
 D 
 
 F1 
 
 a 
 
 03 
 
 ID 
 
 Fl 
 
 Ph 
 
 1— 1 
 
 l-H 
 
 P-l 
 
 P-i 
 
 1-^ 
 
 a 
 
 !3 
 
 P-, 
 
 =1 
 
 a 
 
24* 
 
 Paeadismata. 
 
 TABULA XVni. 
 
 Paradigma flexionis 
 
 Passivi I verbi ultimae . vel ^^ 
 
 Persona 
 
 Name- 
 rus 
 
 Perfec- 
 tum 
 
 Imperfectum 
 
 Indicativus 
 
 Subjunc- 
 tivus 
 
 Apocopa- 
 tus 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fern. 
 2. masc. 
 
 2. fern. 
 1. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. 
 
 3. masc. 
 3. fem. 
 2. masc. 
 2. fem. 
 1. 
 
 sing- 
 
 dual. 
 
 plur. 
 
 C5^ 
 
 Qt,* VTI 
 
 \:n>jkjai 
 
 \:i*j,jia^ 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 > 9 
 
 a 9 9 
 
 ^ 9 
 
 Laa-iAJ) 
 
 ^ " 9 
 ^ ^ O 9 
 
 ^^wA.oJu 
 
 
 
 La.^Ju 
 
 - ° - ?.' 
 
 • "• •• 
 
 ^ ^ o 9 
 
 \ydA'S 
 
 
 (^kXiOJU 
 
 jjifljU 
 
Pakadiomata. 25 
 
 
 
 TABULA XX. 
 
 
 
 Paradigma flexionis notninis 
 
 
 
 a) generis 
 
 masculini 
 
 
 
 
 a) triptoti 
 
 
 
 
 indeterminati 
 
 determinati 
 cum articulo 
 
 determinati in 
 statu construot( 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 
 
 i^LoiiJI 
 
 L^Loi) 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 oL^' 
 
 
 1 "' 
 
 J- 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 qi^- 
 
 'I ''At 
 
 LjLaJ" 
 
 Dual. Nom, 
 
 
 (jLjIaSJ 
 
 (jLoLaJUl 
 
 i:lA$ 
 
 Gen.- 
 
 Ace. 
 
 "'I = r. 
 
 
 --, C 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 
 
 Jj^JLliiJI 
 
 
 Gen.- 
 
 Aec. 
 
 - 1 =r. 
 
 ' 1 '='tf 
 
 1 ° '•■ 
 
 
 
 P) diptoti 
 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 
 F 
 
 
 F 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 3^'' 
 
 ^i.'Sif 
 
 7^' 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 ^^'^ 
 
 ^"Sif 
 
 'f-' 
 
 Dual. Nom. 
 
 
 o';^'" 
 
 ^i;r^T 
 
 .;ir 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 e>^r 
 
 
 15;='' 
 
26* Paeadig-mata. 
 
 determinati determinati in 
 indetermmati ,. , , , , , 
 
 cum articulo statu constructo 
 
 Plur. Norn. 
 
 U^/-' 
 
 c;.;^^' 
 
 >7il 
 
 Gen. Ace. 
 
 ^■:^^ 
 
 ^;^~^'' 
 
 t5^T 
 
 
 TABULA XXI. 
 
 
 
 b) generis 
 
 feminini 
 
 
 
 a) triptoti 
 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 iLcLl 
 
 jiLtLlJI 
 
 il&Lw 
 
 Gen. 
 
 
 xii:tj 
 
 JL&Lw 
 
 Ace. 
 
 RaLm 
 
 JteUUl 
 
 kaLI 
 
 Dual. Nom. 
 
 (jLxeL.u/ 
 
 jjLzcLmJI 
 
 LxfiLw 
 
 Gen.-Acc. 
 
 
 "7.-1 = iT 
 
 ^^Ll 
 
 Plur. Nom. 
 
 i^yLilXu 
 
 ICyLftlAlji 
 
 k;:jL£Lw 
 
 Gen.-Acc. 
 
 iw>LcU« 
 
 yuLftUUl 
 
 ^LaLw 
 
 
 P) diptoti 
 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 Gen. Ace. 
 
 oeterum idem 
 
 
PAEADiaMATA. 27* 
 
 TABULA XXn. 
 
 a) generis masculini in desinentis. 
 
 . , . ... determinati determinati in 
 indeterminati 
 
 cum artioulo statu construoto 
 
 Sing. Nom.-Gen. ^oU i^^'^ ts^^' 
 
 Ace. y^LS ^er^^l (C^^- 
 
 Dual. Norn. ij^yoLi" ,jUualjiJ| LLa^J' 
 
 Gen. -Ace. |j.jJuaU' ^^tJuoUJl (c*^^' 
 
 Plur. Norn. OY^ "^yi^S wiLs 
 
 Gen. -Ace. j^x^oLs ^juoLiiJt (<!?'^' 
 
 b) nominis in 15—, I— desinentis. 
 a) triptoti 
 
 Sing. Norn.- 1 tr " » Tf ■"'jr -rf = ' 
 
 Gen.-Ace.) ^5^^^^ V'i^-J' C5*^^ 
 
 Dual. Nom. ^jLlftliAfljo ^jLIoh yijH Lxiixtfljo 
 
 Gen.- Ace. ^AAila^ioAi jj.AAii3.ia4Jt ^i>Btii»axi 
 
 Plur. ]Som. jj^AJa^ajo ^j^gh,<a».l| yuo-vax 
 
 ^o'foj o^^ojOj- o-.-cij 
 
 Gen.-Acc. ^j.At?nvixi ^^^h,v?t>l ^^gh»ixi 
 
28* Paeadigmata. 
 
 . determinati determinati in 
 
 cum articulo statu constructo 
 
 Sing.Nom.- | ,_^ ^^^^ ^^ 
 (ren.-Acc.j 
 
 Dual.Nom. ij'y^-^ (j'r*^' '.T^ 
 
 P) diptoti 
 
 Sing.Nom.- \ --^. ->;('. 'K 
 
 Gen.-Acc.} ^/^ ^/'^' ^/^ 
 
 id. LIj^ H^JJI yy'^ 
 
 TABULA XXIII. 
 
 Paradigma nominis cum suffixis. 
 
 a) nominis masc. in singulari positi ^jUaj'; fern. iOjla». 
 cum suffixo 1. pers. sing. ic?'-^ ^^™* ig^)'^ 
 
 n )i 2. J' -1 masc. >iJLjLaJ> 
 
 1 1) 2. n !) fern. viLsLoJ' 
 
 1 » 3. 1) II masc. joLtaJS (gCQ- sjL^") 
 
 » » 3. 11 II fern. L(2jL«aJ" 
 
 n n 2. n dualis LjoLai" 
 
 " " 3. 11 1) U^jl-^'Cgen. U[.^LaJ() 
 
 1 i> 1. 11 pluralis LLsLai" 
 
 » n 2. 11 11 msc. iJiioLoj 
 
 " » 2. 11 I) fem. ^JoLiij 
 
 3. „ „ msc. ^Lli- (gen. ^ll^^lJii-) 
 " 3. „ . fem. J,4^'L-^^(gen.^Cki-) 
 
Pabadigmata. 29* 
 
 b) nominis in duali positi. 
 
 Nominativus cum 
 
 suffixo l.pers. sing. ,^ljLaS 
 
 n n 
 
 n 
 
 2. „ 
 
 » 
 
 msc. JLjI viV etc. 
 
 Gen.-Aco. „ 
 
 » 
 
 1. ,■ 
 
 - 
 
 ^lls 
 
 1) « 
 
 )1 
 
 2. „ 
 
 n 
 
 msc. iiLoL*i9 
 
 I) » 
 
 n 
 
 3. « 
 
 V 
 
 11 iUjLtas 
 
 n :t 
 
 « 
 
 3. « 
 
 )) 
 
 fem. Lg.AjLfl,s etc. 
 
 c) nominis masculini in 
 
 plurali positi. 
 
 Nominativus cum 
 
 suffix ( 
 
 3 1. pers. sing. (s^'-»«'* 
 
 1! 1) 
 
 « 
 
 2. „ 
 
 51 
 
 msc. lilol viVetc. 
 
 Gen.-Acc. « 
 
 n 
 
 1. .. 
 
 « 
 
 o 1 a ^ 
 
 )) 1) 
 
 H 
 
 2. « 
 
 r 
 
 msc. ^d/~sLaJ" 
 
 » i) 
 
 n 
 
 3. » 
 
 11 
 
 'i = T. 
 msc. jijoLiflJ 
 
 » » 
 
 n 
 
 3. « 
 
 n 
 
 fem. L^AjLaJietc. 
 
 d) nominis feminini in 
 
 plurali positi. 
 
 Nom.-Gen.-Acc. cum su£f. 1. pers 
 
 .sin 
 
 g. ^\^\^ 
 
 Nominativus » » 2. n « msc. vdi'LiLu 
 
 1) n 11 3. 1) )! 11 xjliLAu etc. 
 
 Gen.-Acc. » n 2. » » » liULiLl 
 
 11 11 11 3. 11 11 II juLeLwetc- 
 
EXERCISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 I. 
 
 A. EXERCISES IN READING. 
 
 i_ftXa. Jala:i. y=a.» LxCwt (_J.JU~> wfcJLft (3^5^ '-*-^i 
 
 U^}^ ^Lj ^^ oLb ^^Xw iu.cio ^joLo ^Jd vi>j^' JaJju 
 XjL^? liXiL^o ijaXAi sLi Xi^ia. -.>4> i:yL-«h^ 
 
 •4. a. 5^^ (j'V^ -r*-*^ ("^ )>"S"^ £''^ Vr^ 4.^^' 
 
 I '•'■•f .*!'.--. ' ° ' xf "- * ^ '"^ ? »' ' s, o ^ 
 
 y s^'s-^ i_3i|UCuo 3^;^ _^v auj ;5vaJ Jsl^ **Ji->°< 
 
 ?,^0- S 9 O^ l'*> 
 
 ^ ,Ju»aA.m; (jJuau >«J.t>jJ' f*?-*^ W.'^ 
 
 ^ i^^^ diLo fjuj i^^ J^t^ *k? 
 
Exercises on the etymology. 33* 
 
 UiJJCjJ^^y (j^OU**o tX:SUJ ^j-^y^ '^v« tPL; 37-38 
 
 tty^aj f^Joj^. |VA^»Uio j^AAAwj LXw^ 'y'^T' >-*^' 
 
 ' (j'^^y* ts^^. *-**j '^i^ (j^?<^^' '^-^?:'. ^fy^ 
 
 ' ' 1°. ' I l'. ' \'t '''' , 'f »' ' ' 
 jj-A*A,wO l^o *i'l (VJ'j-» >-o Uw(il j.yij icjji* 41-44. 
 
 (•-^jf ^j^j^ ;j«5 j^t^ 9^ ij^j-L*j ^La^v. «i*^**! 
 
 sLg^ t«AA^i i.^Ms>.jJ> ^IlVj^ ^Lo L:>Aia.i L«JCaj. 
 
 I ' l'°l °' » ''I ' O JO =^ .-«'* ". 'o^ o,. ^« 
 
 >^' L^^J |VJ Uz^UcLO AJ'w^ C^wUsI JutAAuJ I^IJnL^J 
 
 9 o^ y ^ 
 
 J Q 5 J ^ 
 
 5^ O,^^ °-7 °Tl'°'' 30.. o* o.- 
 
 I.,«* ;^(>aXj ouuw (jidxil IJ. tXi. cy-A-iAwoi (e4^. 43-48. 
 
 C .*, . ^ O ^ ° ! J 
 
 ^ O J ? O J 
 
 ^Juii im.-*Xj l.jJLiil l.jXwt L«A^j (c**i ij'^^*^ 
 
 o ^^ o ^ J s^j o ^o 3 ^ J 0^0^ 3 
 
 ^ v:i04> liiO.^^ *.A«j 15^>' ^T^^ *':i^5»^' 'y^)J. 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.' C 
 
49 
 
 34* EXEKOISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 60-61 
 
 I. ijjjJ '-"—» o«.AJ'| (jt.«^ 4-Luo (^*jaj ^^>-*f!^'' <y^. 
 
 53. !i^4.A5w:& 4^*^H^. 1*5 l.-U=a-l *-g^jj Lg^A-o SLa-V*&. 
 
 ^ U^.OU-S jJ.XJ4>^ (^U^JJs 
 5 , ^^JG -'03 9 '° ^ ?f'' S,0 5G 'ojS .' 
 
 S"'' S,, S->|'' S f »> S,= 5 ?^| ' S 'OJ G,»,, 
 
 JLaax**.! oLcSfcXlst £'<-^v^' ^'-^ rv-AjCi jLgJbt^ iLlixo 
 
 ^ tXiLaXx) >_^yu J^-»jw 
 
 S'OJ £ 3 O.'O u 3.' S'^3 9 '^ G ^ " S ^ 
 
 67-71. tXJ'wo v_fc^ i_jLiXwl w-Li* u»aJiAjo ^jO| (ilUCejt 1.1 
 
 s.""^' i . f.' s.' , 6 ,f^ s a^s; S" c ,„, 
 
 ^js.yo L>.^U^ ^jUj^ ^^"^ f-^.' V*' vaJ^**^ O^yo 
 
 ?'.^' °i' » 3^' fT"' ^i'"' Tf"! ''"I"' I "' 
 lX.xx« ^>~«J^ <^"^^ Ua^^ i^A^.xi EUajI^ ^^\Js gj»t^ 
 
 .00^ 9o^ S .0' 6 o, G. , s ' O.f- o, ''- 
 
 ^"'^^ ^ '^^ (*^; iaJij.fl ^.j^mji 6^k*X>M\ 'iJuo 
 
 "'iT ( ^ '\ ''.. ^\'. ' ^ = " ^ol' S. , ° G^l - 9 , 
 
 "■^ e ^.^-<a-' )^-*«''» v-v*'° (vJo ;yy*^l y:?'-^ iVy*^ 
 
 G'- S^oj 9„^ G. ,", G ^, Gi" 9',' 0, 
 
 '-jy*^ p'^'" ^^^ ;^-'^ o^ i^^yi joUiA-oj 
 
 ^.'''1'- 0) 9-ojG°' S. ," 9 0', 
 
EXBBCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 35 
 
 S "- 9 <i, r, " . 
 
 jjl.ft (XkXo i^MiJijo %\ukj!3\^ Utt"^ iS"?^ ^) (5*^ 
 (_A.e (5^) SUto. £LiAJI_ j^Joo ^aaXwulX) ^^Xi SiOU-is 
 ^ jtXft j^^ SUu ^^.gjyjo ^^-^j' 15^"^ 
 A.2t *J U«aA Jt*A (J>.i=»^ U*'JW (J "'^ ^^ytf*" 
 
 i-UiftI (>^sl i'Lw.s l-tt^^ UyL-OI ^^ iji'')^ XA^*u| 
 
 «jSjc] umjJmi ^.b!^ s^^ (^y^ <^^H^ v^^- r^ 
 ^5^K*« jLgJl i^bji't oosL** wLftv i^s (^-^ sLfij 
 
 * G )■>* G.-o* o', g'' G ". S -5 'l M " °lt "? 
 
 \ ij-k»J| |»u:j I (jlv^w tj^ l»^^ ^>-***^ liUUjo »Uajot 
 
 S,^ G5> ®|'' *'' 'cT'-' ^l('"f ^ I'?' 
 
 L,L^ _.»M ^jIt>kAw t>fcA« yi'-"*'-* JUi'l ij»*-!'i'r5 
 ' ^ ^^ s . ^ , ^^ a ,, ^ s > ^^ t-y^ - 
 
 G. r-'c J J s ^.^ 
 
 0. EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 
 
 i_}Lj J,a ^y.^yj\ Jyj ^ 'jJ Lo^i ^^ LJv^ 135-138. 
 
 ju£ ^1^ ^ JLs.lJ| jj.AA,kj xlbolil ^i J-LIaJI 
 
 1 § 130. 2 § 990. 
 
36* Exercises akd texts. 
 
 ^ *-ft-«^ ^I^Xiij !i5 ',v4^ "Job- JUs ^ sf^^l 
 
 jos^aJI c>Jyjf ^ sUXIi t>Lgj=» «.^-^^ u^rt ^r^M^'^ 
 
 jjLkA/*J| 1^ ^Lj "i.^! ^ ^*&A^ Sj.*4A vd)^" 
 
 liJ^ ^"^^.1 viUjf bt Jyij *j $AA^ sUwJI 
 
 Xi^^ 1^^ ^ ''ILL) ULstlil s<Xsi ji l^iot ^ ^j':^\ 
 
 i§ 110. 149. 2 § 136c 2. 3§12i. 4 § 113b. 5§ii8c. 6§l37cl. 
 7 § 121a. »§ 101b. 9 § 113d. m § 108. •i§126. 12 § 109. "§110. 
 14 § 92b. 15 § 113a, 16 §141. 17 § 108. 18 § 6f 2. 19 § 98ef. 20 § 116. 
 
BXEKCISES ON THE SYNTAX. 37' 
 
 > " - ■' ..'"■'. »"--- o«; JO- "'.T -r J ,'-- ton tr 
 
 tXA£^ l^-* 4^-**^ o; <>>■>* JOXj tXAAxJI ^^'^ "• 
 
 iukJI # ^Lif ^^iJI ^^)l ^L*is^ i^^S ,_^f^ 
 
 1 § 147a, 148 b note. 2 § 99a, cf. note b. 3 § 123. 
 
38* BXEECISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 X-UI ^t^ Sj..«drS? ijOj^l ^>Jj.jiaXs t\./ii &L+-Ut ^^< Jj.j' 
 
 v_A^ xJJI Jl ^ ^^^Jl ^ iUi' c;^ «-Ul (j] 
 ^ V^AiJl |.^aJ oot vib| ai-Ul b ^ |^jjLAj«.SkJ| 
 
 4^^ ^7^*^ 4^^^ i ui * ^i^^' 4i«^ i ul 
 
 ^ ^^jCU ^_^L|t J^;o y0 ftXs> j.At S ^1 &3LljLi 
 
 1 § 134. 2 § 152, 
 
Exercises on the syntax. 39 
 
 ° - . ''' (- - 1= 1 ' " '"ii" ,' ' ' 1° 't t' " ' Ti' 
 
 jj viL*kij <Xc^ c^'^^^ v?Lft ^1^ y^tWl (j (jj 
 
 o^-UuI ^ ^'A^ J-T^r" iwtX.^ **>W' |»^' 
 ia. ftjc\ Ji L.g.£\jLix) ^j.AuJ^I. L^iLftiit sLLmJI^ %^;f 
 
 'iJ^\ ^^ 'iLu^AOJ xJJ\ JjL&. ki ^JLiis Sv+aj JoLw 
 
 6 . J 
 
 ^jmjUJo. JajO s^LdiJ. aJ«wmJ| ^^^ £^^i ^j^Ls ^^ 
 
 jojUw JU 4^ w^iiJIj ^ii«^^l (jy^ ^ ^ ^y 
 
 1 § 131. ^ § 101 a note. 3 § 152. 4 § 93 a. 5 § 132. 
 144. 7 § 141. 
 
40* Exercises akd texts. 
 
 100. ^^iiuS ^ 5^ f^;4^'S i''/Ji° ''^ B ,^;' 
 
 iU^L,*ajO ^r^^ nIwCu^I SwCuLaX >^AA^ ^t jjLw^^ 
 
 j^^ ^ 5^^^^^ 5:?'*^^ ^^^■^ tj li*^^' ij sLis-l 
 ^ ^J^t X+JL) »w«£iJ J^j-'l ^>^. ^j' $-U| Jv*"; 
 
 jj.fi:^ XAJ1 ^i^ ijx |v5tX.«aj^ «„**wy»J!^ ^.^ii-f (j 
 
 iT't' » "..f- "f '••''11"° 'i"t - T'f «,,'' 
 
 1 § 151. 2 § 113b. 3 § 157. 
 
Exercises on the syntax. 41* 
 
 ^^ i5^' ;'*^' tS^ ij-^;-^' rt?' Ij I^JLS 154 ff. 
 
 ^ fyOL^I j^A^ ^ItX^lill jj.A^*gLiJf (jiUi. Jobs 
 bLftJl (Jtyol^ x^jLs. >.^*j (^j"'' 4^' J^ 
 
 xj iiLjLs J-dii (5IJI v5^L«o :^ ^ e)^4Xft 
 
 --O-0 ^Ow,^ ^iS^ . ^•'O '' 61^ 
 
 — 0'£ --CJ^— ww'* ^--'' CS'O ^ Q '$' ^O^ 
 
42* EXEECISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 ^ a -^ ^ t --^ , CJ-N3 ^ ^^ ^ ^ --^^ ? ? £-^ 
 
 ^ S ^lJvit Lg.JLot sl^ JUsxJ I ^ ,j^^!jaJb L^L 
 158ff. (^JtN-io i_flJt wiXiiAuJ y. ItX^t* l«<Xft (i^A*yo ^ 
 
Exercises on the syntax. 43* 
 
 ■:•'>■: - " ° tt '"■-.'. ^ "> ' , 'T 'ii'.' 
 
 ''.'i' '--:»- - - ,-: , >) !-^ j"- -,r ,r, 
 
 Ijt^ xajuIj JkTLlIi |l^IxH Jff iS^ J^pT Jli 
 
 sJL^mO cpL: ^LioJLCuJt lots KAA4JO l-.9ww.AAi ^v^ 
 
 jpUt yA^^ JLiLo j.Lft^ JX) ^ xJU-wJ Oj.AM.J^ 
 
 I^^V-AM/ot^ (^Ij^l |Jt_ |vXj(Xjj(« aXj®*^. l^yXiAwiLi 
 
 v:>.^j^ lit. ^«^*«liLf I ^j ciou. \^AJiJt ^^ cy^^^^ 
 
 (jjuuJI Jj:* UiLXi ijOs ^ I jj oLui . I (j*;.ftj vA*^ 
 I4JU! tjiyi j^.^iJl |C^:>I (J^i> til ^ L*A*^ 
 |V.g-Uf tM-y-^ fr7^ e^ liU*.^^ V'^' li ^>^' 
 
44* BXEEOISES AND TESTS- 
 
 J.'O? o^?'', T"--'o.?' ' .'"* 
 
 r't^ 
 
 v:iiwAa»*A.w . (♦••*"S^ '-j'j''?' Ci«JiAc. sL».Av,J1 S^'jJ' 
 
 ^ |vS3 ^^ \j^]y 'r*^7^ '>*^^i 
 
 ^ ^♦Ai^ifc.. ^Jr^l L^5 *^^ J^tXJ' ,jf (J^ *i).J 
 
 "^'^ a 9 ^ ''^ ^ ' — ■'-- o 9 ^-^ ^ o ^ ""^ ' '^ 
 
 i».fjjj L^ iji^ i^ a-ut^i v_ftAi.ifi i^roLi Ij (34"^!. J-^ 
 j^ jjLLiL syb jUi :^Li |l/j.if'L S'y lL, 
 iv>->.> 15^^'^ ts<^^*- (♦•JcXs^t ijJyb ^ 4^ ji'-^ 
 J.£;j J^^ xijT iQ i^Llj Jr^ xijf tLul 
 
EXEEOISES ON THE SYNTAX. 45* 
 
 • " \<-f'-' '.'.'si' " '," ''' '■' 'i7 "I' 
 j| locX) L}^ XAXj^Au i,:y.>olO. iOLwJtft ooLb xaJLs. 
 
 '.'' " \y.'. '"I' T' " " ''='' '^u 
 
 ^ '.-■'-: I "'i '" ' '"ir ' — >>-o "'t"- 
 
 a-y^ ^y UJ ^ JU« (j^^aAjl CJvftJ^ XAAaJu ouolo^ 
 
 J * ** r '' --^"'^ O^ O i^^w-'? "^ ^ vn 9 
 
 {joju-l J.A£ ^ kjL:s\JCAuxi s^cXJ xaLw Swva/^-k> 
 
 i ,0*f -["'• S'^ S"^ ^u;J^ r'tf "' 
 
 l^jLfibfl t>.*.=? i^y^ VSt^T* (•<iN*» sU-L:if l^JU 
 
 'i>f' .'.r \At 'T m.'' '" !>?.'"' 
 
46* ESEECISES AND lEXTS. 
 
 - o- ^ o* 
 
 = * -'' 
 
 ^^t ^jsj oAjiiJt ^Ui V;^' vJ"^ c>^ U° 
 
 IjjUo J^J4>-i?- >~g.+J *5^i P?*^i ^^^) to-Li. 
 
 ^o 3 , 
 
 x-LJt tx^ ^1^ 4^ jQt jTj^y. Ui' ' LCJf jT,^jjJ 
 
 o^o — ^ i 
 
 3 0^ ^ » 
 
 sLj ;^>£ v>-*^ I*-' ''^]. ^ oJLfti K^tX^i auXsLi 
 JkxLfi Jk~.4> 1^ Sj^iil vb ;^ v^-<aJ uilXls UjjJt 
 LaaIXaiwo stX^ji jUa xiJI |^«3« loUail ijj y^ 
 
 f , iS,3 ..c=^ ' o' 'o'- -J '„ -j- 06 J o3 
 
 i^xs ^4.^ x^io i3:S>J' ^-fi^y^ ^'^^J liLwoU i^jijj" 
 
Exercises on the syntax. 47 
 
 I -- 9 " "^0 "^ ^^^ "^"9 O— 9 9o-^ >0-» -* 
 
 U xXi^ '^')'^ "b)^ '-'4*^ d^-UJI (j.ajij JLi" 
 sL^j xX.«-a^ ,j«t>jLf| xaJI j_tiis3.J V^*^? 5*:?)' 
 
 Jli li> UJ Jli J;Cu!iil J|^ JLs sjcjaJw l^S 4^tpl 
 ^>X<fl.j LZe xJLLt LsiLs. Laj^^ Lgj ij' 15^*^ 
 
 o4*t> li>t JLs ^ff Li^ JLs xs^Ls. iiUJt^ iX iji 
 
48* EXEEOISES AND TEXTS. 
 
 II. 
 
 AEABIC PROSE EXTRACTS. 
 
 xJLfc «iaaj! • sJ'r*^' T^ ' <i )*-**^ ^^^ JtyiJI (joiu^. 
 
 Lfjo La^JOo '-g-s^4> i-fljjj xSl^-M £•-''5 ?)'r'? 
 ^^1 'iXid^S d.ij <Jj»l ^ ^^ tMI 6| &J lg.io 
 
Arabic pkose extracts. 49* 
 
 \-^A 'y^\ "3'^ UJLi. L^Avo J,i5"| ^'^ L4=.^ 14^5 
 |V^^ ctliit^Jl Lgj (jJOiU Xs^Str .^^aIsI 5*^ x^lljfl 
 
 r ':■■•& \ ' -- J s- — ' 
 
 I '' "■' (' t ' ' "-"■ I ^P'M > ''■"'I T °' I f'' T "■' 
 Lg.A4ju. I.j_(d^. L^S jVjo f . tX^jiwyJ, lii.^ j.i" w^-Ui. >iA.AAj 
 
 J^ 4>L»tX!gJt Oj...fljLi (J^ltXJl v^-iiJI doLxAx^ 
 j'.ci^ ''1-°^ ..'i'' '"^ '' ''ir 'i'' I' '11° 
 
 \\^ jkjL^S'f li^li HJ.S. 'iXjiXtJ' vi^olx. (>LxA4~il 
 
 o'l ',- 05- -■-- 0'.. ca,' _ •" \T ' r'°f 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar." 
 
50* Exercises and tests 
 
 ^^^- ^/i^i ^i^ii^ £;yi ^tyi^ ^u^^fi, cMJb 
 
 «^ j_aaJ ijL^jLgJI (j^ij ij-4-' ^rM^ o^ Jolwol 
 (jA*^ J"''-'^ 5^' y^) *-^ i^'* U^J* v:>**£>-i 
 
Arabic pkose exteacts. 61* 
 
 kXj\ 'Jy^) J'^*^ U^"T^' /*^^ s'JliLtJ b'jj) |V^ls& i«^^ 
 
 »L>o. stXA*. viAJo ^aJI «3|t>Jt i^J x^tvi i^.£ Li^ 
 
 ij.+Xi s^aaJI J.XS x^f i3-i^j ^li" ujtXJI sLaJI 1^1^ 
 
 jjjf (j.j| iyUii ukXc UlX^jJ jUuLi ijilojj' ooi. x^i 
 1 'Tf " >"' ' ' 'i I ■=' ' " r '', o ' f ' y, ' '"^ 
 
 xxUj&. XjiXa v:>-ciwiii£ tXij rLiJI ujLj ^^sS. SySJiyi 
 
 J^*uj «^v=? t^j..<fljl^ tXo.t ^L*JI lt>J» ;j L/o lyUi 
 
 J^l J^-*; Jlj' ^=- U-U xSL^u '"^'^ Vr*:? *ii 
 i^Ls -,.L.«3J 5^jJ (*"i'5^ o*.=>-UuJ xslj*« U,Ai I i*-g-*-" 
 
 JU v^.oJ.Jl XivJill ,_*s-L&. ^yj ij^ (5^ 
 (J^^ e)"- ^'-*~' owajI^ L^L&- iajvl !^s»^ ool^ U 
 
52* BXEECISES AUD TEXTS- 
 
 ^u! illplj ^\Sy stXl^ j!jl jyJalj\ ill ^ 1^*^ 
 > } "•'^r' 'T li " "li ''"''' f' I -r"! ." I '• "''I 
 
 -^ IaxI Lj (Jlii L_I^ Lg.A>o |Ixij '3'^^ LiJ iLg^>^U jUaiI 
 
 je^^ jLiJ ^ JLi' Xx«l je^ ^)'^ viAJtl (JJIaX^I 
 
 ■^ '-^^ ^ _^y .^ ^ -^ -^ -^ a , ^ ^ .^ o^ ^ ' ■» 
 
 ,0* 30-- S , u* 3-- o '' " ' ^O^i- ^ 6, - 
 
 (Jl^t ja£ Jt^x)l 1^4^ vi:ol^ tXi' Xxxit |_^ ^jU 
 
 3 ^^^ _,_ . C53 ^,^ 3 3O ^O^ ^ ^O "^^ ^ ^ ^ „ jO-*. 
 
 ^ 0^03 ffi'^ ^ 9^ ^^ 
 
 T,. i'^''!"'' "fsfii'* — I — "' "T' '' 
 (>AS Ua yi*j ijl 2*1^ U.*.«*j Lc^ g^^ ^jy^ v^ 
 
Arabic prose extracts, 53* 
 
 (i (^*^ ;^^ CJ^^ (5^ (**^^ 1^ ij'"'*^^* ' 7^ 
 
 (^ ^5tx; ^ u ^ ill ii| :^ i5jjr Jji^ dlJ^ 
 
 ^j^ ^l-^.^ S?^ ' iu^' ij jjjjjlikl ^-^^^ I4XS8 JLji 
 
 ^eJU«. SjS'ii (JtXJ' J'-^JI <J^^' *j'^ xvoiLc Jtib JiU 
 xj jLfti 8^ jj jtiiJ ij I ,A./o Lsjik. XA-Le LjtXS' xj 
 
 X ^ ^ ^ C3 -« ^— O^ ^^ ^^ f }U ^ ^^ y 9 O^ O'i-^ y ^ ? O -" ^ 
 
 ljOJk.^1 1^1 ij!i^!il| XJ^" XaaS5.. xXAaaI^ XaA i^ySA 
 
 *j.Afl-l+Jt xJ JLiii xaJI^ LgJiii:>l (5r=>l '-il^ I xj^jj 
 ij^AXi^+JI yjivol Lj ^^J JU ^yo ^^ o«-^*i L« ;^£ Uo 
 
 A.A*JI IcXjo Jk% v:yok Lx) Jyu 8*5 a L^-o^ xa^ 
 
54* Exercises and texts, 
 
 ^JLJLioLk^.l x^ijiAi jTjB"* jajI tX*j "i*-*-* ^;;^r*-'' 
 
 3 ^ ^ ^ -'^ ^^ o^^'^^ 30--&^^ J^o./« '"''l ^^^ ' '[ ^ ? * 
 
 sjw 1^1^^ xij.jii)t^ (JJisJI^ jfc»^l XAjLil^ ayLkLw 
 
 _. — o*'- Ji"^' ^-^ Go- G *•-•- ^ ' Hi 
 
 J| ^aIT ^I ,21^ jJCcO xl),^ ^'**_} l_r'-r^ '"^ 
 
 ^^Ci-* 3 J 
 
 jj./!)J ^*l-i» Jj^ ^yS-d^i ^jU!^!^ |VjJLa^t d^-Lo 
 
 >'-'(,^0-0 ^O '^''-•l «!=0-^ Q?0'-O ^ ^ (j^ 
 
 xXLL+^Jt iLJ.j ^Ji^4- '-=')^ u?)-*^' c^^ J-?'-? (J?) I 
 i_^S' U,Ai L^AAs^ 1^ (iUL+iJt jj^?5 L^\tXj' |»for« 
 *Lwki ^jy^ *^-& jx^Us ^|l s^cXj (jj-^lj 'i'4^ lij. 
 j^xifcj (jiij-ft^l lilAxi. JjLj ijO>I (cJl ic*'^ jtXiX^^t 
 
 -='.' c\' '*»": — 'ir.' ?.' '"I'i rr 
 
 Ch? '-S-f L^° <J"^J) LK';^* U?;' o; ^*-^ |VJ ^*j' 
 
 ^^i> ij' "^^ '>?'-? u?;' ii|, ^) ^ '^'»-§"" J^' 
 
Aeabic prose extracts. 55* 
 
 |vXc^ x*«^j jj^ y«.Aj L+A.i joXe i:yJOL(iU Ji.Aft| 
 
 ' f " ' T<-t' sn "'?.' t ='. 'K.r 
 
 &jlr2?l *<JLi.Li xi/o ._joL3 ^tXJl ^irf^X! ij ><XaXa«^| 
 
 ^-"Wj |VJ wAi04> ij.^ 'r'^ iS "^T^V^^ SjkA^j s^-iiXi 
 
 Oo »vjy=» (^^ 7^'^'^ ij.JtX/11 ijB L« Sj.^ jjjo J^' I 
 
56* EXEECISES AND TEXTS, 
 
 OS 
 
 ^5jJ| i^j-aJI tjjo JUi yi&.| f.Li' |vJ id^aAAj t5tX-l 
 !^-J<3 |»»-aJI ^-^^i i54^JI 5^7*""^ '-^■:^*-^ r>^' ^>-^*^' 
 
 tXJ* ^ifc-^i) ^A^Li IwiLw^Xj i( cJ«Ly3 i^v* ^ r^-^' 
 LUiiajl. x^yXMj«i ^J^.AX'^NI LaS'wis. JLi'i ^ji*! |»Ls. 
 
 ■ o ^ o o-o 
 
 
III. 
 
 TEANSLATION INTO ARABIC. 
 
 Note. The order of the words in the folio-wing sentences 
 has heen adapted, so far as possible, to that required by the 
 Arabic translation. In addition, however, the student must bear 
 especially in mind the difference of order (§§ 135, 139 — 142) 
 which marks the cardinal distinction between verbal and nominal 
 sentences (§ 139 note). The square brackets enclose words 
 which in translation should be omitted, while those in curved 
 brackets give the form of the sentence required by the Arabic 
 idiom. — Past and perfect tenses are generally to be rendered 
 by the Arabic perfect, present and future tenses by the Arabic 
 imperf. The extensive use of the (generic) article in Arabic is 
 to be noted. All nouns not in the construct state should have 
 the (definite) article prefixed unless qualified in English by an 
 indefinite article. — So far as lexical the footnotes to the exer- 
 cises are only supplementary to the Glossary. It is, for example, 
 only in special or exceptional cases that "oh" is to be rendered 
 by \^j instead of by Ij, and the notes draw attention to such 
 cases. — The apology for violence done to the Queen's English, 
 in the interests of the learner, may be repeated from the first 
 edition, from which the following is in the main reprinted. 
 
58* TeANSLATION into ARABIC. A. 
 
 A. Nominal Sentences. '■ 
 
 1. The glory of the man [is] his sons, and the 
 solicitude of the man [is] his dwelling and his neigh- 
 bour. — 2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his tongue, 
 and the elegance of the woman in her understanding. — 
 3. The liberal [man is] related to God. — 4. The worst 
 (of) repentance [is] at the day 2 of resurrection. — 5. The 
 love of the world [is] the beginning of every sin. — 6. The 
 promise of the king [is] a security. — 7. The learned 
 [men are] the heirs of the prophets. — 8. "Wisdom [is] 
 for the character 3 like medicine for the body. ' — 9. The 
 world [is] the prison of the believer and the paradise 
 of the unbeliever. — 10. Contentment [is a part] of'' 
 the nature 3 of the domestic animals. — 11. The malady 
 of covetousness has no (not is ^ for it a) cure; and the 
 disease of ignorance has no (not is for it a) pjiysician. — 
 12. The nutriment of the body 3 [is] (the) beverages 
 and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under- 
 
 §§ 139 ff. ' § 113 a. 3 plur. i ^ 5 § 50. 
 
Translation into aeabic, b. 59* 
 
 standing [is] wisdom and learning. — 13. Money has 
 (to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit. — 
 
 14. Verily 1 God [is] forgiving and 2 compassionate. — 
 
 15. Verily ye 3 [are] in a manifest error. — 16. The 
 nobles of ^ Pharaoh's folk said^, "Verily this [is] surely « 
 a learned enchanter". — 1 7. Verily in that ' [lies] surely 
 an example for the unbelievers. — 18. Flight in its 
 [proper] time [is] better than endurance in its wrong 
 time (in another than its [proper] time). — 19. There 
 is no (not 8 [is there]) strength and no (not 8) power 
 except with 3 God, the High and'" Mighty [One]. — 
 20. The best of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst 
 of misfortunes [is] ignorance. — ■ 
 
 B. The Strong Verb. 
 
 21. Jonah went out from the whale's belly. — 
 22. Zaid killed Muhammed. — 23. They gave's (beat) 
 Omar a violent beating n. — 24. The direction of prayer 
 was shifted 12 from Jerusalem to Mecca. — 25. God 
 knoweth (knowing) what i3 ye are doing. — 26. Verily ' 
 God provides for every one his sufficiency. — 27. Learning 
 and money [they] cover up *•* every fault, and poverty 
 
 • § 147 a. 2 § 149. 3 suffix. * ^. 5 perf. sing. § 136. 
 6 §147 6. 7 §147 a. 8 §111. »t_j. 10 §122. 11 §109. 12 §136 6. 
 13 Uj, § 56 note a. " dual. §'l36 d. » § 137 &. 
 
60* Translation into Arabic, b. 
 
 and ignorance [they] uncover i eyery fault. — 28. They 
 took him away and put him in the bottom of the 
 well. — 29. The brothers of Joseph returned 2 to their 
 father. — 30. Why hast thou 3 not* washed thy shirt? 
 — 31. The most 5 of mankind are not^ grateful 2. — 
 32. They' believe not 8 in 9 the future life. — 33. "We 
 made heaven [to be] a [well-]preserved roof. — 34. Do 
 not do good out of" hypocrisy, and do not leave off 
 [doing] it out of 10 modesty. — 
 
 35. Why do ye render waste the cultivated coun- 
 tries ? — 36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother 
 Aaron with our signs to Pharaoh and his nobles; then 
 they declared the two of them n to be liars. — 37. The 
 angels said 12, "0 Mary! be obedient to thy Lord and 
 "prostrate thyself; verily '3 G-od giveth thee glad 
 "tidings of a werd fromi^ him; and hei* [is one] of'^ 
 "those 16 who are placed near [to God], and he shall 
 "talk to mankind in the cradle!" — 38. It is not seemly 
 to hurry (not is good the hurrying), except in the 
 marrying of a " daughter, and the burying of a'" dead 
 [man], and the entertaining of a is guest. — 39. Glorify i^ 
 God in the early morning 20 and [late] in the evening 20. 
 
 ' dual. § 136 d. ^ plur. 3 fern. < ^ § 101 e. 5 sing. § 127. 
 6 M. ' pronoun. 8 part. 9 i_,. lo § us d. n suffix in the 
 dual. 12 § 136 &. 13 § 147 a. n pronoun, is ^^. 1 6 part. 
 " § 118 e. 13 § 118 c. 19 plur. 20 indeterm. accus. § 113 a. 
 
Trahslation into akaeio. e. 61* 
 
 40. Verily the hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong]) 
 three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart, 
 and his speech his action, and his exterior his in- 
 terior. — 41. The men of his people used to sit with 
 himi on account of his learning.- — 42. Verily the 
 holy war [is] incumhent^ on you. — 43. The vehemence 
 of a (the) man 3 [is what] causes him to perish*. — 
 44. The head of al-Husain the son of All was brought 
 into , the city ^ of Damascus ^ and was placed before 
 Yazid.— 45. Verily we' have become Muslims, so 8 
 become Muslims ye^ [also]! — 46. Do not talk to one 
 another with disgraceful talk! — 47. Every thing has 
 (to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the in- 
 dication of understanding [is] reflection, and the in- 
 dication of reflection [is] being silent. — 48. We started 
 off towards Bagdad to bring an action against one 
 another •» before n its 12 governor. — 49. The most ex- 
 cellent [kind] of praise [is], "[there is] no '^ god ex- 
 cept Grod!" and the most excellent of [good] works 
 [are] the five 1* prayers ; and the most excellent [kind] 
 of character [is] (the) being humble. — 50. They fought 
 with one another four days is, then the Byzantines 
 
 1 ,3^ sing., then subject, thentheverb in the plur.cf. §§89 notee; 
 136 d. 2 part. 3 Syo". * nominal sent. § 139 d o. 5 § 107. « § 128. 
 7 § 96 ci. 8 ^J. 9 pronoun, w part. § 113 6. " J,U 12 §72. 
 '3 § 111. 14 masc. determ. after the noun, § 92a. '* § 113 a. 
 
62* Translation into Arabic, a. 
 
 were routed'.— 51. What is disliked in 2 the king [is] 
 the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and the hearing 
 of (the) songs and the spending of (the) time therewith 
 (with that). — 52. They said, "0 our father! verily we s 
 "went away, running races ^, and left Joseph with^ 
 "our baggage; then the wolf ate him". — 53. Observe 
 what [is] in the heart of thy brother by means of his 
 eye, for^ the eye [is] the title-page of the heart! — 
 /54. In the fourth year from the birth of Muhammed 
 the [two] angels " cut open 8 his belly and extracted ^ 
 his heart; then they cut it 9 [his heart] open and 
 extracted ^ from it a black clot of blood ; thereupon 
 they washed 9 his heart and his beUy with snow. — ■ 
 55. They conversed 10 about the case of the Apostle. — 
 56. Verily Grod hath (to (rod [are]) " servants 
 whom 12 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them) 
 with his favours. — 57. Restrain thyself from meat's 
 which 1^ causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [from] 
 an action which 1* occasions thee regret i^. — 58. Thou 
 hast fallen in love '^ with a girl, a possessor of beauty 1= 
 and elegance ". — ^59. Muhammed said, "Help thy brother, 
 "[whether he be] doing wrong i' or wronged''!" They 
 
 ' fem.sing. 2 J, sgge ^. <imperf.merely,§ 157 6. 5 Sjji with gen. 
 '^ Ci- 'dual. 8 sing. § 136a. 9 dual § 136 d. lo § 137 a. h § 147 a. 
 •2 without relative particle § 155. " indeterm. i* without rela- 
 tive particle § 155. is indet. 16 § 93 e. n g 113 5. 
 
Teanslation into AHABIO, 0. 63* 
 
 asked, "0 AiDostle of God! how shall we help him, 
 "[if he be] doing wrong i?" He said, "By restraining 
 "him from doing wrong!" — 60. Do not turn away 2 a 
 beggar! — 61. A man (servant) does not believe, until 
 he love for his neighbour (brother) what 3 he loves for 
 himself.— 
 
 G. The Weak Verb. 
 
 62. A poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him 
 [two] pieces of money*. — 63. Be mindful of death, for 
 he 5 takes hold of your forelocks; ife ye fly from him, 
 he overtakes you, and if^ ye stay, he seizes you. — 
 64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like the 
 body; then through their' coming together is born 
 joy. — 65. The Apostle used toS preach to his com- 
 panions and to exhort them and to teach them the 
 beauties of character 9. — 66. Verily lO our [true] friends 
 will'i entrust to us their secrets.— 67. The lust 12 of the 
 world entails care and sorrow, and abstinence with 
 regard to it restores the heart and the body. — 68. Moses 
 mid, "I have brought''' you an evidence from your 
 "Lord; so let go '* along with me the Sons of Israel!" 
 /— 69. Depend on the Living [one], who does not die! 
 
 1 § 113 &. 2 contracted § 36. 3 1^ § 156 and note a. * dual. 
 5 pronoun with foil. part. 6 § 159. ' dual-sufflx. 8 see p. 61* 
 note 1. 9pl. determ. >"§ 147 a. ii^§99a. " j,. i3 § gg g. "sing. 
 
64* Translation into akabic. c. 
 
 — 70. He pleases me, who makes poetry to i show his 
 education, not to t make gain, and applies himself to 
 singing to i enjoy himself, not to i seek for himself [reward], 
 —71. Demand help of the good (people^ of the good), 
 and of those that act well (and of the acting well). — 
 ^72. Choose 3 whichever of the pages thou wilt! — 
 73. Supplicate much (make much the supplicating), 
 for thou 4 dost not know when s answer « will be given 
 thee! — 74. Restrain your tongues and lower your 
 glances and guard your continence! — 
 
 75. A (the) kingdom is made flourishing through 
 justice and is protected by courage and is ruled 
 through [good] government. — 76. [Good] government 
 [is], that' the gate of the chief be guarded 8 in the 
 [proper] time of being guarded 9, and opened in the 
 [proper] time of being open 9, and the gatekeeper 
 friendly.— ^7. Jalal-al-din used not to go to sleep i" 
 except drunk 1 1, nor (and not) to arise in the morning 
 except seedy and tipsy n.— 78. It is not seemly for 
 the wise [man], that 12 he address the fool, like as 
 it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address 
 the drunken [man]. — 79. People i3 of the world 
 [are] like folk in a ship, who '< are carried onwards 
 
 1 inf. § 113 d. 2 § 133. ;, fern. < § 96 d 6 ^^, 6 impf. 
 pass, impers. ^ § i48 6. 8 ^;Jlf with part. § 110. 9 61 c. "i see 
 p. 61* note 1. 11 § 113 6. 1= § i48 6. " § 133. n §§ 155, 156. 
 
TRANSLATION INTO AEABIC. C, 65* 
 
 whilst they are sleeping i.— 80. The evil-doer [he] 
 does not consider 2 mankind except [as] eyil, because 
 he 3 sees them with'' the eye of his nature, — 81. God 
 elected Abraham [as] an [intimate] friend.' — 82. Every 
 affair in the world [is] transitory. — 83. Wickedness 
 [is] to be feared 5, and no one (noj,) fears it except 
 the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped for, 
 and every one s seeks it. — 84. [To] a man (servant) shall 
 not 8 be given [anything] more ample than endu- 
 rance. — 85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the 
 most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor ; and I looked 
 into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants 
 [to be] (the) women. — 86. He^ whose counsel is 
 asked [is] one 10 in whom one confides; and he 10 who 
 asks counsel [is] one'" who is to be aided. — 87. Do 
 not put offi* the work of to-day till to-morrow 12. _ 
 88. Thou dost not ■ ^ find (see) in the creation of God any 1^ 
 imperfection. — 89. Little which 'o continues [is] better 
 than much which'" is interrupted. — 90. Pharaoh said, 
 "We will 15 kill I6 their sons and spare their women." — 
 91. A Bedouin looked at a gold-piece; then he said, 
 "How small " is thy size and how great" thy value!" — 
 
 ^ 1 § 157 a. 2 § 139 (in. 3 suff. * ,t_J. 5 § 60 c. « ^\. 
 7 U^ji. 8 ^ § 100 end. 9 part. " 'o part. n § 1016. 
 '2 indeterm. " U. u ^ as used § 141. « ^, § 99 a. 
 
 "6 § 19. »' § 52. 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar-' E 
 
66* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D. 
 
 92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with theei, 
 until thou diest! — 93. Be [the] tail and be not [the] 
 head! for 2 the tail escapes whilst 3 the head perishes. 
 
 D. Various subordinate Sentences, 
 94. Muhammed said, "Do not anticipate (begin)'* 
 Jews and Christians by the greeting, but when ye 
 meet one of them % (then) 6 force him towards the 
 narrowest place (his narrowest)". — 95. When comes to 
 thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil, 
 then seek for him excuse; but if thou dost not' find 
 [one], then say, "Perhaps he has an excuse." — 96. Ifs 
 thou eat little, thou shalt live long. — 97. If s ye talk 
 in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye shall 
 enter Paradise. — 98. Ali said, — mayS God be well 
 pleased with him i" — "0 ' * mankind ! do not hope except 
 for your Lord, and do not dread [anything] except your 
 transgressions; and be not he ashamed, who 12 doth not 
 know, to 13 learn, and be not he ashamed, who 12 knoweth, 
 to 13 teach!" — 99. The subsistence which thou seekest 
 is like the shadow (the likeness of the subsistence . . . 
 [is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves on along 
 
 ' vertal sentence. 2 ^li. 3 s 157 nomin. sent. 
 
 * ^ ? 
 4 plur. 5 ^a-\ with gen. § 133 end. 6 § i6l c. J §§ 159, 101c. 
 
 ^ § 160 6. 9 § 98 d. » after the subject. " L^.f § 85. '^ ^^. 
 
 " ,^\ with subj. 
 
TKANSLATION INTO AEAEIC, D, ' 67* 
 
 with thee; thou i dost not overtake it in pursuing 2 [it], 
 then when thou turnest^ away from it, it follows 
 thee!* — 100. A man said to the Apostle of God: 
 "0 Muhammed, give me thy cloak!"; then he threw 
 it down to 5 him; then he said': "I do not 6 want it"; 
 then he [Muh.] said, "May' God combat thee! thou 
 didst wish to 8 declare me to be niggardly, but 
 (and) God has not made^ me [to be] niggardly!" — 
 101. Whoso *" longs for Paradise, he is unmindful of 
 lusts 11. — 102. That a man 22 give in alms in his life- 
 time a drachma (the alms -giving 12 of a man — a 
 drachma) [is] better for him than that i3 be give in 
 alms a hundred drachmae at his death. 
 
 103. The Prophet — may God bless i* him and save 
 him — said, "Whoso i» drinketh wine in this world, [and] 
 thereupon do not'^ repent, he shall be forbidden it '6 
 in the future life." — 104. If anyone light a lamp in a 
 ■mosque, then verily " the angels [they] will beg for- 
 giveness for him as long as '8 that lamp continues is 
 kindled 20. — 105. The reed-pen [is] a tree, whose 21 
 fruit [is] the ideas, and thought [is] a sea, whose 21 
 
 1 pronoun. 2 part. 113 6. 3 § 158 a. ^ perf. ^ ^\. 6 U 
 with imperf. ' § 98 d. « ^^1 _with subj. 9 § 101c. 
 ui § 1S9. 11 determ. '2 inf. 13 ^\ ^ § 148 6 with subj. 
 »• § 11 end. 15 ^ §§ 160;C, 101, c. '6 § 108. " § 161 o. " § 158.6. 
 '9 § 110. 20 part., pass. § :110., 21 § 155. 223^'. 
 
68* TKANSLATION INTO "ARABIC. D. 
 
 pearls [are] wisdom. — 106. Verily the dead [man] and 
 he who 1 has no reUgion (he who no 2 religion to 
 him) [are] equal 3; and there is no 2 trust in (to) 
 him who 1 has no 2 piety. — 107. Every woman 
 that< has no^ modesty [is] like a dish that has no^ 
 salt. — 108. If anyone's 6 [whoso, his] tattle is much, 
 his erring is much [also]. — 109. The anger of the 
 noble [man], although his fire flare up', [is] like 
 smoke of woods in which [there is] no^ blackness. 
 — 110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven i" seventy n 
 transgressions, ere to the knowing [man] is forgiven one. 
 111. Be not 12 like the needle, which is clothes 
 mankind whilst 1* it [is] naked, nor (and) like the wick, 
 which 1* gives light to mankind whilst it is consumed i^. 
 — 112. The believer does not escape from the chas- 
 tisement of God, until he leave off four things, lying, 
 and pride, and niggardhness, and evil thinking (evil 
 of the thinking). — 113. It is seemly for the younger 
 [ones] to 16 precede the elders in three places; when" 
 they travel by night 'S, or wade through a stream, or 
 encounter horsemen. — 114. Do not drink (the) poison 
 out of reliance" on the antidote which thou hast 
 
 * Cr^. 2 § 111. 3 sing. 4 §§ 155^ jsg. » part.pass. § 110. 
 6 §^156. '§169. 8 indeterm. § 155. 9 §111. lo § 136 a. ii§92 6. 
 12 M with energ. I. § 101 6. 13§155. " § 157 a. " § 157 „, pron. 
 ■with imperf. 16 § US. " § 158 a. '8 § 113 a. 19 § 113 d.' 
 
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 69* 
 
 (that which [is] withi thee of 2 the antidote).— 
 115. Paradise is desirous 3 of four [kinds of] folk; the 
 first* of them 5 [are] those who have fed^ a hungry 
 [man], and the second [are] those who have clothed ^ 
 a naked [man], and the third [are] those who fast' 
 in 8 the month of Ramadan 9, and the fourth [are] 
 those who read i" the Koran. — 116. Socrates was asked, 
 "Why hast thou notn mentioned in thy law-code the 
 "punishment of him who kills 12 Hs brother?" He said, 
 "I know not that this [is] a thing which exists." — 
 117. Every thing [it] begins small's, thereupon it be- 
 comes great, except misfortune 1*; for it begins great, 
 thereupon it becomes small ; and every thing [it] becomes 
 cheap, when 15 it becomes abundant, excepting education; 
 for 18 when it becomes abundant, it rises in value. 
 
 118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of 
 Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the 
 Thora), they refused to i' accept it and to do according 
 to what [was] in it. — 119. God commanded Moses to is 
 fast thirty is days and' to purify himself and to purify 
 his garments, and to come to * ^ the mountain, that he 
 might talk to him and give him the book. — 120. After 
 
 1 iXXs. .2 ^^. 3 part. « maso. * saffix in fern. sing. 
 S perf. sing. ' imperf. sing. « § 113 a. 9 § 128. " imperf. 
 sin^. 11 § 101 c. '2 § 159, J3 § 113 J. 14 aocus. § 151. 15 § 158 a. 
 " with suflf. § 96 d. 17 ^\ -with aubj. 18 § 113 «. 19 J,!^. 
 
70* 
 
 TRASSLATION INTO ARABIC. 
 
 Damascus was taken % much folk 2 of^ its inhabitants 
 joined Herachus, whilst* he was in ^ Antioch. — 121. A 
 certain one of the wise men said, Nothing (not) repels 
 the onslaught of the conquering enemy like^ being 
 submissive and giving way, like as ^ green plants are 
 safe from the vehement wind through their pliancy, be- 
 cause they s turn along with it, as (how) » it turns. — 
 122. They disagree i" concerning Waraka; and of i' them 
 [therearejthosewho assert '5 that 12 he dieda Christian is 
 and did not** reach the appearance of the Prophet; 
 and of 11 them [there are] those who are of opinion is 
 that 12 he died a Muslim. — 123. [ye two] companions 
 of the prison! as to the one of youie, he shall serve 
 to his lord wine ", and as to the other, he shall be 
 crucified, then shall is the birds eat of 12 his head; the 
 affair is decreed i9 concerning which ye inquire! — 
 124. The Apostle wrote to chieftains "f of'i the tribes, 
 inviting 20 them to become Muslims 2). — 125. A wise 
 [man] was asked, "What [is] the thing, which [it] is 
 not good that it be said, although it be 22 right?" He 
 said, "A man's eulogizing himself23". — ]26. Woe to 
 
 1 fern. § 136 h. ^ j-«i^ co31. » ^^. 4 § 157 a. 6 i_j. 6 ji^ as 
 subject, § 145 i. ' ^f>l U^ § U7 o. 8 sing. suff. 9 § 159. '10 § 98 6 with 
 i^',^§^137a. ii,?j^. 12 § 147a. 13 §113 6. u § loi c. is §986. 
 IS L>^\ w. dual suff. § 133. i7 indeterm. 18 fern. sing. § 136 c, 2. 
 13 §98 6. 20 §99 6. 21 infin. determ. 22 ^IT g 159. 23 § 131 ^v. Ace. 
 
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E. 71* 
 
 [him] who converses with lying, that he may make the 
 people laugh by it! — 127. This (the) world and the 
 future life [are] as the East and the West; when thou 
 approachest one of them ', thou dost recede from the 
 other. — 128. Fear ye God in secret 2 and do not enter 
 into what is not lawful for you! — 129. The devotee without 
 learning [is] like the ass of the mill 3, who * goes around 
 and does not ^ get through (cut) the distance. — 1 30. The 
 eye of hate [it] draws forth every fault, and the eye 
 of love [it] does not find the faults. 
 
 E. Anecdotes. 
 
 131. An astrologer was being crucified ; then he was 
 asked ^ "Hast thou^ seen this in thy star?" Then he 
 said, "I saw a raising upS, however I did not^ know 
 that it [was to be] upon a piece of wood." 
 
 132. A man knocked at the door of i" 'Amr the son 
 of 'Ubaid; so he said "Who [is] this?" He said, "I." He 
 ['Amr] said, "I do not know (I am not I know ii) among 
 our friends (brothers) *2 [any] one i', whose name [is] I." 
 
 133. (The) thieves came" in upon Abu Bekr al- 
 Eabbani, seeking is something (a thing), and he saw 
 
 1 dual suffix. 2 determ. 3 § 123, note. ■• § 155 note. ^ § 1576 
 ^ w. impf. 6 137 a. ^ with interrog. part. J.*. ^ 73 c end. 
 9 § 101c. " ij^. 11 J^ § 50 and impf. '2 order § 1316. 
 13 i:^\- 11 § 136 a. '5 § 157 6 imperf. alone. 
 
72* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E. / 
 
 them going around' in the house. Then he said, "0 
 young men! This which ye are seeking 2 in the night 3 
 we have* already sought 2 in the day-time, but have 
 not 5 found it!" So they laughed and went out. 
 
 134. It is related 6, that^ a certain one of the 
 polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes; 
 so he commanded [that] to him an [ass's] saddle and 
 saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took thems on^ 
 his shoulder and went out from his presence 10. Then 
 a certain one of his companions saw him, then said, 
 "What [is] this?" He said, "I eulogized the prince 
 with the most beautiful of my poems, then he invested 
 me with [something] of ^^ the most glorious of his dresses". 
 
 135. Al-Mugira, the son of Suba said: No one 
 (not) 12 has deceived me except (another than) a youth 
 of 13 the sons of al-Harit. For I mentioned a woman 
 of theirs (of" them), that^^ I should marry her; then 
 he said, "0 1* Prince ! [There is] no good ' 5 for thee 
 in her." So I said, "And why [not]?". He said, "T 
 saw a man kissing 1 ^ her." So I turned from her ; then 
 the young man married her. So I reproached him 
 and said, "Didst thou not '' inform me that thou's hadst 
 
 T imperf. 2__.,Tith suffix. 3 § 118 a. ^ § 98 e. 5 L«§i60a. 
 6 § 98 6. ' ?>\. 8 dual suffix. 9 ^J*. 10 5>>.-U j^. li ^. 
 
 12 101 c. 13 J. n U^y 15 § 111. 16 imperf. n Jjf § 101c. 
 ^^ (j^i ■with suff. 
 
TKANBLAHON INTO ARABIC. E. 
 
 73* 
 
 seen a man kissing her?" He said, "Yes, 1 saw her 
 father kissing her." 
 
 136. Al-Dahhak the son of Muzahim said to a 
 Christian, "[How would it be] if i thou wert to become 
 a Muslim?" He said, "I have not 2 ceased loving ^ 
 Islam 4, except that ^ my love for wine « prevents me from 
 it." So he said, "Become a Muslim and drink it !" So 
 after he had become a Muslim, he said to him, "Thou 
 hast ' become a Muslim, so if thou drink it % we shall 
 chastise thee ; and if thou apostatize, we shall have thee 
 killed', so choose for thyself". Then he chose Islam and 
 his Islam was good. So he had taken ' " him by stratagem. 
 
 137. A Bedouin stole a purse in which (it) [were] 
 pieces of money ' \ thereupon he entered the mosque 
 to pray 12; and his name was i' Moses. Then the 
 leader of prayer recited, "And what is that 1* in i5 thy 
 right hand, Oh Moses i"?" So he said, "By God, verily 
 thou [art] an enchanter!" Thereupon he threw away 
 the purse and went out. 
 
 138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy in 
 the days " of al-Ra§id. So after he had appeared 
 
 ly § 502. 2 U witli perf. 3__§ 110 with indeterm. part 
 
 * § 132 end, 5 §§ 147 c, 148 <*->! V^ with foil, verbal sentence. 
 6 § 131. ' § 98c with oS. 8 § 159. 9 § 17, note 6. »» perf. 
 11 indeterm. 12 § 99 6. ^^ c>'^. " fem. '5 i_-). '6 Surah 20, 18. 
 n § 113 a. 
 
74* TRANSLATION INTO AEAEIO. E. 
 
 before him [the Caliph], he asked him, "What [is 
 that] which is said of thee?" He said, "that Ii am 
 a noble prophet." He asked, "But what 2 indicates 
 the truth of thy claim?" He said, "Demand what^ 
 thou wilt"*. He said, "I wish that^ thou make these « 
 beardless slaves , [who are] standing ^ [there] this 
 moment § [to be furnished] with beards ^" Then he 
 looked down for a while 10, thereupon he raised his 
 head and said, "How is it lawfuLthat I make these n 
 beardless [ones to be furnished] with beards ^ and 
 alter these ^ beautiful 12 forms? but*' I will make the 
 bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one 
 twinkling." So al-E,asid laughed at him and pardoned 
 him and commanded a present [to be given] to him. 
 139. A person pretended to prophecy 1*; then they 
 besought of him in '5 the presence of al-Ma'mim a 
 miracle. So he said, "I will cast for you a pebble into 
 the water, then it will dissolve". He [al-Ma'mum] said, 
 "We are 16 content." So he brought out a pebble 
 [which he had] along with him ", then cast it into the 
 water ; then it dissolved. So they said, "This is is a 
 
 1 § 96 d. 2 ^^ 31. 3 § 5, note b. ^ perf. § 159. 5 ^1. 
 s § 120 d; the dem. in sing., the adj. in broken pi. ' determ. 
 § 120 a. 8 I 118 a. 9 indeterm. 'c § 113 a. n plur. 12 § 120 
 fern. sing. " '^jj- "* § 22. is t_J is § gg c. •-- A^ § 121 a. 
 18 § 143. 
 
TRANSLATION INTO AEABIO. E. 75* 
 
 trick; however, we will give i thee a pebhle of our 
 own 2, and let 3 it dissolve!" Then he said, "Ye are 
 not* more illustrious s than Pharao and I am not (and 
 not 1 6) mightier in wisdom' than Moses, and Pharao 
 did not 8 say to Moses, 'I am nets content with what 
 thou doestio with thy staif, so that^ I will give thee 
 a staff of my own 12, which " thou shalt make [into] a 
 serpent.'" So al-Ma'mun laughed and let him pass on. 
 140. It is said i* that Abu Dulama '* the poet was 
 standing 16 before al-Saffah on" a certain day (a 
 certain one of the days). Then he said to him, "Ask 
 of me what thou dost want (thy want)!" So Abu 
 Dulama said to him, "I want a hunting-dog". So he 
 said, "(rive ye it is to him!" Then he said, "And I want 
 a horse, oni^ which I may go forth to hunt." He said, 
 "Give ye it to him!" He said, "And a page 20, who 21 
 will lead the dog and hunt with him." He said, "And 
 give ye him a page!" He said, "And a slave-girl 22, 
 who 23 will prepare the game and give us to eat of it." 
 He said, "Give ye him a slave-girl!" He said, "These, 
 
 1 imperf. 2 Uj^Xs. ^^yi. 3 imper. of. ^>^ w. suff. ; then impf. 
 4 ^j^ % 110. 5 §63 6. 6 IJt ^fj. 7 § 113c. 8 § 101 c. p. 
 10 § 156. 11 tjXa. with subj. »2 j_$J-U 1^. " §§ 155—56. 
 '1 § 98 c. 15 147 a. 16 ^\S with part. § 110. " i},. i' with 
 l|i, which stands last, § 54 6. » ^ (after the verb) § 155. 
 20 accus. 21 § 155. 22 accus. 23 § 155. 
 
76* 
 
 TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. B. 
 
 Prince of the Believers! have need of ([there is] 
 no 1 escape for them from) a dwelling, which 2 they 
 may inhabit." So he said, "Grive ye him a dwelling, 
 which 2 will contain them !" He said, "And if they have 
 not (and if not is ^ to them) an estate, then wherefrom 
 shall they live ?" He said, "I grant * thee ten cultivated 5 
 estates and ten waste estates'." He said, "And what 
 [are] the waste ^ [ones] Prince of the Believers?" 
 He said, "In which ^ [there are] no plants^." He 
 said, "I* grant thee, O Prince of the Believers, a 
 hundred 8 waste estates of 9 the deserts of the Sons 
 of Asad." Then he laughed at him and said, "Make 
 them 10 all of them lo cultivated! i"" 
 
 141. It is related n, that Harun al-Rasid had (that 
 to H. was '2) a black slave-girl, of ugly mien i^. Now 
 he scattered one day gold-pieces i* among (between) 
 the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about '5 gather- 
 ing 1 6 up the gold-pieces, whilst i" that slave-girl stood 
 still, looking is at the face of al-Ra§id. Some one 
 asked (it was asked), "Dost thouis not pick up the 
 
 1 § 111. 2 g§ 165—56. 3 t^ ^. 4 § 98 c -(vith ..>^. 
 ^ § 87 a. 6 U and prep, with pronoun at, the end of the sentence. 
 '§111. 8§g2c. 0^^. iofem.siDg. ii§98c. i2j(3(s'*jt 
 § 147 t,-. 13 determ. § 134. » indeterm. is § 136 a.' » §§ 152 
 note 6, 136 A (impf^ pi. fem.) i" § 157 a with part. is § 157 6 
 impf. alone. i9 Sll w. impf. fem. 
 
TEANSLATION INTO AKABIC. E. 77* 
 
 gold-pieces?" Then she said, "Yerily what i they 
 seek [is] the gold-pieces, hut (and) whati I seek 
 [is] the owner of the gold-pieces." Then her speech 
 pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and 
 brought good upon her. Then the report got to the 
 grandees, that 2 Harun al-Easid was enamoured 3 of 
 a black slave-girl. So after that' had come to his 
 knowledge, he sent for the whole of the grandees, 
 until he had assembled ^ them in his presence K Then 
 after he had commanded the bringing in^ of the • 
 slave-girls, he gave every one of^ them a goblet of 
 chrysolite 8 and commanded it to be thrown down". 
 But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a whole »). 
 Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly 
 slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke 
 it. So they said, "Look 10 at this girl, her name [is] 
 ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is] 
 ugly". Then said to her the Caliph, "Why then didst 
 thou break ^i it"? Then she said, "Thou didst 12 command 
 me to break it '3; so I was of opinion that" ini» its 
 being broken [lay] a detriment '^ with regard to the 
 
 1 part. pass, -with suffix. 2 ^h, 3 imperf. < § 152, note c. 
 5 »JJ^. 6 (_) with infinitive § 131. ' cy} § 119 a. 
 
 8 detenn. 9 § 113 6. i" plur. " 2nd. pers. fem. perf. w. suff. 
 § 53 a. 12 § 98 e. '3 t_J with inf. " c^l 1= ^J^. 's § 147a. 
 
78* TEANSLATION INTO ABAEIC. E. 
 
 treasure of the Caliph, and in its not being broken 
 (in the lack of its being broken) a detriment * with re- 
 gard to his command; and the detriment with regard 
 to the first is fitter to keep intact 2 the inviolability 
 of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion 
 that in its being broken [lay] my being called (quahfi- 
 ed3 as*) the crazy [one], and in keeping it intact my 
 called being (qualified ^ as*) the disobedient [one]; and 
 the first [is] more agreeable to me than the second." 
 Then the grandees founds that^ to be beautiful of her 
 and praised her for 8 it and excused the Caliph for 9 
 loving her. And God knows best ([is] most knowing lo). 
 
 1 § 147 a. 2 § 113d, indeterm. inf. with foUowing J § 131. 
 ^ § 61 e. ■• (_). 5 § 13S a. 6 at the end. ^ cr*.' » ij*. 
 ' (^. 1" elative. 
 
GLOSSARY A. 
 
 pi. = plural, see §§ 88 — 90. The numbers within parentheses after 
 the broken plurals refer to the forms as numbered in these sections. 
 
 Aaron ioiy^^- 
 Abraham j^Aff-jK 
 
 abstinence Ssny 
 
 Abu Bekr al-Rabbani yj| 
 
 Abu Dulama sJa'^o o|. 
 abundant see much. 
 
 accept (to) Jlw impf. a. 
 
 acquire (to cause to) <_,mS 
 IV with two accus. 
 
 act well (to) ^^*-M*a► IV. 
 
 action JJij. See also bring. 
 
 address (to) _Jai^ HI- 
 
 affair ^\. 
 
 after, after that conj. Q 
 § 98/. 
 
 after prep. i_q,i^- 
 
 agreeable to elat. ,_^\ 
 
 with ^\. 
 
 aid (to) ^Ls. med. , IV 
 with ace. 
 
 'Ali ^. 
 
 all f^i' with determ. noun 
 or suffix § 119 &. 
 
 alms (to give in) ^d^-^ 
 V with ^_, of the gift. 
 
 along with prep. «i. 
 
 already JkS" § 98 e. 
 
 alter (to) Xs. med. ^^ II. 
 
 although j2jI j § 159. 
 
 among ^j. 
 
 ample >«^t« «?«<• § 63 &. 
 
80* 
 'Ami- 
 
 Glossary A. 
 
 i7* 
 
 § 90 «. 
 
 and 
 
 y. 
 
 angel d^ p/. xlfiLlxi (28). 
 anger ^..ax. 
 
 G- 
 
 animal (domestic) y |._'_ g > 
 pi. JoLii (25). 
 
 Go -' 
 
 another than w^i wzYA /o^- 
 loTving gen. 
 
 answer (to give) to ^jLi. 
 X med. . with J. 
 
 G ^o 
 
 antidote |jLs.t>. 
 
 Antioch iUS'Lkj I. 
 
 any ^ {prep.), cf. § 141. 
 
 apostatize J. F/7/. 
 
 G ,^ 
 apostle Jj^j. 
 
 appear (to) jixi. 
 
 appearance . . g tn. 
 
 apply oneself to (to) I f^o 
 
 approach (to) CJji impf. 
 
 arise (to, in the morning) 
 
 as see like. 
 
 as to Let with nom. and o 
 in the apodosis. 
 
 Asad JuLi. 
 
 ashamed (to be) 'la, X 
 § 49 c. 
 
 ask (to) JLj med. . W27A 
 J. — to ask something 
 
 of JLku impf. a, with two 
 ace. § 38 6. 
 
 G,^ 
 
 ass -l 1^- 
 
 assemble (to) 1^ impf. a. 
 assert (to) 1a\ impf. u. 
 astrologer t^iJi. 
 at (one's house) j^rep. Jcle- 
 Bagdad j|t\ju. 
 baggage cL£o. 
 be, exist (to) ^^JS med. .. 
 — not to be (jllj § 50. 
 
 (^ G " 
 
 beard t^L pi. JJti (3); cf. 
 § 71 &. 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 81* 
 
 beardless t^yeSpl. J^*i(l). 
 beat (to) C>Y^ impf. i, inf. 
 
 ^ 
 
 beauty i^^s.. — beauties 
 
 beautiful (j-w^^a. fern. &_; 
 elat. § 63 &. — to find 
 to be beautiful (j-ww:a. X 
 
 because ^j3 § 147 a. 
 
 Bedouin ^gjlvcl- 
 
 before (of place) = be- 
 tween the two hands 
 of (dual stat. constr.). 
 
 beg of (to) JL« impf. a, 
 with ace. 
 
 beggar part. act. of JLui. 
 
 "begin, begin with (to) ttX? 
 
 impf. a, with ace. 
 beginning ^\l (lit. head). 
 
 believe (to) jjol IV; — 
 
 believer id. part. act. 
 
 s ^ 
 belly ^jJsj. 
 
 Sooln, Arabic Grammar.' 
 
 beseech of (to) ,_>Xls /// 
 with ace. of person and 
 i_, of thing. 
 
 best elat. of good, 
 better elat. of good. 
 
 between 
 
 c^W- 
 
 beverage C/y&iJo P^- JLeLLe 
 (23). 
 
 Go-; 
 
 birds CO?/. jjJs. 
 birth <xCo- 
 
 black ijl«,t /em. § 74&. 
 
 blackness l>|^. 
 
 bless (to) !iLo /i with J^. 
 
 body (\.Ma> pi. JUil (17). 
 ^JtX^ (no. 67). 
 
 book i_}U5l 
 
 born (to be) jj. F. 
 
 bottom JoU^' 
 
 break (to) ^Jjfimpf. i. 
 
 bring (to) v_5 sUs. OTe<?. (^. 
 — to bring an action 
 against one another 
 
82* 
 
 &LOSSABY A. 
 
 r 
 
 ^X^ VI- — to bring in 
 
 ,^a» IV. — to bring 
 into jL=»t> IV. — to 
 bring out j^ IV. — 
 
 to bring upon ^"1 IV 
 
 with J.A. 
 
 brother ^\ ^ 90 a, c ; pi. 
 § 88, 5; pi. when = 
 "friends" § 88, 21. 
 
 bury (to) ^o impf. i, inf. 
 
 but o. 
 
 by, by means of o; in 
 
 oaths = J w. the gen. 
 
 § 95 2. 
 
 Byzantines (the) CO/;, -j Jl- 
 
 Caliph SJu^^. 
 
 care Isa. 
 
 carry onwards (to) jLw 
 
 med. 1^, rviih i_j. 
 case «A^. 
 cast (to) jJs fffjp/". a. 
 
 cease (to) JK »«ed ^ (/or 
 
 J^5§42^, §44). 
 
 certain one (a) \jaju with 
 pi. of follow, noun. 
 
 Go, G ^„S 
 
 character isJl-i. _p/. (JL*if 
 (17). 
 
 G, ^ , 
 
 characteristic joo!iLfc. 
 chastise (to) J*^. impf. u. 
 chastisement k^jl ji^. 
 cheap (to become) ya&.) 
 mi?/. M. 
 
 chief ijLs^' i?/. ilCii (20). 
 
 choose (to) vU*. med. ^ 
 VIII. 
 
 G , , 
 
 chrysolite icy^sU- 
 
 Christian '^SZ^ pi. jLii 
 
 (29); ^JLii. 
 
 claim (to) \^o VIII § 25, 
 note. 
 
 claim i^ls-S. 
 
 cloak g|5v. 
 
 / G 
 
 clot of blood XaJLc. 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 83* 
 
 clothe (to) Llf' impf. u. 
 city xJbtJoo- 
 
 
 
 cognizant of v_} |V-yLft. 
 combat (to) JaS 7/7. 
 
 come (to) 'il «ff8p/. i. — 
 to come to one's know- 
 ledge (concerning) ijb 
 impf. u, with ace. {and 
 ijx). — to come in 
 upon jj».;> impf. u, with 
 Jsi. — to come out 
 from wis. impf. u, with 
 
 come together -f^ VIII. 
 
 command (to) yo| impf. u. 
 — to command anyone 
 to do a thing, id. with 
 
 ace. and ^\ with the 
 subj. — to command 
 anything to he given 
 to anyone, id. with J 
 
 of pars, and ;_j of thing. 
 
 — to command any 
 thing to be done, id. 
 with L_) and infln. 
 
 command yxif. 
 companion _j...a>L«o pi. 
 
 JL*il (17). 
 compassionate l*:^'y 
 concerning ^. 
 confide in (to) ^^| F777. 
 conquering part. act. of 
 
 consider as (to) Jyid impf. 
 u, with ace. 
 
 consumed (to be) iV*.^ 
 VIH. 
 
 contain (to) «^ impf. a. 
 
 content (to be) '^'. impf. 
 
 a. — to be content with, 
 
 id. with i_j. 
 
 ' G^ ^^ 
 
 contentment jLcLj". 
 
 continence 
 
 vf 
 
 F* 
 
 iph of 
 
84* 
 
 continue (to) 1\3 med. . 
 
 § 110. 
 contradict (to) ^_<t A^ ///. 
 
 converse (to) yycX^s,. V. — 
 to converse about, id. 
 with i_j. 
 
 counsel (to ask) X^ med. 
 
 country JJLi pi. JL*i (9). dead 
 courage 5teLss»ci. death 
 
 Glossary A. 
 
 ad-Dahhak dL^f. 
 
 ? CI __, 
 
 Damascus (^j^ciy«<>. 
 
 So 
 
 daughter i^^^ § 90?. 
 
 day ^^.i??. pl4f§§88, 17; 
 
 90s. — one day Lol^. 
 
 to-day *jjJI. 
 day-time ^Lgj. 
 
 lOk-AjO. 
 
 y^. 
 
 cover up (to) jXm, impf. u. deceive (to) cJ^ impf. a. 
 
 S o - -. -. . 
 
 covetousness ^jOys^. 
 
 cradle ^Lgjo. 
 
 crazy part pass, of t^ 
 
 /em. X_. 
 creation (oJ^. 
 crucify (to) ,_jLo ^OTp/l i. 
 cultivated part. act. of 
 
 s^£ fern. X_. 
 cure slLi. 
 
 cut (to) Jas impf. a. — 
 to cut open ^^impf.u. 
 
 decline (to) «JUi VIII. 
 
 decree (to) ^— toji impf. i. 
 
 demand (to) a thing JLu 
 
 2ffj;)/". a, with ^^ § 38 &. 
 
 depend on (to) Ji^ F, 7f «^A 
 
 desert ililii?/. JL*i (26); 
 
 S3 ** 
 
 desirous of (to be) ^vLco 
 med. y VIII, Kith J| or 
 
 detriment ^^oJij. 
 
Glossary A. 85* 
 
 s a, 
 
 devoted to (to he) d+ss dog ,_Jf; hunting-dog 
 
 VIII mm ^. cu^:Js. 
 
 devotee part. act. of ^^ domestic see animal. 
 V. 
 
 sC). 
 
 door i_jLj. 
 
 die (to) lijUo med. ,. , ' ' ■ 
 
 Q ^ ^ drachma jvp.t 
 
 difficult ^. ^^^^ f^^^j^ ^^^^ .^ ^^ 
 
 disagree jto) ._a^ F///. ^^,^^ ^^^^ ^ .^^^_ ^_ 
 
 disease eIj- 
 disgraceful 
 
 !5^C» ^ 
 
 s , dress ^j,*Ajopl. JJLjls (23). 
 
 drink (to) Oj^jo «ff?p/. «. 
 
 r ■ drunk, drunken /j|lCl. 
 
 dislike (to) 'ji^impf. a. dwelling JtS {fern.). 
 
 disobedient part. act. of early see morning. 
 
 15**^' East ij-j-ci^- 
 
 dissolve (to) 616 »«e<?. _,. g^sy llj. 
 
 distance XiLwuo. . „ ^ ',:.f 
 
 ^ , eat (to) Jo I 2?wp/, m; 2??y?. 
 
 distinguish (to) ija-^ § 38 &. — to give to 
 
 ^"^Pf- "• eat of |V«l5 /FwiYA ace. 
 
 do (to) J^ mi?/. «; jii pers. and J^. 
 
 m;?/". a (no. 139). — to education o^l. — to show 
 
 do according to J^ one's education ool V. 
 
 with i_j. elder yjS\ pi J^UI (23). 
 
86* 
 
 Glossabt a. 
 
 elect (to) ^A^ VIII. 
 
 „ 
 
 elegance JL+ss-. 
 enamoured of (to be) 
 
 (£*«£ itnpf. a, with ace. 
 s 
 enchanter j^Lw. 
 
 encounter (to) ^J ///. 
 
 endurance jjJa. 
 
 enemy TtXa. 
 
 enjoy oneself (to) ^Jio V. 
 
 entail (to) yy.. IV. 
 
 enter (to) J^^S impf. u. 
 see § 107 note. 
 
 entertain (to) ^^'S impf. i. 
 
 inf. %\Ji. 
 
 entrance J^Joo. 
 
 o 
 entrust (to) anyone with excellent JuoLi elat. § 63 b. 
 
 ^Oj X with two accus. except '^[{^ ^ ^i) § 151- 
 envious part. act. o/J..^. _ g^^ept that' ^f it 
 
 equal g|^. 
 ere, cow/. ,jl Jlo" § 100. 
 
 err (to) iaJLc m/". iaJLc. 
 
 ^ , 
 error JiLo. 
 
 escape (to) L^ impf. u. 
 
 s > 
 escape Jkj. 
 
 estate aiLyo i??. JLii (9). 
 eulogize (to) ^^Juo m^/. 
 «.; id. VIII (no. 134). 
 evening (late) ^l^^. 
 
 every J.f w?YA indeterm. 
 noun. § 119 &. 
 
 G, ^^ 
 
 evidence JLuo. 
 
 evil (to be) *L1, »je<?. .. 
 — to do evil id. IV. — 
 evil-doer part act. of 
 id. IV. 
 
 evil s 
 example is 
 
 >/-• 
 
 § 147 c. 
 excepting "^^ Lo M^eYA «cc. 
 excuse (to) T jk* m^?/". ?. 
 
 excuse ^tXc 
 
G-LOSBAET A. 
 
 87* 
 
 exhort (to) iacl impf, i, 
 § 40 a. 
 
 exist (to) ^\Smed. .. 
 
 ., s ,<■- 
 exit -jJsP. 
 
 exterior jUi^. 
 
 extract (to) ysa. X. 
 
 eye ^jjyc /em. § 72. 
 
 face !Us-m- 
 
 fast (to) ILfl me<?. .. 
 
 father i_>| § 90 a. 
 
 five 
 
 S o. 
 
 §§ 91, 92 a. 
 
 flare up (to) " T F. 
 
 -55. 
 
 flight v_jj.* 
 
 flourishing (to make) 1^.^ 
 impf. u. 
 
 fly (to) from yi impf. i, 
 
 with ^JJa. 
 
 folk ^°yS pi § 88, 17; !iJ 
 
 CO?;, (no. 120). 
 follow (to) LaS mj?/. a, 
 
 fault 44^ i,/. .L^; (10). ^°«i ^^'•^ «^' ''^ ^^• 
 
 ^ ?.'" , ?- /-QN for iJrep. J § 95 A; cow/, 
 
 favour x+jij pL Jljls (o). 
 
 ^^U§96<?. 
 
 fear (to) J[L med. ^ impf. ^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^ ^^.^^ ^^ ^^^_ 
 
 a, §42<?. _, . 
 
 one ^w^s. impf, i, with 
 feed (to) ^ /r. ^^^ ;r;^, 
 
 fight (to) with one another ^^^^^ ^^^^ » ^^^^_ g 25 
 
 ^»^^- note. ^ 
 
 find (to) J^; /mi^/. e, § 40a. ^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^;_ j^,p 
 
 fire ^li. (24). 
 
 first J.I. forgive (to) wie impf. i. 
 
 fit ^^ eZa^. J^l. forgiving J^. 
 
88* 
 
 Glossary A. 
 
 forgiveness (to beg) yii X 
 
 form ''isy£> P^- J-** (4) 
 four ^;f §§ 91, 92 «. 
 fourth 
 
 friend vl^Lo (see p. 85*). 
 
 — of God = Abraham 
 
 G 
 
 S ^ 
 
 — intimate ^j<>-o pi- 
 
 friendly i_JLJaJ. 
 
 from ^rep. ^/). 
 
 fruit iilij. 
 
 future life see life. 
 
 gain (to make) ^_,mS V. 
 
 game Juya- 
 
 garment i_)^j p/. JL*i (9). 
 
 gate ioLj. 
 
 G a- 
 
 gate-keeper ^Lj. 
 gather up (to) W°^ VIII. 
 get to (to) ^j F7// wJ^A 
 
 gift 4*^P° -^^- (M'''*^'(2^)- 
 see «/so prophecy. 
 
 girl xjsLs.. 
 
 give (to) I ^rir- IV with two 
 ace. — to give way inf. 
 
 G > J 
 
 glad see tidings. 
 
 G ^ -^ ®i --o^ 
 
 glance ^„,kj pi. JLiil (17). 
 glorify (to) ^j^ II. 
 
 glorious li^Li e?a^. § 63 &. 
 
 glory oli. 
 
 go round (to) \\c> med. ^. 
 
 — to go away C^''> 
 impf. a. — to go on 
 
 ^^cii impf. i. — to go 
 
 out ' li. impf. u. — 
 
 to let go (Ju*,s IV. 
 
 goblet —tXis. 
 
 god^l; God kill, by God 
 
 ^JUl:. 
 
 Jt. — to get through gold-piece .UjO p/. §90 A:. 
 
 good nOMW «w^ «<?;■. 
 
 y^ 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 89* 
 
 elat. id. — to be good 
 
 Jwwvk~» impf. u. — to 
 make good i_)LSo med. 
 
 government x_«,L_3» or 
 
 - s 
 governor ^j. 
 
 grandee dULo i??. § 88, 10. 
 
 grant (to) «ias IV mth 
 two accus. 
 
 grateful (to be) IX!^ impf. u. 
 great j.juJ. — to be, be- 
 come great l^impf. u. 
 green (fresh) ^.jJoy 
 greeting 1%^. 
 guard (to) J^L.o med. ^ ; 
 
 tnf. ^ya- 
 
 i. 5°'. 
 guest i_fijua. 
 
 hand tVS § 90 r. 
 
 al-Harit lijvlil. 
 
 Harun ar-Rashid ^JJ\^■^ 
 
 Jk,A, 
 
 A^«jf- 
 
 bate (jiflju. 
 
 have (to), 2S expressed hy 
 the subject in the dative 
 [with J) followed iy the 
 
 object in the nom. (as 
 
 JLo xJ he has money); 
 occasionally a form of 
 
 ^lyto be stands before 
 
 the subject (as jj ^jlj 
 
 G 
 
 JUo he had money). — 
 not to have either as in 
 the last example, but 
 
 with jjllj (§ 50) instead 
 of '^ ( JL; ^ ^}) 
 or Si with folloTving ob- 
 ject (§ 111) and dative 
 
 of subject (si JLx ^). 
 he Iso § 12 a. — he who 
 
 J^;§14&. 
 head ^\y 
 hear (to) ^t^ impf. a, inf. 
 
 heart ^IS pi. Jj*i (10). 
 
90* 
 
 Glossakt a. 
 
 heaven gU*u P^- ^y^M 
 
 §76&. 
 heir part. act. of ^i;.. pi. 
 
 x3 
 
 ')'> 
 
 (6). 
 
 hell-fire JLl!]. 
 
 help (to) ItaS impf. u. — 
 
 to demand help of ^La 
 
 med. . X with i^. 
 
 Heraclius Jojc. 
 
 high ^. 
 
 holy see war. 
 
 hope for (to) La.r m;>/. u, 
 with ace. 
 
 horse jot;>. 
 
 So, 
 
 horsemen co//. Jui>" 
 
 , \ Go, 
 
 house v:i^. 
 
 how i_il^ 
 
 however i^i(j fvith follg. 
 
 verb. 
 humble (to be) mjio. VI. 
 
 hungry part. act. of cLs. in prep. ^ 
 
 '^^^- i ^. incumbent on (to be) C>^'^ 
 
 hundred x^lw §§ 91, 92 c. impf i, with J^.^ §'40fl. 
 
 hunt (to) 5Lfl med. (^. — 
 to go forth to hunt id. V. 
 
 So, 
 
 hunt, chase Joya. 
 hurry (to) J^sxr^ //. 
 
 al-Husain ^jl^LM- 
 
 hypocrisy (religious) sL).. 
 
 hypocrite part. act. of 
 
 ■s- 
 
 So, 
 
 Ignorance Jljs.. 
 ignorant j3ar<. act. nfj.^-.^ 
 
 «=o, ' ,, 
 
 idea ^^ijtxi pJ. JlcLLo(23). 
 if ^1 § 159; in hypothe- 
 
 o-j 
 
 ^«ca? clauses J weYA <Ae 
 i^er/". — if anyone ^ 
 § 159. 
 
 6 
 
 illustrious J_aJL&. e/a<. 
 
 § 63 I. 
 imperfection inf. of oU 
 
 med. , F/. 
 
Glossaet a. 
 
 91* 
 
 indicate (to) JS impf. u, 
 
 with Jki. 
 s 
 indication J-J5. 
 
 Q " ^ 
 
 indigestion ^^m^. 
 
 inform (to) ^j-i. IV. 
 
 inhabit (to) ^JXl impf. u. 
 
 inhabitants J^sol. 
 
 inquire concerning (to) 
 Xi X with ^. 
 
 intelligent part. act. of Joseph 
 interior sls.Ji. 
 
 Islam ^!iH,!^|. 
 
 interrupted (to be) mhs 
 
 rii. ^ 
 
 intimate see friend. 
 
 into prep. jj. 
 
 iuTest (to) anyone with 
 *X^ impf. a, with ^^^ 
 ofpers, and ace. of thing. 
 
 inviolability 'xjoys,.. 
 
 invite to (to) Li 5 impf. 
 u, with ^f. 
 
 Israel JuJCIK 
 
 Jalal ad-din jj^ Jul JSLi^. 
 
 Jerusalem j^jJiJI. 
 Jews (the) coll. ^J^\. 
 join (to) (^:1 impf. a, with 
 
 Jonah 
 
 (j^^J- 
 
 joy ;5r-'- 
 justice Jj^. 
 
 keep from (to) «I« mj?/". 
 
 fl, with ace. and ^^. 
 
 keep intact (to) ^iu /F. 
 
 kill (to) Jjci mj)/". M. 
 
 kindle (to) <5ij emp/". ?. 
 
 s ^ 
 king dUi. 
 
 kingdom 'iXX^. 
 
 kiss (to) J.AJi //. 
 
 knock (to) at the door of 
 
92* 
 
 Glossaky a. 
 
 ^5 imjpf. M, with J<ft leave, leave off (to) dJi 
 of per s. and ace. of door. impf.u. 
 
 know (to) ^JS impf. a; let (to) £5^ 2»2p/- a § 40 a. 
 
 olt imp. i (no. 132), liar (to declare anyone to 
 
 i^rS imipf. i 
 
 (no. 
 
 73). 
 
 be a) <^dSn. 
 
 knowing part. act. of ^J^; 
 
 liberal 1^. 
 
 elat. § 63 6. 
 
 
 
 lie, tell a lie (to) i^jji/ 
 
 Koran i^jllkll. 
 
 
 
 m^/. «■; zw/. CidS. 
 
 lack |.jLs. 
 
 
 
 life (the future, next world) 
 
 lamp -^1^- 
 
 
 
 
 laugh (to) iJl^ impf. a. — life-time sLIi.. 
 
 to laugh at id. with ^je 
 
 — to make laugh id. 
 IV with ^_, of means. 
 
 light (to) y^ IV. — to 
 
 give light to *Lo med. 
 , IV, with J. 
 
 law-code xju^ji- 
 
 lawful (to be) Jls.. mp/. 
 
 lead (to) 5LS »«e(?. .. 
 
 leader see prayer. 
 
 le^rn (to) (JLa F. 
 
 learned Lji i?/. f^CxI li'^^e (to) jiLi. med ^. 
 
 (20). living ^. 
 
 learning ^&. long Jo^. 
 
 like (like as)j?rep. li); cow/. 
 
 Li5"(M'«7Ai;6.se«<.),jjt US' 
 (worn. sent.). 
 
 likeness Jjci. 
 
 o 
 little (JuJi. 
 
Glossaby a. 93* 
 
 long for (to) ^Li med. ^ antith. to woman (nos. 
 
 VIII, with JJk. 2, 43, 102), § 90 e. 
 
 look at (to) ^ impf. u, "manifest part. act. J^ 
 
 -., ■ med. (C IV 
 
 with^j^y. — to look down 
 
 ^ I CQ i' 
 
 o: 
 
 ^Jo iv. - to look into "la^l^i^d co^^- U-LJ»- 
 
 U 
 
 manner «^, 
 
 JJs F///, with ^ § 25, "^-^"^^^^ Cfy 
 
 note. ^^'^^y (to) ^1) ^^^- i ^• 
 
 lord ^:. ^^^y r^;^- 
 
 meat -• 
 
 love, fall in love with (to) ™^^^ i^- 
 
 4^ /r, W2YA ace. ^^^°^ ^^■ 
 
 love AL. medicine 1^. 
 
 SlB^ 
 
 loving «■«/. ju^. meet (to) ^aJ «ffjp/. a. 
 
 lower (to) u,d£ m^)/. u. mention (to) S'^ impf. u. 
 
 lust JUfcj. — lusts ciylj.^. mien -J^ixi. 
 
 make, make to be (to) Jkis. mighty *.^y^ «^«^- § 63 &. 
 
 impf.a, (with two accus.). .,1 *«- 'if 
 
 ^ , mill xjj^LSc. 
 
 -to make (poetry) JU ^.^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^-^ ^>r 
 
 met?. ,. . ^ .,, ' 
 
 ^ ezwp/. u, with ace. 
 
 malady ^lil. miracle IcJ^. 
 
 al-Ma'mun ^^yoUJI. misfortune Jujuavo p/. 
 
 man J^^'^ i?^- JLii (9); sl« JoLii (25). 
 
94* 
 
 Glossakt a. 
 
 Muzahim 
 
 naked ^^LjjA fern. x__. 
 
 G o , 
 
 modesty sUw^. 
 
 moment (this) kcL*Jf. 
 
 money JLxi. — piece of name 1^|. 
 
 money jvS^O i?^- JJUw narrow ;jjto (= t3-uuo) 
 
 nature «^ ^/. § 88, 9. 
 near (to place) <^Ji II. 
 needle slst. 
 neighbour X^. 
 
 G 
 
 niggardly Jui:^. — to de- 
 clare anyone to be n. 
 J^ II- 
 
 niggardliness Jk^. 
 
 (23). 
 month - (^ •'■: 
 
 ^^ G^o J 
 
 morning (early) 5 Jo. 
 morrow, to-morrow <Xe. 
 
 Moses ^e-IJjjo- 
 
 G o ^ 
 
 mosque tX^?wo. 
 most elat. o/much. 
 
 G^ ^ 
 
 mountain JlL^- 
 
 much y^ elat. § 63&. — 
 
 to be much, abundant ^^S^* O^- 
 
 yS'impf. u. — to make 
 much JS IV. 
 
 al-Mugira SldtJI. 
 Muhammed tX*..^. 
 
 noble Ij>y! 
 
 — nobles coll. 
 
 music 
 
 not see § 150. 
 now conj. o. 
 
 ■if 
 
 Muslim (to become a) JL« 1 Lj § 85 ; also Lgjt. 
 IV. — Muslim id. part, obedient to (to be) ^^ 
 act. impf. u, with J. 
 
Qlossaet a. 
 
 95* 
 
 observe (to) jj^ VIII. 
 
 occasion (as a conse- 
 quence) (to) v_JiA IV, 
 with two accus. 
 
 Omar y+£. 
 
 on acount oi prep. J. 
 
 one as pronoun or adj. 
 s , s , 
 JLa.!. fern. H ; with 
 
 s ^ * 
 pron. suffix Jk^t. 
 
 only till. 
 
 onslaught (j«Lj. 
 
 open (to) 2Si impf. a; 
 
 inf. ^Xi. 
 
 opinion (to be of) ^^K 
 m/)/. a, § 49 &. 
 
 or j|. 
 
 other 
 
 ;^'- 
 
 overtake (to) d.;) /r. 
 owner ,_*a.Lo pi- JLiil 
 
 (17). 
 page boy |.!iLa. 
 Paradise iU^t- 
 
 pardon (to) Li* «ff!|)/'. u, 
 with J<£. 
 
 So' 
 
 part (= some) udnj 
 
 (§ 133). 
 pass on (to let) vLs* med. 
 
 ,IV.' 
 
 pearls coll. JJ. 
 
 pebble sLass.- 
 
 people (Jkjc|. 
 
 perhaps JoiJ § 147 a. 
 
 perish (to) >iJUljo ew!^/. «"; 
 — to cause to p. id. IV. 
 
 person (man) ^^LLjt. 
 
 Pharao ^yAys- 
 
 physician v_*.JtAis. 
 
 pick up (to) iaU impf. u. 
 piece, see § 73 c. 
 piety xjLsO. 
 place (occasion) ^jioyjo pi- 
 
 J^U:i (23). 
 place (to) «.«S^ i»«p/: a. 
 
 § 40 a. 
 
96* 
 
 Glossary A. 
 
 plants coll. «iLj (masc). (§ 83). direction of 
 
 please (to) ....^a^ IV. — prayer II^.— leader of 
 
 to be well pleased with s, ', 
 
 prayer |,boi. 
 
 ,_aoT impf. a. with °wi. i . /. s ^ r - . 
 
 ^') so. ^-^ preach to (to) v_j2i. 2»i;)/. 
 
 pleasure sj^j pi. § 76. ^^ ^nj^ ace. ' 
 
 pliancy jjjJ. precede (to) (,tXj V. 
 
 poem, poetry !jLi p/. JLiif prepare (to) J..o /r. 
 
 (17). 
 poet leLi. 
 
 poison I«. 
 
 polite scholar -.ff s t*' pi. 
 iSCii (20). 
 
 presence Sw(da». 
 present (gift) SJLo {inf. of 
 
 Juflj). 
 preserve (to) iiia. ewip/". a. 
 pride ^!a^ 
 
 poor Ljii jj?. r^ (20). PJ^ince puo| j?/. ^5Ui (20). 
 possessor .6, /em. i:i5|(i prison ^^.^j^. 
 
 § 90/. 
 poverty Jii. 
 power Sjj. 
 
 praise (to) Jt*^ m;>/". a. 
 praise (God) .Sb- 
 pray (to) Xo //. 
 
 S ' , SI 
 
 prayer ■■&%Jm {= gyLa 
 § 43 note) pi. «I,|JLo 
 
 promise Ji^.. 
 
 prophecy (gift of) i^. — 
 to pretend to prophecy 
 Lj V. 
 
 prophet ^ pi. j.^!. 
 
 (18). 
 
 prostrate oneself (to) J^ 
 m^/". u. 
 
GrLOSSAKY A. 
 
 97* 
 
 protect (to) ^IL impf. u, i. 
 
 provide for (to) ^'Jl impf. 
 u, with two accus. 
 
 punishment xjjJic. 
 purify (to) ^^U II. — to 
 oneself id V. 
 
 purse 8-.^. 
 
 pursue (to) aj3 VIII. 
 
 put (to) Jjt^ impf. a. — 
 to put off till j.i.T //. 
 J- 
 
 qualify (to) inf. i^^^. 
 raise, raise up (to) iij 
 
 impf. a; inf. Id' 
 Eamadan ^La^r. 
 ar-Kashid Jkjui J|. 
 reach (to) liJ. t> IV. 
 read (to) \ji impf. a. 
 recede from (to) ji.*j impf. 
 
 a, with ^vvo. 
 
 * 
 
 recite (to) |Ij> impf. a. 
 
 reed-pen ^Jji. 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.^ 
 
 reflection inf. of Jo V. 
 
 refuse (to) ^| impf. a. ■ — 
 
 to r, to do, id. with ^ I 
 and subj. 
 
 regard, with r. to \. 
 
 regret pJ*.S. 
 
 relate (to) ^^ impf. i. 
 
 related to ^_>jj.i with ^jo. 
 
 reliance inf. VIII, see rely. 
 
 religion ^^o. 
 
 rely on (to) JkS^ P77/, w?Y^ 
 
 repel (to) (>» impf. u. 
 
 repent (to) oLi" med. ,. 
 
 repentance Xxiljo. 
 
 report j^i*. 
 
 reproach (to) l!^ »je<?. .. 
 
 restore (to) _.U ?we<?. ^ /F. 
 
 restrain from (to) ^J^impf. 
 M, wiYA acc. aw<? ^jt. — 
 to r. one's self from id. 
 
sea jsi. 
 second 
 
 ,U. 
 
 (17). 
 
 98* Glossary A. 
 
 resurrection XxiLlS. 
 
 return to (to) is-T impf. i, 
 
 with j|. 
 
 right (due) ;^jj&.. 
 
 right, right hand ^j-a^j- 
 
 riseinvalue(to) "^t impf.u. 
 
 roof i_B.o'w 
 
 routed (to be) j,yjD F//. 
 
 rule (to) (jj^Lw »!e<?. .. 
 
 run races (to) laj-w F7/7. 
 ■ s, ^„^ 
 saddle (of an ass) jlc jo. 
 
 s -^ 
 
 — saddle-girth -lys^- 
 safe (to be) LL*, mj?/". «. 
 
 as-Sa£fah Li«J|. 
 
 salt ^jJijo. 
 
 save (to) |vlw //. 
 
 say (to) Jli OTe<?. .. — to «'"i'/"- «' «'«'^ '«"' «cc. 
 
 say of anyone, id. with set about (to) 'XJo med. ^, 
 J^. — to s. to anyone, ^^ff^ impf. § 99 note a. 
 
 id. with J. seventy ^^'L. 
 
 scatter (to) ^£ ewijo/. u, i. shadow J^b. 
 
 secret !L, ^/. JL«I 
 
 security ijU-«o. 
 
 see (to) (^IT m;?/'. a, § 49 ft. 
 
 seedy part. pass, of ^^ji.. 
 
 seek (to) ^JJLb zwip/. w. — 
 to seek for one's self,id. V. 
 
 seemly (to be) ^Lj VII. 
 
 seize (to) jk^l impf. u. 
 
 self ^jIlS § 12 e. 
 
 send (to) Ju«j /r; for 
 
 t_aJLa> ; with i_). 
 
 serpent ^^,L*j. 
 
 G t. ^ 
 
 servant (i. e. of God) Jla* 
 
 pi. JLii (9). 
 serve wine to (to) ^^lu 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 99* 
 
 sliift (to) •^ Ja impf. i. 
 ship SiXjfAM- 
 
 G ^ 
 
 shirt (jiOA+ji. 
 
 "' G , 
 
 shoulder i_aaST 
 
 sign jot i?/. § 76. 
 
 silent (to be) inf. o*.*^- 
 
 s 
 sin x£j^^. 
 
 singing (art of) sUi. 
 
 sit with (to) (j«Jj=» ///, 
 with ace. 
 
 G, , 
 
 size sxiLi". 
 
 slave d JL+jo j»^. J>jLftLftx 
 
 (27). — slave-girl &jvLs. 
 
 i)?. J^ly (24). 
 
 sleep, go to sleep (to) jlU 
 med. ,, impf. a; part. act. 
 pi. § 88, 9. 
 
 s - 
 
 small JJ^-^a• — to become 
 
 s. yXM impf. a. 
 smoke ^L^i>. 
 
 snow Aj- 
 so conj. o- 
 
 sober ^«r<. act. of L^. 
 
 Socrates iLjuu. 
 
 g/ 
 solicitude jL^ja. 
 
 
 
 son ^jj § 90 & (pluralis 
 
 sanus with names of 
 tribes). 
 
 songiijai|^/.|^Lil((>£Ut). 
 
 c 5 
 
 sorrow y^ya>. 
 
 spare (to) o. X, § 49 c. 
 
 So' 
 
 speech J^j". 
 
 spend (to) (of time) inf. 
 
 spirit ^yy 
 
 staff Lax-. 
 
 stand (to) jili me^?. ^ ; pari, 
 act. pi. § 88, 9. — 10 
 
 stand still i_aS^ impf. i. 
 
 Gor 
 star ^. 
 
 start off (to) &a.j V. tv.^l 
 stay (to) *Lji med. y IV. 
 steal (to) ^yL impf. i. 
 stratagem X-L^. 
 
 G* 
 
100* 
 
 Glossakt a. 
 
 stream Jla^. ten^^ §§ 91, 92 a. 
 
 strength Jj.^. than ^__ § 63 b. 
 
 Su'ba HuxJi. that pron. dLj3 § 13 c. 
 
 submissive (to be) J j V. that (in order that) J mith 
 
 subj. § 100. 
 
 that conj. ^\ (before a 
 
 verb) § 148 &; ^t {before 
 a noun) § 147 a. 
 
 that which Lo. 
 
 then o- 
 
 subsistence ^v.. 
 
 sufficiency xjLa5^ 
 
 supplication ^.L^o. 
 surely J (after ^V). 
 tail ^j j. 
 
 r -- ^ a ' 
 
 take (to) tXa-t mp/. u. — thereupon Ji. 
 
 (of a city) l^i m;?/: a. tj^ief Jj ^/. j^ (10) 
 
 to t. away ,_^b impf. a. 
 with i_j. — to t. hold of 
 
 thing g^ pi. JLiit (17) 
 but without the nuna- 
 
 j^l impf u, rvith 
 talk to 
 
 tion i-LLil. 
 
 (to) i^iS" //, mith ,,.,.,.= T. . . 
 
 ^ ' ^ thmk (to) ..yiim^/.M 
 
 - to t. to one an- ^ ' u^ ^ ^ 
 
 two accus.; inf. JjJo. 
 third XJIJ § 93 a. 
 thirty j^-iU §§ 91, 92 6. 
 this t tX* § 13 6. 
 Thora (the) SlJ^l 
 
 ace. 
 
 other, id. V. 
 
 talk lis. 
 
 tattle iaXl. 
 
 teach (to) Jji //, w«7A two 
 accus. 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 101=' 
 
 those who ^ § 14 b. 
 
 cyjl 
 
 thou 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 thought y^i. 
 
 trsLnsiiory pai-i. act. o/" ^i. 
 travel (to) TLl med. ^. 
 
 three uy^^ §§ 91, 92 a. 
 
 through (by means of) 
 prep. o. 
 
 throw away (to) ^J impf. 
 i. — to throw down ^sii 
 IV. 
 
 tidings, to give glad tid- 
 ings to anyone of a 
 thing jAj //, rvith ace. 
 of per s. and i_). 
 
 time ^jLxi)- — (proper) time 
 
 tipsy ^j\yi>j- 
 title-page fj\y^. 
 to {direction) prep. J I; 
 {sign of the dative) J. 
 
 tongue ^j\S^pl. 'iXxs\ (16). 
 towards prep. Jt^, 
 transgression .^li pi- 
 J^ (10). 
 
 treasure jtAjyi&.. 
 
 S^ ^ -^ '' 
 
 tree S^sj^.A. 
 
 tribe jcLAJsi?/. JoLii (25). 
 
 trick x-Li-. 
 
 trust XjLiol. 
 
 G o 
 
 truth ij(>»«ffl. 
 
 turn (to) JUo me^?. |^. — 
 to turn from ^yt- VI, 
 with ^x- — to t. away 
 {act.) t>^ impf. u. — to 
 t. away from {neut.) J^ 
 
 II, with ^j^. 
 twinkling jilai. 
 'Ubaid A-u.e. 
 ugly ^*j /em. s. — 
 
 unbeliever part. act. of jhS 
 
 pi. § 76. 
 uncover (to) ^JiJh^impf. i. 
 understanding J.ii£. 
 
102* 
 
 Glossary A. 
 
 unmindful of (to be) ^L*- waste yxLi fem. X-^- — I 
 
 r, miih ^^. 
 
 render waste 
 
 -^y^ 
 
 II. 
 
 until conj. JX^^ generally water gLo § 90^. 
 
 with suhj. (cf. § 152 c). ^gj^ As.. 
 
 upon prep. ^j^. well-pleased see please, 
 
 used to ^[S' med. , wt7A West ;_>jjLo. 
 
 /b//^. 2'»aj!?/. § 99 c; sw&y. 
 ffen. betrv. ^\^ and imp f. 
 
 value x+jui. 
 
 vehemence iijLi.. 
 
 vehement ■_" -^ 1 r - 
 
 verily ^°,| §§ 147, 96 d. 
 
 viand (V*iajop/.xJLeUxi(28). 
 violent Ju;\.w. 
 
 wade through (to) ^jiL^ 
 
 /Ke«?. ., wt^A ace. 
 want (to) lilv med. . IV. 
 want &^L^. 
 
 whale cy^a*. 
 what rel. interr. Lc. 
 when re?, interr. Jjo ; coh/. 
 iSt § 158. 
 
 where? 
 
 ^. 
 
 I. 
 
 from 
 
 where, whence ^^ I ^jjo. 
 
 which relat. ^ jJK 
 
 s* 
 whichever ^f § 14 c. 
 
 while (a) jLcL*,. 
 
 whilst cf. § 157. 
 
 .0- o ^ 
 
 who re/. ^5 jJI; interr. ^jo. 
 
 war (holy) m/l JLii o/" whoever,whoso JJo§§14&, 
 jLg^ III. 159. 
 
 Waraka xs' 
 
 ';r 
 
 whole -'i~^- 
 
 wash (to) JJLc m;?/: i. why? p; why then? |S UJ. 
 
Glossary A. 
 
 103* 
 
 wick XJIJ j. 
 
 wickedness Li. 
 
 will (to) sLxi med. ^^ 
 
 word iCjS. 
 
 wind ^. /em. § 72. 
 
 wine j.4.^. 
 wisdom jctXfk 
 
 work Jkii p/. JLiil (17). 
 world (the, this) LiSjJI. 
 worst Lii § 63 note, 
 write to (to) ,_JcS'«»y9/'. m, 
 with, J,|. 
 wise *aX~» p^. *-!5^oij (20). wrong (to^ to do) IJUo 
 
 Q CI > 
 
 wish (to) o\\ med. ^ IV. impf. i; inf. |JLIs. 
 
 with «xi (in company w.); 
 
 ^_j (in union w., hy 
 
 means of), 
 without yJu {with gen.). 
 woe to! (j Ju.. 
 wolf i_^(3. 
 
 woman sljjoj^, SljX. - 
 
 i?/Mr. gLlj § 90 f. 
 wood o,*. — piece of youth J^^ 
 
 wood £Lm^- Zaid Ju^. 
 
 Yazid 
 
 ye |»JOl. 
 
 year xju« ^?. § 90 m. 
 
 yes |Ui- 
 
 young ynJuiO elat. § 63 b. 
 
 pi. J^UT (23). 
 young man ^Xi pi. ^^^Jii 
 
 (21). 
 
104* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 GLOSSAEY B. 
 
 I pari, interr. often before 
 tlie first half of an 
 alternative question. 
 
 <^\st.c.yi\ (§ 90 «) father. 
 Jot impf. i to stay, remain. 
 
 I Jo I adv. always, for 
 ever; with neg. never. 
 
 (^1 impf. i to run away. 
 
 ^\ impf. i; c. ace. come, 
 come to. c.acc. p. et\^ 
 r. to bring, to give 
 somethg. to some one. 
 
 wjI impf. u to make an im- 
 pression. 
 
 jS\ ph ylj\ trace, sign, 
 mark. 
 
 ys^\ wages, hire, reward. 
 
 i\^\fefn. ^^Jkja.! one, some 
 one. 
 
 Xt (§ 90c) _p/.S^| brother, 
 neighbour. 
 
 j^js,.! mj»/. M to take, to 
 g^e, catch hold of. 
 
 VIII to make; w. 2 Ace. 
 to adopt, regard (as). 
 
 T 
 
 fs.t //to put off, postpone. 
 j.i&.| the last, secpnd, 
 end. 
 Sy^y I the next world. 
 
 vi.l fern. i5j.^l other. 
 
 jij| F to conduct one's 
 self with propriety. 
 
 i_3t>l good breeding, 
 politeness, education, 
 polite reproof. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 105* 
 
 'ij^i^l vessel for holding !tUXl„!S!t (the Arabs have 
 water, made of skins. treated the first two 
 
 Si- 
 
 jC(>| // to pay (tribute). letters of the name as 
 
 the article) Alexander. 
 
 JLsNtXlCvu^t Alexandria. 
 
 il lo! see! when lo! 
 
 lit conj. when, if; adv. "^ 
 
 & Go 
 
 lo! see! i».^l v. U^. 
 
 j^il impf. a; c. Jpers. et j^_^| ^he root, the chief 
 o rei to allow, permit. thing. 
 
 Zto ask permission. ^^iS pi Jlif region, di- 
 l.l\pl. ^iSfear. strict. 
 
 ^!j'j|m/. /permission, ^i P^- p-^lLil (xXi(i.a) 
 
 region, country. 
 
 iiS\ Fto gather strength, 
 become confirmed. 
 
 Ji'l impf. u to eat ; to get 
 to eat. 
 
 /// to eat with some 
 one. 
 
 So* 
 
 J^l m/. /eating. 
 
 ° ' *•- 
 
 JjS'Lo various kinds 
 
 of food, 
 ill jpflfrf. composed of ^^1 
 
 il /Fto injure, molest. 
 
 
 ^4>.yi Jordan, the Jor- 
 dan district. 
 
 „ ^% 
 
 [ulJLLLkLTl Aristotle. 
 
 s„* 
 ^Sfem. earth, land, coun- 
 try, ground. 
 
 Uuj foundation. 
 
 „i impf. i to tie, bind, 
 take captive. 
 
 LC 
 
 «J^.M^I 
 
 a captive. 
 
 an 
 
 A^. 
 
106* 
 
 Glossabt B. 
 
 ^1 ^^ ^ IJP ^^^^P* 
 ^§ 151). 
 
 ^jjfA»j.^f(§ 14a) he 
 that; whoso, who, which. 
 
 i_aJI zffjp/. a to become 
 familiar with . . . 
 
 Vlllto be on intimate 
 terms , familiarly ac- 
 quainted (with). 
 
 Go* S ,_ G ji- 
 
 ^_ftJli?/. oill or o^l 
 thousand. 
 
 G 3* 
 
 oJ|intimate,familiar. 
 
 li\ impf. a to feel, suffer 
 
 pain. 
 
 s * 
 
 ivjJI painful. 
 
 s I ' "'g , _ 
 xJI^;?/. s^\ a god. 
 
 2JUI ex Jl e< jj| (the 
 
 true) God, Allah. Julc 
 
 aJUl name of a man. 
 
 ^^iji'O God! 
 J| jsrep. (§ 96 b) towards, 
 in the direction of, to, 
 till, as far as. 
 
 Il part, ititerr. or. 
 
 It m/)/. M, to direct one's 
 course by something. 
 
 -I i>Z. tfyL^I mother. 
 
 Gsi 
 
 Jwl the people of a 
 (particular) religion, 
 nation, people. 
 
 jjol impf. u, c. ace. p. et uj 
 r. to order; command. 
 
 jjcI command, power; 
 
 affair, matter. ^_a^Lo 
 
 r«y I commander. 
 - G * 
 
 jjyol commander, 
 
 prince. 
 
 ^^^-Ox^l jjwithe prince 
 
 of the (true) believers, 
 commander of the faith- 
 ful = the Caliph. 
 
 ^j.a\ impf. a, c. ace. to be 
 
 safe from . . . 
 IV to believe. 
 
 G,* __ 
 
 Xxt pi. GL.i( female slave. 
 ioyo|Umayya(man's name). 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 107* 
 
 ^\ (§ 100, 1486) that. j^l/em. J^| first (<?e<em. 
 
 ^^1 (§§ 147, 148 a) that. 
 Jjl (§§ 159, 160) if. 
 
 also beginning.) 
 J.lgen. and ace. J.| t>. .i. 
 
 j;i (§ 147) lo! truly, verily ^J^a;.^ where? whither? 
 (often untranslatable). 
 
 Lil pron. (§ 12) I. 
 
 ,:^\ pron.; fern. vi:ot, thou. 
 
 ,j*o| imp/", a to have fami- 
 
 liar intercourse with. 
 
 ^jll*j| CO?;. y«b man. 
 
 Go* 
 
 i_ajt nose. 
 
 Uit par<. (composed of 
 
 ^1 and Lo) only (refers 
 in this sense usually to 
 last word of sentence), 
 but. 
 
 ^\'part. whence? how? 
 
 .^\ V c. J^ ret to equip 
 one's self, to be prepar- 
 ed (for any thing). 
 s <, *• 
 
 J^sct coll. one's kinsfolk, 
 
 family, people (cf.§133), 
 inhabitants. 
 
 jjjI J I whither? Jjjo 
 ijjI (from) whence? 
 where ? 
 
 jLsl sign, revelation. 
 
 Lgj| (§ 85) particle of ex- 
 clamation. 
 
 \^ prap. in, on, at; with, by 
 means of; for (of price), 
 by (in oaths), o yo l<3|_ 
 lo! there was . . . 
 
 Jub Babylon, Babylonia. 
 
 (jl,.j impf. u to be brave, 
 courageous. 
 
 ijjuU courage,8trengtl), 
 power. 
 
 So- . 
 
 y^vj sea, great river. 
 Iju effjp/. a to begin. 
 
108* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 J Jo lie acc. to exchange, 
 alter, change. 
 X c. acc. et i_j to take 
 
 something in exchange 
 for (something else). 
 
 ' jj impf. a to go away, 
 
 cease. 
 
 yij,i II. c acc. pers. et i^ 
 
 r. to tell some one 
 something as a piece of 
 good news. 
 
 I^ or Imsj to glance, 
 
 perceive ; to understand 
 something thoroughly. 
 
 lowest part; the heart 
 or secret thoughts of 
 a person. 
 
 ii..ij impf. a to arouse, 
 awaken; to send. 
 
 t\*J imp/', u or tX*j impf. 
 
 a to be distant, far off. 
 VI to be far distant 
 from each other. 
 
 Jk.«j prep, after, after 
 the departure , death 
 
 of . . . t\«j f\je after 
 
 the death of. 
 
 y^ pi ^L^\ glance, ijaju one (§ 133), part, 
 intelligence. portion; some (of). 
 
 %; 
 
 ,^y to come too late. 
 IV to delay. 
 X to find that sthg. 
 comes too late. 
 
 ijJaj belly; bottom (of a 
 valley). 
 
 kxhj repletion. 
 
 ijaJu impf. a to "hate. 
 
 ijaJu hatred. 
 jLidxj id. , state of 
 being hated. 
 iL.*aj«j hatred. 
 ^_*j impf. i to seek, strive. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 109* 
 
 r VII to be necessary, ^ impf. i to build. 
 
 meet, behoove. oT' ■ ^ 
 
 iUb inf. 
 
 JfilyL? Hippocrates. ^j| (ggoj, ^%Qf.2■, 
 
 ^j impf. a to remain, re- 126) pi. %\Xi\ son. 
 
 main over, continue in iLol^i^ilL (§ 90 i) daughter. 
 
 ***4J P^- tvSL^J animal, a 
 Sl^AJ inf. , ]brute beast. 
 
 jXj ^1 Abu Bekr, name i-jLj^/. oLjf gate, door. 
 
 of the first Caliph. "" "' ^.^o* « 
 
 ^^ mj9/. i to weep, 
 jjj ^/. oi^-j country, vil 
 
 
 lage(plur. co//.country). 
 
 iij ^w?;?/'. M, c. ace. to reach, 
 attain to; to come to 
 one's ears. 
 
 ^J«.AAXJ Bilkis, queen of 
 
 Sheba. 
 
 ^ impf. u to try, afflict. 
 
 ^^j part, certainly; nay, 
 ' on the contrary. 
 
 I»j {ex Lij) wherewith? by 
 
 what means? 
 
 lAAj ji)/. *c;Laj J, v:i>^ house, 
 
 family. JLjl o^aj 
 
 treasury. 
 
 cLj iOT/?/". 2 to sell, buy. 
 
 «>o w/. / selling, sale. 
 
 ^TjLj OTe<?. ^ IV to be evi- 
 dent. 
 
 jT^j (§ 114) i^rejt?. 
 between. . . . ^^tXj ^^^ 
 prop. bet. the hands of= 
 before, in presence of. 
 
 Li<u cow;', with a nom. 
 sentence: while, whilst. 
 
 aUlj evidence, proof. 
 
110* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 ^ijjjLj" masc. coffin. 
 
 ^ JTto be well arranged, 
 be in good order. 
 
 ijj impf. a, c. ace. to follow. 
 
 JV c. 2 ace. to make 
 sthg. follow, to attach 
 sthg. to, some one. 
 
 VIII to follow, en- 
 deavour to aquire. 
 
 Ji^' prep, under, ^jo 
 vifcs! id. 
 
 s ^' 
 olwj earth, morsel of 
 
 earth. 
 
 djj impf. u to aban- 
 don, leave, give up, 
 omit. 
 
 ^'yi3 (cf. ^^ fern. (or. 
 
 i^ysS msc.) piety. 
 vJ.ij fern. (§ 13 e) that 
 
 (woman). 
 
 Go 8 , , , 
 
 j.A*Jj jo/. Sjyo^" pupil, 
 
 disciple. 
 
 li' ?«jB/. e to be finished. 
 
 i.Lij perfect. 
 
 'iy^ nom. unit, a date. 
 
 xjjjXil (§ 2 (? note.) the 
 Torah (five books of 
 Moses). 
 
 rU ^ to ask help in se- 
 curing (blood) revenge. 
 
 oJo impf. u to be or stand 
 firm, to be fixed. 
 IV io fix, establish. 
 
 ooU .£'/flf. o^ajI con- 
 stant, fixed, firm. 
 Jjo /ffij?/. a, to lose a child 
 
 {aec.) by death (said of 
 a mother). 
 
 ii)i^ /i?»2. jo^' three. 
 
 HwiikA o^' thirteen. 
 
 aj a<?y. thereupon, then. 
 
 i^o iffi/?/. 2 to bend. 
 
 X to make an ex- 
 ception of. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 111^ 
 
 v_}^" garment. 
 jiLs-strength of character. 
 
 9 
 
 JoJ*^ new. 
 
 ^Jk^ kid. 
 
 LjtXfe. VIII to draw to 
 oneself. 
 
 y&. mpf. u to drag, pull. 
 1^1;^ impf. i to run, flow. 
 
 ^\^pi^r^ (§ 89) 
 
 female slave, young girl. 
 
 soya, island ; Sj-Jji ' Meso- 
 potamia. 
 
 i^ya. emp/". i to reward, 
 requite. 
 
 ///to pray God to re- 
 quite some one for sthg. 
 
 B ^ ^ 
 
 i),.^^ the body. 
 
 Jute. to place ; make, pre- 
 pare; c. 2 ace. to make 
 to be sthg.; to begin 
 (§ 99 note a). 
 
 oi^ impf. i to become dry. 
 
 Li=k impf. u to be rude. 
 
 ^Lto 2«/. tyranny. 
 
 Jji. zm/>/. 2 to be great, 
 powerful, exalted. 
 
 (J^:i. great, illustrious, 
 
 sound (in judgment). 
 
 xJikji. might, majesty. 
 
 jLLb- impf. i to sit down ; 
 c. J to give an audience. 
 
 /// c. ace. to sit down 
 by some one, sit with. 
 
 {j^yXc?- inf. sitting. 
 
 (j«.A.Li. pi- i-LlAkXi- 
 
 companion one sits 
 with. 
 
 s^s. a live coal. 
 
 1^ impf. a to bring to- 
 gether, gather, collect. 
 
 with 2 'j.jo to bring 
 about a meeting of two 
 parties, to have them 
 both come into one's 
 presence. 
 
112=' 
 
 IV js jjir z^\ 
 
 (also without xjL and 
 
 ■with ^1) to decide upon, 
 resolve to do sthg. 
 
 VIII to come together, 
 to assemble. 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 " Is> belonging to the 
 demons, a demon. 
 
 ^U^ VIII to avoid. 
 
 s ", ° . 
 
 >_^2> side. v_^A&. 1^ 
 
 >«A*£ 
 
 the whole, all 
 
 in comparison with. 
 sCU=. pi. y2U&. corpse, 
 funeral bier. 
 
 (LjLu.~» as ace. of con- 
 dition: all together). 
 
 xrU^ a number, 
 party (of people). 
 
 JtC to be beautiful. 
 
 s ^ _ ^ _ 
 
 J^A+s. beautifuljhand- J g~^ impf. a to be igno 
 
 G^ ^^ 
 some, elegant, kind. rant. xJL^ ««/". 
 
 4X«.a,. impf.aio take trouble 
 about sthg., exert one's 
 self. 
 
 /// to fight, do battle, 
 esp. w. unbelievers i. e. 
 non-Moslems. 
 
 ^j^ impf. u to cover over, 
 conceal. 
 
 Sa^ G ' 
 
 XASk pi ^jU^ garden 
 of trees. Paradise. 
 
 G ^ ^ 
 
 ^U.^ interior, heart, 
 soul, character. 
 
 jj^ coll. demons. Jinn. 
 
 J^Ls. pi. 1^^ igno- 
 rant. 
 jUJLssLs^ the state of 
 
 ignorance, i. e. (pre- 
 islamic) heathenism. 
 
 jt^^^ hell. 
 
 i_}L&. med. . ir c ace. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 113* 
 
 pers. et ^\ r. to give or 
 grant an answer, an 
 audience to some one, 
 listen to, promise, con- 
 cede sthg.to one, comply 
 I with his request. 
 
 Xto hear, in the sense 
 of answer (a petition). 
 
 5Lis. med. . to be generous. 
 
 \L&. med. 5 c. ace. to pass 
 
 in c. ace. to pass 
 beyond, exceed, trans- 
 gress. 
 
 cL&. med. , to be hungry. 
 
 ilcys> (nom. unit. § 
 73 c) hunger. 
 
 t.[^ med. 1^, c acc.to come, 
 c. u to bring. 
 
 l^:^ inf. 
 (jioa^ army. 
 Z>^ IV to love. 
 
 Jifc&. love. 
 
 S o c i n , Arabic Grammar.^ 
 
 ,_*AAi {elat. Zt-^\ c. 
 i^\ pro dativ. pers.) pi. 
 
 jLa^I dear to some 
 one, beloved, friend. 
 
 jU^ love, friendship. 
 
 Abyssinian. 
 
 15' 
 
 Lia^ mj9/. u c. ace. pers. et 
 Lj rei to present some 
 
 one with sthg. 
 
 ^L until; so that; for 
 the purpose of; {some- 
 times = finally). 
 
 r 
 
 mjo/". M to make the 
 pilgrimage to Mecca. 
 
 xs3L:a. i?/. ^sXs. the 
 pilgrimage to M. 
 
 s -' 
 reason or excuse. 
 
 &.s\^ pi. 
 
 good 
 
 >_AS!ti. impf. a to prevent, 
 exclude. 
 
 i^jL^si. curtain, veil. 
 H 
 
114* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 >^:s>L^ porter, gate- 
 keeper, chamberlain. 
 
 kij(>.~. tmpi'. u to be new. 
 II c. ace. pers. to in- 
 form, relate. 
 Xto newly adopt, get 
 
 sthg. new. 
 
 s 
 
 viojes. a story, nar- 
 rative (applied esp. to 
 the traditions respect- 
 ing Muhammed). 
 
 r jk.~. impf. ff, c. ace. vel ^jo 
 
 to be on one's guard 
 against . . . 
 
 ^iX^ inf. 
 
 i^(X==- impf. a to be clever, 
 
 skilled. 
 
 j.^ (leys w^) impf. a to b e free. 
 
 ^pl. 
 
 I free,noble. 
 
 ^r 
 
 &. /// to make war 
 
 upon, fight with some 
 one. 
 
 VI to carry on war 
 with each other. 
 
 t>j.i impf. i to strive eager- 
 ly after. 
 
 c>y^ eagerness, zeal, 
 anger. 
 ijOyss^ II c. ^^s- r. to 
 incite (to), stir up (to). 
 
 0>- 
 
 IV to burn, singe. 
 
 U-^ II to move, to stir 
 up, agitate. 
 
 lj.s. impf. M, c. Jȣ to be 
 forbidden to one, to be 
 legally prohibited one. 
 // to pronounce un- 
 lawful, declare to be for- 
 bidden, to prohibit. 
 
 ^•f^ to be troubled, sad. 
 
 IV to trouble , make 
 sad. 
 
 vII^aL^ impf. u to reckon. 
 
 i^LL^ reckoning. 
 
 (Xm^ impf. u to envy. 
 
 j^j..w.i^ impf. M to be beauti- 
 ful, good. 
 IVto do good. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 115* 
 
 X to find to be good. 
 
 j^-»aaj=» beauty, good- 
 ness. 
 
 elat. 
 
 beautiful, good. 
 
 ^j£a> CO//, suite, servants, 
 escort. 
 
 ' ■^^ effi/?/". M, c. «cc. ^ers. 
 
 z;e/ Jk.£ to be present 
 with or at. 
 
 IV to bring forward, 
 esp. to bring before a 
 sovereign or ruler. 
 
 VIII c. ace. to come 
 upon one (saidof death). 
 Pass, to be near to 
 death. 
 
 ._^> impf. u to surround. 
 
 wAa. impf. i to dig. 
 
 VIII to dig for one's 
 self. 
 
 lao'^ impf. a to take care 
 of, to guard, to be atten- 
 tive. 
 
 VIII c: i_j r. to take 
 care, give heed. 
 
 loA- impf. i to be right. 
 
 a 
 
 (£^ truth, certainty; 
 right, claim. 
 
 lite. impf. u to be despised. 
 X to despise. 
 
 B ^ 
 
 y.f.A- 
 
 despised. 
 
 I51&. ra^/. M to decide, give 
 judgement. 
 
 jL«X». wisdom. 
 
 *aX~. i?/. 4-L»XLs» wise, 
 learned. 
 
 |vfL.=. i?^- ,.IX=. go- 
 vernor, ruler, judge. 
 ^~» ?OTj?/. i to relate. 
 
 J^ m^/. M to loosen, 
 untie; mj^/". i to be al- 
 lowed. 
 
 IV or X to pronounce 
 sthg. allowed, declare 
 lawful, to allow. 
 J^i. rto adorn one's self. 
 H* 
 
116* 
 
 ^ (l.pers. 
 to be hot 
 
 Glossary B. 
 ) Impf. a. 
 
 tS* 
 
 . fern, fever. 
 
 kx)L*;a. pigeon. 
 
 J<i^ impf. I to praise. 
 
 tX.,.^ Muhammed (the 
 praised one). 
 
 0t^ m^/". u to be foolish. 
 
 (^♦=»l foolish, stupid. 
 
 Ji>,.^ m^/. i to load, carry ; 
 
 bring ; transport, c. Ji^^ 
 to attack; c. ace. per s. 
 et J^s. r. to make s. o. 
 sit upon sthg.; to in- 
 cite to some action. 
 
 viA^a. to commit sin. 
 
 r to purify one's self 
 from sin. 
 
 iai^i. // to embalm. 
 
 oJJ.s^!^)| al-Ahnaf, (a man's 
 name). 
 
 note b) c. Jt^ to compel. 
 
 J'TII c. ^]| to require, 
 be in need of. 
 
 X^Ls. c. i_3 need, want; 
 c. fi,\ request. 
 
 J,^ prep, round, round 
 
 about. 
 s _ 
 JLia. state, condition, 
 
 situation. 
 
 i^ls. impf. i, to gather 
 together, take posses- 
 sion (of everything). 
 
 ^-s. impf. § 49 c. to live. 
 
 ":L tribe, clan. 
 
 5.jys. life. 
 
 vi>tA^ impf. u to be bad, 
 wicked. 
 
 viju^Aia. bad, vile, 
 vicious, profligate. 
 
 jj.^ // c. 2 ace. to relate, 
 tell some one sthg. 
 
 nil to test, try, 
 prove. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 117* 
 
 wise 
 
 r^^ P^- ^^-i^' infor- forward, to produce, to 
 
 mation, news, affair. expel. 
 
 well informed, -P bring out, draw out. 
 
 _j.^ tribute. 
 
 ■y^ imp/', i to make bread, j-yi*- ifnpf. a to be dumb. 
 
 to bake. ,^^ 
 
 , Vj^ impf. I to make a' 
 
 hole in, to pierce. 
 
 VII to have a hole put 
 through, be pierced. 
 
 VIII to break through, 
 flow through. 
 
 ^■jX. impf. u to store up. 
 
 iiiiLi&.j9?.,j_5lC.i.treas- 
 
 ure , treasure-house. 
 
 ■yj^ a cake of bread, 
 bread. 
 
 ivi~» impf. i to seal up, put 
 one's seal to. 
 
 x^jsjk^ Hadiga (Muham- 
 med's first wife). 
 
 |.J*.i>- impf. u to serve. 
 
 XX (\^ inf. 
 s - 
 
 r 
 
 of) servants. 
 *iJL&. a servant. 
 
 zr 
 
 tVi^ coll. (the staff 15^^ «'"»/'/"- «. ^- «''c- '"• 
 
 to fear sthg. 
 
 ua^ impf. u to be some 
 one's special property. 
 
 (jaL^, coW. 'lAj^ an 
 intimate friend; persons 
 of distinction. 
 
 w^ impf. i to prostrate 
 one's self, to fall down. 
 
 i. impf. u to go out. 
 
 come out, go out from, 
 depart from. 
 IV to bring forth or 
 
 ^.^JUlL. impf. i to dye (esp. 
 the hair). 
 
118* 
 
 Glossaky B. 
 
 .s. dyed. 
 
 ' ^^ IX to be or become 
 
 green. 
 
 JqjL impf. a to sin. 
 
 i_jLkE.f al-Hattab (a man's 
 name). 
 
 i_ftj. impf. I to be light 
 (opp. of heavy). 
 
 s , a^f ,. , 
 
 i_aAA~» e?. i_ft~il light. 
 
 jJLia. ?mp/. M to be ever- 
 lasting, to remain. 
 
 (jwJja. VIII io appropriate 
 to oneself secretly. 
 
 U«al~w // c. ace. pers. et 
 ^x to rescue, to free. 
 
 (j,flj.is? escape, way of 
 escape. 
 
 JaAis. F///prop. to become 
 commingled; to come 
 on (said of the darkness 
 in which objects can 
 no longer be disting- 
 uished). 
 
 i-aJLL impf. u to be behind, 
 to succeed. 
 // to leave behind. 
 
 XiA-Ua. pl- iLii~» Ca- 
 liph. 
 
 i^_^Xb>- impf. u to create, 
 form. 
 
 So, 
 
 l^jXi. 1) one's out- 
 ward form; 2) coll. 
 people. 
 
 {^zX~^pl.^j^:^JsA one's 
 (natural) disposition, 
 character, mental and 
 moral traits. 
 
 Jvt'^ m^/. u to go out (of 
 fire and light). 
 
 r«^ to ferment. 
 
 y4..i /em. fermented 
 drink, wine. 
 
 JLL me<?. ^ (§ 42<?; 44) 
 impf. a to fear. 
 // to put in fear. 
 
 \^Y^ tear. 
 vlX. med. ^ to be good. 
 
Glossaet B. 
 
 119* 
 
 VIII to choose, select "^i^ coll., nom. unit. H^o, 
 for one's self. pearl. 
 
 yA^ [also B,s elat.) good ^J^t> IV to attain, reach, 
 (adj. and noun) , pro- comprehend. 
 
 sperity. 
 
 JL~» med. ^ II to imagine 
 something. 
 
 tjla Darius. 
 
 ;_};> impf. i to walk slowly. 
 
 jolt> pi- ^_jl.i> beast of 
 burden and for riding. 
 
 Ij5 IV to turn one's back, 
 go away. 
 
 (jjs^a c. ace. to enter, to 
 
 come; c. Jk.£ to come to 
 see one, to consummate 
 marriage with (coire) ; 
 
 c. 
 
 c^^ 
 
 to interfere. 
 
 IV to bring into, in- 
 troduce. 
 r. J J 
 
 J^is.0 Ml/". 7. 
 G 
 
 Jki.|i> entering,future, 
 next. 
 
 ivtf j4> J3/. |V^f)iS a dirhem, 
 a silver coin. 
 
 (Cj3 mi?/. «' to know. 
 IV caus. 
 
 Li (> mp/". u to call, to call 
 upon, invoke, c. lo to 
 
 pray to God for some- 
 thing, to call to one's 
 aid, to name; c. ace. et 
 
 Jt to induce s. o. to do 
 sthg., invite, summon. 
 VI to call to one an- 
 other, c. lo to bring a 
 complaint against . . . 
 
 5^£4> prayer. 
 
 «ii> impf. a to push; hand 
 over, deliver up. 
 
 LiiS impf. u, c. ^ to come 
 
 near. 
 
120* Glossary B. 
 
 jt> elat. ^o] low, ^c> debt, 
 
 humble, trivial, near; ° ^j ^;. ^ GiSl re- 
 
 pl- i^lol the nearest ligion. 
 
 parts. ;1-Ijj> denar, a gold coin. 
 
 Lllj /-m. world. ,^ ^^Q^_ ^g 13 ^-j ^jjjg^ 
 
 ^15 me^. ^ 77 to subdue. , r l; (§ 15) ^^at (then)? 
 
 .t3»«e<?.. C.J to surround. ,\j<3 wolf. 
 
 •So pl. ».o dwelling- ^co impf. a, c. ace. to 
 
 place, house, abode, frighten. 
 
 <^oii''t' Jib impf. u, c. ace. to think 
 
 |.lt> ff?e(?. . to remain, con- of, mention, name, 
 
 tinue, be durable. speak of. Inf. ^j.. 
 
 ^^'oprep. on this side of, Ji impf. i to be insignifi- 
 
 below, beneath ; other cant, feeble. 
 
 than, exclusively of, be- Jj^ miserable, 
 
 sides, before. ^^,o ^j.^id. feeble. 
 
 ^5J0 mp/. a to be indis- >iJLJ6/ew. viJULj j9ron.(§ 13c) 
 
 posed. that, 
 
 /r to treat medically. J^^ ,-^^^. « to go,go away. 
 
 %\'^S medicine. IV to cause to disap- 
 
 ^jl(S ffje«?. ^^ to be in sub- P^ar. 
 
 jection. ljt,% gold. 
 
Glossaey B. 
 
 121" 
 
 .i the (man) of, possessor .^7 pi. cLs house, pi. real 
 
 _ofcf.§§90/, 133. estate. 
 
 cti> med. ^ to become 
 
 known, spread abroad. 
 IV to make public, 
 publish. 
 
 U-l; i??- u*'^J^ head, the 
 chief thing. 
 
 ^ju^sP^. iS-Lu^s leader, 
 general. 
 
 tS'J impf- <3f. (§ 49 &) 
 to see, be of opinion, 
 think, believe, consider 
 advisable, c. 2 ace. to 
 regard or esteem a per- 
 son or thing as, hold 
 
 to be. 
 ^* 
 IV ^Ac. 2 acc.to show. 
 
 (^L insight, counsel, 
 advice. 
 
 C>\ lord, God. 
 ^j emp/. M to tie, fasten. 
 JaAJ^ e/a^. iajul se- 
 curely fastened, firm. 
 
 «joJI ar-Rabi', (a 
 man's name). 
 «jv| /em. xjLJsl tour. 
 
 «is.. mj3/. 2 to turn i 
 return. 
 
 jacK, 
 
 
 foot, 
 
 leg. 
 
 
 
 man. 
 
 I^". m^/". M to stone 
 
 
 ».AJs>-^ stoned, accursed. 
 
 \js^. impf. u, c. ace. to hope 
 for sthg. 
 
 to be wide, broad. 
 
 // c. i_j to bid anyone 
 
 welcome (LX&.J0). 
 
 Is."! impf. a, e. ace. pers. 
 
 to have pity on, com- 
 passion for, some one. 
 
122* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 VI to take compassion 
 on each other. 
 
 Cf? 
 
 II to set (of jewels), 
 
 inlay. 
 
 t^y loving kindness r^' impf. a to suck (at 
 3sp. of God), deed of 'the breast). 
 
 (esp. of God) 
 kindness. 
 
 ^> fern. mill. 
 
 soft.' 
 
 3j imipf. u to bring back, 
 give back. 
 VIII to turn back. 
 
 3r m/". I giving back. 
 
 ^i\. mjo/". M, c. 2 «cc. to 
 present, grant, furnish, 
 bless with, give food. 
 
 iVS) food (esp. as given 
 
 by Allah), sustenence. 
 
 jj.jy^ Marzuk, (man's 
 name). 
 JkAuj IV to send. 
 
 J^**-N jt?/. Ju«, mes- 
 senger, apostle (esp. of 
 God). 
 
 IV to give suck. 
 
 l^j impf. a, c. ace. to be 
 
 content with, acquiesce 
 in, take pleasure in. 
 
 s-ix. jdJI 
 
 ^) 
 
 God be 
 
 gracious unto him! 
 
 IV to satisfy, render 
 content. 
 
 .^v t«/. / pleasure, 
 
 delight (in sthg.). 
 
 tXtv Vlllto shake, tremble. 
 
 ^j /»«/?/. a to watch, tend, 
 
 G , J 
 
 ctT J5/. isLft* herdsman, 
 shepherd. 
 
 JUc, _p/- LsLftj subjects 
 (also sewp'. coll.). 
 
 isLfcyo pl.c\yjo pasture- 
 ground. "^ 
 
Glossaky B. 
 
 123* 
 
 ^_^&l imp/", a to have a 
 
 I strong craving for; c. 
 
 jj^ to give up the 
 craving for sthg., to 
 shun, relinqi},i^L 
 
 i_aAixj9/. xA^«| (fl^t) caJiS> 
 iiT mp/". « to rais6^, lift 
 
 up (the voice); c. Jt to 
 bring sthg. before the 
 F judge. 
 
 .Ai» high, noble. 
 
 jjjT 7F c. i_5 to be kind, 
 gentle vyith . . . 
 
 (3ij-«p/. (^ifwX) elbow. 
 
 ^i\ impf. i to be or become 
 thin, abject, mean. 
 
 ^\ bondage, slavery. 
 
 «jir mj?/". « to mend, patch. 
 
 iiijij patch. 
 
 o^S^ m^/. «, c. ace. to 
 
 mount on horse-, camel- 
 back &c., to ride. 
 
 5 V, 
 
 '^1 
 
 j^f^ m/. stepping 
 into,, aboard (a ship). 
 
 ^^Lajo. nanje^f a month. 
 
 JO. impf. i, c. i^ r. to 
 
 throw, pelt with. 
 
 _v_A». OT^/. «, c. «cc. ret 
 
 to be afraid of sthg. 
 
 v^aJdK monk. 
 
 c. ace. et 
 
 . of. 
 
 ' K IF »«erf. ., 
 
 (^.« to rid . 
 f-^^ (for ^^^) /e»?., 
 
 j»/. -,by wind. 
 
 '''».-- 11 
 
 S^l. smell, scent. 
 
 o\\ med. . /F c. ace. to will, 
 wish, intend, endeavour 
 to. 
 
 iK med. . to seek, desire, 
 attack. 
 
 (^r. 2»2p/". 2 to relate. 
 
 i_aa.") 2Vwp/". a to advance 
 slowly. 
 
 c^i 2ff?p/. « to sow. 
 
124* 
 
 Glossary B, 
 
 cvj coll. seed, green 
 corn, green crop, differ- 
 ent sorts of grain. 
 
 cycv to shake violently. 
 IT (reflexive). 
 
 *x.> impf. u to assert, re- 
 late. 
 
 k /we<?. . II c. 2 ace. 
 
 to marry some one to, 
 join in wedlock ; c. ace. 
 to take in marriage. 
 V c. ace. reflex. 
 
 jK med. . impf. u to visit. 
 5nL}\ inf. 
 
 Jk med. . ewT?/". a to cease. 
 s ,^ 
 Jl.vtw/". cessation. Noon 
 
 be good, pure. ' ^'^ afternoon. 
 
 tfc e/«;. ^/-Tpure, i5;y''"^^-«' to ^■eaio^'e. clear 
 
 delicate, dainty. 
 
 v_iv rajD/". M to conduct a 
 bride to her husband's 
 house. 
 
 1^-. ult. . to increase, to 
 
 — .- o ^ 
 
 J'Jv to shake (trans.). II 
 to shake (int.), tremble. 
 
 ^■dmpf.u to fasten securely. 
 s , 
 |.Lo» bridle (nose-rein). 
 
 (jUov time, space of time. 
 
 L©\ mjo/. u to shoot up, to 
 flourish, prosper. 
 
 So, 
 
 away. 
 kjjKjo?. LjI^v corner. 
 t>K merf. 1^ iffjp/". /, c. 2 ace. 
 to give more, to add to. 
 Juyo inf. ; increase, 
 addition. 
 .1 part. § 95<?; 99 a. 
 
 J.A.W impf. a to be or remain 
 over. 
 
Glossary B. 
 ^jL«/ remaining, the ^^ pi. 
 
 125* 
 saddle. 
 
 rest, all 
 
 JLu impf. a, c. 2 ace. to 
 ask one for sthg. c. ace. 
 
 pars, et ^s. to enquire 
 for, ask respecting. 
 
 JoLu beggar, 
 
 jULaw-o the asking, a 
 question. 
 
 6 
 
 ijofjjM masc. or fern, way, 
 right way, road. 
 
 g So 
 
 ow«/ fern. jU*« six. 
 
 >A*u impf. u or i to hide, 
 shield (e. g. from the 
 gossip of the people). 
 
 Ji^aL impf. u, c. J, to 
 
 prostrate one's self 
 TupoaxuvEiv. 
 
 t>^.iSU*< znf. 
 
 S ti , 
 
 cX^^xi mosque. 
 
 Ill, /F c. Jt pers. to tell 
 s. 0. sthg. as a secret. 
 
 j^ p?. >ly*l secret. 
 
 c.y^ IV to be in haste, c. 
 jj to make haste with . . . 
 
 it^yjM, elat. Pt-*"'! 
 
 quick, swift, speedy. 
 
 ' -- - > 
 
 aj'lww Suraka, (a man's 
 
 name). 
 
 ela^ impf. a to spread out. 
 ^>Ja*u the flat roof of 
 eastern houses. 
 
 tXiL*.; jt?/. (Xs^SyM the fore- 
 arm. 
 1^^ impf. i, c. i_5 t;e/ ^ 
 
 joers. to lodge informa- 
 tion against, denounce. 
 
 jA«; jo^. ^U*«i journey. 
 
 XjUi*!/ ship. 
 
 oJC**, mj»/". M to become 
 or be silent. 
 
 ^JCw impf. a to be or be- 
 come drunk. 
 
126* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 (J '7^ 
 drunk. 
 
 pi. 
 
 ^^K. 
 
 ^; 
 
 i^jCw impf. u to dwell, in- 
 habit, rest, be quiescent. 
 
 S 5 J 
 
 (jJCu rest, quiescence. 
 (ji'Ll p^. ^IC^ in- 
 habitant. 
 J.A*JLw to put in chains. 
 
 iaXiu m^/". M to be or be- 
 come powerful. 
 
 // to make, install as 
 ruler. 
 
 A.^ ladder. 
 
 j.^M/ immunity from 
 ills, prosperity, wel- 
 fare. ^.^LiaJI xaJa 
 
 peace be with him! 
 (parenthetically placed 
 after the names of high 
 religious personalities). 
 
 JLo^Au peace and pro- 
 sperity. 
 
 |.iLv*/t (m/. IV) Islam. 
 
 ^jLkJu, c. J.S. autho- a-w impf. u to put poison 
 rity over, rule; ruler, into anything, to poison. 
 
 sultan. 
 |vLm/ impf. a to be whole, 
 intact. 
 
 // to bestow health 
 and prosperity; c. J^a 
 to greet, salute. 
 
 IV c. xJJ to declare 
 one's self resigned to 
 to God; to become a 
 Moslem. 
 
 ^Au poison. 
 impf. a to hear. 
 
 6 
 
 viU-w pi. 'kSUm.\ fish. 
 
 U-w // c. 2 ace. vel c. ace. 
 et i_j to call by name, 
 to give a name to. 
 
 O o 
 
 jv.wt (§ 56 a) name. 
 eL»-X heaven. 
 
Glossaey B. 
 
 127=' 
 
 - O ^ 
 
 >^Z, part. § 95 d; 99 1 
 i^Lu med. , to drive. 
 
 ket, bazaar, lane. 
 
 pi. (Jlj.-! mar- 
 
 jj,*« impf. u 1) to sharpen, l^Ll, hour, short space 
 2) ordain, institute. of time, moment. 
 
 ^^^ tooth, age. 
 
 Go > G ^ J 
 
 hXmj pl. i^^rfUu regula- 
 tion, institution, tradi- 
 tion (of the Moslems). 
 
 (XCl IV to support. 
 
 'iXMipl. mm. i^U^ (§ 76 6; 
 
 90 ffj) year. 
 y^ impf. a to keep awake. 
 
 *L»/»«e^.,tobebad,wicked. 
 
 IV to spoil, corrupt, 
 to do ill. 
 
 jJCm med. . to sink into 
 the ground. 
 
 5L1 med. . c. ace. to be- 
 come lord, ruler, over... 
 
 t>^f fern. iAOyMj pl. 
 ^^I5^~^«, O^ black. 
 
 G„ , G ^. , 
 
 Jow pl. Si>L*, lord, 
 ruler, chief. 
 
 (_5j.A« Vlllto be equal, alike, 
 
 simultaneous vyith. 
 
 sl^^ c. ^^ (quite) 
 the same, indifferent to. 
 
 sLau med. ^ impf. i to jour- 
 
 ney, go along, go. ^51 3 
 
 to follow one's track. 
 
 G- 
 
 iy^Mja distance travel- 
 led. 
 
 G o ^ G_ J > G. ' o* 
 
 sword, sabre. 
 ^Lau FJ to find a bad omen. 
 
 Giii 
 
 a bad omen. 
 
 /F to satiate, satisfy. 
 
 ^^.i, 2»y?/". a to be satiated. 
 
 xaau // to compare. 
 
r 
 
 128* Glossary B. 
 
 „sv.Ai impf. u to be intri- 
 
 cate, intertwined. 
 
 tj- ^ -- 
 
 j.^\_w wow. M?i2t 5w:S\.Ai 
 
 tree, shrub. 
 <5..w 2Vw7?/. M to bind, tie. 
 
 // c. |_^£ to press hard 
 on one. 
 
 r//7tobecomestrong, 
 powerful, heavy. 
 
 JoJ.-cie/«tJk..co|strong, 
 
 powerful; vehement. 
 
 w«i (1. pers. v:dsj.^) eVw/?/". 
 « to become bad. 
 
 wi, (e/«t ?■<?.) pi. >lj-«il 
 bad, wicked. Mischief, 
 woe, war. 
 
 impf. a to drink. 
 \^\yjij wine, strong 
 drink. 
 
 ^7' 
 
 Ov.^ m/)/. M to be high. 
 IV to be high, lofty. 
 
 G — 
 
 o>.^ height, fame, 
 nobility. 
 
 G .- J ^ w >- 
 
 i_ftjj.Ai/)^. olv*il noble, 
 aristocratic, respected. 
 
 ijj-ci i»?j5/. u to rise (of 
 the sun). 
 
 ii,..ci./) place of the 
 
 sun's rising = the East. 
 
 dj-ii impf. a c. ace. to be 
 
 one's companion. 
 
 ii)wCi net. 
 s 
 >iL!y.i, companion,ally. 
 
 ^5j.Ai impf. i to buy, sell. 
 VIII io buy, negotiate. 
 >~ a .* A u m^/". a, c. v_( j9er*. 
 be deeply struck with. 
 JU*i j9/. sLa.w lip. 
 
 ;3i.w IV c. J<£. to be ten- 
 derly solicitous for . . . 
 
 yiiii impf. u to thank, be 
 thankful. 
 
 [Xm impf. u, to complain. 
 
 VIII to complain. 
 
 o^.*^ lie. ace. to say "God 
 
Glosbaey B. 
 
 129* 
 
 bless you" to a person 
 (e. g. sneezing). 
 
 jii fern. sun. 
 
 JU4 left (hand or side.). 
 
 jk.^ impf. a c. ace. to be 
 
 present at sthg., to wit- 
 ness, to give evidence. 
 Ill c. ace. to see, be 
 an eye-witness. 
 
 {^yii impf. i to roast. 
 
 *Ui med. ^ impf. a to will, 
 wish. 
 
 &^(i a matter, thing, 
 something. 
 
 oLci med, ^ to become 
 gray-haired. 
 
 ,_AjUi gray hairs. 
 
 I^aLi pi. lAk wit- t*^ "''^' ^ ^° ^^"''"'^ 
 
 an old man. 
 
 ness. 
 
 f.': ' T . ,. -^^.A^ old man. 
 
 St>L.g,w testimony, 'r'- 
 
 guarantee , security, a ^liJi i?/. Jj-^^lXi devil, 
 bearing testimony. 
 
 j^^i jo/. v.^i month. 
 1 g ■•>■ FJ7/ to desire, wish. 
 
 Sj-g-Cu sensual desire, 
 
 ^ appetite. 
 
 ., 
 
 jL*i CO/;, worn. unit. sLi 
 
 small cattle, sheep and 
 
 goats ; nom. unit, a single 
 
 head of these. 
 
 TLw med. . /F c. ^^t to 
 point to, 
 
 Socln, Arabic Grammar,^ 
 
 Satan. 
 
 cL^ med. (^ to spread a- 
 broad, become public. 
 
 II to accompany, to 
 follow. 
 
 ^^j.^ impf. u to pour, pour 
 out. 
 
 ^e)jJo impf. u to be attrac- 
 ^tive, good-looking. 
 
 IVto enter the time of 
 
130* 
 
 Glossabt B. 
 
 early morning, c. «cc. be- 
 come sthg. early, soon. 
 
 XiL.^ beauty, love- 
 liness. 
 
 ILfl impf. i, c. ^J^ to have 
 patience with, to put 
 up with, endure. 
 
 kAJo impf. u or a to dye. 
 
 L2o impf. u to be foolish; 
 youthful. 
 
 ^^gJo pi ijLxIi? little 
 boy. 
 
 A,jo impf. i to be in good 
 ^ health, sound. 
 
 ^^>A^ pl. pX^ elat. 
 ^««st right, correct. 
 
 ^•tfg iwip/. «, c. flcc. to 
 
 keep company with, 
 have to do with. 
 
 HI to take for com- 
 panion. 
 
 X to take with one 
 as an associate. 
 
 associate; friend, com- 
 panion ; owner, inhabi- 
 tant of (cf. § 133). 
 
 'iju^ pl. '..i^P leaf. 
 
 Joo m^/". u to turn away 
 from, alienate. 
 
 jijjua e'ffjp/". M to speak 
 the truth, be truthful, 
 sincere. 
 
 // to consider sthg. to 
 be true, right, to believe 
 one. 
 
 V c. Jv.e pers. et t_^ rei 
 to give one sthg. as 
 alms. 
 
 (^J_:c\-<0 pl- iXJii^^S 
 friend. 
 Owo impf. i to turn from. 
 VII to turn, go, away, 
 return (home). 
 
 XacUo thunderbolt. 
 
 yuo mi?/. M, to be small, 
 little. 
 
Glossaey B. 
 
 131=' 
 
 jjufl inf. littleness. 
 i_a,Aa impf. u to place in a 
 row, draw up. 
 
 VIII to arrange (them- 
 selves),to stand in a row. 
 jjLifl IX to be yellow. 
 
 j.A^I pi. yAj£> yellow. 
 
 iJo VIII to choose. 
 
 ^lixAa/) man s name. 
 
 X-Lifl m;?/". a to be good, 
 be in order. 
 
 IV to put in order, 
 set right. 
 
 G ^ 
 
 SLsvJLo apious action, 
 
 good deed. 
 ^.,0 // to pray, perform 
 divine service, to wor- 
 
 ship. «JLLc jJJt ija 
 
 |vJLl} contracted to 
 
 *il;o § 11. 
 
 G ^ Q I 
 
 !s!iLo, 'iJJo divine 
 service, worship, prayer. 
 
 oii.o mjo/". M to be quiet. 
 
 i:y^4..»fl silence. 
 
 »Xjio impf. a to make, 
 prepare, to do. 
 
 y^ pl. vLg»ol relation 
 
 (by marriage). 
 
 oLo ?we<?. ^ IV to befall, 
 fall to one's share. 
 
 XAA-tajo misfortune. 
 
 G ' 
 
 m)»^ voice. 
 
 i(\^^j»/. .^yo figure, shape, 
 form. 
 
 XJUOyO 
 
 cell. 
 
 ' LIo »ie<?. ^^ to cry out. 
 VI to shout at each 
 other. 
 
 5Lfl mei?. (^ to hunt. 
 
 G ° - 
 
 4\A.«a inf. hunting, what 
 is caught, game. 
 
 jLo med. ^, c. ace. to be- 
 come or be sthg. ; to 
 repair to. 
 
 77 to cause to become; 
 to appoint, to place. 
 I* 
 
132* 
 
 Globsaey B. 
 
 «js^ VIII to lie on one's 
 
 side. 
 
 t5' 
 
 ,:auo forenoon. 
 
 \^sfj6 impf. i to strike, beat. 
 
 ^•Ui med. ^ IV to press 
 hard, hem in. 
 jLua straits, distress. 
 LisUs to sink (trans.). 
 
 VIII refl. to beat 
 against each other. 
 
 Owo inf. I striking, 
 beating. 
 
 ^_fcJs impf. u or i to treat 
 medically. 
 
 ._^,AAis physician, doc- 
 tor. 
 L'^ a single blow, ^J;^ jy to cover with a 
 
 iid. 
 F// to be covered up. 
 
 ^T;.sx.is m^/. a to grind. 
 
 ^^j-^ts^Jb flour. 
 
 i^Jo impf. u to chase away, 
 drive away, pursue. 
 
 i^-Jo IVio cast down one's 
 
 a beating 
 
 i-datA^ impf. ti to be weak. 
 
 i_ftA».^ weak. 
 
 (J^ «m/i/. i to err. 
 
 JL!!iLo erring, error. 
 
 |V.(0 m^/. M to put close 
 to, press against, to 
 gather. 
 
 sLo med. . to be clear, 
 bright, shining. 
 
 %yJi light, brightness. 
 ^LIao brightness. 
 i_ftA.o /)?. oLuol guest. 
 
 eyes. 
 |V*io Mwp/. a to eat. 
 
 /F to feed (trans.). 
 
 j,ljiia in/". / eating, 
 taste, a meal, food, a 
 (particular) dish. 
 
Glossaet B, 
 
 133* 
 
 ^_>Uo impf.u to seek, search 
 after; wish for. 
 
 iJilXJo inf. I seeking, 
 a search. 
 
 JUff 
 
 y^^ 
 
 Abu Talib 
 
 cLis merf'. . to obey, be 
 compliant. 
 /Fid. 
 
 SxUo is/., obedience, 
 subjection. 
 
 (Muhammed's uncle). 
 *JJo impf. u to stand up. 
 
 oUo med. . to go round. 
 
 s ^ ' 
 
 ,jLi^ flood. 
 
 get up, rise (of the sun). JUs med. ^ IV io lengthen, 
 nil c. Jj. to look protract; to be long 
 
 over sthg. 
 s 
 Jojis long, lasting 
 
 long. 
 
 at, see. 
 
 (SJJs // c. ace. to set free, 
 give divorce to. 
 IV to set free. 
 VII to go away, 
 depart. 
 
 »^Jo impf. a to strive to 
 obtain, to covet, sthg. 
 
 *JJo inf. covetousness, 
 greed. 
 
 s gli impf. u to be clean, 
 pure. 
 
 (^ISs impf. i to fold, fold 
 up or together. 
 
 t_}Lb »Je<?. f^ to be good, 
 pleasant, excellent. 
 
 S w^ J ^ CI ^ 
 
 ,_jJdo ^/a#. v_*AJb| good, 
 excellent, nice to the 
 taste, sweet (scent). 
 
 XaaIs something good, 
 a dainty. 
 
 II to cleanse, purify. TUb ff?e(?. ,_5 to fly. 
 
134* 
 
 Glossaey B. 
 
 Ah med. ^^ // to plaster 
 
 with clay or mud {^^}o). 
 
 J^himpf. i to treat unfair- 
 ly, injure, do wrong to. 
 
 IV to grow dark. 
 
 x^J-is darkness. 
 
 |.^Ui5 darkness, dusk. 
 
 (.iUs one that acts in- 
 juriously, oppressor. 
 
 ^_aja impf. a to appear, to 
 come in sight. 
 
 soLaa adoration, wor- 
 ship. 
 
 IXe impf. u to cross, to 
 pass along (a certain 
 road). 
 
 iyi^ an example (from 
 which to take warning). 
 
 fj^jis. impf. i to look]stern, 
 black-browed.jj 
 
 (jlLuLlf al-*^ Abbas, 
 (man's name). 
 
 IV to bring to sight. uLs^ mantle, cloak, 
 
 G i , 
 
 w.g.is the back, upper i^iift impf. i to be or be- 
 
 part, surface. 
 
 ^LSs elat. y-lio] pro- 
 minent, striking. 
 
 jJlc. iffj;?/". u to worship. 
 
 So, G , 
 
 iXj^ coll. tXju.* slave, 
 
 g' - 
 
 servant; |)/. oLaa man 
 (as the servant of God). 
 
 lid 'O } o ^ 
 
 xJUt lXa^ 'Abdallah (a 
 man's name). 
 
 come free. 
 IV to free, liberate. 
 
 S 
 
 lixft nobility, high 
 
 rank. 
 
 g ^ 
 taXUs- free, noble, old. 
 
 ^jUie ' Utman , (man's 
 name). 
 
 V^ ^ ^" kl^^ ^^ wonder 
 at sthg. 
 
Glossakt B. 
 
 135* 
 
 a wonder, miracle. 
 jLS!Lfc // to expedite. 
 
 a -I 
 
 Jki impf. u, c. 2 ace. to 
 count, reckon as . . . 
 
 ijHidS lentils. 
 
 JcXa impf. i to be just, 
 s 
 Ji^Lc just, impartial. 
 
 Ijii impf. a, c. ace. to be 
 
 without stbg. 
 
 Iji^ V c.acc.to cross over, 
 go beyond. 
 
 /// c. ace. to treat 
 as an enemy, attack. 
 
 ^iXcpl. gttXfcl enemy. 
 
 s.tjLft enmity. 
 
 CsiXa //to torture, punish. 
 
 i_9ti\£ torture,punish- 
 ment. 
 
 r<Xe VIII to excuse one's 
 self. 
 
 go, 
 
 \(\£. excuse (in the 
 sense of a refusal). 
 
 lovA coll. the Arabs. 
 
 ' ® o^ 
 
 ^tj^l a Bedouin. 
 
 \jdy£. impf. i to interfere 
 with, thwart, offer, 
 rto come in one's way. 
 
 o._f impf. i to perceive, 
 know, recognize. 
 
 Sij.*xi knowledge. 
 
 o.^jLio a favour, kind 
 deed. 
 
 ,sly*J I name of the count- 
 ry known to the an- 
 cients as Babylonia. 
 
 yt impf. i to be strong, 
 powerful (often paren- 
 thetically after jJU|: 
 he is powerful). 
 
 •j-jya elat. yal strong, 
 powerful. 
 Jye eVw/?/". 2 to depose. 
 VIII to take one's 
 leave, be deposed. 
 
136* 
 
 c. ace. et 
 
 Glossaet B. 
 rei II xXki pi LjLta^ gift, 
 
 ^^yfr c. ace. ei ^j.£. 
 
 to console, comfort. present. 
 
 y:**ft pi. ^\-»^ a body 'l^ i^^f y^ to be or be- 
 come greatjlarge ; c.^J^ 
 to appear to be great, 
 insolent. 
 
 rtf^"" inf. greatness. 
 j^jJofc elai. |v:titl great, 
 of great account, august. 
 
 >.3L&.fr 
 
 of troops, army. 
 fji.£. II to build a nest 
 
 y£ft /// to associate with. 
 wifc£. /em. Sj^aLc ten. 
 
 s ^ ^ 
 
 tribe, tribesmen. 
 
 wCijwi assembly , the 
 whole; those present. 
 
 ^ikft e/wp/". z, c. «cc. to 
 resist, not obey some 
 one. 
 
 IUaoa/o p/. ijoL*xi re- 
 sistance, revolt, sin. 
 yoA member. 
 
 ^jiJoA impf. i 07- u to 
 
 sneeze, 
 Lia*. IV c. ace. pars, et rei 
 
 to give sthg. to some 
 
 one. 
 
 oo 
 
 -r^ 
 
 pl. 
 
 '^■) 
 
 Ui 
 
 wicked, clever demon. 
 
 Lac impf. u, c. ^ja to 
 pardon (a person), be 
 gracious to. 
 
 I— )^L££ 
 
 i_>Jift pl. 1-3 >Ui* scor- 
 pion, a bitter enemy. 
 
 JJl& impf. i. or J^ac 2miJ/. a 
 to be intelligent. 
 
 Bo, 
 
 JjLft intellectual abi- 
 lity, intelligence; pru- 
 dence. 
 
 Ji 777/ to fall ill. 
 
Glossaet B. 
 
 137* 
 
 SAa illness, sickness. 
 ^JLft /// to treat. 
 
 1_.^-^ impf. a perceive, 
 know, learn (that), c. i_, 
 to know something. 
 
 IV c. 2 ace. to acquaint, 
 inform one of sthg. 
 
 Go S 3 J 
 
 *J^ pi. |»^JLft know- 
 ledge, science. 
 jwiLe mark, sign. 
 
 IJLft e/«^. (V-let jo/. 
 
 i-LJLft possessing know- 
 ledge, a learned man, 
 savant. 
 
 So, 
 
 (»!^Lft very knowing. 
 iJLjw teacher. 
 
 5Le mi?/. M to be high. 
 VI to be highly exal- 
 ted, esp. parenthetically 
 after^WaA: He is exalted 
 (§ 23). 
 
 Jkii?rep.(§ 96 &) over, 
 on the ground of, on, 
 
 upon, at; with verbs of 
 entering : chez ; against, 
 in the direction of, to- 
 
 wards.g^^ J^£ Ijotobe 
 in a state of, to be ac- 
 customed to sthg. 
 
 s , ' o* . 
 
 J..& elat. J^l high; 
 also man's name 'Ali. 
 
 (JLe. elat. J^r| high, 
 
 prominent, excellent. 
 
 iv& impf. u to be or become 
 common; to increase. 
 
 r^uncle(onthefather's 
 
 side); liJI JjjJ cousin. 
 
 XJoLi the common 
 people (plebs), large 
 crowd. 
 Ss. II to furnish, provide 
 handsomely. 
 
 r 
 
 life; in the oath 
 
 ^y^ by my life. 
 
 'Sa 'Omar (man's 
 name). 
 
138* 
 
 Glossakt B. 
 
 .t+£(§ 90 « pronounce 
 'Amrun) 'Amr (a man's 
 nanae). 
 
 Jn^ impf. a to do, make, 
 
 construct. 
 
 X to employ one for 
 for some purpose, to 
 apoint governor. 
 
 Jl^ pi. JUfi^l work, 
 act, deeds of piety, 
 province. 
 
 (JuiLc pi- JU-e a func- 
 tionary, vicegerent, 
 prefect. 
 
 ^^ impf. a to be or be- 
 come blind. 
 
 IV to disfigure, make 
 unrecognisable. 
 
 ^^t pi. ^ blind. 
 
 ^^.prep. away from, from 
 (hinderance) ; about, 
 concerning ; according 
 to, on the authority of. 
 
 ^_JLixl 
 
 vine, 
 
 pi. 
 
 grape. 
 J^-Ir. preip. by the side of, 
 
 near, with, by (one). 
 _Lc med. . IX to be bent, 
 
 crooked. 
 
 5Lft med. . to return, c. 
 ace. to visit. 
 
 (iLc. OTe<?. . c. i_j to take 
 
 refuge in . . . 
 X to ask for protec- 
 
 tion;tosay: xJUL bySiS 
 
 (Surah 114) "I take 
 
 refuge in God", c. ^jo 
 
 from. 
 ' Lt me^f. . IV c. ace. 
 
 to help, support. 
 X to help one's self, 
 
 to help on, succour. 
 
 xj.lio Mu'awiya, the first 
 
 Omayyad Caliph (661 
 —679). 
 
 ^A«aA Jesus. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 139* 
 
 Jjls. med. ^ to live, 
 XAaa life, way of liv- 
 ing, (§ 64 c). 
 ItXc ult. . to come early. 
 V to breakfast, to 
 refresh oneself early. 
 
 'S-jS. impf. u to set (of 
 the sun). 
 
 S o^ 
 
 i_)j.ixi place where the 
 
 sun sets, the West. 
 ^vc IV to make to sink, 
 
 drown. 
 J|l£ gazelle. 
 
 Juuuc 2»jp/. 2 to wash. 
 gukt impf. a to coyer. 
 &A^L£i?^.(ji|II.csaddle- 
 
 cover, horse-cloth. 
 Ji^Ae mi?/. 2" c. flcc. ret et (S^ ^^ *° ^^°S- 
 
 J^ J?, to take sthg. ;Li »Je<?. ^ to penetrate 
 
 yAs. impf. i c. (J pers. to 
 pardon, forgive. 
 
 isjii^o pardon, forgive- 
 ness. 
 
 Jotft m^j/. M to neglect. 
 
 JLLfcfc inattention, neg- 
 ligence. 
 
 ^Jjt mj?/". «■ to be all- 
 powerful, victorious. 
 
 (^Xft II et IV io bolt, bar, 
 shut. 
 
 |.!iLft i?/. ^^Uli a young 
 man, lad, slave. 
 
 ^jl£ impf. a, c. ^^ to be 
 rich. 
 
 15 
 
 0* 
 
 .Aft i?/. il-AAftI rich. 
 
 from one unlawfully. 
 
 J^,iflx ?'ot;?/. « to get angry, 
 
 be angry with. ' 
 
 far into, go down. 
 jLfc a cave. 
 ijcLe »2erf. . to dive. 
 
140* Glossary B. 
 
 Cil£ med. ^^ to be absent, 
 c. ^^ to disappear. 
 
 G ^ G J J 
 
 secret. 
 
 'iJiiS absence , stay 
 among strangers. 
 
 v_Ajtix inf. sunset. 
 jLc med. ^ 11 to alter, 
 change. 
 
 !li (§ 133 with gen.) 
 another,somethg.differ- 
 ent from, no (with neg.), 
 except; before substs., 
 adjs. and parts, it ren- 
 ders the converse, like 
 
 our prefix un- or in-; ^^ 
 
 7^ 
 
 A without. 
 
 e". 
 
 oco«/.(§§95e; 152; 161) 
 and so, then, and. 
 
 impf. a to open. 
 
 VII to open (intr.). 
 
 VIII to conquer, ac- 
 quire for one's self. 
 
 ^sSsXj mf. I. 
 
 l.\jd.Apl- ^^Iax) key. 
 
 ^^jci" nil c. i_j to be 
 
 struck with emotion, 
 bewitched, by. 
 
 Jii a young man. 
 
 " yUi a young woman, 
 girl. 
 
 S^ impf. u to transgress, 
 act viciously. 
 
 (- s a 3 
 
 y=.Li pl. ^L^ evil- 
 doer. 
 
 ^ impf. a to boast of, 
 glory in. 
 
 Ill to give oneself 
 airs towards some one. 
 
 j..^ inf. I. 
 impf. i to flee. 
 ftJt the Persians. 
 
 / 
 
 gjjjLi Persia. 
 
 ijlli a horse, esp. of a 
 good breed. 
 
 jijj impf. u to spread out. 
 
Glossart B. 
 
 141* 
 
 U^'^f P'- \J^f carpet, ^.^ bounty, kind- 
 cushion, bed. ness, favour. 
 
 U^ili impf. i, c. J^ pers. \j-^ ^'"^Pf- «■ to be clever, 
 to impose sthg. on one 
 
 as a duty. 
 
 |wi imp. u, c. ^ to be 
 
 empty, disengaged, 
 finished with sthg. 
 
 ^jj impf. u, to separate, 
 part. 
 Ill to leave. 
 Vin to become sepa- 
 rated, to disperse. 
 
 &xhj intelligence. 
 
 (Joii impf. a to do. 
 
 J.*i i>/. JL*il deed, 
 
 act, mode of action. 
 
 tXfli F to miss, enquire 
 for, some one. 
 
 wtfti pi. iljJLi poor. 
 
 dLi F// to free oneself, 
 to become disattached. 
 
 £^ mi7/. a to get a fright, ^ ^ to reflect. 
 
 be afraid. ^^'^i' '^." 
 
 X.g5^Ls i)?. xj Ijj fruit. 
 Jul* m;)/". M to become 
 
 bad, wicked. 
 
 Ai /Fto become happy, 
 
 (>Lli en/, the doing 
 of mischief, evil, wrong. 
 
 Jyj 7Fto divulge, publish, 
 betray. 
 
 )JeS impf. u to be or 
 remain over, to be ex- 
 cellent. 
 
 successful, to prosper. 
 
 S O 3 J 3 
 
 dUi, d.J.i a (large) ship. 
 (M^ SO and so, Mr. Such- 
 
 and- Such. 
 S^i pi. icjI JU desert. 
 ^ mouth (§ 90 o). 
 ^il)Li ?»e<^. . c. flcc. to pass 
 
142* 
 
 Glossakt B. 
 
 by, to expire (of the 
 time for some one to 
 do sthg.). 
 
 ^jLi med. . to excel, be 
 excellent. 
 
 /^S prep. above, 
 higher than. 
 
 8ji (§ 90o pi. sljjl) mouth. 
 
 jj prep, in, into, at, on, 
 among, accompanied 
 by, by; with (before a 
 quality), in relation to, 
 with regard to. 
 
 o^.«Jju pi. 'iA^'^h phi- 
 losopher. 
 
 ^ji* X to find detestable. 
 
 G o^ 3 5 
 
 yj3 pi. yyj3 grave. 
 
 (jidls mp/". 2 to take hold 
 of, take into one's hand. 
 
 (J^* impf. a to accept. 
 
 IV to approach, come 
 nearer; be susceptible 
 to. 
 
 V to receive. 
 
 X to be opposite. 
 
 before. 
 
 jjji prep, before. 
 
 J./J> jarep. in the 
 
 presence of, in the 
 
 sphere of . . . sXJJi ^jjo 
 
 on his side, of his party. 
 G , ^ 
 JyjJs inf. J acceptance. 
 
 xJIaaj tribe, family (in 
 
 wide sense). 
 
 HJLjULo comparison, re- 
 lation. 
 
 Jli' mjs/'. M to kill, make 
 away with. 
 
 /// c. ace, to fight 
 with, fight. 
 
 G o.- 
 
 JuCi' inf. I killing, exe- 
 cution. 
 JutXi" J3?. Ji.Xi> killed. 
 
 kiLsvJs »j| Abu Kuhafa, 
 the father of Abu Bekr. 
 
Glossaet B. 
 
 143* 
 
 jj (§ 98 e, 99 d) particle. 
 
 jJ6" impf. i to be able to, 
 can, could (also witb 
 folg. impf.). c. J^ to 
 have power over. 
 
 IV c. Jk* to Tiiake one 
 more povyerful than , . . 
 
 . Jo worth, value, due, 
 power. jtXiu in rela- 
 tion to, in proportion 
 
 f to . . . 
 
 i,Jo impf. a, to advance, 
 approach. 
 
 11 to place before, 
 set sthg. before s. o. 
 
 /Fto approach. 
 
 V to go before, pre- 
 cede. 
 
 AjtXs pi. i-LoJJi an- 
 cient,old, of a past time. 
 
 '^impf. i to stay, persevere. 
 
 IV to render stable, c. 
 
 1^ rei to confess to sthg. 
 
 X to stand fast, hold 
 
 good, 
 e ,^ 
 jtjj continuance, rest. 
 
 \Ji impf. a to read. 
 
 y 
 
 ,t»i' Kur'an or a 
 
 passage therefrom. 
 
 Cj.3 impf. u to be near at 
 hand. 
 
 II to place near, to 
 
 take as intimate friend, 
 
 to offer, set before one. 
 
 F/tobeclosetogether. 
 
 ,_;oJ> pl. *>Lj Jsl ; elat. 
 
 7 '* ' o 
 pl. i_j,Li'l(subst.).c.jj^ 
 
 near, close(to) ; related. 
 
 ^ II-'' 
 ijiij^ the tribe of the 
 
 Kuraish, the Kurai- 
 
 shites. 
 
 raishite 
 
 nom. rel.Si Ku- 
 
 ^f 
 
 V horn 
 
 
 ,(> the 
 
 two horned (Alexander 
 bicornis). 
 
144* 
 
 GLOssABr B. 
 
 ^'<"- ^> - ' -- «, 
 
 Xjjj pi. ^^Ji place, village. «kj' imp/", a to cut off. 
 
 \J^ ult. . to be hard. 
 
 1^ IV to swear. 
 
 Jc«ai> impf. i, to make for, 
 repair to, some one. 
 
 Jc^aJLo the end of a 
 
 journey. 
 
 VII c. 
 
 O^ 
 
 to become 
 
 Itof to be short. 
 
 VI to shorten one's 
 self, to shrink. 
 
 yjioJi pl. \yoJi castle, 
 fortress. 
 
 ydi VII to let one's self 
 down, dart down (of a 
 bird). 
 
 ^^^' impf. i to decide judi- 
 cially; to accomplish, 
 finish; to discharge a 
 claim. 
 
 VII to be finished, 
 brought to an end. 
 
 fLdi" inf. I payment. 
 
 Jajj adv. ever, with negat. 
 never. 
 
 parted from ; to cease. 
 
 Juts impf. u to seat one's 
 self, sit down. 
 
 Go J ,o* 
 
 Jkia pl. JLasI lock, pad- 
 lock. 
 
 i^impf. i to be small, few. 
 
 /Fto make small, take 
 little of. 
 
 Xto deem small, think 
 little of, despise. 
 
 JuJj) small, few, scant. 
 
 (_jLs impf. i to turn round, 
 to change. 
 
 VII to alter (intr.), to 
 change one's mind. 
 
 >_JU' pl. uAs heart. 
 
 •Jj* r7/7 to tear away, 
 take away. 
 
 (jia-o mjt?/". i to hunt, catch. 
 
 Uji VIII to procure, pur- 
 chase. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 (>li med. , to lead, guide. 
 VII to let one's self 
 be guided. 
 
 JLs med. . to say, tell; 
 often = ask. c. J to 
 name. 
 
 Jyj pi. Jtyil speech, 
 
 utterance, apothegm. 
 s ^^ 
 JUw) speech. 
 
 Jji med. . to stand up, 
 proceed (to). 
 
 /Ftofix, setup, estab- 
 lish; halt, stop, stay. 
 
 JTto be upright, faith- 
 ful. 
 
 0^ 
 
 *J5 coll. people, one's 
 dependants, nation, 
 subjects. 
 
 juLajj resurrection. 
 
 S'-^r'. , "='1-.-: t (. 
 Jt*jLi jO(. |vjl*-» loot. 
 
 (•La* place, occasion. 
 
 ^^jj impf. a to be strong. 
 
 Sjj" strength, force; 
 
 Socin, Arabic Grammar.- 
 
 145* 
 the means to do 
 
 C. l_5 
 
 sthg. 
 
 i^^ (c. J.£) strong, 
 
 powerful. 
 
 J(§§95/-; 145 & prop, subj.) 
 as, like as. 
 
 ^S iii is) as if . . . 
 
 y/Simpf.u to be great, large. 
 V to vaunt oneself, 
 be proud. 
 
 yk^inf. /to be advanc- 
 ed in years. 
 
 j.aaS' e/a^. waTI great, 
 old. 
 
 y_^impf. u to write. 
 /// c. ace. to corre- 
 spond with. 
 
 L-aLx^p/. w^A^a writ- 
 ing, scripture (= writ- 
 ten revelation), letter, 
 book. 
 
 ffXS'impf. u to conceal. 
 
146* 
 
 Glossaet B. 
 
 ^jCt^inf. concealing, 
 keeping close. 
 yif to be much or many. 
 
 IV to make many, 
 take much of. 
 
 X to consider much 
 or many. 
 
 y^iS elat. Js\ much, 
 
 many (often rather as 
 a suhst. in apposition). 
 
 i^d^impf. i to lie, tell lies. 
 II c. ace. pers. vel i_> 
 
 rei to charge one with 
 falsehood, discredit. 
 
 '^dSinf. I, lying, a 
 
 lie, falsehood. 
 
 i^S impf. M, to cause one 
 trouble, pain. 
 
 '&iS grief, distress, 
 anxiety. 
 
 i^^CiS Tpl. jjmj^LS' divi- 
 sion (of cavalry), squad- 
 ron. 
 
 "^^S impf. u to be noble, 
 generous. 
 
 ^j>S pi- i-^jS noble, 
 high-souled , highly 
 esteemed. 
 
 sjoy^pl. -vlXoanohle 
 
 quality, generous ac- 
 tion. 
 
 sS'imp/'. a to dislike. 
 
 S VIII to acquire, to 
 attain to sthg. 
 
 Simpf. i to eclipse. 
 
 i-A^-.< impf. i, c. ^j^ to 
 uncover. 
 
 VII to be uncovered, 
 be carried off. 
 
 v^^jd' ankle-bone, a die 
 (^/. dice). 
 
 \jtS' III c. ace. pers. et j^ 
 rei to requite, recota- 
 pense one for sthg. 
 
 yifimpf. u to be unthank- 
 ful, to deny. 
 
Glossaet B. 
 
 147* 
 
 ^ibT pi xUS'unbeliev- ^j^impf. a to hide one's 
 
 ing- self. 
 
 ^jj^impf. u to wrap in a •yjS'pl. ^yi' treasure, 
 shroud. 
 
 Ji^impf. i, c. ace. pers. et 
 r. to do sthg. in some 
 one's place; to protect 
 s. 0. from sthg. 
 
 ji'(§ 119 &) totality; be- 
 fore determ. subst., all; 
 before indeterm., every. 
 
 UJli^as often as . . . 
 
 AS II c. ace. pers. to 
 speak with, address one. 
 Fto speak, talk, make 
 speeches, c. lj to pro- 
 nounce, utter. 
 
 jtjjLs word. 
 
 *5k^speech, talk, con- 
 versation. 
 
 (^(§ 15) how much? 
 Ur(J + U) as. 
 
 9 ^ 
 
 JijL«5'perfect. 
 
 \jS impf. u to give one a 
 
 surname contg. lot- 
 
 ^^ med. , to be, exist. 
 (Sometimes the perf. of 
 this verb is to be trans- 
 lated by our present). 
 c. ace. (§§ 110, 149) to 
 be something, e. J to 
 
 be translated by "to 
 have". 
 
 ^j^ pl. xjXa\ place. 
 
 .- CI ^ 
 
 i_ftAS'how? 
 
 J(§§ 95^ ; 147 b) acorrobo- 
 
 rative particle. 
 cf prep. (§§ 95 h; 117; 
 
 130; 131'; 182) for; is 
 sign of the dative; on 
 account of, for . . . sake 
 (giving purpose, mo- 
 tive); at (the time of), 
 J conj. c. stibj. (§ 100) 
 
 K* 
 
148* 
 
 GrLOSSABT B. 
 
 in order that; c. mod. 
 
 «i>oc. §101 a. |!^:s)(§ 147) 
 
 because. 
 '^ (§§ 1016; 111; 150c) 
 
 not, no. %^prep. c. gen. 
 
 without. By means of 
 
 S a preceding negation 
 is very frequently re- 
 sumed. 
 
 ^i, °^ (often ^';) 
 
 nevertheless, but. 
 
 ^"i^ (also ^iX^jpl X^IG 
 angel. 
 
 olJ impf. a to tarry, 
 
 delay. 
 
 (jIaJ impf. a to put on. 
 IV c. 2 ace. to clothe. 
 
 (jjj./Xoi> /. ^j«j iL« el th- 
 ing, dress. 
 
 [^^/Limpf. a c. i_j or c.acc. to 
 overtake. 
 
 tXJ, l.pers. 1:1)0 jJ, mj?/. a 
 
 to be tasty, sweet. 
 
 6 , i -* 
 
 jojj e?«^ jJI tasty, 
 delicious, sweet. 
 
 1-J «>wp/". «, c. ace. to 
 remain in . . . 
 
 (jLwJi??. jj~UI tongue, 
 (^j^ FI/J to cling to. 
 
 ■ _ntil 2»!p/". M to be fine, 
 slender, kind. 
 
 So 3 
 
 i_aiaJ c. (^ kindness, 
 graciousness,to war ds. . . 
 
 
 
 L-ajdaJ kind. 
 v_^ impf. a to play, sport. 
 
 c ^ - 
 
 JjiJ(§147)maybe,perhaps. 
 
 jjjiJ ?mj9/". a to curse. 
 
 jUaJ a curse. 
 
 ^_jjj II c. ace. pars, et u 
 
 to surname, give a nick- 
 name to. 
 
 |v£J impf. a to swallow, 
 
 gulp down. 
 
 jiL^JiJ a morsel. 
 
jU trn'pf. a to meet, meet 
 
 with. 
 
 IV c. ace. to throw. 
 
 X to throw one's self, 
 to lie. 
 
 Glossaet B. 149 
 
 U not (cf. § 150). 
 
 p (§ 101 c) not. 
 
 LJ conj. after, when. 
 
 13 part, if, introduces a 
 condition, which is not 
 likely to be fulfilled. 
 
 3 med. . to blame. 
 
 l^^ pi. ^!jtp| colour, sort, 
 kind. 
 
 ^jUj(§§50;110;144)not 
 to be, to be non-exis- 
 tent. 
 
 Jj, lij pi. JLJ (§ 90p) ^ ^'^i'^- " ^- V t« P^^' ^y- 
 
 ;^.Lxi Ma'rib, a town in 
 South Arabia. 
 
 G o 
 
 J^ resemblance , like- 
 ness ; the like, same ; one 
 (pers. or thing) like, cf. 
 § 145 &. 
 
 J^ resemblance, na- 
 ture, quality(of a thing). 
 
 \^ impf. a to put to the 
 test. 
 
 9.-" ■ f 
 xj^ %nf. 
 
 town. &AJtXJI = itiJtV 
 
 "Jj\ Medina. 
 
 night. 
 U, iS U;j^o«.(§15)what? 
 (§ 14) that which, what, 
 somethg. that. 
 
 U conj. (§ 158 6) so 
 long as. 
 
 'iyjO 
 
 "time". Sjjo once 
 
 p/. Olo often. 
 I^tl* bitterness. 
 JlSl (§ 90 e) man. 
 
 yfjjot woman, wite. 
 
150* 
 
 Glossabt B. 
 
 5*.yxi manliness, vir- 
 tus, manly virtue. 
 
 ^jUvw/o pi. sjvljjo mar- 
 grave, prefect. 
 
 \joJo impf. a to be or be- 
 come sick, 
 (jidjyo sick. 
 
 cyo Fto roll (in the dust). 
 
 (Vjyx Miriam, Mary. 
 
 ^t^Mija impf. « c. o to wipe, 
 wipe off, away. 
 
 ^-<u«^| Christ, the 
 Messiah. 
 
 viJLA»uo / to take hold of, 
 sieze. 
 V to hold on by sthg. 
 
 ^^ (§ 71 e) inf I. 
 
 siw j»/. xUaxf rain, shower 
 of rain. 
 
 Ji^o mj(/. u to defer (a 
 payment). 
 
 (Jdajo ?■«/. 
 
 ■XI j9rejt>. with; besides; 
 alongside of. 
 
 idMi stomach. 
 oiX« m/)/. u to hate. 
 
 liiJLo hatred. 
 iXJo Mecca. 
 
 okXxi OTj?/. M to tarry, stay. 
 ^Lo mp/". a, c. ace. ei ^^ 
 to fill sthg. with . . . 
 VIII to become filled. 
 
 L^ IV to enter on the >iU-« impf. i, c. ace. to 
 eventide; to do some- rule, govern, possess. 
 
 thing late. 
 
 ^^*i»jo impf. i to go, walk ; 
 
 ^^«jo inf. 
 
 f^MS-jc impf. i to go, betake 
 one's self to. 
 
 II to appoint as king. 
 
 So? 
 
 viLLo dominion, sover- 
 eignty, reign, riches. 
 
 S o 
 
 riches. 
 
 possessions, 
 
Glossaey B, 
 >iUxi pL J Jlxi king. 
 
 (J!^ ceremony of 
 marriage. 
 
 JtCl+x pi. vilJUjo king- 
 dom, sovereignty. 
 
 «SXo for d^Lo 2^. under 
 
 151* 
 
 eh^ = ^j.x + ,j^ (§5 
 note V). 
 
 ^ who? (§ 15); he who, 
 they that; one that, 
 whoso, whoever. (§§ 14, 
 154, 159). 
 
 jj..* prep, of (= some of, 
 
 inpartitivesense§114), 
 belonging to; with the 
 negation it has a streng- 
 thening effect, § 141 ; 
 consisting of; away 
 from, from (separation, 
 point of departure); 
 hence in comparison = 
 than; through(passage). 
 
 (XSjo {from .6 1^) since. 
 *Xjo impf. a, c. 2 ace. to 
 
 debar onefromsthg., re- 
 fuse, prevent one doing 
 sthg.; c. ace. et \je to 
 
 defend one from or 
 against sthg. 
 
 VIII to protect one's 
 self. 
 
 y^ impf. a, c. i_j to be 
 skilled, clever, expert, 
 wellversed. 
 
 j_g» wedding-present, 
 price of the bride (paid 
 to her father). 
 
 yyLo med. . to die. 
 
 II to 
 
 put \ 
 
 to death. 
 
 S ^ 
 
 inf. death. 
 
 
 dead. 
 
 
 ^J^yo M( 
 
 Dses. 
 
 S ^oS 
 
 goods and 
 
 chattels. 
 
 property, 
 
 flocks. 
 
 
 
152* 
 
 GrLOSSART B. 
 
 ^ (§ 90 q) pi. 5LL0 
 
 water. 
 ijoLJo pi- Jot^ table, 
 
 tray. 
 
 ■Xjti med. jj // c. i^jo to 
 distinguish. 
 
 Lj // c. «cc. pers. et ^_j 
 rei to give one informa- 
 tion regarding. 
 
 Fto give one's self out 
 for a prophet. 
 
 xXS VIII to awake up. 
 
 IV causative. 
 
 ^.^ pron. we. 
 
 L^ Fto turn aside, to draw 
 back, retire. 
 
 So-- ^ f "f 
 
 J^ coll., nom. unit. XJL^ 
 palm. 
 
 |,tXj mp/. a, c. J^ to re- 
 pent of sthg., feel sorry. 
 
 ^JO 7/7 to be one's boon 
 companion. 
 
 |CjJo pl. i-CotXj boon 
 
 companion, mess-mate. 
 
 ^S i^/. ^.C^l fe/ ^^ ^^ jjj ^^j^ ^.^^^ ^_ ^^^ 
 
 prophet. ^Q gg^lj ^Q some one. 
 
 5^_AJ the office, rank, 
 
 of prophet. 
 
 tX^ impf. u to be brave, 
 courageous. 
 
 ,- o- 
 
 5tX^ courage, magna- 
 nimity. 
 
 iv^' i??- -j^ constellation. 
 
 L^ impf. u to become free, 
 to save one's self. 
 
 J jo IV to warn. 
 
 cyS impf. i to remove. 
 F777 to strip off, dis- 
 place. 
 
 J-yj impf. i to descend, 
 
 alight, stop , lodge, 
 
 encamp, c. JkA to alight 
 
 at, lodge, stay with. . . 
 
 IV to send down (in 
 
Glossabt B. 
 
 particular, a revela- 
 tion). 
 
 Jyi/i 'pl. J\Ux dwell- 
 ing-place, abode, halt- 
 ing-place. 
 
 t' A^i im.'pf. a to copy. 
 X^^-j pl. j^i-Mjj a copy. 
 
 ^wj m^/. a to forget. 
 
 ^^UuMJew/. forgetting. 
 
 gLlj (§ 90/) women. 
 
 tXAj /// c. 2 ace. to ad- 
 jure by God. 
 
 hMfj imp/", a to be lively, 
 in good spirits. 
 
 JflLicj inf. 
 ^.A^aS impf. u to set up. 
 
 ^jjuaj share, portion. 
 
 ^_^ i/rep/". « to be a true 
 friend. 
 
 'IjoS impf. u, c. ace. to 
 help, succour." 
 V (denom.) to become 
 
 153* 
 
 a Christian, to live as 
 a Christian. 
 
 j^t^,.«3j pi. iJlLaS 
 a Christian. 
 
 
 \ya.i.4j} al-Mansur, 
 the second Abbaside 
 
 Caliph 754—775. 
 
 Lis Vin to draw (the 
 sword). 
 
 ^jjaj impf. a to butt with 
 the horns. 
 
 l^Jiij mj»/. i to talk, 
 /r to make, compel 
 to talk. 
 
 Joi impf. u to see, look 
 at, examine, reflect. 
 
 1*S impf. a to be soft, well 
 
 off, affluent. 
 
 camels. 
 
 coll. a herd of 
 
 X4AJ 
 
 affluence, welfare. 
 
 ^ part, yes, yes in- 
 deed. 
 
154* 
 
 Gloss AEY B. 
 
 IaS impf. u vel i c. ^^yjo to 
 
 flee from, avoid. 
 ^jtjjL> II to cheer, relieve. 
 ^jj*Aj /em., pi. ^JA».AJ^ 
 
 s " 
 
 lyjyjtj soul (anima ap- 
 petens)^ self (§ 12e); 
 
 life. vjy*J u*^ tM* 
 iuji.ij the taking of a 
 
 life not for a life, i. e. 
 without a murder hav- 
 ing been committed. 
 
 iii impf. a to be of use. 
 VIII c. u make use 
 of, profit by . . . 
 
 jULftAvo pi- >sUx use, 
 useful qualities,benefit. 
 
 (HJS into play the hypo- 
 crite. 
 
 Ifti 2»!ii)/. «', c. jj.^ pers. 
 
 to reproach one with 
 sthg. 
 
 VIII to avenge one's 
 self. 
 
 e 
 
 li^ an act of revenge. 
 J^ m/)/". M to afflict, 
 hurt, injure. 
 
 jUJo affliction,trouble. 
 SS impf. i to marry. 
 
 /// id. 
 
 Zid., to wish to marry. 
 
 v^^JLJI _l5o marriage 
 with one's stepmother. 
 
 JOo F to be hard, strait, 
 troublesome. 
 
 yS^ IV to deny. c. ace. r. 
 et J^A to find strange, 
 to take offence at sthg. 
 
 <Xgi impf. M to be fat, large. 
 
 (Xgj large, aspiring, 
 generous. 
 laS pi. jLaj I stream. 
 
 ^S m^/. a to forbid. 
 Vlllto arrive at, come 
 to an end. 
 
 C^ 
 
 j Noah. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 155* 
 
 )\S fem.pl. ^\^&re,hell- |jae, fern, sjoo (§ 13 &), 
 fire. this, here. 
 
 )f 
 
 light. 
 
 J!)Iff impf. 
 
 u to flee. 
 
 c^ i??. cllj I kind, species, ICi imp/, i to put to flight, 
 different (sort of). F77 to turn and flee. 
 
 a man s name. 
 
 ^iyi female camel. 
 
 ILS med. . , mjo/". a to lie 
 down, sleep. 
 
 1^ impf. u to part from 
 some one. 
 
 Sjj^, Sv^iv!! the re- 
 moval of Muhammed 
 from Mecca to Medina. 
 
 oL»4X^JI Hadhad, name 
 of a king. 
 
 (^ji^ impf. i to lead by 
 the right way, to guide 
 aright. 
 
 ^j-fS. ii\ \\ al-Mahdi, 
 
 name of the third Abba- 
 side Caliph, 775 — 785. 
 
 5 I ' TT V. 
 
 |V-wuo Hasim, man's name ; 
 
 iv^Ltf jAj Muhammed's 
 
 clan. 
 Jk* J9ar^. interrog. 
 ivff, AfSa proti.a.pers.plur. 
 
 msc. they (§12 a). 
 
 Ij6 2»!p/. u to intend to do 
 sthg. 
 
 X+;o energy. 
 JO^I India^ the Hindus, 
 jjo pron. he. 
 
 rUo »je<?. . F// to collapse. 
 Jjli »«£(?. . to be easy. 
 
 X c. lo to despise. 
 
 ^Il^ insignificance. 
 (jj^ /ot^/. a, c. ace. to 
 fall in love with. 
 
156* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 gj^ air, sky. 
 
 jt pron. Ill fern. she. 
 
 J conj. and, also, even. 
 Asseverative particle 
 
 w. the genit.: xJUl j by 
 
 God (be it sworn), c. 
 ace. with (§ 112). 
 
 jjj i)/. ^jLj^I an idol. 
 
 J]s&.j mj?/. 2 to be neces- 
 sary; to be legally in- 
 cumbent on one. 
 IV to necessitate. 
 
 (;?«r^. act. IV) pi. 
 that which 
 
 brings about sthg.,occa- 
 sion, cause. 
 
 Jl&.j m;?/. i" to find. 
 
 «^. F to take the direc- 
 tion of . . ., set out. 
 
 countenance. 
 Jjs.|, one, single. 
 
 j^^ /F c. j[ i?ers. to 
 reveal to one, inspire. 
 
 i>. t»jp/". a to love. 
 
 VI to love mutually. 
 SiiLiolove, inclination. 
 
 c5j impf.p(}S to set, place, 
 leave, let. 
 
 77 to deposit. 
 
 IV c. ace. rei et J I 
 jjers. to intrust sthg. 
 to some one. 
 
 2uui>^ 7?/. /^\^j pro- 
 perty given in trust, a 
 deposit (of money or 
 its equivalent). 
 
 vij."! impf. i^jyj to inherit. 
 
 VI to receive as one's 
 portion. 
 
 ^X^ heir. 
 
 (S^^ tffjp/. 2 to go down, 
 arrive. 
 
 jLsT^ Waraka, man's name. 
 
Glossaey B. 
 
 157* 
 
 p)\j pi. iK\^ vizier, mi- 
 nister. 
 
 ^s>«;^ impf. a to be dirty. 
 
 inf. 
 
 i^w. JOTp/, '*Zj^^ to be pos- 
 sible, be open (to one). 
 IV to bring one into 
 a comfortable position ; 
 to get riches for s. o. 
 
 'j.^wj impf. a to be sleepy. 
 
 \,jJcl impf. i to describe. 
 
 iJijto description. 
 
 J,.^. impf. i to connect, 
 arrive at. -^_^ 
 
 VI to be mutually 
 attached to each other. 
 
 ^r IV to bequeath by 
 
 will. 
 ".oj executor (of a 
 
 will). 
 Lay impf. auAJ to lay. 
 
 to appear humbly be- 
 fore . . . 
 
 VIII to be humbled, 
 powerless. 
 
 «A.«o^ low, ignoble, 
 
 mean. 
 
 ^yd pJ^ /"^ly pls-ce, 
 position, dwelling- 
 place. 
 
 tXi. mj?/. i to make an 
 agreement, promise. 
 
 VIII to accept a pro- 
 mise, to promise one 
 another. 
 
 ^\jLMO rendezvous, / 
 appointed time. 
 
 Jofc. impf. i to warn, ex- 
 hort. 
 VIII to suffer oneself 
 
 to be corrected. 
 . — s^ „s 
 ^Lcji?^. k^.lvessel,recep- 
 
 tacle. 
 
 Vic. J to be humble, J^jl impf. i to go forth 
 
158* 
 
 Glossary B. 
 
 to a prince, c. ,J^ to 
 come to. 
 
 (iir /// c. ace. to agree 
 with, correspond to. 
 
 jj. impf. i to be complete. 
 /// c. ace. to come to, 
 arrive at. 
 
 F|y, xi'jTsU^-God 
 has taken him (the Mos- 
 lem) to himself, has 
 brought him to a bless- 
 ed end. Pass, to die a 
 blessed death. 
 
 yLi. dying; a blessed 
 end. 
 oJJ. time. 
 iSj mp/". «Aj to fall, fall 
 
 upon, light upon ; c.^^ 
 to find some one. 
 IV to excite. 
 
 i_?yr «'ffip/". 2 to stop, stand; 
 
 c. J^ to go up to one. 
 
 _i"r F c. ace. to beware, 
 be afraid, of sthg. 
 
 nil to be afraid. 
 
 Ji^. 7/ to appoint as OTcr- 
 
 seer. F to trust (in) . 
 s 
 J^. representative, 
 
 vice-gerent, agent. 
 
 <3J. impf. i to bring forth. 
 IV c. ace. to beget. 
 X c. ace. to beget (a 
 son) by a woman. 
 
 Jj^ i??. i>!5f^l child, 
 son, lad. (In the sing, 
 also collect.). 
 &^', feast, marriage feast. 
 
 (^^ «"»»p/". 
 
 e. ace. to be 
 
 near. 
 // to turn one's back, 
 
 to turn round; c. ^fi. 
 to turn away from. 
 
 ^Jj p?. f-UJ^I near; 
 esp. 'near to God' = 
 saint, helper. 
 
 ^iyi i??. (Jtyo client, 
 slave. 
 
Glossary B. 
 
 159* 
 
 -^Aj impf. a to be awake. 
 
 IV to wake. 
 X to have one's self 
 waked, to awake. 
 
 
 
 ,j.jUJ on the right, the 
 right side, right hand. 
 
 Oj-^l coll. the Jews. 
 .«^ Joseph. 
 
 at- 
 
 CjJS^"^ impf. J;,^j c. 2 ace. 
 to present some one 
 with sthg.). 
 
 U part of exclam. (§ 85) 
 0! 
 
 IjMAj impf. a, c. "jjt to 
 
 despair of . . . 
 
 (VAAj j3/. -IjCjI orphan. 
 
 i_} Jtj Yatrib, name of Me- ^yi pi. -LI (§ 90 s) day, 
 
 dina before Islam. pi- length of reign. Ijj 
 
 1j /em., ^Z. t\l| (§ 90 r) 
 
 hand,power,possession. 
 1*]1j impf. i to play (either 
 
 with arrows, by wh. lots 
 
 were cast, or with dice). 
 
 IvjwJc play, game,game 
 of chance. 
 
 on the day that... (§129). 
 L>oj.j one day; rviih suff. 
 
 ^ Jo ^ 
 
 e. g. (iU^ thy day 
 
 (§ 125). j;pi(§ii8«) 
 
 to-day, dZjtiyi, (= '1^_ 
 61) in that day, then, 
 ^lijj a Greek. 
 
CORRIG-ENDA. 
 
 pp. 56, 57 for headings as printed read: § 65 Nomina Eelativa; 
 
 § 66 Nomina Demimitiva. 
 p. 68 heading read: § 78 Nom. Diptota. 
 p. 93 1. 4, for 'you' read 'them'. 
 
 * ■■ ."■' 
 
 p. 40 4, read q^^i^Jm^, 
 
 X 
 
 p. 42*, 7 read ^V>. 
 p. 42*, 15 read Cjya. 
 p. 54% 2 read jM-JUsUaw^I. 
 p, 55*, 7 read t^yo). 
 
 PRINTED BY W. BSUGniilN, LEIPZIG.